C81GB
Intuitive Vision System
CV-X Series
User's Manual
Read this manual before use.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Introduction
Introduction
This manual describes the hardware and its basic operation. Read this manual thoroughly in order to understand how the
CV-X Series works and to maximize the performance of the system.
Always keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Please ensure that the manual is passed to the end user of the software.
About the notation in this manual
This manual covers the CV-X Series, which includes the CV-X400/X300/X200/X100 models. All references, unless otherwise
stated, pertain to the CV-X480. Additionally, all screen images in this manual are taken from the CV-X480.
Symbols
The following warning symbols are used to ensure safety and to prevent human injury and/or damage to property when
using the system.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.
Important
Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.
Point
Indicates additional information on proper operation.
Reference
Indicates items to enhance system understanding and other useful information.
Trademarks
• "SD Memory Card" is a registered trademark of the SD Association.
• Other company names and product names noted in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective companies. The ™ mark and ® mark have been omitted in this manual.
Libraries and programs
• The open source software files are subject to the notices and additional terms and conditions. For information about
such open source software files, please refer to the license information stated in Libraries in the “System Information”
menu option under “Global”.
• Such open source software files are provided on an “AS IS” basis to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law.
• If there is any discrepancy between the terms and conditions of the applicable open source license agreement and the
“License”, the terms and conditions of the applicable open source license agreement prevail with respect to the
applicable open source software.
• You may obtain a copy of the source code corresponding to the binaries for GPL/LGPL-licensed file by sending a
request to Keyence customer service at soft-license@keyence.co.jp. There will be a charge to cover the costs of
providing the source code.
2 CV-X UM_E
Safety information for CV-X Series
Safety information for CV-X Series
Safety Precautions
General Cautions
DANGER
• Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
• This product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in a hazardous location and/
or potentially explosive atmosphere.
• Do not use this product in an application which requires functional safety. It should not be used in situations where
death or serious property damage is possible, such as nuclear power plants, on aircraft, trains, ships, or vehicles,
used within medical equipment, playground equipment, roller coasters and other rides, etc.
WARNING
• If the product is used in a manner not specified by this manual, the protection provided by the product may be impaired.
• You must perform a sufficient risk assessment for the machine where this product is to be installed prior to installing
this product. Provide appropriate protective fail-safe measures on the machine independent from this product in case
a failure with this product should occur.
CAUTION
Before starting or operating the system, check to make sure all system functions are working properly.
NOTICE
• If the system is operated beyond its published specifications or if the system is modified, its functions and
performance cannot be guaranteed.
• Please note that when the system is used in combination with other instruments, its functions and performance may be
degraded.
• Do not subject the controller or connected devices to a sudden change in temperature. There is the risk of
condensation occurring.
General cautions for the controller
WARNING
• Do not use with any power voltage other than 24 VDC. Doing so may cause fire, electric shock, or product malfunction.
• Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Doing so may cause fire or electric shock.
Operating environment and conditions
CAUTION
• To use the system properly and safely, avoid installing this unit in the following locations. Doing so may cause fire,
electric shock, or product malfunction.
- Locations that contain moisture or dust, or that are poorly ventilated.
- Locations where the system is exposed to direct sunlight or temperature increases.
- Locations where there are flammable or corrosive gases.
- Locations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact.
- Locations where water, oil or chemicals may splash onto the unit.
- Locations where static electricity is present or electric discharge may occur.
NOTICE
• Keep this unit and cables away from high-tension cables or power lines.
Otherwise, noise may cause malfunction or accidents.
• Bundle cables with spiral tubing material. Direct bundling will concentrate the cable load on the bindings, which can
result in cable damage or short circuit.
• The controller and optional devices are precision components. To maintain performance do not subject them to
vibration or shock.
C81GB
CV-X UM_E
3
Safety information for CV-X Series
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs
CAUTION
In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the unit in an abnormal condition may cause fire, electric
shock, or product malfunction. Contact your local Keyence office for repair.
• If water or debris enters the system
• If the system is dropped or the case is damaged
• If smoke or a burning smell emits from the controller
Usage
NOTICE
• Before making any connections/disconnections, be sure to turn off the power of this unit and connected devices.
Failure to do so may result in a malfunction of the controller or connected devices.
• Do not turn the power off while you are programming. Otherwise, all or part of the program settings may be lost.
• Do not block the ventilation holes. Otherwise, the inside temperature may rise and a malfunction may occur.
• Do not allow an excessive amount of sunlight or bright indoor light to enter the camera for a long period of time. Doing
so may cause damage to the imaging area inside the camera or malfunction.
Maintenance
NOTICE
4 CV-X UM_E
• Do not clean with benzene, thinner, or alcohol. Doing so may cause discoloration or deformation of the unit.
• If the unit has any dirt on it, wipe it off with a cloth moistened with a mild detergent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Safety information for CV-X Series
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
CE and UKCA marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EU
Directive(s) and UK regulations, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications
when using this product in the Member States of European Union and in the United Kingdom.
EMC Directive (CE) and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations (UKCA)
• Applicable standard (BS) EN61326-1, Class A
• This product is intended to be used in an industrial environment.
• Use cables shorter than or equal to 30 m to connect this product and its external electromagnetic devices.
• Be sure to connect the ground terminal to a grounding.
• When connecting the LJ-V input unit CA-E100LJ/E110LJ, for the head cables, wind the following ferrite core (furnished
accessory of CA-E100LJ/E110LJ) with them to within 200 mm of the controller’s head connector.
Model: ZCAT2035-0930A-BK (manufactured by TDK Corporation)
Remarks: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies
with the essential requirements of EMC Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations. The manufacturer of the
end-product is solely responsible for the compliance of the end-product itself according to EMC Directive and
Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations.
FCC Regulations
This product complies with the following regulations specified by the FCC.
• Applicable regulation FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
• This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
KC mark (Republic of Korea)
사 용 자 안 내 문
이 기기는 업무용 환경에서 사용할 목적으로 적합성평가를 받은 기기로
서 가정용 환경에서 사용하 는 경우 전파간섭의 우려가 있습니다.
CV-X UM_E
5
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
The CV-X Series consists of four series of controllers: CV-X400/X300/X200/X100. The major differences between and within each
series are listed below.
Differences between the CV-X400, CV-X300, CV-X200, and CV-X100 Series
The major differences between each series are listed below. The major differences by product within each series are
described in the subsequent pages. For the limits of each function by series, see the descriptions for the functions.
ShapeTrax Measurements
• In addition to ShapeTrax2, the CV-X400/X300 Series also have the latest ShapeTrax3.
• The CV-X200 Series only has ShapeTrax2.
• In addition to ShapeTrax2, the CV-X100 Series also has the latest ShapeTrax3. However, some ShapeTrax3 functions are
not supported. For more details, refer to "ShapeTrax3(A)" (Page 2-274).
• All references in this document, unless otherwise stated, pertain to the CV-X480. Note that though it is not explicitly noted in
the descriptions within the manual, ShapeTrax3 is not supported on the CV-X200 Series.
Support for capture that uses capture modes (CV-X400/X200 Series only)
• By using the CA-HX*C/M or CA-H*CX/MX cameras and connecting the CA-DC50E/60E, the CV-X400 Series supports
LumiTrax and MultiSpectrum.
• By using the CA-HF*C/M cameras (21 megapixel mode or lower) and connecting the CA-DC60E, the CV-X400 Series
supports LumiTrax.
• By using the CA-H*CX/MX cameras and connecting the CA-DQP*X to the CA-DC60E, the CV-X400 Series supports 3D
Capture and Outline Capture.
• By using the CA-HX*C/M cameras and connecting the CA-DC30E, the CV-X200 Series supports LumiTrax.
• For more details, refer to "Chapter 7 Capture Using High-functioning Cameras or LJ-V Series Heads" (Page 7-1).
Support for LJ-V Series head connection (CV-X400/X200 Series only)
• The CV-X400 Series (CV-X480 or CV-X480LJ) supports direct connection to LJ-V Series heads.
• The CV-X200 Series supports connection to LJ-V Series heads via the LJ-V7000.
• The CV-X300/X100 Series do not support LJ-V Series heads.
Support for USB port (CV-X400/X300/X200 Series only)
• The CV-X400/X300/X200 Series include a USB port.
• By connecting to a computer via a USB cable, settings can be exchanged with the CV-X Simulation Software and
measurement results can be output to the CV-X Terminal Software.
Support for USB HDD (CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Users can connect a USB HDD to the CV-X400/X300 Series to save the inspection results, captured images, and other data.
• For more details on the supported USB HDD specifications and how to connect and remove a USB HDD, refer to the CV-X
Series Setup Manual.
• For more details on the functions specific to a USB HDD, refer to "Using a USB HDD (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)" (Page
1-21).
• All references in this document, unless otherwise stated, pertain to the CV-X480. Note that though it is not explicitly noted
in the descriptions within the manual, a USB HDD is not supported on the CV-X200/X100 Series.
6 CV-X UM_E
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Support for VisionDataStorage (USB) (CV-X400/X300 Series only)
The CV-X400/X300 Series support output to VisionDataStorage via the dedicated VisionDataStorage USB cable (OP88263).
• Enabling [Use VisionDataStorage] in the Global settings changes the behavior of the controller in the following ways:
- The name in the output settings will change from [FTP] to [FTP/VisionDataStorage (Ether)], and [VisionDataStorage
(USB)] will be added.
- The item name in the menu for the Image Output Location of Image Output and the Source of image loading in the
Image Strip Settings will change from [FTP] to [FTP/VisionDataStorage (Ether)], and [VisionDataStorage (USB)] will be
added.
• The descriptions in this manual presume that [Use VisionDataStorage] in the Global settings is Disabled (the default
value).
• For details about specifications and how to connect the VisionDataStorage, see the VisionDataStorage User's Manual.
Support for the communications expansion unit (CV-X400/X300 Series only)
The CV-X400/X300 Series supports communications with the communications expansion unit connected.
• EtherNet/IP communication by the EtherNet/IP unit (CA-NEP20E: Option) is supported. For details, see "Changing the
EtherNet/IP settings" (Page 6-144).
• PROFINET communication by the PROFINET unit (CA-NPN20E: Option) is supported. For details, see "Changing the
PROFINET settings" (Page 6-186).
• EtherCAT communication by the EtherCAT unit (CA-NEC20E: Option) is supported. For details, see "Changing the
EtherCAT settings" (Page 6-218).
Support for the CA Series touch panel (CV-X400/X300/X200 Series only)
The CV-X400/X300/X200 Series support the use of a touch panel (CA-MP120T) with a special cable. For more details, refer
to "Changing the settings when using the touch panel (CA Series Touch Panel)" (Page 5-10) and the Setup Manual.
Supported program setting version
• The CV-X400/X300/X100 Series support program setting version 4.0 and later.
• The CV-X200 Series supports only up to program setting version 3.4 and does not support version 4.0 and later.
• For more details of the functions that are available on each program setting version, refer to "Changes to each version of
the CV-X Series" (Page 15). To load a program setting of version 3.4 or earlier onto the CV-X400/X300 Series, the
program setting needs to be converted into a format for version 4.0 or later in setup mode (Page 1-57).
CV-X UM_E
7
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Differences in the CV-X400 series controllers
The major differences among the models are listed below.
• The image processor used in the CV-X490/X480/X480LJ/X470 is faster than that used in the CV-X400/X420/X450.
Actual speed differences will vary depending on the contents of the program. Processing speed should be evaluated
according to the actual model to be used.
• The CV-X490 has approximately eleven times more image memory, the CV-X480/X480LJ/X470/X450 has approximately
four times more, and the CV-X420 has approximately two times more than the CV-X400 controller.
• The number of the cameras which can be connected for each model of the CV-X400 Series are shown below.
CV-X480*1 CV-X480LJ*1
CV-X490*1
Camera
Camera
connection
destination
CV-X400
CV-X420
CV-X450
CV-X470
Area Camera CA-035C/035M,
CA-H035C/H035M,
CA-HS035C/HS035M,
CV-035C/035M,
CV-H035C/H035M,
CV-S035C/S035M
Camera port of
the controller or
CA-E100
2
2(4)*2
2(4)*2
2(4)*2
(4)*2
×
(4)*2
CA-H048CX/H048MX,
CA-HX048C/HX048M
2*3
2(4)*2*3
2(4)*2*3
2(4)*2*3
(4)*2*3
×
(4)*2*3
CA-200C/200M,
CA-H200C/H200M,
CA-HS200C/HS200M,
CV-200C/200M,
CV-H200C/H200M,
CV-S200C/S200M
×
2(4)*2
2(4)*2
2(4)*2
(4)*2
×
(4)*2
CA-H200CX/H200MX,
CA-HX200C/HX200M
×
2(4)*2*3
2(4)*2*3
2(4)*2*3
(4)*2*3
×
(4)*2*3
CA-H500C/H500M,
CV-H500C/H500M
×
×
2(4)*2
2(4)*2
(4)*2
×
(4)*2
CA-H500CX/H500MX,
CA-HX500C/HX500M
×
×
2(4)*2*3
2(4)*2*3
(4)*2*3
×
(4)*2*3
CA-H2100C/H2100M
×
×
×
2(4)*2
(4)*2
×
(4)*2
×
(4)*2*4
(4)*2*4
LJ-V series
head
CA-HF2100C/HF2100M CA-E200 or
×
×
×
×
(4)*2
CA-HF6400C/HF6400M CA-E200L
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
*2*5
(4)
*2*5
(2)
×
×
(4)*2*5
×
×
LJ-V7020/V7020K/
V7060/V7060K/V7080/
V7200/V7300
CA-E100LJ
*6
CA-E110LJ
×
×
×
×
×
×
*1 At least one camera input unit is required for the CV-X490/X480/X480LJ controllers as they are not equipped with a camera port.
*2 The number in the parenthesis is the maximum number of cameras that can be connected by adding the camera expansion unit (CAE200/E200L/E100/E100LJ/E110LJ).
*3 CA-H*CX/MX and CA-HX*C/M support the LumiTrax Mode (Page 7-15).
CA-H*MX and CA-HX*M support the MultiSpectrum Mode (Page 7-35).
CA-H*CX/MX support the 3D Capture Mode (Page 7-47) and Outline Capture Mode (Page 7-68).
See "Chapter 7 Capture Using High-functioning Cameras or LJ-V Series Heads" (Page 7-1) for more details.
*4 The CA-HF*C/M in 21 megapixel mode or lower support the LumiTrax Mode (Page 7-15).
*5 Up to two LJ-V Series heads (Same model only) can be connected to each camera input unit. However, the capture timing and number
of capture lines will be the same for LJ-V Series heads connected to the same camera input unit.
*6 CA-E110LJ is a camera input unit that also supports luminance output-type LJ-V series heads that have a "B" on the end of their model
number.
Reference
8 CV-X UM_E
For more details on differences among the models, refer to "Main Specifications" (Page 9-55).
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Differences between the included tools
Depending on the type of the package (identified by the alphabet at the end of the model number), the included tools vary
as shown below.
Full package
CV-X4*0F
Standard
package
CV-X4*0A
LJ package
CV-X4*0LJ
Reference
• The tools in the “3D Presence/Comparison” category are only available in the 3D Capture Mode. See "Chapter 8
Measurement Using Height Image" (Page 8-1) for more details.
• Tools in the “Vision-Guided Robotics” category can be used only with the Vision-Guided Robotics-dedicated program
setting. For more details, refer to the CV-X Series User's Manual (Robot Vision Edition).
• Tools in the “Connector” category can be used only with the connector-dedicated program setting. For more details,
refer to the CV-X Series User's Manual (Connector Inspection Edition).
• The tools in the “Height” category are only available when capturing using the 3D Capture Mode (CV-X400/X420/
X450/X470/X480/X490 only) or the LJ-V Series head (CV-X480 only). See "Chapter 8 Measurement Using Height
Image" (Page 8-1) for more details.
• Only the measurement tools that use height extraction are available on the CV-X480LJ. Capturing of luminance images
using our specified model of LJ-V Series head, 2-Head Dead Angle Cut, the tools in the [Height] category, ShapeTrax3/
ShapeTrax2 measurements, and the various tools based on ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 are unavailable.
• The controller models for each package are as follows:
- Full package
: CV-X400F/X420F/X450F/X470F/X480F/X490F
- Standard package : CV-X400A/X420A/X450A/X470A
- LJ package
: CV-X480LJ
CV-X UM_E
9
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Differences in the CV-X300 series controllers
The major differences among the models are listed below.
• The CV-X350 has approximately four times more image memory than the CV-X300 controller; and the CV-X320 has
approximately twice the image memory compared to the CV-X300 controller.
• The number of the cameras which can be connected for each model of the CV-X300 Series are shown below.
Area Camera
Camera
Camera
connection
destination
CA-035C/035M,
CA-H035C/H035M,
CA-HS035C/HS035M,
CV-035C/035M,
CV-H035C/H035M,
CV-S035C/S035M
Camera port of
the controller or
CA-E100
CV-X300
CV-X320
CV-X350
2
2(4)*1
2(4)*1
CA-H048CX/H048MX,
CA-HX048C/HX048M
2*2
2(4)*1*2
2(4)*1*2
CA-200C/200M,
CA-H200C/H200M,
CA-HS200C/HS200M,
CV-200C/200M,
CV-H200C/H200M,
CV-S200C/S200M
×
2(4)*1
2(4)*1
CA-H200CX/H200MX,
CA-HX200C/HX200M
×
2(4)*1*2
2(4)*1*2
CA-H500C/H500M,
CV-H500C/H500M
×
×
2(4)*1
CA-H500CX/H500MX,
CA-HX500C/HX500M
×
×
2(4)*1*2
*1 The number in the parenthesis is the maximum number of cameras that can be connected by adding the camera expansion unit (CA-E100).
*2 It does not support LumiTrax Mode (Page 7-15), MultiSpectrum Mode (Page 7-35), 3D Capture Mode (Page 7-47) and Outline Capture
Mode (Page 7-68).
Reference
10 CV-X UM_E
For more details on differences among the models, refer to "Main Specifications" (Page 9-55).
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Differences between the included tools
Depending on the type of the package (identified by the alphabet at the end of the model number), the included tools vary
as shown below.
Full
package
CV-X3*0F
Standard
package
CV-X3*0A
Limitedfunction
package
CV-X3*0M
Reference
• Tools in the “Vision-Guided Robotics” category can be used only with the Vision-Guided Robotics-dedicated program
setting. For more details, refer to the CV-X Series User's Manual (Robot Vision Edition).
• Tools in the “Connector” category can be used only with the connector-dedicated program setting. For more details,
refer to the CV-X Series User's Manual (Connector Inspection Edition).
• The controller models for each package are as follows:
- Full package
: CV-X300F/X320F/X350F
- Standard package
: CV-X300A/X320A/X350A
- Limited-function package: CV-X300M/X320M
CV-X UM_E
11
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Differences in the CV-X200 series controllers
The major differences among the models are listed below.
• The image processor used in the CV-X290/X270 is approximately 40% faster than that used in the CV-X200 (approximately 20% faster
in the case of the CV-X250).
Actual speed differences will vary depending on the contents of the program. Processing speed should be evaluated
according to the actual model to be used.
• The CV-X290 has approximately twice the image memory of other controller models.
• The number of the cameras which can be connected for each model of the CV-X200 Series are shown below.
Area Camera
LJ-V Series Head
Camera
Camera input unit to
which connection is
possible
CV-X200
CV-X250
CV-X270
CV-X290
CA-035C/035M,
CA-H035C/H035M,
CA-HS035C/HS035M,
CV-035C/035M,
CV-H035C/H035M,
CV-S035C/S035M
CA-EC80
2
2(4)*1
2(4)*1
2(4)*1
CA-HX048C/HX048M
CA-EC80
2*3*4*5
2(4)*1*3*4*5
2(4)*1*3*4*5
2(4)*1*3*4*5
CA-EC80HX/EC80L
1*3*4*5
1(2)*1*3*4*5
1(2)*1*3*4*5
1(2)*1*3*4*5
*1
2(4)
*1
2(4)*1
CV-H100C/H100M
CA-EC80
×
2(4)
CA-200C/200M,
CA-H200C/H200M,
CA-HS200C/HS200M,
CV-200C/200M,
CV-H200C/H200M,
CV-S200C/S200M
CA-EC80
×
2(4)*1
2(4)*1
2(4)*1
CA-HX200C/HX200M
CA-EC80
×
2(4)*1*3*4*5
2(4)*1*3*4*5
2(4)*1*3*4*5
CA-EC80HX/EC80L
×
1(2)*1*3*4*5
1(2)*1*3*4*5
1(2)*1*3*4*5
CA-H500C/H500M,
CV-H500C/H500M
CA-EC80
×
×
2(4)*1
2(4)*1
CA-HX500C/HX500M
CA-EC80
×
×
2(4)*1*3*5*6
2(4)*1*3*4*5
CA-EC80HX/EC80L
×
×
1(2)*1*3*5*6
1(2)*1*3*4*5
CA-H048CX/H048MX,
CA-H200CX/H200MX,
CA-H500CX/H500MX
-
×
×
×
×
CA-H2100C/H2100M
CA-EC80L
×
×
×
1(2)*1*2
LJ-V7020/V7020K/
V7060/V7060K/V7080/
V7200/V7300
CA-EC80LJ
×
×
×
1(2)*1*2
*1 The number in the parenthesis is the maximum number of cameras that can be connected by adding the camera expansion unit (CAE800).
*2 You cannot connect the CA-H2100C/H2100M and the LJ-V Series head simultaneously.
*3 The number of connectable units and the transfer speed of CA-HX500C/HX500M/HX200C/HX200M/HX048C/HX048M vary depending
on the camera input unit mounted to the controller. (When CA-EC80HX/EC80L is mounted, one unit can be connected and it works as
a 16x-speed camera. When CA-EC80 is mounted, two units can be connected and they work as 11x-speed cameras.)
*4 It supports LumiTrax Mode (Page 7-15).
*5 It does not support MultiSpectrum Mode (Page 7-35), 3D Capture Mode (Page 7-47) and Outline Capture Mode (Page 7-68).
*6 The CV-X270 does not support the LumiTrax Mode function that uses CA-HX500C/HX500M.
Reference
12 CV-X UM_E
For more details on differences among the models, refer to "Main Specifications" (Page 9-55).
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Differences between the included tools
Depending on the type of the package (identified by the alphabet at the end of the model number), the included tools vary
as shown below.
Full package
CV-X2*0F
Standard
package
CV-X2*0A
Reference
• Tools in the “Vision-Guided Robotics” category can be used only with the Vision-Guided Robotics-dedicated program
setting. For more details, refer to the CV-X Series User's Manual (Robot Vision Edition).
• Tools in the “Connector” category can be used only with the connector-dedicated program setting. For more details,
refer to the CV-X Series User's Manual (Connector Inspection Edition).
• The tools in the "Height” category are only available when capturing using the LJ-V Series head (CV-X290 only).
See "Chapter 8 Measurement Using Height Image" (Page 8-1) for more details.
CV-X UM_E
13
Differences between the CV-X Series controllers
Differences in the CV-X100 series controllers
The major differences among the models are listed below.
• The image processor used in the CV-X170 is approximately 40% faster than that used in the CV-X100 (approximately
20% faster in the case of the CV-X150).
Actual speed differences will vary depending on the contents of the program. Processing speed should be evaluated
according to the actual model to be used.
• The CV-X170 has approximately twice the image memory of other controller models.
• The number of the cameras which can be connected for each model of the CV-X100 Series are shown below.
Camera
Area Camera
CV-X100
CV-X150
*1
CV-X170
CA-035C/035M,
CA-H035C/H035M,
CA-HS035C/HS035M,
CV-035C/035M,
CV-H035C/H035M,
CV-S035C/S035M
2
2(4)
2(4)*1
CA-HX048C/HX048M
2*2
2(4)*1*2
2(4)*1*2
CV-H100C/H100M
×
2(4)*1
2(4)*1
CA-200C/200M,
CA-H200C/H200M,
CA-HS200C/HS200M,
CV-200C/200M,
CV-H200C/H200M,
CV-S200C/S200M
×
*1
2(4)
2(4)*1
CA-HX200C/HX200M
×
2(4)*1*2
2(4)*1*2
CA-H500C/H500M,
CV-H500C/H500M
×
×
2(4)*1
CA-HX500C/HX500M
×
×
2(4)*1*2
CA-H048CX/H048MX,
CA-H200CX/H200MX,
CA-H500CX/H500MX
×
×
×
*1 The number in the parenthesis is the maximum number of cameras that can be connected by adding the camera expansion unit (CV-E500).
*2 It works as an 11x-speed camera. It does not support LumiTrax Mode (Page 7-15), MultiSpectrum Mode (Page 7-35), 3D Capture Mode
(Page 7-47) and Outline Capture Mode (Page 7-68).
Reference
For more details on differences among the models, refer to "Main Specifications" (Page 9-55).
Differences between the included tools
Depending on the type of the package (identified by the alphabet at the end of the model number), the included tools vary
as shown below.
Full
package
CV-X1*0F
Standard
package
CV-X1*0A
Limitedfunction
package
CV-X1*0M
Reference
14 CV-X UM_E
• Tools in the “Vision-Guided Robotics” category can be used only with the Vision-Guided Robotics-dedicated program
setting. For more details, refer to the CV-X Series User's Manual (Robot Vision Edition).
• Tools in the “Connector” category can be used only with the connector-dedicated program setting. In addition, the
connector appearance inspection tools are not available with CV-X1*0M. For more details, refer to the CV-X Series
User's Manual (Connector Inspection Edition).
• Aside from the packages listed, other packages are also available. For details, inquire of your salesperson.
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.8
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.7
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Function additions and changes
(CV-X400 / X300 Series)
Additions and changes related to tools (CV-X480D)
• It is now possible to enable [Jumbo Frame] even without
mounting the communication expansion unit (CA-NEP20E,
CA-NPN20E, CA-NEC20E).
• With regard to image output to the FTP server and to the
VisionDatabase, it is now possible to shorten the image
output time by using the [Parallel Processing of JPEG/
PNG Compression] function.
• With regard to image output to the FTP server and to the
VisionDatabase, it is now possible to optimize the size of
the output image based on the capture area.
• The initial value for the retry attempts when logging in to
the FTP server has been changed from 1 to 3.
• With regard to the outputting of images and result data to
the FTP server, the timeout value for when the response
from the FTP server is delayed has been lengthened.
• It is now possible to output screen image captures as an
option of Image Output.
• With regard to the [Do Not Judge Outside Box] function
of the Path Planning tool, it is now possible to specify the
distance for collision judgment in the box vicinity.
• With regard to the Height Extraction of the Position
Adjustment tool, it is now possible to specify [Zero Plane
of Other Tool] and [Detected Plane of Other Tool] as the
extraction method.
• With regard to Check NG Cause of the Path Planning tool,
[Robot (Transparent)] has been added to the display types.
• With regard to the Search Model Registration of the 3D
Search tool, it is now possible to register CAD data that
is larger in size than the field of view of the camera as a
model.
• With regard to the 3D Pick tool and Path Planning tool,
[Sensitivity of Collision Judgment] has been added for
the performing of collision judgment with a height image.
Other additions and changes (CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• With regard to the copying and pasting of tools, it is now
possible to copy and paste tools across program settings.
• [JAKA] has been added as a supported robot manufacturer
to [Manufacturer] in [Robot Connection Settings].
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.6
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Additions and changes related to tools
(CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• The [Follow Detection Condition Angle Range] setting
has been added to the Details of the Rotation DirectionAdded Search of [ShapeTrax3].
• [ShapeTrax3A] has been added to the [Function List]
category.
Additions and changes related to tools (CV-X480D)
• [Height Measurement] has been added to the [Height]
category.
• The [Robot Coordinate Conversion] function has been
added to the detailed settings for the Detection
Conditions of the Height Measurement tool.
• The upper limit for [Pre-Slide Lift Distance] in the Departure
Settings of the Path Planning tool has been changed.
CV-X UM_E
15
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.5
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Changes related to image capture
(CV-X400 Series)
• Track Moving Object for LumiTrax Mode using the CA-HF
camera is now supported.
Other additions and changes
(CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• The SFTP client function is now supported.
• The Check Login function for the FTP server to connect
to has been added.
• The APPE command used for sending image files to the
FTP server has been changed to the STOR command.
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.4
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Additions and changes related to supported
hardware (CV-X400 Series)
• The CV-X490F has been added.
• The following cameras are now supported:
CA-HF2100C/M, CA-HF6400C/M
• The camera input unit CA-E200 is now supported.
• EtherNet/IP communication by means of the CANEP20E is now supported.
• PROFINET communication by means of the CANPN20E is now supported.
• EtherCAT communication by means of the CA-NEC20E
is now supported.
• It is now possible to use jumbo frames for the Ethernet
communication of the CV-X controller when the CANEP20E / CA-NPN20E / CA-NEC20E is connected.
Additions and changes related to supported
hardware (CV-X300 Series)
• EtherNet/IP communication by means of the CA-NEP20E
is now supported.
• PROFINET communication by means of the CA-NPN20E
is now supported.
• EtherCAT communication by means of the CA-NEC20E
is now supported.
• It is now possible to use jumbo frames for the Ethernet
communication of the CV-X controller when the
CA-NEP20E/CA-NPN20E/CA-NEC20E is connected.
Additions and changes related to tools
(CV-X400 Series)
• The [Large Area Mode] setting has been added to the
OCR2 tool, 1D Code Reader tool and 2D Code Reader
tool, and the size restriction for the inspection region has
been relaxed.
16 CV-X UM_E
Other additions and changes
(CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• The [Camera Installation Optimization Navigation] has
been added.
• PNG format image files are now supported.
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.3
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Additions and changes related to tools
(CV-X400 Series)
3D Capture Mode Only
• [Real-Time (Free-form Plane)] has been added to
[Method] of the Height Binarization.
Other additions and changes
(CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• [Output Every Total Status OK] has been added to
[Image Output Condition] of the image output settings.
• Horizontal scrolling has been made possible in the
[Ethernet Monitor] of Utility.
Additions and changes related to Global Settings
• In [ERROR Output Settings] of [System], [PC Programrelated Error] has been added.
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.2
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Changes related to image capture (CV-X400 Series)
• [3D Capture Mode] is now supported as a capture mode
setting in Vision-Guided Robotics program settings.
Changes related to tools (CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• [Measured Value Correction] has been added to the
tools in the [Measurements & Dimensions] category.
Additions and changes related to tools
(CV-X400 Series)
• [Processing Shape] has been added to [Invalid Pixel
Suppression].
3D Capture Mode Only
• [Section Count] has been added to the [3D Presence/
Comparison] category.
• [Section Count] has been added to the [Function List]
category.
• The [Extraction Method Specification] function has been
added.
• [Expand Correction Range] has been added to [3D
Comparison].
Other additions and changes
(CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• The [Edit Group] function for tools is now supported.
• The [Display Tool List] function has been added.
• The [Renumber Tool ID] function has been added.
• The [Select Multiple] function for tools is now supported.
• The function for hiding the graphics on the [Raw 2],
[Grayscale], [Color] and [Normal] displays is now
supported through [Icon Display on the Image Display].
• It is now possible to display up to 300 lines of
communication logs in the [Ethernet Monitor] of Utility.
• Czech, Hungarian and Polish are now supported.
• [Custom] has been added to the File Naming Rule for
the Image Output settings.
• It is now possible to use externally specified strings
when [Sequential] is selected for the File Naming Rule
for the Image Output settings.
• The initial value of the filter length for input terminals has
been changed to 40000 nsec.
• The Result OR flag is now set to be cleared during
program setting change and reset.
Other additions and changes (CV-X400 Series)
• The [Display Color Specification] function has been added.
Additions and changes related to global settings
(CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• It is now possible to change the display setting for the
[Display Tool List] button in [Tool Common Display Settings].
Additions and changes related to commands
(CV-X400 / X300 Series)
• The STW and STR commands have been added.
CV-X UM_E
17
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.1
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Additions and changes related to supported
hardware (CV-X400 Series)
• When the CA-DC60E is used, the following lights are
now supported:
CA-DQP12X, CA-DQP25X, CA-DQW40X
Additions related to image capture
(CV-X400 Series)
• [3D Capture Mode] is now supported.
• [Outline Capture Mode] is now supported.
Additions and changes related to tools
(CV-X400 Series)
• [Multi-Region Mode] has been added.
• The Judgment Conditions graph function for [MultiRegion Mode] has been added.
• [Batch Region Adjustment] functions for [Multi-Region
Mode] have been added.
• The [Share Setting] function for [Multi-Region Mode] has
been added.
• When the [Multi-Region Mode] is used, it is now possible
to collapse the display of the items per region in Output
Settings, Statistics, Operation Screen Settings and
Calculation.
• The reading performance of the [2D Code Reader] has
been improved.
• [Suppress Expansion] is now supported in the
[Average], [Smoothing], [Median] and [Gaussian] image
enhance filters for height images.
• [Outline Interpolation Suppression] is now supported in
the [Invalid Pixel Suppression] image enhance filter for
height images.
3D Capture Mode Only
• The [3D Presence/Comparison] category has been
added.
• [3D Comparison], [Section Area Comparison], [Outline
Comparison], [Height Comparison] and [Profile
Comparison] have been added to the [3D Presence/
Comparison] category.
• [3D Comparison], [Section Area Comparison], [Outline
Comparison], [Height Comparison] and [Profile
Comparison] have been added to the [Function List]
category.
• The [Height Binarization] function has been added.
• [Shape Region] has been added to the type of the
inspection region.
• [Specify Desired Point] is now supported for the
installation distance in 3D Installation View.
18 CV-X UM_E
• The [Image Capture] of 3D Installation View is now
made to capture an image where the screen is
maximized.
• It is now possible to narrow down the width of the height
range when using the CA-DQP25X to 5mm.
Outline Capture Mode Only
• [Outline Coincidence] has been added to the
[Presence/Absence] category.
• [Outline Comparison] has been added to the [Function
List] category.
• [Shape Region] has been added to the type of the
inspection region.
Additions and changes related to tools
(CV-X300 Series)
• [Multi-Region Mode] has been added.
• The Judgment Conditions graph function for [MultiRegion Mode] has been added.
• [Batch Region Adjustment] functions for [Multi-Region
Mode] have been added.
• The [Share Setting] function for [Multi-Region Mode] has
been added.
• When the [Multi-Region Mode] is used, it is now possible
to collapse the display of the items per region in Output
Settings, Statistics, Operation Screen Settings and
Calculation.
• The reading performance of the [2D Code Reader] has
been improved.
Additions and changes related to commands
(CV-X400 Series)
• [Multi-Region Mode] is now supported by the DW, DR,
SLW, SLR, MCC, MCW and MCR commands.
• [3D Capture Mode] is now supported by the CSH, CSE
and CLV commands.
• [Outline Capture Mode] is now supported by the CLV
command.
Additions and changes related to commands
(CV-X300 Series)
• [Multi-Region Mode] is now supported by the DW, DR,
SLW, SLR, MCC, MCW and MCR commands.
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Additions and changes related to global settings
(CV-X400 Series)
• In [System], [Tool Common Display Settings] has been
added.
• It is now possible to change the setting for [Region Line
Display] in the [Tool Common Display Settings].
• It is now possible to change the setting for [Icon Display
on the Image Display] in the [Tool Common Display
Settings].
• It is now possible to change the setting for [Zero Plane
Display] in the [Tool Common Display Settings].
• The upper limit for the Timeout in the FTP settings has
been changed to 600 seconds.
Additions and changes related to global settings
(CV-X300 Series)
• In [System], [Tool Common Display Settings] has been
added.
• It is now possible to change the setting for [Region Line
Display] in the [Tool Common Display Settings].
• It is now possible to change the setting for [Icon Display
on the Image Display] in the [Tool Common Display
Settings].
• The upper limit for the Timeout in the FTP settings has
been changed to 600 seconds.
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 5.0
(Supports CV-X400/X300 Series only)
Notations used in this manual
The descriptions in this manual presume that [Use
VisionDataStorage] in the Global settings is disabled
(the default value).
When [Use VisionDataStorage] is enabled, the following
occur:
• The name in the output settings changes from [FTP]
to [FTP/VisionDataStorage (Ether)], and
[VisionDataStorage (USB)] is added.
• The item name in the menu for the Image Output
Location of Image Output and the Source of image
loading in the Image Strip Settings changes from
[FTP] to [FTP/VisionDataStorage (Ether)], and
[VisionDataStorage (USB)] is added.
Additions and changes related to supported
hardware
• The following cameras are now supported:
CA-035C/M, CA-H035C/M, CA-HS035C/M, CA-H048CX,
CA-H048MX, CA-200C/M, CA-H200C/M, CA-HS200C/M,
CA-H200CX, CA-H200MX, CA-H500C/M, CA-H500CX,
CA-H500MX
Other additions/changes (CV-X400 Series)
• [Icon Display on the Image Display] is now supported.
• The Maximize Image Display function has been added.
• The [Options] icon has been added on the image
display, and the buttons on the View Bar have been
moved to the Options menu.
• It is now possible to change the setting for [Range
Settings] and [Height/Grayscale Blend Ratio Setting] on
the image display.
• The [3D Display Color Specification] function has been
added.
Other additions/changes (CV-X300 Series)
• [Icon Display on the Image Display] is now supported.
• The Maximize Image Display function has been added.
• The [Options] icon has been added on the image
display, and the buttons on the View Bar have been
moved to the Options menu.
Additions and changes related to tools
• The count of the number of detected edges has been
added to the judgment condition and to the result data
of the Edge Angle tool.
Additions and changes related to output settings
• A function which automatically deletes old folders has
been added to the New Folder Rule of Image Output.
• With regard to VisionDatabase output, it is now possible
to set the output condition for the results data.
• In regard to the outputting of results data to the
VisionDatabase, the setting for not outputting the results
data of a tool when the tool was not executed has been
added.
Additions and changes related to utilities
• The Trace Log function has been added.
• In the memory monitor screen of each of the
communication protocols, the default setting for the form
of expressing numerical data has been changed to
[Decimal (signed)].
CV-X UM_E
19
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 4.3
(Supports CV-X400 Series only)
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 4.2
(Supports CV-X400 Series only)
Additions and changes related to tools
Additions and changes related to supported
hardware
• It is now possible to add the built-in library characters in
the library edit screen of the OCR2 tool.
Additions and changes related to output settings
• The specification has been changed such that the Tool
Judge Value in the Bit Allocation Area of the EtherNet/IP
and the PROFINET are cleared upon reset.
• The following light controller is now supported:
CA-DC60E
• When the CA-DC60E is used, the following lights are
now supported:
CA-DRM5X, CA-DRM10X, CA-DRM20X
Additions and changes related to image capture
Additions and changes related to global settings
• Various terminologies in Vietnamese have been changed.
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 4.3
(Supports CV-X100 Series only)
• The MultiSpectrum function has been added.
• [No Interpolation of Dead Angle Data] has been added
to [Imaging Settings] of [LJ-V Settings].
• [Polarization Attachment In Use] has been added.
• [Active Capture Settings] has been added to [MultiCapture Settings].
Additions and changes related to tools
Additions and changes related to output settings
• The specification has been changed such that the Tool
Judge Value in the Bit Allocation Area of the EtherNet/IP
and the PROFINET are cleared upon reset.
Additions and changes related to global settings
• Various terminologies in Vietnamese have been changed.
20 CV-X UM_E
• [Color Sorting] and [Color Distribution] have been added
to the [Presence/Absence] category.
• [Color Grouping] has been added to the [Function List]
category.
• The MultiSpectrum function is now supported in the
Extract Colors function.
• The MultiSpectrum function is now supported in [Color
Detection].
• [Profile Measurement] and [Continuous Profile
Measurement] have been added to the [Height]
category. (CV-X480 only)
• [Profile Measurement] and [Continuous Profile
Measurement] have been added to the [Function List]
category. (CV-X480 only)
• [Measured Value Correction] has been added to
Judgment Conditions of [Height Measurement] and
[Trend Height Measurement]. (CV-X480 only)
• [Multiple Points (Real-Time)] has been added to the
specification method for Zero Plane Specification. (CVX480 only)
• [Multiple Points] has been added to the calculation
basis for Height Extraction. (CV-X480/X480LJ only)
• [Gain] has been added to [Defect].
• With regard to the [Characters] tool under the [ID &
OCR/OCV] category, the base tool has been changed to
[OCR2].
• [OCR2] has been added to the [Function List] category.
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Additions and changes related to commands
• The following commands have been added:
“Change Measured Value before Correction of
Measured Value Correction” command (MCC)
“Write Measured Value Correction” command (MCW)
“Read Measured Value Correction” command (MCR)
“Write SNTP Time Zone” command (TZW)
“Read SNTP Time Zone” command (TZR)
• The MultiSpectrum function is now supported by the
CLV command.
Additions and changes related to utilities
• [Image Output Storage Count] has been added to
[Archived Image Settings].
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 4.2
(Supports CV-X100 Series only)
Additions and changes related to image capture
• [Active Capture Settings] has been added to [MultiCapture Settings].
Additions and changes related to global settings
• [Return to Default] has been added to [FTP Server
Settings (Target)] of [FTP] of [Communications & I/O].
• [Handle RxRyRz Decimal Part with 3 Digits] has been
added to [Robot Operation Setting] of [Robot
Connection Settings].
Additions and changes related to global settings
• In [Manufacturer] of [Robot Connection Settings],
addition has been made to the robot manufacturers that
are supported.
• [Handle RxRyRz Decimal Part with 3 Digits] has been
added to [Robot Operation Setting] of [Robot
Connection Settings].
• In [Communications & I/O], [SNTP] has been added.
• [Return to Default] has been added to [FTP Server
Settings (Target)] of [FTP] of [Communications & I/O].
Additions and changes related to other aspects
• [Following the Color Group No. of] has been added to
the execute condition options.
• [3D Observation] has been updated. (CV-X480/X480LJ
only)
CV-X UM_E
21
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 4.0
(Supports CV-X400 Series only)
The following shows the list of major additions and
changes in Ver. 4.0 of the CV-X series.
Additions/changes related to supported hardware
• The connection of a USB HDD is now supported.
• The connection of up to a maximum of 8 units of
illumination expansion units is now supported.
• The direct connection of LJ-V Series heads is now
supported. (CV-X480/X480LJ only)
• The connection of LJ-V Series heads that support
luminance output is now supported. (CV-X480 only)
• The connection of the encoder unit CA-EN100U is now
supported. (CV-X480/X480LJ only)
• The connection of up to a maximum of 4 units of 21
megapixel cameras is now supported. (CV-X470/X480
only)
Additions/changes related to image capture
• [Flash 5] to [Flash 8] have been added to the [Flash
Output Settings].
• In [Light Controller Settings], the [Model] of the
illumination expansion unit can now be specified.
• In [Light Controller Settings], the setting range for
[Volume] has been expanded to 0 to 1023.
• In [LumiTrax Image Settings], [LumiTrax Tuning] has
been added to the settings for [Shape/Topography
Image].
• [HDR] is now supported by the following cameras:
CA-HX048M, CA-HX048C, CA-HX200M, CA-HX200C,
CA-HX500M, CA-HX500C
• With the support for direct connection of LJ-V Series
heads, the [LJ-V Settings] has been updated. (CV-X480/
X480LJ only)
• In the [Correction Settings] of the [LJ-V Settings] for LJ-V
Series heads, [Vibration Correction], [2-Head Dead
Angle Cut] and [Spike Noise Cut] have been added.
(CV-X480/X480LJ only)
Additions/changes related to tools
• For tools that had [ShapeTrax2] as their base tool, the
base tool has been changed to [ShapeTrax3].
• [ShapeTrax3] and [Auto-Teach Insp. (ShapeTrax2)] have
been added to the [Function List] category.
• [Auto Tuning] has been added to the Feature Extraction
Conditions of [PatternTrax].
• [Spike Noise Cut] has been added to Image Enhance.
(CV-X480 only)
• [Extract Plane of Other Tool] has been added to the
specification method for Zero Plane Specification. (CVX480 only)
• [Extract Plane of Other Tool] has been added to the
specification method for Height Extraction. (CV-X480/
X480LJ only)
Additions/changes related to utilities
• [Encoder Monitor] has been added. (CV-X480/X480LJ
only)
• [Remove USB HDD] has been added.
• [USB HDD] has been added as an image loading
source for the [Image Strip Settings].
Additions/changes related to Global Settings
• In [ERROR Output Settings] of [System], [FTP-related
Error] and [USB HDD-related Error] have been added.
• In [Input Assignments] of [External Terminal] of
[Communications & I/O], [Filter Length Setting] has
been added.
• The initial value for [FLASH] signals in [Output
Assignments] of [External Terminal] of [Communications
& I/O] has been changed to Normally Open.
• In [Communications & I/O], [Encoder Settings] has been
added. (CV-X480/X480LJ only)
Additions/changes related to external I/O
• [USB HDD] has been added to [Output Settings].
• In [Output Settings], [USB HDD] has been added to the
[Image Output Location] for [Image Output].
Other additions/changes
• [Convert All Programs to Latest Version] has been
added to Program Operation.
• [USB HDD] has been added to the [Destination] for
[Save Archived Image] of the Image Strip.
• [3D Observation] has been updated. (CV-X480/X480LJ
only)
22 CV-X UM_E
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 4.0
(Supports CV-X100 Series only)
Additions/changes related to tools
• For tools that had [ShapeTrax2] as their base tool, the
base tool has been changed to [ShapeTrax3].
• [ShapeTrax3] and [Auto-Teach Insp. (ShapeTrax2)] have
been added to the [Function List] category.
Additions/changes related to Global Settings
• In [ERROR Output Settings] of [System], [FTP-related
Error] has been added.
• The initial value for [FLASH] signals in [Output Assignments]
of [External Terminal] of [Communications & I/O] has been
changed to Normally Open.
• Supported robot manufacturers were added to
[Manufacturer] in [Robot Connection Settings].
Additions/changes related to external I/O
• For [EtherNet/IP] and [PROFINET], a zero clear is now
performed when resetting result data.
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 3.4
The following shows the list of major additions and
changes in Ver. 3.4 of the CV-X series.
Additions/changes related to supported hardware
• Keyence KV-7000 Series PLC models are now
supported as PLC-link connection compatible models.
Additions/changes related to tools
• [PatternTrax] and [Auto-Teach Insp.(PatternTrax)] have
been added to the [Function List] category.
• [Show Label No.] has been added to [Display Options]
under [ShapeTrax2].
• [Calculation] can now be set as a position adjustment
reference.
• Tools under the [Measurements & Dimensions] category
(excluding [Measure Distance] and [Measure Width])
can now be set as position adjustment references.
• Scaling coefficient system variables (%Cam*ScalingX,
%Cam*ScalingY, %Cam*ScalingL) have been added.
• Reading and verification of [PDF417], [MicroPDF417]
and [Composite Code (CC-A, CC-B, CC-C)] are now
supported in [2D Code Reader].
• The [Verification] function is now supported in [1D Code
Reader].
• The reading algorithm has been changed to improve the
processing speed in [1D Code Reader].
Additions/changes related to external I/O
• [Do Not Output When Tool(s) Unexecuted] has been
added to the [OUT terminal] in the [Output Settings].
• Corrections have been made such that the values in the
bit allocation area with no assigned output items do not
change in the EtherNet/IP and PROFINET outputs.
• Numeric values with 0 integer digits (Example: .123) and
numeric values having 17 digits or less with integer and
decimal parts combined (Example: 123.45678901234567)
are now supported for the CPW command arguments.
CV-X UM_E
23
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Other additions/changes
• [Do not execute the tool when its condition reference
tool is not executed] has been added to the execution
conditions.
• The Thai notations in some of the screens have been
changed.
• The [Update Version of Program Setting] in Program
Operation has been improved so that it will automatically
set the tool names, etc. in Vietnamese, Brazilian
Portuguese, and Indonesian if they are blank.
• [Sample Program Creation] was added.
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 3.3
The following shows the list of major additions and
changes in Ver. 3.3 of the CV-X series.
Additions/changes related to program settings
• Creating a Vision-Guided Robotics setting is now
possible.
• The time required for changing programs was reduced
by approximately 100 ms.
Additions/changes related to tools
• The [Vision-Guided Robotics] category was added.
• [Feature Drawing Tool] was added to [Auto-Teach
Inspection] and [ShapeTrax2].
• Disabling [Eraser Tool] in [Auto-Teach Inspection] and
[ShapeTrax2] is now possible.
• [Allowable Distortion], [Feature Densification] and
[Eliminate Overlap] were added to [ShapeTrax2].
• To [Detection Order] in [ShapeTrax2], [From Upper Right
(Right to Left)], [From Upper Right (Downward)], [From
Lower Left (Left to Right)], [From Lower Left (Upward)],
[From Lower Right (Right to Left)], and [From Lower
Right (Upward)] were added.
In addition, the names of [Y > X: Ascend] and [X > Y:
Ascend] were changed to [From Upper Left (Left to
Right)] and [From Upper Left (Downward)] respectively.
• To [Detection Order] in [ShapeTrax2], [Grouping
Method] and [Grouping Range] were added.
CV-X200 Series only
• In the feature extraction process in [ShapeTrax2], the
calculation error which occurs under certain conditions
was improved.
Additions/changes related to utilities
• [PLC-Link Memory Monitor] was added.
• [Ethernet Monitor] was added.
Additions/changes related to Global Settings
• [Check Connection] was added to [Network Settings],
[FTP], and [PLC-Link].Additions/changes related to
external I/O
• In [Output Settings], [Other] was added to [Data
Delimiter] in [RS-232C (Non-Procedural)].
• In [Output Settings], [Other] was added to [Data
Delimiter] in [Ethernet (Non-Procedural)].
• Regarding the data to output, which was set in [RS232C (Non-Procedural)], [Ethernet (Non-Procedural)],
[SD Card 2], and [FTP] in [Output Settings], changing
the output format is now possible.
24 CV-X UM_E
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 3.2
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series Ver. 3.1
The following shows the list of major additions and
changes in Ver. 3.2 of the CV-X series.
The following shows the list of major additions and changes
in Ver. 3.1 of the CV-X series.
Additions/changes related to image capture
Additions/changes related to supported hardware
• [Detect Calibration Pts. with Multiple Images] was
added to the calibration function.
• The following cameras are now supported.
CA-HX048M, CA-HX048C, CA-HX200M, CA-HX200C,
CA-HX500M, and CA-HX500C
• The following illumination expansion unit is now supported.
CA-DC30E
• The following camera input unit is now supported.
CA-EC80HX
• The following lights are now supported when using the
CA-DC30E.
CA-DRW5X and CA-DRW10X
• With the increase of supported models, the rated power
consumption (at maximum load) has been modified.
CV-X200 Series only
• The Trigger Signal can now be changed when
configuring internal trigger settings.
Additions/changes related to tools
• [Extract Colors] was added to Position Adjustment of
[Auto-Teach Inspection].
• [Image Region Generation Target Image] was added to
[Image Region Generator]. Generation of the image
region with respect to the reference image is now
possible.
• [Image Region Generator] can now be added in all
program settings.
• [Grayscale Blob] can now be added in all program
settings.
• In CV-X1*0M, the use of the [Connector Dimension
Inspection] tool is now possible.
CV-X290 only
• For the plane detection in [Trend Height Measurement],
[Correction] is now supported.
Additions/changes related to utilities
• [Individual] was added to Scaling.
Additions/changes related to Global Settings
CV-X200 Series only
• Display of camera input unit model and serial number in
System Information is now supported.
Other additions/changes
• [Following Multiple Execute Nos.] was added to execute
conditions.
• Brazilian Portuguese and Vietnamese are now supported.
CV-X100 Series only
• The profile display function was added to the view bar.
• The tool tip indication for the view bar buttons is now
supported.
CV-X290 only
• The behavior change (elimination of 30 sec. connection
timeout process) in LJ-V firmware Ver. 3.14 is now supported.
Additions/changes related to image capture
CV-X200 Series only
• Added the LumiTrax function.
Additions/changes related to tools
• Increased the internal memory size used for Blob and
Blob Filter.
CV-X290 only
• [Contrast with Background] was added to the [Flaw
detection] category.
• [Dark or Bright Clusters] was added to the [Alignment]
category.
• [Dark or Bright Clusters] was added to the
[Measurements & Dimensions] category.
• [Dark or Bright Clusters] was added to the [Count]
category.
• [Grayscale Blob] was added to the [Function List]
category.
• [Dark or Bright Clusters] was added to the [Position
Adjustment] category.
Additions/changes related to utilities
• [Latest] was added to [Archive Condition] in [Archived
Image Settings].
• [Memory Distribution] was added to [Archived Image
Settings].
Other additions/changes
• Indonesian is now supported.
CV-X200 Series only
• [Zoom] was added to the setup mode image strip.
CV-X UM_E
25
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Functions added/changed in the CV-X
Series ver. 3.0
The following shows the list of major additions and changes
in Ver.3.0 of the CV-X series.
For information on the additions and changes related to the
connector inspection, refer to the User's Manual (Connector
Inspection Edition).
Reference
In order to use these additional/modified functions,
the program setting version must be 3.0 or higher.
Moreover, version 3.0 program settings cannot be
loaded into older version controllers.
Additions/changes related to supported hardware
The following functions have been added or modified:
• The LJ-V Series head is now supported (CV-X290 only).
• 21-megapixel cameras CA-H2100M and CA-H2100C
are now supported (CV-X290 only).
• Keyence touch panel (CA-MP120T) is now supported
(CV-X200 Series only).
• USB communication is now supported (CV-X200 Series
only).
• Keyence KV Nano Series PLC models are now
supported as PLC-link connection compatible models.
Additions/changes related to program settings
• Creation of program settings that use 21-megapixel
cameras is now supported (CV-X290 only).
• Creation of program settings that use the LJ-V Series
head is now supported (CV-X290 only).
Additions/changes related to image capture
• Modification of the LJ-V Series head settings is now
supported (CV-X290 only).
• [Mirrored CCD] was changed to [Mirror Invert/Rotation];
and [Vertical] and [Rotate 180°] were added (CV-X200
Series only).
• Modification of the image buffer options when using
asynchronous triggers is now supported.
26 CV-X UM_E
Additions/changes related to tools
CV-X290 only
The following functions were added or modified for CVX290.
• The [Height] category was added.
• Encoder (EC) coordinate system for measured values is
now supported.
• Maximum and minimum setting values for the coordinate
system for the inspection region, etc. were extended.
• Maximum value of [Extract size] for the [Shading
correction] image enhancement was extended to 2000.
• Maximum value of [Intensity] for the [Blur] image
enhancement was extended to 99.
• [Large Area Search Mode] was added to [Pattern
Search] and [ShapeTrax2].
• [High-definition Display] was added to [Display Options]
of [ShapeTrax2].
• The functions to be used for 3D inspection were added
to the list of geometry math functions in [Calculation].
• [3D position] and [Plane] were added to the list of
temporary variables in [Calculation].
Common for all models
The following functions have been added or modified for
the CV-X Series.
• The following functions were added to the geometry
math functions in [Calculation].
I4Line : Intersection of the diagonals of a quadrilateral/
I4XY : 4-point intersection
• The following function was added to the general math
functions in [Calculation].
Stdev : Standard deviation
• [Blob Filter], [Scratch Defect Extraction], [Noise
Isolation] and [Contrast Expansion] were added to the
list of image enhancement filters.
• [Processing Shape] was added to the [Expand],
[Shrink], [Median], [Remove Bright Noise] and [Remove
Dark Noise] image enhancement filters.
• The [Size] setting method for the [Expand], [Shrink],
[Median], [Remove Bright Noise] and [Remove Dark
Noise] image enhancement filters was changed.
• Numeric input of upper and lower limit values for the
[Binary] image enhancement filter is now supported.
• The [Binary] image enhancement filter can now be
added for all tools in the [Function List] category.
• [Starting Offset] and [Starting Angle] were added to
[Profile Position], [Profile Width] and [Profile Defect].
• [Search Region] is now editable during region editing
upon adding the [Pattern Search] and [ShapeTrax2]
tools.
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Additions/changes related to system settings
Added and changed functions with the
CV-X Series Ver. 2.1
• USB communication is now supported in the PC
program output setting (CV-X200 Series only).
• [230400bps] was added to [Baud Rate] under [RC232C] (CV-X200 Series only).
Functions marked with * are only supported in version
2.1.0010 and later.
Additions/changes related to external I/O
Additions and changes related to image capture
• The CA Series touch panels are now supported (CVX200 Series only).
• [Total Status] became selectable in [OUT Terminal],
[EtherNet/IP] and [PROFINET] in [Output Settings].
• [Output Timing] has been added to [OUT Terminal],
[EtherNet/IP] and [PROFINET] in [Output Settings].
• [OUT Terminal Output Mode] has been added to [OUT
Terminal] in [Output Settings].
• It is now possible to use the Multi-Capture and HDR
functions simultaneously.
Other additions/changes
• The [Display profile] function was added to the VIEW bar
(CV-X200 Series only).
• Tooltip display for the VIEW bar buttons is now supported.
• Maximum reduction ratio of the camera screen display
was changed to 1%.
• Reset for the common context menu is now enabled for
the Setup Mode as well.
• VIEW bar display for the Operation Screens preview is
now supported.
Additions and changes related to tools
• [Verification] function in [2D Code] and [2D Code
Reader] measurement is now supported.
• In addition to [CODE39], [CODE128], [EAN/JAN/UPC],
[GS1 Databar], [ITF], [Codabar /NW-7] and
[Pharmacode], [CODE93] is now supported in [1D
Code] and [1D Code Reader] measurement.
• The symbols "OKAC", "NGAC" and "EXAC" for holding
the accumulated OK count, NG count, and execution
count, respectively, were added as mathematical
operation symbols for each measurement tool.
• The variables "%OkCount" and "%NgCount" for holding
the accumulated Total Status OK count and NG count,
respectively, were added.
• The variables "%Cam*OkCount", "%Cam*NgCount",
"%Cam*ExecCount" and "%Cam*ExecStatus" for holding
the accumulated OK count, NG count, execution count
and execution status, respectively, for individual camera
judgment were added.
• [Execute No. ("%ExecuteNo")] and [Trigger Interval
("%TrgTime")] were added to Variables.
• Retention of the state of the last input method (up/down
buttons or numerical keypad) selected during value
input is now supported.*
• In [Characters] and [OCR] measurement, the setting
item [Match With 1D/2D Code Read Data] was added
under [Judgment Conditions].*
It is now possible to match the OCR Detected String with
the Read Data of any [1D Code], [1D Code Reader], [2D
Code], or [2D Code Reader] measurement that is
measured at the same time.
CV-X UM_E
27
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Additions and changes related to commands
• BC Command (Image Capture)
[BC, 0] (same as the existing [BC] command) and [BC,
1] (outputs the image captured via FTP) were added.
The FTP output destination follows what is set in the
[Image Capture Settings] found in the global settings.
• RE Command (Trigger Reset)
The command [RE], which cancels the input state of a
trigger in the middle of a measurement count when
Multi-Capture is set, was added.* (Number-specified
command No. [15])
The captured images and measurement result of the
measurement count being executed are discarded, and
the state returns to the one before measurement
execution.
It is now possible to retain the archived data of
measurement counts prior to the cancelled
measurement even when the input state of the trigger is
canceled in the middle of multi-capture.
When a tool is being executed, trigger reset is executed
after the tool's execution is completed.
Execution in Run Mode is possible.
Execution via I/O command is also possible.
(CMD_CODE: 14, CMD_PARAM: 0)
Furthermore, the item [Trigger Reset], which has the
same function as RE Command execution, was added
to the common context menu that appears on the
screen when the right button of the mouse is held for a
time.
• RM Command (Read Run/Setup Mode)
The command [RM], which reads the current operation
mode (Run Mode or Setup Mode), was added.*
(Number-specified command No. [16])
Execution in Run Mode and in Setup Mode are both
possible.
Additions and changes related to utilities
• It is now possible to set to display the latest archived
image in the Image Display of the Operation Screen
through [Edit Image Display] of [Operation Screen
Settings].
• It is now possible to set to display variables in the
Measured Value Display of the Operation Screen
through [Edit Measured Value] of [Operation Screen
Settings].
• In [Image Strip Settings], the setting item [Loading
Condition] was added.* Through this, it is now possible
to selectively load images whose CAM Judgment value
is OK or NG.
28 CV-X UM_E
Additions and changes related to
communications & I/O
• In the [OR Terminal] settings of [Output], the setting item
[OR Terminal Output Timing] was added. In addition to
the original method of executing OR Terminal output
during NG Status, it is now possible to execute OR
Terminal output during OK Status.
• In the [OUT Terminal] settings of [Output], it is now
possible to select the execution status
("%Cam*ExecStatus") of each camera. Through this,
when asynchronous trigger is used, it is now possible to
output the camera execution status via the I/O terminal.
• In [Image Capture Settings] of global settings, FTP was
added as an output destination. Through this, it is now
possible to output the file of the image taken using the
[Image Capture] command to the FTP server.
• For FTP server output, creation of the output destination
folder on the FTP server based on the source controller's
IP address is now supported.
• In [Image Output] of [Output], the setting item [Create
Folder Per Judgment Value], which can be selected
when the [Image Output Condition] is [Always Output],
was added.*
Furthermore, in the program [Export] settings and [Save
Archived Image] settings, the setting item [Create
Folder Per Judgment Value] was added.*
By enabling these settings, it is now possible to output
images while sorting them into the [OK] or [NG] folder
based on the image's CAM Judgment value.
Reference
• In order to use these added and changed
functions, the program setting must be of
version 2.1 or later. Furthermore, Ver. 2.1
program settings cannot be loaded on
controllers of an older version.
• Among the added functions above, the items
marked with a * are supported from Ver.
2.1.0010 onwards.
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series
Major new functions with the CV-X Series
Ver. 2.0
Additions and changes related to image capture
• Multiple image capture is now supported (Page 3-20).
• Illumination expansion unit CA-DC10E is now
supported.
• HDR image capture is now supported (Page 3-10).
• Calibration functions are now supported (Page 3-7).
Additions and changes related to tools
• [Peak-to-Peak Width] was added to the "Measurements
& Dimensions" category (Page 2-160).
• [1D Code] (Page 2-243) and [2D Code] (Page 2-246)
were added to the "ID & OCR/OCV" category.
• The "Graphic Display" category (Page 2-249) was
added.
• [1D Code Reader] (Page 2-355) and [2D Code Reader]
(Page 2-359) were added to the "Function List" category.
• It is now possible to change the result graphic display
colors for each tool.
• It is now possible to set no position adjustment for the
auto-teach inspection tool.
• It is now possible to set image enhancement for position
adjustment with the auto-teach inspection tool.
• It is now possible to change the segment size for the
auto-teach inspection tool.
• It is now possible to add a quality image from the image
strip during Step 3 of auto-teach inspection.
• The name of the auto-teach inspection [Edge
Enhancement] function was changed to [Defect
Enhancement].
• [High] was added to the auto-teach inspection [Defect
Enhancement] function.
• It is now possible to select [Rectangle], [Oval], [Ring],
and [Arc] as multiple regions for auto-teach inspection.
• It is now possible to add mask regions as multiple
regions for auto-teach inspection.
• [Inverse Target] was added to [Angle Formed by Two
Lines].
Additions and changes related to connector
inspection
• It is now possible to create program settings for
connectors.
• The "Connector" category was added.
Additions and changes related to commands
The following commands have been added.
• Operation screen change command (VW) (Page 6-9)
• Judgment condition change command (DW)
(Page 6-20)
• Judgment condition read command (DR) (Page 6-21)
• Defect level change command (SLW) (Page 6-22)
• Defect level read command (SLR) (Page 6-23)
Additions and changes related to utilities
• It is now possible to export archived images in run
mode.
• It is now possible to individually export archived data.
• It is now possible to share judgment conditions.
• It is now possible to adjust judgment conditions and
defect level parameters from the custom menu in run
mode.
• EtherNet/IP memory monitor was added (Page 4-24).
• PROFINET memory monitor was added (Page 4-25).
• "3 Displays" can now be selected in "Operation Screens".
Additions and changes related to global setting
• [Startup Hiding Menu Bar] was added to [Startup Mode
Setting] (Page 5-37).
• It is now possible to select [Permit register reference
image registration] and [Show custom menu only in
setup mode] as [Operator Settings] for [Set Account]
(Page 5-39).
Additions and changes related to
communications & I/O
• BOOTP is now supported (Page 5-3).
• EtherNet/IP is now supported (Page 6-134).
• PROFINET is now supported (Page 6-176).
• Results output by FTP is now supported (Page 3-119).
• It is now possible to set the trigger command response
for non-procedural communication to the same format
as with the CV-3000/5000 Series controller (Page 5-3, 59).
• STX and ETX are now supported as delimiters for nonprocedural communication (Page 5-3, 5-9).
• It is now possible to select the output data delimiter for
non-procedural communication.
• The camera exposure in progress signal
(EXPOSURE_BUSY) was added (Page 6-64).
Multi-language support
• Thai is now supported.
• German is now supported.
• French is now supported.
• Italian is now supported.
• Mexican Spanish is now supported.
CV-X UM_E
29
Contents
Contents
Introduction.........................................................2
Safety information for CV-X Series ......................3
Safety Precautions................................................. 3
Precautions on Regulations and Standards.......... 5
Differences between the CV-X Series
controllers ......................................................6
Differences between the CV-X400, CV-X300,
CV-X200, and CV-X100 Series ........................ 6
Differences in the CV-X400 series controllers....... 8
Differences in the CV-X300 series controllers..... 10
Differences in the CV-X200 series controllers..... 12
Differences in the CV-X100 series controllers..... 14
Changes to each version of the CV-X Series....15
Contents............................................................30
Chapter 1 Basic operation
Introduction ........................................................ 1-2
Overview of controller ..................................... 1-2
Overview of CV-X series image processing
sensor ........................................................ 1-3
Controller operation flow ................................. 1-4
Interface .......................................................... 1-5
Basic operation .................................................. 1-9
Overview of basic operation .......................... 1-9
Using mouse ................................................ 1-10
Operating the unit with a touch panel........... 1-11
Entering values or characters ....................... 1-12
Changing the image type and
magnification............................................ 1-13
Checking the shading profile wave
(Display Profile)........................................ 1-15
Using the context-dependent menu
(Context Menu) ........................................ 1-16
Starting/ending operation ............................. 1-18
Checking past images with the image strip.. 1-19
Using the image strip in run mode ................... 1-19
Using the image strip in setup mode ............... 1-20
Using a USB HDD
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only) .................... 1-21
Inspection/measurement condition settings.. 1-22
Overview of inspection/measurement condition
settings..................................................... 1-22
Selecting setting number
(Program Settings) ................................... 1-23
Adding new program settings.......................... 1-23
Changing to existing program setting.............. 1-24
Adding camera ............................................. 1-25
Adding camera................................................. 1-25
Select the camera for editing ........................... 1-25
Registering image for measurement
(Register Image) ...................................... 1-26
Setting measurement conditions (Tool) ........ 1-28
Tool list ............................................................. 1-28
Managing tools................................................. 1-32
Editing an inspection region ........................ 1-39
Converting color images (Extract Colors)..... 1-46
Specifying filter processing on the image
(Image Enhance) ..................................... 1-47
Adjusting position (Position Adjustment) ...... 1-53
Managing program settings.......................... 1-54
30 CV-X UM_E
Contents
Chapter 2 Tool
Presence/Absence ............................................. 2-2
Judged with Quality Learning......................... 2-3
Judged with Black/White-Specific Area ....... 2-13
Judged with Color-Specific Area .................. 2-16
Judged with Pattern Match (Shading) .......... 2-19
Judged with Pattern Match (Profile) ............. 2-23
Judged with Shading.................................... 2-28
Judged with Color Component ..................... 2-31
Color Sorting ................................................. 2-34
Judged with Color Distribution ..................... 2-37
Flaw Detection.................................................. 2-40
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning ................ 2-41
Detect Flaw with Total Defect Area............... 2-51
Detect Flaw with Each Defect....................... 2-56
Detect Flaw with Black & White Area............ 2-61
Detect Flaw with Contrast with Background. 2-64
Flaw on a Line............................................... 2-68
Flaw on a Ring .............................................. 2-72
Flaw on a Curve ............................................ 2-77
Alignment.......................................................... 2-83
Pattern Match (Shading) Position ................. 2-84
Pattern Match (Profile) Position..................... 2-88
Edge Position................................................ 2-92
Position and Angle of Line ............................ 2-96
Center Position of Circle ............................... 2-99
Edge Slope ................................................. 2-102
Edge Position to Circumference ................. 2-106
Tip Position ................................................. 2-110
Cluster Position ........................................... 2-114
Dark or Bright Cluster Position.................... 2-119
Measurements & Dimensions ....................... 2-124
Operation of special measurements &
dimensions tool...................................... 2-125
Measure Distance ....................................... 2-130
Measure Width............................................ 2-136
Line/Angle................................................... 2-163
Intersection/Center ..................................... 2-169
Detect Circle ............................................... 2-173
Detect Point ................................................ 2-176
Count............................................................... 2-200
Cluster Count .............................................. 2-201
Edge Count................................................. 2-206
Pattern Match (Shading) Count .................. 2-212
Pattern Match (Profile) Count...................... 2-216
Dark or Bright Cluster Count....................... 2-220
ID & OCR/OCV ................................................ 2-225
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series).. 2-226
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series).. 2-234
1D Code Reader......................................... 2-243
2D Code Reader......................................... 2-246
Graphic Display .............................................. 2-249
Line Display ................................................ 2-250
Circle Display.............................................. 2-252
Point Display ............................................... 2-255
Scale Display .............................................. 2-257
Mathematical Operations............................... 2-259
Calculation .................................................. 2-260
Function List................................................... 2-262
Auto-Teach Inspection ............................... 2-263
Area............................................................. 2-267
Pattern Search ............................................ 2-270
ShapeTrax3(A) ............................................ 2-274
ShapeTrax2................................................. 2-281
PatternTrax.................................................. 2-286
Edge Position .............................................. 2-291
Edge Angle ................................................. 2-294
Edge Width ................................................. 2-297
Edge Pitch................................................... 2-300
Edge Pairs................................................... 2-303
Defect.......................................................... 2-306
Blob............................................................. 2-310
Grayscale Blob ........................................... 2-314
Profile Position............................................. 2-319
Profile Width ................................................ 2-323
Profile Defect............................................... 2-328
Intensity....................................................... 2-333
Color Detection ........................................... 2-335
Color Grouping (CV-X400 Series Only) ...... 2-338
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only) ............ 2-341
OCR ............................................................ 2-348
1D Code Reader ......................................... 2-355
2D Code Reader ......................................... 2-359
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax3A)
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only) .................. 2-363
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2) ......... 2-367
Auto-Teach Inspection (Pattern Search)..... 2-371
Auto-Teach Inspection (PatternTrax) .......... 2-375
Image Region Generator ............................ 2-379
Outline Coincidence/Outline Comparison
(When in Outline Capture Mode) ........... 2-382
Position Adjustment ...................................... 2-387
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match
(Shading) ............................................... 2-388
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match
(Profile)................................................... 2-392
Position Adjustment with Edge ................... 2-396
Position Adjustment with Line Position and
Angle...................................................... 2-401
Position Adjustment at Center of Circle ...... 2-404
Position Adjustment with Gravity Center of
Cluster.................................................... 2-407
Position Adjustment with Dark or Bright
Cluster.................................................... 2-412
CV-X UM_E
31
Contents
Chapter 3 Capture/operation/output
Camera settings ................................................. 3-2
Overview of camera settings .......................... 3-3
Setting camera model and capture conditions
(Camera).................................................... 3-4
Specifying trigger used for capture
(Trigger) ................................................... 3-12
Changing lighting configuration for each camera
(Lighting).................................................. 3-14
Specifying advanced capture conditions
(Set Advanced)........................................ 3-17
Mathematical Operations ................................ 3-21
Overview of mathematical operations .......... 3-21
Operation Notations...................................... 3-22
Operation Function List................................. 3-28
Operation symbol/output item comparison table
(Measured Value/Judgment Value) ......... 3-61
Execute ............................................................. 3-95
Overview of execute conditions.................... 3-95
Setting execute conditions
(Execute Condition Settings) ................... 3-96
Output setting................................................... 3-98
Overview of output setting ............................ 3-99
Setting [CAM Judgment] and [Partial Judgment]
(Judgment Settings) .............................. 3-100
Setting output method when the total status value
is output from the OR terminal
(OR Terminal)......................................... 3-101
Setting the output items for I/O output
(OUT Terminal) ...................................... 3-102
Setting result output items for RS-232C
non-procedural communication
(RS-232C (Non-Procedural)) ................. 3-103
Setting result output items for Ethernet interface in
non-procedural communication
(Ethernet (Non-Procedural)) .................. 3-105
Setting result output items for the SD card
(SD Card 2)............................................ 3-107
Setting result output items for the USB HDD
(USB HDD)............................................. 3-109
Setting result output items from Ethernet interface
to PC application (PC Program) ............ 3-111
Setting result output for PLC-Link (RS-232C) or
PLC-Link (Ethernet) (PLC-Link).............. 3-112
Setting the items for output of results with
EtherNet/IPTM
(EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP Module) ......... 3-113
Setting the items for results output with PROFINET
(PROFINET, PROFINET Module) ........... 3-115
Setting the items for output of results with
EtherCAT (EtherCAT)............................. 3-117
32 CV-X UM_E
Setting the items for output of results to the FTP
server (FTP)............................................ 3-119
Setting the items for output of results to
the VisionDataStorage
(VisionDataStorage (USB))
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only) .................. 3-121
Changing settings for output/saving of images
used for measurement
(Image Output)....................................... 3-123
Custom menu ................................................. 3-130
Overview of custom menu .......................... 3-130
Creating a menu that collected only necessary
items (Custom Menu)............................. 3-131
Contents
Chapter 4 Utility
Overview of utility............................................ 4-2
Adjusting setting values for tools giving wrong
judgments (Tool Adjustment Navigation) .. 4-4
Adjusting learning data based on the NG-judged
image (Auto-Teach Inspection Adjustment
Navigation)................................................. 4-6
Reproducing capture conditions used for
capturing the reference image
(Camera Installation Replication)............... 4-7
Optimizing the Image Capture Environment
(Camera Installation Optimization) .......... 4-10
Using shared judgment conditions for multiple
tools (Share Judgment Condition) ........... 4-12
Checking terminal change of state and
tool execution state (Trace Log)
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only).................... 4-13
Verifying the connection status of input and
output terminals (I/O Monitor) .................. 4-20
Verifying the status of RS-232C (non-procedural
communication) communication
(RS-232C Monitor) ................................... 4-21
Verifying the status of Ethernet (non-procedural
communication) communication
(Ethernet Monitor) .................................... 4-22
Verifying the status of PLC-link communication
(PLC-Link Memory Monitor) ..................... 4-23
Checking the EtherNet/IP communications status
(EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor) ................. 4-24
Checking the PROFINET communications status
(PROFINET Memory Monitor) .................. 4-25
Checking the EtherCAT communications status
(EtherCAT Memory Monitor) .................... 4-26
Displaying the measured value in actual size
(Scaling)................................................... 4-27
Customizing screen display in run mode
according to environments
(Operation Screens) ................................ 4-29
Analyzing operation results (Statistics)......... 4-36
Adjusting the tool setting values based on the past
archived image (images on image strip) and
retesting them in batch (Batch Test) ....... 4-41
Changing settings of archived images
(Archived Image Settings) ...................... 4-42
Changing image strip settings
(Image Strip Settings) .............................. 4-43
Protecting settings from a third party
(Security Settings).................................... 4-44
Changing the user account
(Change Account) ................................... 4-45
Managing files in the SD card and USB HDD
(Manage Files) ......................................... 4-46
Removing SD card 2 and the USB HDD
(Remove External Media) ........................ 4-51
Chapter 5 Global settings
Communications & I/O....................................... 5-2
Overview of Communications & I/O ................ 5-2
Changing Network settings (Network) ............ 5-3
Changing Terminal settings
(External Terminal) ..................................... 5-4
Changing PLC communication settings
(PLC-Link) .................................................. 5-5
Changing RS-232C Communication settings
(RS-232C) .................................................. 5-9
Changing the settings when using the touch panel
(CA Series Touch Panel).......................... 5-10
Changing FTP settings (FTP) ........................ 5-11
Changing VNC server function settings
(VNC) ....................................................... 5-13
Changing EtherNet/IP communication settings
(EtherNet/IP)............................................. 5-14
Changing the PROFINET communication settings
(PROFINET).............................................. 5-16
Changing EtherCAT communication settings
(EtherCAT) ............................................... 5-18
Changing SNTP Server Connection Settings
(SNTP) (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)........ 5-20
Changing the VisionDataStorage Settings
(VisionDataStorage (USB))
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only) .................... 5-21
Camera common .............................................. 5-22
Overview of camera common ....................... 5-22
Live captured image in run mode
(Run Screen Update Mode)..................... 5-23
Illumination expansion unit settings
(Lighting Configuration) ........................... 5-24
Adjusting the white balance
(White Balance Settings).......................... 5-25
Changing the camera transfer speed
(Transfer Setting)
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only) .................... 5-26
CV-X UM_E
33
Contents
System .............................................................. 5-27
Overview of system....................................... 5-27
Setting a controller name
(Controller Name) .................................... 5-28
Specifying the reference image file type
(Reference Image File Type) ................... 5-29
Changing the image capture settings
(Image Capture Settings) ........................ 5-30
Changing mouse settings
(Mouse Settings)...................................... 5-31
Changing error output settings
(ERROR Output Settings) ........................ 5-32
Changing the decimal point notation
(Decimal Point Notation) .......................... 5-33
Changing the common tool display settings
(Tool Common Display Settings) ............. 5-34
Enabling VisionDataStorage
(VisionDataStorage)
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only).................... 5-35
Other global settings ....................................... 5-36
Overview of other global settings ................. 5-36
Setting startup mode
(Startup Mode Setting)............................. 5-37
Defining user's permission (Set Account) .... 5-38
Setting the clock (Date & Time) .................... 5-40
Switching the display language
(Language) .............................................. 5-41
Restarting the controller (Reboot)................. 5-42
Checking the system information
(System Information)................................ 5-43
34 CV-X UM_E
Chapter 6 Communication control
Control/data output via commands .................. 6-2
Overview of communication control
commands ................................................. 6-2
List of communication control commands ...... 6-3
Details of communication control commands .. 6-5
Control/data output via the PLC-Link............. 6-41
Overview of the PLC-Link function................ 6-42
Types of compatible PLC-Link connections .. 6-43
Connecting to the PLC-Link/setting the link
unit ........................................................... 6-46
Outputting measurement data via PLC-Link.. 6-51
Controlling the system via PLC-Link
(PLC terminal) .......................................... 6-54
Controlling the system via PLC-Link
(Polling) .................................................... 6-57
Troubleshooting ............................................ 6-60
Control/data output via I/O terminals ............. 6-62
Functions available with I/O terminals of
the controller ............................................ 6-62
I/O Terminals of the CV-X100/X200 Series ... 6-63
I/O Terminals of the CV-X400/X300 Series ... 6-79
Using command inputs via I/O terminals...... 6-96
Outputting data via I/O terminals ................ 6-102
Timing chart ................................................ 6-104
Control and data output by EtherNet/IP ....... 6-134
Overview of control and data output by
EtherNet/IP ............................................. 6-134
Preparing the EtherNet/IP connection ........ 6-136
Preparing the EtherNet/IP Connection
(When Using the CA-NEP20E)............... 6-137
Controller EtherNet/IP communication
specifications ......................................... 6-139
Changing the EtherNet/IP settings.............. 6-144
Output of measurement data by EtherNet/IP cyclic
communications (Data Output).............. 6-147
Controlling the controller with EtherNet/IP cyclic
communication (Command Control)...... 6-149
Changing the execute condition No. using
EtherNet/IP cyclic communication
(Execute Condition No. Change) ........... 6-151
Typical setup procedure for EtherNet/IP .... 6-152
Troubleshooting .......................................... 6-159
Communicating with the controller using
EtherNet/IP message communication.... 6-161
Contents
Control and data output by PROFINET ........ 6-176
Overview of control and data output by
PROFINET.............................................. 6-176
Preparing for PROFINET connection .......... 6-178
Preparing the PROFINET Connection
(When Using the CA-NPN20E) .............. 6-179
Controller PROFINET communication
specifications......................................... 6-181
Changing the PROFINET settings .............. 6-186
Output of measurement data using PROFINET
cyclic communications (Data Output) ... 6-189
Controlling the controller with PROFINET cyclic
communication (Command Control)...... 6-191
Changing the execute condition No. using
PROFINET cyclic communication
(Execute Condition No. Change)........... 6-193
Typical setting procedure for PROFINET ... 6-194
Troubleshooting .......................................... 6-206
Control and data output by EtherCAT.......... 6-208
Overview of control and data output by
EtherCAT................................................ 6-208
Preparing the EtherCAT Connection .......... 6-210
Controller EtherCAT communication
specifications......................................... 6-212
Changing the EtherCAT settings ................ 6-218
Output of measurement data using EtherCAT
cyclic communications (Data Output) ... 6-220
Controlling the controller with EtherCAT cyclic
communication (Command Control)...... 6-222
Changing the execute condition No. using
EtherCAT cyclic communication
(Execute Condition No. Change)........... 6-224
Typical setting procedure for EtherCAT ..... 6-225
Troubleshooting .......................................... 6-233
Chapter 7 Capture Using High-functioning
Cameras or LJ-V Series Heads
Overview of Capture Using High-functioning
Cameras or LJ-V Series Heads .................... 7-2
Capture Using High-functioning Cameras or
LJ-V Series Heads that Can be Used with
This Unit ..................................................... 7-3
LumiTrax Mode................................................... 7-4
MultiSpectrum Mode .......................................... 7-6
Standard Lighting Mode
(When using MultiSpectrum Light) ...............7-8
3D Capture Mode............................................... 7-9
Outline Capture Mode ......................................7-10
Capture Using the LJ-V Series Head ............... 7-12
LumiTrax Mode (CV-X400/X200 Series Only) .. 7-15
Example LumiTrax system configuration ...... 7-16
Changing Settings Such that the Workpiece Can
be Captured in LumiTrax Mode ............... 7-23
Setting the Optimum Parameters for LumiTrax
Shape/Topography Images
(LumiTrax Tuning) .................................... 7-28
Capturing a moving object
(Track Moving Object) ............................. 7-29
Executing an inspection on images generated
in LumiTrax Mode .................................... 7-31
Other Changes When LumiTrax Mode is
Used......................................................... 7-32
MultiSpectrum Mode (CV-X400 Series Only) .. 7-35
Example MultiSpectrum system
configuration ............................................ 7-36
Changing Settings Such that the Workpiece Can
be Captured in MultiSpectrum Mode....... 7-37
Capturing a moving object
(Track Moving Object) ............................. 7-40
Other Changes When MultiSpectrum Mode is
Used......................................................... 7-42
CV-X UM_E
35
Contents
Standard Lighting Mode
(When using MultiSpectrum Light)
(CV-X400 Series Only) ................................ 7-43
Example system configuration using
MultiSpectrum light in Standard Lighting
Mode........................................................ 7-44
Changing Settings Such that the Workpiece Can
be Captured in Standard Lighting Mode Using
MultiSpectrum Light................................. 7-45
3D Capture Mode (CV-X400 Series Only)....... 7-47
Example 3D Capture system configuration .. 7-48
Changing the Settings for Capturing in 3D
Capture Mode (Easy Setup Menu) .......... 7-50
Adjusting the Capture Settings for 2D Images
(2D Capture Settings) .............................. 7-60
Adjusting the Capture Settings for 3D Images
(3D Capture Settings) .............................. 7-61
Displaying the Installation Diagram Based on
Calibration Data (3D Installation View) .... 7-65
Executing an inspection on images generated in
3D Capture Mode .................................... 7-66
Other Changes When 3D Capture Mode is
Used ........................................................ 7-67
Outline Capture Mode (CV-X400 Series Only) .. 7-68
Example Outline Capture system
configuration ............................................ 7-69
Changing the Settings for Capturing in
Outline Capture Mode
(Outline Capture Settings) ....................... 7-71
Setting the Optimum Parameters for Outline
Images (Outline Capture Tuning) ............ 7-75
Capturing a moving object
(Track Moving Object) ............................. 7-77
Executing an inspection on images generated
in Outline Capture Mode.......................... 7-79
Other Changes When Outline Capture Mode is
Used ........................................................ 7-80
36 CV-X UM_E
Capture Using the LJ-V Series Head
(CV-X400 Series Only) ................................ 7-82
Selecting the Type and Configuration of the LJ-V
Series Head (Camera Settings)
(CV-X480/X480LJ).................................... 7-83
Changing the Capture Settings in the LJ-V
Settings According to the Operation Guide
(Initial Setting Navigation)
(CV-X480/X480LJ).................................... 7-84
Changing the Interval for Obtaining the Profiles
with the LJ-V Series Head (Line Scan Settings)
(CV-X480/X480LJ).................................... 7-88
Setting the Range of the Height Images to Be
Obtained with the LJ-V Series Head
(Capture Settings) (CV-X480/X480LJ) ..... 7-93
Changing the Imaging Parameters of the LJ-V
Series Head (Imaging Settings)
(CV-X480/X480LJ).................................... 7-97
Correcting the Height Data Obtained with
the LJ-V Series Head (Correction Settings)
(CV-X480/X480LJ).................................. 7-101
Executing an inspection on images captured
with luminance output type head........... 7-105
Displaying the Measured Value in Full Scale
(Scaling)................................................. 7-106
Checking the Profile of Objects .................. 7-109
Checking the Communication State of the
Encoder Input (Encoder Monitor)
(CV-X480/X480LJ only) .......................... 7-111
Contents
Chapter 8 Measurement Using Height
Image
Overview of Measurement Using Height Image .. 8-2
Overview of 3D Inspection with This Controller.. 8-3
Height Extraction/Height Binarization ........... 8-10
Layout of the 3D Screen ............................... 8-12
Setting the Tools That Use Height Images .... 8-15
3D Comparison............................................. 8-16
Section Area Comparison............................. 8-22
Outline Comparison (3D Capture Mode) ...... 8-27
Height Comparison....................................... 8-33
Profile Comparison ....................................... 8-37
Section Count ............................................... 8-41
Height Measurement .................................... 8-47
Trend Height Measurement .......................... 8-51
Profile Measurement ..................................... 8-55
Continuous Profile Measurement .................. 8-78
Height Image Settings (Common) .................. 8-82
Generating Grayscale/Binary Images
from Height Images
(Height Extraction/Height Binarization).... 8-83
Specifying the Plane to be a Reference
for the 3D Measurement
(Zero Plane Specification) ....................... 8-90
Filters Dedicated to Height Measurement .... 8-92
Chapter 9 Appendix
Shared operations.............................................. 9-2
Correcting individual measurement results
(Measured Value Correction)..................... 9-3
Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions
(Multi-Region Mode) .................................. 9-5
Creating a Shape Region.............................. 9-13
Extract Colors
(When using a Color Camera) ................. 9-19
Extract Colors
(When in MultiSpectrum Mode) ............... 9-26
Filter details................................................... 9-34
Extracting defects and stains ...........................9-34
Reducing the impact of changes in intensity ... 9-35
Removing background information .................. 9-36
Eliminating Shading and Gradation ................. 9-37
Highlighting only scratch defects using
the scratch defect extraction filter .............. 9-39
Removing/extracting clusters of bright/dark pixels
using the noise isolation filter......................9-40
Technical description.................................... 9-41
What is an edge?.............................................. 9-41
What are the profile position/profile width/profile
defect tools? ...............................................9-42
What is the defect tool? ....................................9-44
Supplementary explanation of "ID & OCR/OCV"
category tools .......................................... 9-47
Types of files saved on the SD card ............. 9-53
Main Specifications.......................................... 9-55
Controller Unit (CV-X170/X150/X100) ........... 9-56
Controller Unit (CV-X290/X270/X250/X200) .. 9-62
Controller Unit (CV-X350/X320/X300) ........... 9-70
Controller Unit (CV-X470/X450/X420/X400) .. 9-77
Controller Unit (CV-X490/X480/X480LJ) ....... 9-85
Troubleshooting ............................................... 9-94
Troubleshooting ............................................ 9-95
Error messages............................................. 9-96
INDEX............................................................... I-1
CV-X UM_E
37
Contents
38 CV-X UM_E
Chapter
Basic operation
1
Basic operation
Documentation for the installation and configuration methods
of the controller, software, and CAD data can be downloaded
from the following URL.
www.keyence.com/cvx_support
CV-X UM_E
1-1
Introduction
Introduction
q Introduction
Basic operation
Inspection/measurement
condition settings
1-2 CV-X UM_E
Overview of controller
This section describes the information to understand the
system configuration using the controller.
• Overview of CV-X series image processing sensor (Page
1-3)
• Controller operation flow (Page 1-4)
• Interface (Page 1-5)
Overview of CV-X series image processing sensor
Overview of CV-X series image processing sensor
Control I/O Data Output
CV-X Series Image Processing System
CV-X Series
Controller
Data
Output
Ethernet
USB*
Program
Settings
Controller-based
execution for on-site
adjustment or addition
of functionality
SD Card
Remote desktop
Ethernet
USB*
Application Software CV-H1X
CV-X Series
Simulation-Software
CV-X Series
Terminal-Software
• Simulation on PC using images captured
on site
• Editing of program settings
• Confirmation of output data
(Simple receipt of result data)
* Except for the CV-X100 Series
CV-X Series Controller (this product)
CV-X Series Terminal-Software
The platform features processing according to the settings
for image input of the camera.
Since settings creation and measurement execution using
a touch panel (CV-X400/X300/X200 Series only) or a
mouse can be performed and re-setting based on the
statistical results can be completed with the unit alone,
necessary on-site adjustments and setting changes can
be dealt with on the spot.
It is the communication software dedicated to the CV-X series.
The measurement result from the controller is received and
it can be saved in txt format or image output can be
received. In addition, the remote monitoring and remote
control of the controller through the remote desktop
function can be performed.
CV-X Series Simulation-Software
It is the simulation software dedicated to the CV-X series.
Program settings prepared in this unit or archived images
can be read for inspection simulation to adjust settings.
The function to automatically generate the user manual for
operators according to the program settings is also
available. It is also possible to download/upload program
settings via communication.
CV-X UM_E
1-3
Introduction
The CV-X series has the controller that performs the process according to the settings, and the software (CV-H1X) for a PC
to perform the simulation and receive the output data.
Controller operation flow
Controller operation flow
Introduction
Inspection/measurement flow using this controller is as shown in the figure below.
Preparing measurement (setup manual)
• Connect a camera and monitor etc. to the controller.
• Prepare a lens and light suitable for the target.
▼
Setting image capture for measurement conditions
(Chapter 3)
Register the image capture conditions such as shutter
speed and the reference image for setting according to
the target (Page 3-3).
▼
Trial run (Chapter 4)
• Check if the intended evaluation can be correctly
performed under the set measurement conditions.
• Adjust the settings using utilities such as "Tool
Adjustment Navigation", (Page 4-4), "Statistics" (Page
4-36), "Batch Test" (Page 4-41), etc. to optimize the
setting parameters.
1-4 CV-X UM_E
▼
▼
▲
Setting tools (Chapter 2 and Chapter 3)
• Set measurement method on the tool according to the
inspection purpose (Page 2-1).
• Position Adjustment of tool (Page 2-387),
mathematical Operations of measurement results
(Page 2-259), output settings (Page 3-98) and
execute condition (Page 3-95) can also be specified.
• If necessary, the setting values which are adjusted
later can be put in the custom menu (Page 3-130).
Registering display settings (Chapter 4)
Screen display in run mode can be changed as
necessary (Page 4-29).
Setting operating environment of the entire controller
(Chapter 5)
Perform settings related to general operation of the
controller which is common to all program settings such
as communication setting (Page 5-2) or account setting
(Page 5-38).
Interface
Interface
Introduction
The screens of the controller in setup mode and run mode are as shown in the figures that follow.
Screen in setup mode
(1) Global setting menu
Opens the global setting menu (Page 5-1).
(2) Tool edit menu
Displays the menu to edit the tool selected or to add/delete
a camera in use.
(3) Save button
Saves the program setting currently being edited.
(6) Set camera button
Opens the camera setting (Page 3-2) of the camera
selected by [Display camera switching] tab.
(7) Add tools button
Adds a tool to the camera selected by [Display camera
switching] tab (Page 1-28). Left-click [Position Adj.] to
change the settings of position adjustment (Page 1-53).
Reference
(4) Program menu
Opens the menu related to program settings such as
change, add new, copy or delete of program settings
(Page 1-23).
Reference
If an older-version program setting was loaded, the
program setting version is displayed before the
program setting name.
When [ALL] is selected with the Display camera
switching tab, added tools are related to the
selected camera (yellow-bordered image display)
in (10) Image display.
(8) Capture No.
This item is displayed only when multiple image capture is
used, and is used to select the capture number to display in
the Image Display. When [Multiple Displays] is selected,
images from up to 4 captures can be displayed at one time.
Example of when the program setting version is 1.0
(5) Display camera switching tab
Selects the camera to display on the image display.
(9) View bar
Changes the display method of the image display (Page 113).
CV-X UM_E
1-5
Interface
Introduction
(10) Image display
Displays the camera image.
Using the buttons displayed on the camera image, you
can switch the display type (Page 1-13) or display the
camera image in full screen (Page 1-14).
Furthermore, selecting
displays the settings that can
be used for the currently displayed image.
(13) Run mode switching button
Changes to run mode.
(14) Total status display
Displays the total status.
(15) Custom menu button
Displayed only when [Custom Menu] is set (Page 3-130).
(16) Toolbar
Displays tools related to the camera selected by [Display
camera switching] tab. When [ALL] is selected by the
display camera switching tab, the tools for all cameras are
displayed.
(17) Result data display
Displays the result of the tool currently selected.
(18) Image strip button
Opens the image strip (Page 1-19).
• Profile Settings (Page 1-15)
• Tool Common Display Settings (Page 5-34)
(11) Error list button
This is displayed only if a setting error occurs. Condition of
the error can be checked.
(12) Menu buttons
Opens "Execute Condition Settings"(Page 3-95), "Output
Settings" (Page 3-98) or "Utility" (Page 4-1).
1-6 CV-X UM_E
(19) Register image button
Opens the Reference Image Registration dialog (Page 126).
(20) Run button
Captures an image and executes inspection. By pressing
, images can be captured continuously.
Interface
Screen in run mode
Introduction
(1) Date and time display
Displays the date and time of the last measurement.
(2) Operation screen switching tab
Selects the operation screen to display.
When operation screens are added with "Operation Screen
Setting" (Page 4-29), the display can be switched by
selecting S00 to S09.
(3) Display of total count/NG count
Displays the cumulative measurement count and
cumulative NG count.
(4) Display of program time/trigger interval
• Program time: Displays the processing time (time from
trigger input until image processing is completed) of the
measurement that was most recently executed.
• Trigger interval: Displays the estimated value of trigger
input interval that can be input at the shortest time.
When [Live Image] is used, delay or fluctuation of image
capture timing occurs. It is necessary to allow for the
maximum one image capture time and transfer time in
addition to the value displayed.
(5) Setup mode switching button
Changes to setup mode.
(6) Statistics button
Displays the [Statistics] result screen (Page 4-36).
CV-X UM_E
1-7
Interface
Screen in run mode (display of S00 to S09)
Introduction
(1) Operation screen name display
Displays the current operation screen (S00 to S09) name.
(2) View bar
Changes the display method of the image display (Page 113).
The tool displayed on the image display can also be
changed by left-clicking on the desired image display first
and then selecting the tool from the drop-down menu.
(3) Custom menu button
Displayed only when [Custom Menu] is set (Page 3-130).
1-8 CV-X UM_E
Basic operation
Overview of basic
operation
q Basic operation
Inspection/measurement
condition settings
It is possible to select the displayed items and enter the
necessary setting values with a mouse for the primary
controller operations.
This section describes operations common to overall
functions of the controller.
• Using mouse (Page 1-10)
• Operating the unit with a touch panel (Page 1-11)
• Entering values or characters (Page 1-12)
• Changing the image type and magnification (Page 1-13)
• Checking the shading profile wave (Page 1-15)
• Using the context-dependent menu (Context Menu)
(Page 1-16)
• Starting/ending operation (Page 1-18)
• Checking past images with the image strip (Page 1-19)
• Using a USB HDD (CV-X400/X300 Series Only) (Page 1-21)
CV-X UM_E
1-9
Basic operation
Introduction
Using mouse
Using mouse
Basic operation
To operate the CV-X series, use the dedicated USB mouse (OP-87506). To operate the CV-X400/X300/X200 Series using a
touch panel, refer to “Operating the unit with a touch panel” (Page 1-11).
Reference
The speed of the mouse pointer can be changed
in the global settings (Page 5-31).
햲
햳
(1) Left button
Press this to select the item.
햴
(2) Right button
Press this to display the context menu (Page 1-16).
(3) Wheel
Turn the wheel to display the lower part of a list or to
change the zoom ratio of the image display.
Selecting items
The following section describes how to select or enter the
setting values.
1 Move the mouse to set the screen pointer to the
desired item.
1 Move the pointer to the item you want to select.
2 Left-click.
2 Left-click.
This selects the item moused over in Step 1.
Reference
Functions of the left button and the right button can
be replaced (Page 5-31). In this manual,
description is provided based on the initial
settings. If functions of the buttons are replaced,
read this manual by replacing the "left button" with
"right button" and "left-click" with "right-click" which
appear in the manual.
Drag
Drag means sliding the mouse with the left button pressed.
It is used, for example to change the region size.
1-10 CV-X UM_E
Slide the mouse with
the left button pressed.
Operating the unit with a touch panel
Operating the unit with a touch panel
Basic touch panel operations
Enlarging/reducing/scrolling an image
using the touch panel
Selecting an item (Left click/Double click)
Directly tap the item you wish to select on the screen.
To perform a mouse double click, quickly tap twice on the
applicable part of the screen.
Scrolling the image
Tap the camera screen with your finger and slide it.
Enlarging the image display size (Pinch-out)
Displaying the context menu (Right click/Long
mouse press)
Place two fingers close together on the image, and then
spread the fingers to enlarge the image display.
Press and hold one finger on the screen.
However, if there is a button in the pressed position, the
action will be equivalent to a left mouse click instead.
Reducing the image display size (Pinch-in)
Place two fingers slightly apart on the image, and then
pinch the fingers together to reduce the image display
size.
CV-X UM_E
1-11
Basic operation
By connecting a Keyence touch panel CA-MP120T, you can operate this unit using screen taps instead of a mouse (CVX400/X300/X200 Series only).
For details on how to connect a touch panel, refer to the CV-X Series Setup Manual.
Entering values or characters
Entering values or characters
Basic operation
Entering values
Entering characters
To enter values for setting values etc., use the procedure
described below.
To enter characters for setting name etc., use the
procedure described below.
1 Select the item.
1 Select the item for input of characters.
The value input screen appears.
2 Left-click the digit to change with the mouse and
left-click the up/down button displayed on the
screen. Or turn the wheel of the mouse to specify
the desired value.
Reference
is alternatively used for the numeric keypad
input.
3 When the value is changed, click [OK].
This confirms and enters the specified value.
To cancel the change
In Step 3 above, select [Cancel] instead of [OK].
On the [Judgment Conditions] screen, to return the
value to unset condition ([------]),
select the value and then select [Clear].
1-12 CV-X UM_E
The character input screen appears.
2 Specify the desired characters.
3 Select other language.
To input the character string that automatically
changes according to the display language, put a
check mark on [Edit All Languages].
• The input option for other languages appears.
Select the desired language field and enter the
characters.
• When the language is selected, the input method for
the language is automatically set.
4 To complete the input, click [OK].
Changing the image type and magnification
Changing the image type and magnification
Zooming IN/OUT of the displayed image
This function can be used to change the type of image
displayed on the screen.
It is useful for displaying in accordance with the usage
purpose such as displaying the image to be processed as
is or changing to the post-processing image to check the
processed state. You can also display or hide the
inspection region and display the inspection region of
other tools at the same time.
The image displayed can be enlarged or shrunk as desired.
The zoom ratio can be set from x1/100 (1%) to x25 (2500%).
If using multiple image displays, each display has its own
zoom settings.
Zooming can be especially useful when drawing regions
around small targets or locating defects for parameter
setting.
1 Select on the screen the image whose display type
is to be changed.
2 Switch the display type using the VIEW bar or the
1 Move the mouse pointer to the point of zoom-in/out.
2 Turn the wheel to display the zoom-in/out image.
Zoom in
buttons on the image display.
Zoom out
The screen display changes to the selected image type.
The image types that you can select are as follows.
Reference
The image types that you can select change
depending on the operation status.
• Raw 1/Raw 2 (
): Displays the raw image as it is
(Raw 1). Selecting ON in
displays the
graphics of the inspection region frame and
measurement result on the image (Raw 2).
• Extract Image: Displays the image showing the
effects of color extraction in the inspection region for
the selected tool.
• Filtered (
): Displays the image showing the
effects of filter processing in the inspection region
for the selected tool.
• Filtered 2: Displays the image showing the effects of
filter processing in the inspection region for the
selected tool (also displays regions and results from
other tools that are using the same image).
• Contrast (
): Displays the defect level distribution
for Defect and Grayscale Blob. If the currently
selected measurement tool is not Defect or
Grayscale Blob, the type displayed is [Filtered
Image] (for tools other than ShapeTrax2 and
ShapeTrax3), and [Current Feature] (when the
displayed image is the current image) or
[Registered Feature] (when the displayed image is a
reference image) (for ShapeTrax2 and ShapeTrax3).
Reference
Zoom-in/out can be performed relative to the
center of the image display with the
zoom-in
button and
zoom-out button as well.
To return the magnification to the original size,
Left-click
or hold the wheel.
CV-X UM_E
1-13
Basic operation
Changing the displayed image type
Changing the image type and magnification
Basic operation
Scrolling the image
Displaying the image display in full screen
When using a high resolution camera or displaying a
magnified image, the entire image cannot be displayed on
the screen. To see areas of the image currently not
displayed, scroll the image using the procedure below.
The image displayed on the image display can be viewed
in a way where the whole image is enlarged on the entirety
of the monitor screen, instead of enlarging a part of the
image within the image display region.
1 Press the mouse wheel on the image display.
2 While holding the wheel, move the mouse in the
1 Left-click
at the top right of the image display.
The camera image will be displayed in full screen.
desired direction for the image.
Reference
The image can also be scrolled with the scroll bar
at the right and under the image display.
To Exit the Full Screen Display
Left-click
To return the display position to the original,
Left-click
or hold the wheel.
1-14 CV-X UM_E
.
Checking the shading profile wave (Display Profile)
Checking the shading profile wave (Display Profile)
1 Left-click
at the bottom left of the image display.
The Options menu will appear.
Display
Sets the display or non-display, thickness, and color of
the profile waveforms, frames, and measurement
positions.
• Show Waveform: When this is enabled, the profile
wave will be displayed (Default: Enabled, Line
thickness: 1pt, Color: Red).
• Show Frame: When this is enabled, the profile
frame will be displayed (Default: Enabled, Line
thickness: 1pt, Color: White).
• Show Measurement Position: When this is
enabled, the profile measurement position will be
displayed (Default: Enabled, Line thickness: 1pt,
Color: Orange).
Reset Display Setting
Resets the display settings to the default values.
Reference
2 Left-click
.
• You cannot display horizontal and vertical
profiles simultaneously.
• In the case of color images, the shading profile
wave is displayed after the images have been
converted into monochrome images using the
[Gray] color extraction process.
[Profile Settings] will appear.
3 Change the profile display settings as needed.
Display Profile
Specifies the direction of the profile to display.
• OFF: Not display the profile.
• Horizontal: Displays horizontal-direction profiles.
• Vertical: Displays vertical-direction profiles.
Meas. Position
Specifies the measurement position of the horizontal or
vertical profiles.
Left-click [Show at Center of Screen] to move the
profile measurement position to the center of the
screen.
CV-X UM_E
1-15
Basic operation
The intensity distribution of any desired position of the
currently displayed image can be checked using
horizontal/vertical profile waves.
The maximum and minimum intensity values will also be
displayed.
Using the context-dependent menu (Context Menu)
Using the context-dependent menu (Context Menu)
Basic operation
In the Setup Mode, press the right button of the mouse
(right-click) to use the context menu.
Context menu displayed by right-click
The context menu content displayed varies depending on
the pointer location during right-click.
(3) Context menu displayed at the image display
In addition to the items displayed by right-clicking the
toolbar, the following items are displayed.
• Undo editing of the region: Returns the region size
changed on the [image display] to the original.
• Image Registration: Opens the [Reference Image
Registration] screen (Page 1-26).
(4) Context menu displayed at the text edit region
• Undo: Cancels the previous text edit operation.
• Copy: Copies the selected text.
• Cut: Cuts the selected text.
• Paste: Pastes the copied or cut text.
Reference
(1) Context menu displayed at the display camera
switching tab
• Delete CAM *: Deletes the camera of the camera
number right-clicked.
• Add CAM: Adds the camera to be used. The number of
cameras that can be connected varies depending on
the controller model (Page 6).
(2) Context menu displayed at the toolbar
• Edit: Opens the edit screen of the tool right-clicked.
• Delete: Deletes the tool right-clicked.
• Copy: Copies the tool right-clicked.
• Paste: Pastes the copied tool.
• Paste with Tool ID: Pastes the copied tool with the
option to specify the ID number. When "ALL" is selected
on the camera tab, the camera number and capture
number to paste to can also be selected.
• Renumber Tool ID: Renumbers the tool ID of the tool
that is selected.
• Group Settings: Groups/ungroups the selected tools.
You can also set the group judgment condition.
• Select Multiple: Selects multiple tools on the toolbar.
• Copy Across Programs: Copies the right-clicked tool
for pasting to other programs.
• Paste Across Programs: Pastes the copied tool to
other programs.
1-16 CV-X UM_E
Depending on the operation condition, these menu
items may not be displayed or may not be
available even if displayed.
Using the context-dependent menu (Context Menu)
Context menu (common context menu)
displayed by holding the right button
Basic operation
The common context menu is displayed by holding the
right button for around 1 second on the screen.
• Image Capture: Saves the screen displayed as an
image file on the SD card. To change the image save
format, refer to "Changing the image capture settings
(Image Capture Settings)" (Page 5-30).
• Change Account: Displays the [Change Account]
screen (Page 4-45) (Run Mode only).
• Reset: Performs reset (Page 6-7).
• Trigger Reset: Cancels the state in which a trigger is
input halfway into a measurement round when MultiCapture is enabled (Page 6-9). This function discards
the capture image and measurement result of the
currently running measurement round and restores the
state before the measurement execution.
• Remove SD Card 2: Makes SD card 2 ready to be
removed (Run Mode only).
• Remove USB HDD: Stops the USB HDD operation so
that it can be removed (Run Mode only).
Point
You do not need to perform the stop operation
when using VisionDataStorage (USB).
CV-X UM_E
1-17
Starting/ending operation
Starting/ending operation
Basic operation
Starting the operation
1 Turn on the controller.
After the opening screen appears on the monitor, the
Setup Mode screen should appear.
Ending the operation
To stop the operation, turn OFF the power supply to the
controller.
Point
Turning off the controller while it is accessing an
SD card may damage the card itself and/or
corrupt the data that is being saved on the SD
card.
To stop the result output only such as judgment
output
• Left-click the setup mode switching button to change
the controller to the Setup Mode.
• By shorting the TEST input terminal, Run Mode can be
run with only the result output being stopped.
2 Left-click the run mode switching button to change
the controller to the Run Mode.
3 Input the trigger. (For external trigger)
Start image capture and judgment process under the
inspection conditions set.
To start in Run Mode from the beginning when
the power is supplied
Select [Run Mode] in Startup Mode Setting (Page 5-37) to
start in the Run Mode when the power is supplied.
To change the opening screen displayed at the
start-up
• Save the image of 1024 x 768 pixels in 24-bit bitmap
format as "Logo.bmp" in "cv-x/setting" of SD card 1.The
saved image file is displayed as the opening screen at
the start-up of the controller.
• To not display the opening screen, prepare a black
image file with commercially available graphic software
and save it as "Logo.bmp" in "cv-x/setting" of SD card 1.
1-18 CV-X UM_E
To stop image capture and image processing
Turn ON the EXT input terminal to stop acceptance of the
trigger input.
Checking past images with the image strip
Checking past images with the image strip
See "Changing image strip settings (Image Strip
Settings)" (Page 4-43) for more details on the
image strip display settings.
Reference
Displaying image strip
Using the image strip in run mode
Archived images in the image buffer memory or external
image files can be displayed magnified on the image strip.
1 Select the target image on the image strip and leftclick
.
The Option toolbar appears.
2 Left-click [Zoom].
Left-click
.
The image strip appears.
Left-click
Reference
to hide the image strip.
The maximum number of images that can be
displayed in the image strip is 1024.
CV-X UM_E
1-19
Basic operation
Images of past inspection results (archived image) or
images saved on the SD card, USB HDD, FTP, or
VisionDataStorage (USB) can be checked with the image
strip.
Checking past images with the image strip
Using the image strip in setup mode
Basic operation
Re-measuring the archived image with the latest
parameters.
In setup mode, when the image is selected on the image
strip, the image is re-measured with the currently set
setting values. It is convenient as the measured results of
the adjusted setting values applied to the past archived
images can be verified.
3 Specify the save condition of the archived image.
Destination
Select the archived image output destination.
Destination
Specify the folder where the archived image is to be
saved.
Reference
The image file name is "Date (YYMMDD)
_Time (hhmmss)_Total count_Image
name_Camera judgment.bmp/jpg/png".
Example:
120601_092309_0000000001_CAM1
_OK.bmp (When multiple image capture is
enabled, the name is "Date (YYMMDD)_Time
(hhmmss)_Total count_Image name
_Capture number_ Camera judgment.Save
format" (Example:
120601_092309_0000000001
_CAM1_CAP1_OK.bmp).)
Save image
• All: All images are exported.
• Total Status NG Count: All camera images of
measurements showing NG in total status when
Left-click [Update Result] to re-measure all images.
Saving archived images
archived are exported.
• CAM Judgment NG: Only images showing camera
NG judgment during the time they were archived are
exported.
Save archived images on the SD card or USB HDD.
Point
Do not use third-party SD cards and/or USB HDD
that have not been formatted on the controller.
Doing so may result in data loss or setting data
damage.
1 Left-click
on the image strip.
A screen appears for selecting the image to save.
2 Check the boxes of the images to save, and then
left-click [Execute].
The [Save Archived Image] screen appears.
Target CAM
Check the target camera for export of the archived
image.
Destination
• Create Folder Per Judgment Value: Tick this box if
images should be output sorted to either the [OK] or
[NG] folder according to the CAM judgments.
File format
Select the export format for the archived images from
BMP (bitmap), JPEG or PNG.
4 Left-click [Execute].
Execute additional learning using the archived
images (when using the auto-teach inspection
tool).
During editing of the auto-teach inspection tool, additional
learning of archived images can be done from the image
strip.
1 Select the image for additional learning.
2 Left-click [Additional learning of selected image].
Performs additional learning.
Displaying magnified images
You can magnify an image displayed on the image strip by
left-clicking [Zoom] on the image strip.
1-20 CV-X UM_E
Using a USB HDD (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Using a USB HDD (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
USB HDD
To USB HDD
connector
Reference
To output to the VisionDataStorage via USB, see
the VisionDataStorage User's Manual.
USB HDD supported on the controller
Refer to the CV-X Series Setup Manual.
The USB HDD needs to be initialized (formatted) on the
controller before use (Page 4-39).
What You Can Do Using the USB HDD
The following functions become available when a USB
HDD is connected to the controller.
• Setting the Items for Result Output to the USB HDD
(Page 3-98)
• Enabling Image Output to the USB HDD (Page 3-109)
• Saving Archived Images to the USB HDD (Page 1-20)
• Exporting the Archived Image to the USB HDD Using
the HS Command (Save Archived Image) (Page 6-32)
• Checking Past Images on the Image Strip (Page 1-19)
Reference
It is not possible to store program files or write/read
program files to/from the USB HDD.
Connecting the USB HDD
Refer to the CV-X Series Setup Manual.
Removing the USB HDD
Refer to the CV-X Series Setup Manual.
Reference
The USB HDD can also be removed by selecting
[Remove USB HDD] from the context menu
(common context menu) that appears when the
right button is held down in Run mode.
CV-X UM_E
1-21
Basic operation
On the CV-X400/X300 Series, users can connect a USB
HDD to save the inspection results, captured images, etc.
Inspection/measurement
condition settings
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Overview of inspection/
measurement condition
settings
Introduction
Basic operation
q Inspection/measurement
condition settings
1-22 CV-X UM_E
This section describes basic operation flow necessary for
preparation of program settings in the controller.
• Selecting setting number (Program Settings) (Page 1-23)
• Adding camera (Page 1-25)
• Registering image for measurement (Register Image)
(Page 1-26)
• Setting measurement conditions (Tool) (Page 1-28)
• Editing an inspection region (Page 1-39)
• Converting color images (Extract Colors) (Page 1-46)
• Specifying filter processing on the image (Image Enhance)
(Page 1-47)
• Adjusting position (Position Adjustment) (Page 1-53)
• Managing program settings (Page 1-54)
Selecting setting number (Program Settings)
Selecting setting number (Program Settings)
The controller manages various settings for image
processing with the setting numbers. Various data files used
in program settings are managed and saved as follows.
Data specific to program settings
Setting data, reference image data, learning data, and
connector model data, etc. are saved comprehensively (in
group) in the folder for each program setting.
Adding new program settings
Add program settings necessary for image processing.
The setting name can be specified at the same time. It is
helpful to register an easy-to-understand setting name.
1 Left-click
and
select [Add New].
The [Add New] screen appears.
Data common to all program settings
Global settings data, library data, and connector shared data,
etc. are saved in the common folder for program settings.
SD Card 1
Program 000
Individual data
Library data
(Common for all programs)
Reference image data
Learning data
Global settings data
(Common for all programs)
Defective sample image
2 Left-click [Program Setting (Generic)].
SD Card 2
Program 000
Individual data
Reference image data
Learning data
Defective sample image
Reference
• Program settings 000 to 999 can be specified for
SD card 1 and SD card 2, but the actual number of
programs that can be registered varies depending
on the SD card capacity or settings.
• When SD card 1 is removed, reference to the global
settings data or library data is disabled. The
controller does not operate correctly.
• The memory used for the SD card (in which setting
values and other data are saved) is manufactured
using highly advanced semiconductor technology.
However, repeated data read/write or external noise
may cause failure or loss of data. It is strongly
recommended that data such as setting values is
backed up regularly to other storage media.
• Connector inspection using the connector model
data and the connector shared data can be used
only with the connector-dedicated program
settings. For details, refer to the CV-X Series User's
Manual (Connector Inspection Edition).
• Press [Program Setting (Connector)] to use the
connector inspection.
For more details, refer to the CV-X Series User's
Manual (Connector Inspection Edition).
• Press [Vision-Guided Robotics Setting] to use the
Vision-Guided Robotics.
For more details, refer to the CV-X Series User's
Manual (Robot Vision Edition).
3 Specify the SD card for storing settings and the
program setting No., name, and version then leftclick [Execute].
A setting is newly created.
Reference
The setting files that can be created using the CVX400/X300 Series are Ver.4.0 and higher only. Also, it
is not possible to create Ver.4.0 and higher setting
files using the CV-X200 Series.
CV-X UM_E
1-23
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Data storage on the controller
Selecting setting number (Program Settings)
The content displayed on the [Add New] screen is
different for the CV-X470/X480/X490/X290.
Inspection/measurement condition settings
If you are using the CV-X470/X480/X490/X290, the
following [Add New] screen will appear and you will need
to select the camera type together with the program
setting type.
Changing to existing program setting
1 Left-click
and
select [Change Programs].
The [Change Programs] window appears.
2 Select the program to change to and then left-click
When using a 21-megapixel or greater camera,
select [High Res. Cameras (21MP and up)].
When using an LJ-V Series head
(only for the CV-X480/X290),
select [LJ-V].
For more details, refer to "Capture Using the
LJ-V Series Head (CV-X400 Series Only)" (Page 7-82).
1-24 CV-X UM_E
[OK].
This changes the program setting.
Reference
Program settings can be copied for other use or
settings of other controller can also be used. Refer
to "Managing program settings" (Page 1-54) for
more details.
Adding camera
Adding camera
Select the camera for editing
Select the camera number with the display camera
switching tab.
Adding camera
Right-click the display camera switching tab and
select [Add CAM] - [camera number to add].
Camera setting for the selected camera number can
be changed or tool can be edited.
Reference
The camera is added. The additional camera tab is
displayed on the display camera switching tab.
For more details on how to setup an additional
camera, refer to "Camera settings" (Page 3-2).
Selecting
displays all cameras. When a
tool is added in this status, it is added to the image
display in focus.
CV-X UM_E
1-25
Inspection/measurement condition settings
The controller uses the system of adding/selecting the
camera used for each program setting and of adding/
editing a tool for each camera. Up to four cameras can be
connected by using the camera expansion unit.
Registering image for measurement (Register Image)
Registering image for measurement (Register Image)
Inspection/measurement condition settings
An image can be registered as a reference image to the
controller to be used as a template for measurements and
judgment conditions. Since it is the image referred to as
the standard during actual inspection, adjust the lighting
conditions correctly before registration.
1 Left-click the desired camera number for
Adjusting reference image position/Changing
save format of reference image
On the [Reference Image Registration] screen, the position of
the captured image can be adjusted/registered and the
save format can be selected.
registration of the reference image with the display
camera switching tab.
2 Left-click
.
The [Reference Image Registration] screen appears.
3 Capture the reference image.
4 Left-click
.
The image currently displayed is registered with the
specified registration number as a reference image.
• 900 reference images maximum can be registered
for each camera.
• Since the reference images are saved in the SD
card, the number of images that can be saved
varies depending on the SD card capacity.
• When the Capture Mode or LJ-V Series head is
used, the number of reference images that can be
registered and the range of the reference image
numbers varies. For more details, refer to
"Precautions When Using a Capture Mode or the LJV Series Head" (Page 1-27).
Reference
Using the image strip (Page 1-19), a desired
image from the archived images can also be
registered as reference image.
Deleting a registered reference image
On the [Reference Image Registration] screen, select the
registered image and left-click
, then left-click [OK] on
the confirmation message.
Or, right-click the registered image and select [Delete]
from the context menu for deletion.
1-26 CV-X UM_E
Adjust Position
• Custom:
- X Direction: Move the image in the X direction
(specified by the number of pixels).
- Y Direction: Move the image in the Y direction
(specified by the number of pixels).
- θ Direction: Rotate the image in the θ direction
(specified by the angle).
- Use Mouse: To adjust the position by dragging the
image, put a check.
- Clear: Returns the changed value to 0.
• Specify Reference: When the reference is specified, the
image can be automatically moved for position
adjustment.
Format
Select the file format for the reference images.
• BMP (default): Saves the images in bitmap format.
• JPG: Saves the images in JPEG format.
• PNG: Saves the images in PNG format.
Reference
• The measurement results for the images registered
as JPEG files may differ from those for images
registered as BMP files or PNG files due to
image deterioration caused by the compression.
• If the JPEG or PNG file format is selected, it will
take longer to save and load the images
compared to the BMP files as the compression
and expansion processing is required.
Capture Only for Selected Capture No. (only when
multiple image capture is used)
When this box is checked, only the capture number that
was selected with [Capture No.] at the top left of the
screen is captured.
Registering image for measurement (Register Image)
Precautions When Using a Capture Mode or the LJ-V
Series Head
Reference
Inspection/measurement condition settings
When Registering
• When registering a reference image in the case where a
capture mode or the LJ-V Series head is used, the
maximum number of registrable images will change
because generated images or height images will also
be registered with the captured image.
- LumiTrax Mode: 100 images
- MultiSpectrum Mode: 100 images
- 3D Capture Mode: 400 images
- Outline Capture Mode: 100 images
- When the LJ-V Series head is used: 400 images
• For details on the types of images generated
during capture by using the Capture Mode or
the LJ-V Series head, refer to "Capture Using
High-functioning Cameras or LJ-V Series Heads
that Can be Used with This Unit" (Page 7-3).
• When capturing images using the LJ-V Series
head, grayscale images will only be captured
when you use an LJ-V Series head with
luminance output support and enable
[Luminance Output Type] in [Camera Settings].
• The range of reference image numbers varies
depending on the images captured (generated). For
more details, refer to "Reference image numbers for
capture using high-functioning cameras or LJ-V series
heads" (Page 7-14).
• When only registering the height image using the LJ-V
Series head, the grayscale image will be deleted if a
grayscale image is already registered for the
corresponding reference image No.
• Do not specify a JPEG-compressed image for the height
image. Correct height data cannot be obtained due to
image degradation caused by the compression
process.
When Deleting
When you delete the reference image, all generated
images that are registered will also be deleted, in addition
to the captured image. It is not possible to specify the type
of image to delete.
CV-X UM_E
1-27
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Inspection/measurement condition settings
The controller performs measurement by units referred to as a "Tool".
This controller has all kinds of tools. They are classified into "Categories" such as "Presence/Absence", "Count", etc. based
on their use.
This section describes the method to add tools which are common for each tool, and the method to set the region and the
image enhancement filter to improve images.
Reference
The number of registered categories varies depending on the controller models. For more details, refer to "Differences
between the included tools" (Page 9).
Tool list
By selecting the inspection application and specific
measurement method, the optimum tool for inspection can
be used.
For detailed application or setting details of each tool, refer
to the description of each tool.
Reference
• The tools in the "Height” category are only
available when capturing using the 3D Capture
Mode (CV-X400/X420/X450/X470/X480/X490
only) or the LJ-V Series head (CV-X480 only). See
"Chapter 8 Measurement Using Height Image"
(Page 8-1) for more details.
• The tools in the "Connector" category can only be
used in connector-dedicated program settings. In
addition, the connector appearance inspection
tools are not available with CV-X1*0M. For details,
refer to the CV-X Series User's Manual (Connector
Inspection Edition).
• The tools in the “Vision-Guided Robotics” category
can only be used in Vision-Guided Roboticsdedicated program settings. For details, refer to the
CV-X Series User's Manual (Robot Vision Edition).
Presence/Absence (Page 2-2)
Page 2-3
Page 2-13
Page 2-16
Page 2-19
Page 2-23
Page 2-28
Page 2-31
Page 2-34
Page 2-61
Page 2-64
Page 2-68
Page 2-72
Page 2-77
Page 2-382
Flaw Detection (Page 2-40)
Page 2-41
1-28 CV-X UM_E
Page 2-51
Page 2-56
Page 2-37
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Alignment (Page 2-83)
Page 2-88
Page 2-92
Page 2-96
Page 2-99
Page 2-102
Page 2-133
Page 2-134
Page 2-135
Page 2-148
Page 2-152
Page 2-155
Page 2-106
Page 2-110
Page 2-159
Page 2-160
Page 2-114
Page 2-119
Measurements & Dimensions (Page 2-124)
Measure Distance (Page 2-130)
Page 2-130
Page 2-131
Page 2-132
Measure Width (Page 2-136)
Page 2-136
Page 2-140
Page 2-144
Line/Angle (Page 2-163)
Page 2-163
Page 2-166
Intersection/Center (Page 2-169)
Page 2-167
Page 2-168
Detect Circle (Page 2-173)
Page 2-173
Page 2-169
Page 2-170
Page 2-171
Page 2-172
Page 2-184
Page 2-188
Detect Point (Page 2-176)
Page 2-175
Page 2-176
Page 2-180
Page 2-192
Page 2-196
Count (Page 2-200)
Page 2-201
Page 2-206
Page 2-212
Page 2-216
Page 2-220
CV-X UM_E
1-29
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Page 2-84
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
ID & OCR/OCV (Page 2-225)
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Page 2-226
Page 2-234
for CV-X400/X300
Series
for CV-X200/X100
Series
Page 2-243
Mathematical Operations (Page 2-259)
Page 2-246
Page 2-260
Graphic Display (Page 2-249)
Page 2-250
Page 2-252
Page 2-255
Page 2-257
3D Presence/Comparison
Page 8-16
Page 8-22
Page 8-27
Page 8-33
Page 8-51
Page 8-55
Page 8-78
Height
Page 8-47
Connector
Vision-Guided Robotics
1-30 CV-X UM_E
Page 8-37
Page 8-41
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Function List (Page 2-262)
Page 2-267
Page 2-270
Page 2-274
Page 2-286
Page 2-289
Page 2-294
Page 2-297
Page 2-300
Page 2-303
Page 2-306
Page 2-310
Page 2-314
Page 2-319
Page 2-323
Page 2-328
Page 2-333
Page 2-335
Page 2-338
Page 2-341
Page 2-355
Page 2-359
Page 2-363
Page 2-367
Page 2-371
Page 2-375
Page 2-274
Page 2-281
Page 2-348
Page 2-379
Page 8-16
Page 8-22
Page 8-27
Page 2-382
Page 8-33
Page 8-37
Page 8-41
Page 8-47
Page 8-51
Page 8-55
In the case of
In the case of
3D Capture Mode Outline Capture Mode
Page 8-78
Position Adjustment (Page 2-387)
Page 2-388
Reference
Page 2-392
Page 2-396
Page 2-401
Page 2-404
Page 2-407
Page 2-412
The "Connector Position Adjustment" tool can only be used in connector-dedicated program settings. For details, refer to
the CV-X Series User's Manual (Connector Inspection Edition).
CV-X UM_E
1-31
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Page 2-263
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Managing tools
3 Select a tool at the lower part of the screen, specify
the tool ID and left-click
Inspection/measurement condition settings
This section describes the operation for tools and the
group of gathered tools.
Operation for tools
Reference
.
To add the selected tool to an existing group,
select the group to add it to in [Select Group],
.
and then left-click
The tool is added, and the tool edit screen appears.
Adding a tool
1 Left-click
in setup mode.
The [Tool Catalog] screen appears.
Re-editing tools
Right-click the desired tool for editing settings on
the toolbar and then select [Edit].
2 Select the inspection category in [Category] at the
upper part of the screen.
Relevant tools are displayed at the lower part of the
screen.
The edit screen for the tool appears.
Reference
1-32 CV-X UM_E
Double-clicking the tool displayed on the toolbar is
another way to display the edit screen.
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Deleting a tool
1 Right-click the desired tool for deletion on the
toolbar and then select [Delete].
Renumbering the tool ID
Point
A confirmation message appears.
2 Left-click [OK].
The tool is removed.
1 Right-click the tool for renumbering its tool ID on
the toolbar and then select [Renumber Tool ID].
Copying a tool
1 Right-click the desired tool for copying on the
toolbar and then select [Copy].
The [Renumber Tool ID] screen appears.
2 Specify the new tool ID in [Tool ID] and select [OK].
2 Right-click on the toolbar and then select [Paste].
The tool selected in step 1 is copied and pasted.
Reference
• When [Paste with Tool ID] is selected, a desired
ID can be specified for the copy of the tool to be
created. (Usually, IDs are automatically allocated
sequentially from the first one available.)
• When multiple image capture is used, the capture
number to paste to can also be selected.
The tool ID is renumbered to the new tool ID.
CV-X UM_E
1-33
Inspection/measurement condition settings
• The “Connector Position Adjustment” tool and
the tools in the Vision-Guided Robotics category
of the Vision-Guided Robotics program setting
do not support the renumbering of the tool IDs.
• Multiple tools can be selected (Page 1-34) for
collective renumbering. When selecting multiple
tools and renumbering their IDs, the new tool
IDs are assigned beginning from the tool with
the smallest tool ID among the tools that are
selected.
• The renumbered tool IDs are reflected also to
the functions that refer to those tool IDs. Note
that the tool ID of the detection tool selected for
the calibration data is not replaced with the
renumbered tool ID. Set this tool ID to the
renumbered tool ID to avoid a setting error.
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Selecting/deselecting multiple tools
Point
When the [ALL] tab is selected, the multiple
selection of tools is unavailable.
Copying a tool to other programs
Point
Inspection/measurement condition settings
1 Right-click on the toolbar or on the image display
The auto-teach inspection and vision-guided
robotics tools (except 3D Search, 3D Pick, and
Path Generation) do not support copy and paste
to other programs.
and then select [Select Multiple].
1 Right-click the tool to be copied on the toolbar and
then select [Copy Across Programs].
The toolbar will be in the multiple selection mode.
2 Use the ON/OFF check box at the upper left corner
of the tool to select/deselect multiple tools.
2 Switch to the program to copy the tool to.
3 Right-click on the toolbar and then select [Paste
Across Programs].
Operations including copy/paste, deletion, group
setting, tool ID renumbering, and copy/paste across
programs can be collectively performed for the
multiple tools selected.
Reference
When [Paste Across Programs] is selected,
the tool ID is automatically assigned.
4 If Multi-Capture is enabled, specify the capture
number for the paste destination.
1-34 CV-X UM_E
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Operation for groups
Point
• The upper limit of the number of groups that
can be created is 32 for each camera.
• When the [ALL] tab is selected, the grouping/
ungrouping of tools is unavailable.
Creating a new group
1 Right-click the tool for grouping on the toolbar and
then select [Group Settingds] - [Group].
Reference
When [Group Settings] - [Group] is selected
in a state where multiple tools have been
selected beforehand (Page 1-34), a group
which consists of the selected tools can be
created.
Reference
• Select
on the group icon to view the
tools in the group. Select
to return to
the collapsed display.
• Selecting [Edit Group] enables you to
edit the group name and group ID. For
more details, refer to "Editing the
properties of a group" (Page 1-37).
How to view the results display area of the group
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
The [Group] screen appears.
2 Select [Create New Group].
3 Set the [Group Name] and select [OK].
(1)Group ID
(2)Group Name
(3)Total measurement time of the tools within the group
(4)Group judgment result (Green: OK, Red: NG)
(5)List of the tools within the group
The selected tool(s) is/are grouped.
The grouped tool(s) is/are displayed listed in the
results data display area.
CV-X UM_E
1-35
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Grouping tools enables you to display grouped multiple
tools together and make judgment by the judgment result
of the grouped multiple tools (group judgment).
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Adding a tool to a group
Point
When the [ALL] tab is selected, no tool can be
added to a group.
Inspection/measurement condition settings
1 Right-click the tool that is to be added to a group on
Copying a group
A group can be copied together with the tools contained in it.
1 Right-click the group to copy on the toolbar and
then select [Copy].
the toolbar and then select [Group Settings] - [Add to
Group].
Reference
When [Group Settings] - [Add to Group] is
selected in a state where multiple tools have
been selected beforehand (Page 1-34), the
selected tools can be collectively added to
a group.
2 Right-click on the toolbar and then select [Paste].
The group selected in step 1 is copied and pasted to
the end of the toolbar.
Ungrouping a group
The [Group] screen appears.
2 Select [Add to Existing Group].
3 Select the group to which you want to add the tool
1 Right-click the group for ungrouping on the toolbar
and then select [Group Settings] - [Ungroup].
in [Select Group] and then select [OK].
A confirmation message appears.
2 Left-click [OK].
The selected tool is added to the group.
The added tool is listed in the results data display area.
1-36 CV-X UM_E
The group is ungrouped.
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Removing a tool from a group
Point
When the [ALL] tab is selected, no tool can be
removed from a group.
Editing the properties of a group
1 Right-click the group whose properties are to be
1 Right-click the tool to be removed from the group on
the toolbar and then select [Group Settings] [Remove from Group].
Point
If there is no tool left in the group after the tool
is removed from the group, the group itself is
cancelled.
Reference
When [Group Settings] - [Remove from
Group] is selected in a state where multiple
tools have been selected beforehand (Page
1-34), selected tools can be collectively
removed from the group.
The [Edit Group] screen appears.
2 Edit the properties of the group.
• Group Name: Set the name of the group.
• Group ID: Set the group ID.
• Group Color: Set the group color.
• Group Judgment Condition: Select the condition
for the group judgment.
- OR: The group is judged as NG if there is even
just one tool within the group that is NG.
- AND: The group is judged as NG when all of the
tools within the group are NG.
A confirmation message appears.
3 Once the editing is done, select [OK].
2 Left-click [OK].
The selected tool is removed from the group.
Deleting a group
Deleting a group also deletes the tools contained in the
group.
1 Right-click the group for deletion on the toolbar
and then select [Delete].
The [Edit Group] screen closes.
A confirmation message appears.
2 Left-click [OK].
The group is deleted together with the tools in it.
CV-X UM_E
1-37
Inspection/measurement condition settings
edited on the toolbar and then select [Group Settings]
- [Edit Group].
Setting measurement conditions (Tool)
Displaying the list of tools/groups
Point
Inspection/measurement condition settings
When the [ALL] tab is selected, the tool list is
unavailable.
1 Select
on the toolbar.
Points in tool editing
Displaying guides
To display the guide such as an explanation of the item
selected or an explanation of the setting method, left-click
the
displayed on the tool edit screen.
Registering adjustment items on the custom menu
It is convenient to use the custom menu for frequently
edited items or for limiting edit items.
•
mark is added to the item that is registered on the
custom menu.
• Refer to "Custom menu" (Page 3-130) for more details on
the custom menu.
The tool list is displayed.
Reference
1-38 CV-X UM_E
• Selecting [Select Multiple] displays check
boxes on the left side of the list items. Place
a check mark in the box of the desired
items to collectively select them.
• When a group is selected in the list, [Edit
Group] is displayed. Selecting [Edit Group]
displays the [Edit Group] screen. For more
details, refer to "Editing the properties of a
group" (Page 1-37).
Editing an inspection region
Editing an inspection region
Rectangle/
Rotated Rectangle
Circle
Drawing a rotated rectangle
1 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.
Oval
2 Drag the red handle to change the angle.
Ring
Reference
Arc
Polygon
(Example: hexagon)
• The regions stipulated in the above figures are
collectively called “Figure Regions”.
• If the inspection region shapes are complex,
then convert the image into two gradations with
specific colors, and the “Image Region” (Page
2-379) which makes the shapes of the parts of
the particular color into the inspection region, or
the “Shape Region” (Page 9-13) which extracts
the outlines from the image and makes it into the
inspection region can be used.
• Some of the tools also support the “Multi-Region
Mode” (Page 9-5), which sets multiple regions
within the image.
3 Drag from within the frame line to move the
location of the region without changing the size.
Drawing a rectangle
1 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.
2 Drag from within the frame line to move the
location of the region without changing the size.
CV-X UM_E
1-39
Inspection/measurement condition settings
This section is about how to edit the size and position of the
inspection regions (including search region and pattern region)
and the mask region specified for the measurement unit.
This controller supports the following types of inspection and
mask regions.
Editing an inspection region
Drawing a circle
Drawing a ring
1 Specify the first point on the circle region to be
1 Specify the first point on the ring region to be
Inspection/measurement condition settings
created.
2 In a similar way, specify the second and third
points.
A circle through 3 points is drawn.
3 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.
created.
2 In a similar way, specify the second and third
points.
A circle through 3 points is drawn.
3 Specify the position of the inner circle or outer
circle.
4 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.
4 Drag from within the frame line to move the
location of the region without changing the size.
5 Drag from within the frame line to move the
location of the region without changing the size.
Drawing an oval
1 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.
2 Drag the red handle to change the angle.
3 Drag from within the frame line to move the
location of the region without changing the size.
1-40 CV-X UM_E
Editing an inspection region
Drawing a polygon (hexagon)
1 Specify the start point of the arc.
1 Specify the start point of the polygon.
2 Specify vertexes (12 points maximum)
Since the cursor direction is the same as the direction
of movement, a vertical cursor showing the same
direction as the red arrow appears.
2 Specify the end point of the arc.
3 Specify the intermediate point of the arc.
An arc is drawn.
4 Specify the position of the inner circle or outer
circle.
continuously.
3 Left-click the start point again.
A polygon is drawn.
When 12 vertexes are specified, a polygon is drawn at
that time.
4 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.
5 Drag a green handle on the frame line to change
the size.
5 Drag from within the frame line to move the
location of the region without changing the size.
6 Drag the red handle to change the angle.
Reference
Vertexes may be added/deleted from the menu
opened with
.
7 Drag from within the frame line to move the
location of the region without changing the size.
CV-X UM_E
1-41
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Drawing an arc
Editing an inspection region
Drawing a region by using values
Inspection/measurement condition settings
1 Draw a region.
2 Left-click
of [Inspection Region].
The region edit screen appears.
Excluding a part from the inspection
region (Mask Region)
An inspection region can have up to four mask regions which
is not inspected for each tool. This is useful when the target
has a complicated shape or when a portion needs to be
excluded from the inspection.
Initial inspection region
Mask regions added
Mask regions
(Max. 4)
Initial inspection region
3 Change the values to edit the region shape.
4 Left-click [OK].
Areas covered by the mask regions are
excluded from the inspection region.
Inspection region after
applying mask regions.
1 Select desired region shape for [Mask Region 0] to
[Mask Region 3].
2 Draw it as in normal region.
1-42 CV-X UM_E
Editing an inspection region
Deleting unnecessary feature
information/boundary information
(Eraser Tool)
When a tool (including position adjustment in Auto-Teach
Inspection) that is based on the ShapeTrax3 tool (Page 2-274)
or ShapeTrax2 tool (Page 2-281) is used, unnecessary
detected edges within the range can be removed as noise
components by specifying the area on the reference image.
1 Left-click
When a tool (including position adjustment in Auto-Teach
Inspection) that is based on the PatternTrax tool (Page 2286) is used, an arbitrary part on the reference image can
be specified to eliminate the tone change within the range.
1 Left-click
on the tool edit screen.
on the tool edit screen.
2 Put a check on [Eraser Tool] and left-click [Edit].
The [Eraser Tool] screen appears showing the
boundary information of the image.
2 Put a check on [Eraser Tool] and left-click [Edit].
The [Eraser Tool] screen appears. The edge
information is displayed in green (fine feature) and
light blue (coarse feature).
3 Remove the unnecessary tone change parts by
tracing them while left-clicking the mouse.
4 When editing is complete, left-click [OK].
Reference
3 Trace and erase unnecessary edge information by
left-click.
• The range to erase at a time can be changed
with the [Size] slider.
• To display only the specified feature type in the
screen, select either one of [Coarse] or [Fine]
only in [Display Feature].
4 When editing is complete, left-click [OK].
Reference
• The range to erase at a time can be changed
with the [Size] slider.
• To display only the specified feature type in the
screen, check either one of [Coarse] or [Fine]
only in [Display Feature].
CV-X UM_E
1-43
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Deleting unnecessary feature information in
ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2
Deleting unnecessary boundary information in
PatternTrax
Editing an inspection region
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Creating feature information from the
profile information of figures and images
in ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2
(Feature Drawing Tool)
Directly drawing features
When the features cannot be extracted properly as expected, the
features to be extracted can be directly drawn while looking at the
image in the background.
Left-click the buttons in the [Add] field to draw features by using
When a tool (including position adjustment in Auto-Teach
Inspection) that is based on the ShapeTrax3 tool (Page 2-274)
or ShapeTrax2 tool (Page 2-281) is used, features necessary
for pattern detection can be directly drawn or edited in the
Feature Drawing Tool.
With this function, highly precise ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2
measurement is possible even when appropriate features
cannot be extracted from the image properly as in the
following cases.
• The objects are laying side by side, and therefore the
features cannot be extracted properly.
• Unnecessary features are extracted due to shades and
halation by light or shadows in the background.
• Objects, of which features cannot be properly extracted
due to shading, are laying side by side.
In order to use the Feature Drawing Tool, put a check on
[Feature Drawing Tool] on the [Feature Extraction
Conditions] screen and left-click [Edit].
Reference
• Simultaneous use with the [Eraser Tool] is not
possible.
• Simultaneous use with the mask region is not
possible.
1-44 CV-X UM_E
figures such as straight line and rectangle.
Editing an inspection region
Correcting and using the features extracted from
the image
When drawing features by using graphics is difficult in the case of
Trim
Deleting unnecessary parts of features is possible by
tracing the part by dragging with a mouse.
register the features extracted from the image.
1 Left-click [Auto Extract] in the [Add] field.
The [Auto Extract] screen appears.
Bright/Dark Direction Setting
Stabilizing the searching procedure is possible by
specifying the bright/dark direction (bright to dark, dark to
bright) for the features created by the Feature Drawing
Tool.
• Auto-Set Bright/Dark Direction: The bright/dark
information near the feature can be automatically
acquired based on the directly drawn feature and the
reference image.
• Set Bright/Dark Direction to Both Ways: The bright/dark
information near all features is set to both directions.
• Individual Setting: The bright/dark information (single
direction, both directions) is manually specified for each
feature.
2 With the [Deselect] button in selected state, select
unnecessary features by left-clicking a feature or by
dragging to enclose features as a region from the
features that were automatically extracted.
• When necessary features are deselected by
mistake, left-click [Select] and click on the
necessary features to undo the operation.
• Checking [Display Black Image] turns the back
ground black. It eases the editing of features.
• When [Display Features Already Added] is checked,
the features which were added before the Auto
Extract dialog was displayed are shown in green.
Switching between display/hide can ease the
discrimination of the features to be newly added by
auto extraction.
• By left-clicking [Extraction Settings] - [Paint], the
pixels in the specified position and brightness range
can be filled with a specified color (black, gray, or
white). When the contrast is low and features cannot
be extracted, it is possible to fill a part of the section
where features cannot be extracted to enable the
Fit Shape
The position of the directly drawn feature is automatically
adjusted based on the edges of the reference image.
Simulate Detection
Validating whether or not stable detection is possible with
the created shape is possible.
The detection setting value, which was changed during
validation, is directly reflected to the tool setting value.
extraction of the features. On the contrary, it is also
possible to disable the extraction of unnecessary
features by filling the section where features are
extracted needlessly.
Click the fill position on the image. Then, adjust the
tone values of the upper and lower limits of the fill
range.
3 After completing the correction, left-click [OK].
CV-X UM_E
1-45
Inspection/measurement condition settings
works with complicated profiles, it is also possible to correct and
Using the other functions
Converting color images (Extract Colors)
Converting color images (Extract Colors)
Inspection/measurement condition settings
When a color camera is used, the captured color image is
automatically converted to a grayscale image by [Gray]
extraction. It can be changed to the desired extraction
mode.
1 Left-click
on the tool edit screen.
To use the color extraction information set in
another tool
1 Left-click [Copy Setup] on the [Extract Colors]
screen.
The [Copy Setup] screen appears.
The [Extract Colors] screen appears.
2 Select one tool with settings of desired color
extraction information from [Source].
2 Use [Mode] to choose the color extraction method.
• Color to Binary: Turns the image into a binarized
image by determining the specified color as white
and other colors as black.
• Color to Grayscale: Turns the image into a
grayscale image using the specified color as the
maximum value.
• Gray: Turns the color information into RGB. Using
the average value, the image is turned into a 256tone grayscale image.
• Fine Color: Compares color intensity using the
information of H (Hue), S (Saturation) and B
(Brightness) without changing into a grayscale
image (only for defect tool).
Reference
See "Extract Colors (When using a Color Camera)"
(Page 9-19) for more details of each color
extraction processing.
1-46 CV-X UM_E
3 In [Destination], put a check on the desired tool for
using copied color extraction information and leftclick [Execute].
The color extraction information of the tool selected in
Step 2 is copied to the tool checked in Step 3.
Specifying filter processing on the image (Image Enhance)
Specifying filter processing on the image (Image Enhance)
Adding enhancement filter
1 Left-click
on the tool edit screen.
The [Image Enhance] screen appears.
Managing added filter
Changing Execute/Non-execute of filter
When the checkmark at the upper left of each filter is
removed on the [Image Enhance] screen, filter is not
executed. It is convenient to use this function when
temporary non-execution is desired while maintaining filter
settings.
Deleting filter
Select the desired filter for deletion on the [Image
Enhance] screen and left-click
.
Changing the filter order
After selecting the filter to change the order of, left-click
to move it up the order (applied earlier) and left-click
to move it down the order (applied later).
Using context menu on the [Image Enhance]
screen
Right-click on the [Image Enhance] screen to display the
following context menu items:
2 Left-click
.
The [Add Filter] screen appears.
Add Filter
Adds a new filter to the end of the filters already set.
Insert Filter
Inserts a new filter before the filter right-clicked.
Change Filter
Deletes the filter right-clicked and inserts a new filter
instead.
Delete Filter
Deletes the filter right-clicked.
Going Up
Moves the order of the filter that is right-clicked upward
(early order).
3 Select the desired filter for addition and left-click
[Add].
The selected filter is added.
Going Down
Moves the order of the filter that is right-clicked downward
(late order).
CV-X UM_E
1-47
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Specify the image enhancement filter to apply to the
image.
When a color camera is used, the filter is applied to the
images converted using color extraction.
Refer to "List of image enhancement filters" (Page 1-48) for
more details on the effect and settings of each image
enhancement filter.
Specifying filter processing on the image (Image Enhance)
List of image enhancement filters
Expand
Removes dark noise by adjusting pixels to the highest
grayscale intensity from a group of pixels.


Performs binary processing.
Move [LO] and [UP] with a mouse for adjustment.
Brightness between [LO] and [UP] becomes "white".
• Auto Set: [LO] and [UP] are automatically set from
distribution on the graph.
Contrast Conversion
Adjusts brightness of the overall image.
• Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing
shape.
• Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the
stronger the filter effect.
• Direction: Selects the direction of expansion.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
• Border: Put a check when processing including
information outside the border.
Shrink
• Offset: When the value is increased, the image
becomes bright. When decreased, the image becomes
dark.
• Span: When the value is increased, the contrast
becomes strong. When decreased, the contrast
becomes weak.
1-48 CV-X UM_E
Removes bright noise by adjusting pixels to the lowest
grayscale intensity from a group of pixels.


Inspection/measurement condition settings
Binary
• Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing
shape.
• Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the
stronger the filter effect.
• Direction: Selects the direction of shrink.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
• Border: Put a check when processing including
information outside the border.
Specifying filter processing on the image (Image Enhance)
Removes dark noise by close processing (expansion 
shrink).
Removes noise yet maintains definition by taking the
median (most common) intensity across a group of pixels.
Remove Bright Noise
• Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing
shape.
• Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the
stronger the filter effect.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
Shading Correction
Using this filter leaves areas where there is a sharp
contrast while removing smooth change in contrast for the
rest of the background.


Removes bright noise by open processing (shrink 
expansion).
See "Eliminating Shading and Gradation" (Page 9-37) for
more details.
Blur
Blurs the image.

• Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing
shape.
• Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the
stronger the filter effect.
• Direction: Selects the direction of expansion and shrink.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
• Border: Put a check when processing including
information outside the border.
• Intensity: Sets the level for blur. The larger the value is,
the stronger blur is.
• Direction: Selects the direction of blur processing.
CV-X UM_E
1-49
Inspection/measurement condition settings
• Processing Shape: Specifies the filter processing
shape.
• Size: Sets the filter size. The greater the size, the
stronger the filter effect.
• Direction: Selects the direction of expansion and shrink.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
• Border: Put a check when processing including
information outside the border.

Median

Remove Dark Noise
Specifying filter processing on the image (Image Enhance)
Removes noise by taking the average intensity across a
group of pixels.
Adjusts brightness according to the intensity on the
reference image.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.


Preserve Intensity
See "Reducing the impact of changes in intensity" (Page 935) for more details.
Sobel X
Extracts the border of shading variation in the horizontal
(X) direction.

Outputs the image for tone difference obtained by
overlapping the reference image with the current image.

Subtraction
See "Extracting defects and stains" (Page 9-34) for more
details.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
Sobel Y
The background of a target can be removed with the
Image Extraction filter, by subtracting the current image
from a processed version.
Extracts the border of shading variation in the vertical (Y)
direction.
See "Removing background information" (Page 9-36) for
more details.
1-50 CV-X UM_E

Image Extraction

Inspection/measurement condition settings
Average
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
Specifying filter processing on the image (Image Enhance)
Enhances regions where there is a change in intensity.
It has a little weaker extraction in X and Y directions than
Prewitt, but is suitable for extraction of shading variation in
oblique directions.


Roberts
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.

It is the edge extraction processing that composes the
results of shading variation extraction done individually in
the X and Y directions.
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
Laplacian
Extracts edge uniformly without depending on the
direction.

Prewitt
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
Sobel
• Count: Changes the number of times the filter is
applied.
Scratch Defect Extraction
Extracts only linear defects by removing the shading
variation in the background.


Extracts low-contrast shading variation and emphasizing it
rather stronger than Prewitt.
For details, refer to "Highlighting only scratch defects using
the scratch defect extraction filter" (Page 9-39)
CV-X UM_E
1-51
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Sharpen
Specifying filter processing on the image (Image Enhance)
Extracts or removes clusters of bright or dark pixels.
Extracts the desired target by processing the binary
image.
Contrast Expansion
Improves the image contrast by correcting the brightness
distribution in the image.

Inspection/measurement condition settings
For details, refer to "Removing/extracting clusters of bright/
dark pixels using the noise isolation filter" (Page 9-40).
• Expansion Width: Adjusts the intensity of the contrast
expansion. Increasing this value will expand the
brightness distribution correction width.
• Noise Cut: Reduces the noise. Noise occurs especially
in the dark areas of the image. Increasing the value will
reduce the noise, but the image may become less
sharp.
1-52 CV-X UM_E

Blob Filter

Noise Isolation
• Detection Color: Selects which blobs ("White" or
"Black") in the binarized image are to be set as targets
for processing.
• Detection Count: Specifies the maximum number of
blobs to be detected.
• Lower Area Filter: Excludes a blob which is smaller
than the specified lower limit. Increase the value in case
an unnecessary noise component is counted.
• Fill Holes: Fills the inside of the blob with the detection
color.
• Active Border: Excludes the blobs on the frame border
of the inspection region. Setting to ON removes the
background from the inspection region.
Adjusting position (Position Adjustment)
Adjusting position (Position Adjustment)
Reference
If a tool in "Position Adjustment" category (Page 2387) is added, settings for position adjustment are
automatically performed. The following settings
are not required.
1 Prepare a tool for reference.
2 Left-click
.
The [Position Adjustment] screen appears.
inspection region of the tool registered as the target tool
will be adjusted according to the position data of the
reference tool. The following adjustment manners are
available: Batch adjustment - applies the position
adjustment data of one reference tool to one or more target
tools to adjust them at one time. Individual adjustment applies individual position factor (X, Y and Theta) data
from different reference tools to the corresponding factor in
the registered target tools. When “Interpolation” is
enabled, image distortion is suppressed, thereby
minimizing the error in the measurement result of the target
tool. The enabling and disabling of interpolation can only
be set for monochrome cameras and cameras that output
height images.
Tool available as reference
Tools that can be specified as reference for position adjustment and
the data referred to when adjustment is performed are as follows:
Tool (Base tool)
Adjustment item
Pattern search
Position, angle
ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2
Position, angle
PatternTrax
Position, angle
Edge position
Position, angle
Edge angle
Center, angle
Defect
3 Select a reference tool from [Reference].
When [Specific] is checked, each position of [X], [Y]
and [θ] can be adjusted by use of different tool results.
4 In [Default Reference at Adding Tools] at the lower
right of the screen, select added reference in Step 3.
When a new tool is added in the future, the added tool
will be set such that the position will be automatically
adjusted based on the reference tool set in Step 4.
To individually set the reference for each tool,
left-click
and add/set the position adjustment
references. Then, in [Target], select the reference for each
target tool.
When [Only Specified Reference] is selected from the
dropdown menu of the target list title bar, only tools related
to the reference selected from the reference list are
displayed.
Interpolation
If the inspection region is fixed, correct inspection cannot
be ensured if a target object moves even only slightly in
the inspection region. As a measure for that, a function
called position adjustment is provided. By specifying a
reference tool (the tool to be used as the basis), the
Grouping OFF
Position
Grouping ON
Center of gravity
Blob
Center of gravity,
major axis angle
Grayscale Blob
Center of gravity,
major axis angle
Profile Position
Circle/Line
Detection OFF
Position, angle
Circle detection ON Circle center
Line detection ON
Profile Defect
Line center, line angle
Defect position,
defect angle
Auto-teach inspection
Position, angle
Connector position
adjustment
2 point midpoint
position, angle
1D code reader,
2D code reader
Position, code angle
Mathematical Operations
ANS0 to 2*
Line Passing Two Points
Line center, line angle
Bisection of Two Lines
Midpoint of Bisection,
median angle
Angle Formed by Two Lines
Two Lines Intersection,
best fit line 1 angle
Line/V-Line Intersection
Intersection, line angle
Two Lines Intersection
Intersection, best fit
line 1 angle
Center of Quadrangle
Center, best fit line 1
angle
Midpoint of Points
Midpoint, line angle
Circle Passing Three Points
Circle center
* ANS0 is treated as X, ANS1 is treated as Y, and ANS2 is treated
as θ in the operation.
CV-X UM_E
1-53
Inspection/measurement condition settings
If the object for measurement is misaligned relative to the
inspection region, Position Adjustment measures the
object position with the reference tool and gives the
position feedback. This adjustment moves the position of
the inspection region so as to follow the object movement
and allows correct measurement.
Managing program settings
Managing program settings
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Describes management method of saving, copying,
deleting, importing/exporting, name editing, etc. of
program settings.
Reference
For details of adding a new program setting or
changing method, see "Adding new program
settings" (Page 1-23) and "Changing to existing
program setting" (Page 1-24).
Deleting a program
1 Left-click
and
select [Delete].
The [Delete] screen appears.
Saving a program
1 Left-click [Save] at the upper left of the screen.
A confirmation message appears.
2 Left-click [OK].
Settings are saved.
Copying a program
1 Left-click
and
select [Copy].
The [Copy] screen appears.
2 Left-click [Target].
The [Select Program] dialog appears.
3 Select the program setting to delete and left-click
[OK].
Reference
The program setting being edited at the time
cannot be deleted. To delete a program being
edited at that point, change the program
setting to a different one and then perform
deletion.
4 Left-click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
5 Left-click [OK].
The program setting is deleted.
6 Left-click [Close].
2 Left-click [Source] and [Destination] to select the
program setting to copy and the destination to
copy it to, and left-click [Execute].
The program setting is copied.
When [Copy with the defective images] is checked,
the defective images are also copied as well.
3 Left-click [Close].
1-54 CV-X UM_E
Managing program settings
• Export Target Details: Individually specifies the
target data to export.
Exporting a program
Point
Do not use third-party SD cards. Doing so may
result in data loss or setting data damage.
1 Left-click
and
select [Export].
The [Export] screen appears.
- Learning Data: Learning data (SCT.tbd) of autoteach inspection.
- Defective Sample Image: Image
(No._NGMASTER_CAM(Image name)_NG.bmp/
png) of defective sample in auto-teach inspection.
- Feature Data: The feature data (STF.tbd) created
with the Feature Drawing Tool in the ShapeTrax3/
ShapeTrax2 tool.
2 Specify the program setting and the target data for
export.
• Program Settings: Program setting file (inspect.dat)
including tools.
• Global Settings: Environment setting data (env.dat)
such as input/output.
• Reference Image: Reference image (ref*_*.bmp/
jpg/png]).
• Opening Screen: Image data (Logo.bmp) of screen
displayed at start-up. Refer to "To change the
opening screen displayed at the start-up" (Page 118) for more details on the start-up screen.
• OCR Library: Library data (dic*.dat) used for the
OCR/OCR2 tool.
• Archived Image: Exports images by specifying the
number of images from the latest archived images
(only when the export target is [Only Current
Program]). You can also output archived images by
sorting them to either the [OK] or [NG] folder
according to the camera judgments. Refer to
"Changing settings of archived images (Archived
Image Settings)" (Page 4-42) for more details on the
archived image.
- Shape Region Data: The shape region data
(RGN_SHP.dat) that has been created as the
inspection region.
- Outline Settings Data: The outline settings data
(CNT_SHP.dat) that has been set using the Outline
Comparison (Outline Coincidence) tool.
- Subtraction Settings Data: The subtraction
settings data (TDS_MDL.dat) set using the 3D
Comparison tool.
- Camera Calibration Data: The calibration data
(TDC_G_CLB_*_*.dat) used in 3D Capture Mode.
- Position Data: The position data
(RBT_L_POS_*.dat) used in Robot Inspection.
- Shared Position Data: The shared position data
(RBT_G_POS_*.dat) used in Robot Inspection.
- Calibration Data: The calibration data
(RBT_L_CLB_*.dat) used in Robot Inspection.
- Shared Calibration Data: The shared calibration
data (RBT_G_CLB_*.dat) used in Robot
Inspection.
- Connector Model Data: The connector model
data (mdl_l_*.tbd) used for the connector
inspection.
- Connector Shared Data: The connector shared
data (mdl_s_*.tbd) used for the connector
inspection.
3 Left-click [Execute].
Executes exporting.
4 Left-click [Close].
Reference
For [Remove SD Card 2], see Page 4-51 and for
[Manage Files] see Page 4-46.
CV-X UM_E
1-55
Inspection/measurement condition settings
The program can be written onto an SD card and saved as
backup.
Managing program settings
Importing a program
Renaming a program
Inspection/measurement condition settings
The data exported by [Export] of the controller or [Export]
of the PC simulation software (CV-H1X) can be loaded.
Point
Do not use third-party SD cards. Doing so may
result in data loss or setting data damage.
1 Left-click
1 Left-click
and
select [Edit Name].
The [Edit Name] screen appears.
and
select [Import].
The [Import] screen appears.
2 Left-click [Target].
The [Select Program] dialog appears.
3 Select the program setting to rename and left-click
[OK].
2 Specify the program setting and the target data for
import.
3 Left-click [Execute].
Executes importing.
4 Left-click [Close].
1-56 CV-X UM_E
4 Left-click [Edit] and input the name.
5 Left-click [Close].
Managing program settings
Converting program settings
Inspection/measurement condition settings
Converting program settings to the most recent
version
To use all the functions described in this manual, you need
to update the programs to the latest version. However,
updating the program version will prevent you from loading
them into older version controllers.
Reference
Be aware that settings cannot be restored to the
earlier version after conversion.
1 Left-click
and
select [Update Version of Program Setting].
A confirmation message appears.
2 Left-click [OK].
Reference
For the CV-X400/X300 Series, it is also possible to
batch-convert all programs to the latest version by
selecting [Convert All Programs to Latest Version].
Changing the camera types which can be used in
the program setting (CV-X470/X480/X490/X290 Only)
If you have selected [Area Cameras (up to 5MP)] for
[Camera Type] when adding a new program, you can
convert it into a program that will allow you to use other
cameras.
1 Left-click
and
select [Convert Program to LJ-V Type] (CV-X480/
X290 only) or [Convert Program to 21+MP Camera
Type].
A confirmation message appears.
2 Left-click [OK].
CV-X UM_E
1-57
Managing program settings
Inspection/measurement condition settings
1-58 CV-X UM_E
Chapter
2
Tool
Tool
Documentation for the installation and configuration methods
of the controller, software, and CAD data can be downloaded
from the following URL.
www.keyence.com/cvx_support
CV-X UM_E
2-1
Presence/Absence
Presence/Absence
q Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
Count
ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
Function List
Position Adjustment
2-2 CV-X UM_E
Point
See "Chapter 8 Measurement Using Height Image"
(Page 8-1) for more information on [3D Presence/
Comparison] that appears when 3D Capture Mode
is selected.
Judged with Quality Learning
Judged with Quality Learning
This tool learns the quality images through the image sensor and recognizes images other than the quality
images as defective images. It is so useful that the influence from variabilities or individual differences existing
in the quality images can be removed.
For more details on items of
, refer to the base tool "Auto-Teach Inspection" (Page 2-263) (for CV-X400/X300/
X100 Series) or "Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2)" (Page 2-367) (for CV-X200 Series).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the quality image is registered
When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)"
OK workpieces with variation of color
Generate the quality learning image
in consideration of variation
A A
A A
A
A
Quality match (%): 90
When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume"
During operation
Inspection target
Detect the difference by comparing
with the quality learning image
A A
A A
A
A
Defect volume: 400
Inspection example for use
Assembly error inspection of fuse box
It detects error assembly of a fuse box for automobiles.
Multiple quality images are registered in advance. Images which are different from the quality learning data
(which has quality variations and individual differences learned incorporated into it) are considered
defective.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-3
Presence/Absence
"Judged with Quality Learning" measurement
Judged with Quality Learning
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Presence/Absence
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
Set position adjustment (Page 2-5).
Set it to perform position adjustment for the target object.
Setting to find the object position makes the inspection region follow the object.
For details of setting items
, refer to the base tool "Auto-Teach Inspection" (Page 2-263).
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
3
Edit the inspection region (Page 2-5).
Specify the desired region range for inspection.
Multiple places for inspection can be selected.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
4
Learn quality images (Page 2-6).
With registration of multiple quality images, what is learned is that variation in the registered range is OK
and items out of the range is NG. The more number of quality image registrations there are, the more
redundant the quality image is against variation. More precise learning can be achieved.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
5
Verify the learn result (Page 2-8).
Capture quality images and defective images to verify if correct inspection can be performed.
Registration of multiple defective samples in advance is useful to verify if a defective sample after
change of the setting values is correctly judged.
6
Set judgment conditions.
• When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume": In [Defect Volume Upper Limit], specify the upper limit
of the defect volume to judge as OK.
• When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)": In [Quality Match(%) Lower Limit], set a resemblance
percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target objects will be judged as OK.
2-4 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Quality Learning
1.Setting position adjustment
Set the position adjustment.
If position adjustment is not necessary, remove the check from the [Position Adjustment] box.
2
3
Take the reference image for position
adjustment.
Presence/Absence
1
Move the green frame so that the
characteristic shape of the object may be
surrounded.
Left-click
.
The green line shape displayed along the object
shape is registered as the data for position
adjustment.
4
Set the assumed angle range of position
gap.
Smaller angle range can reduce the processing
time.
For details of setting items
, refer to "AutoTeach Inspection" (Page 2-263).
2.Editing an inspection region
Set an inspection region.
1
Select the type of region.
• Multiple regions: Up to 32 [Rectangle], [Rotated
Rectangle], [Circle], [Oval], [Ring], or [Arc]
regions can be specified. This is convenient
when specifying the inspection areas in detail.
• Figure region: The method to specify the region
is the same as that of a normal tool. See "Editing
an inspection region" (Page 1-39) for more
details.
2
Add a region.
This section describes the procedure in [Multiple
Regions].
After selecting a region shape, left-click [Add
Inspection Region] to add an inspection region.
Left-click [Add Mask Region] to add a mask region.
3
Adjust the region size according to the
inspection target area.
To delete a region, select the region for deletion
and left-click
.
CV-X UM_E
2-5
Judged with Quality Learning
3.Learning quality image
Add quality images to create learning data.
Presence/Absence
1
2
Left-click
.
Capture the quality image.
Every time [Add] is left-clicked or a trigger is
externally input, it is added to the quality image.
The guideline is to add 30 or more quality images.
3
Left-click
.
Create the learning data from quality images
archived.
An image whose feature failed to be detected or an
image judged as defective when [Cut Incorrect
Learning] in Details of Composite Image Learning
is ON is removed from learning target and an X
mark is put.
To include the image with X as learning target, turn OFF [Cut Incorrect Learning].
However, an image whose feature failed to be detected cannot be a learning target.
An image on the image strip can be learned as a quality image.
After displaying the image strip, select the image to use and left-click [Add Selected Image to Learning] to
add it.
However, in this case, the function of registering current images as quality images using
used.
2-6 CV-X UM_E
cannot be
Judged with Quality Learning
[Position Gap] and [Variability Level]
Position gap
Raw image
Position gap

Reference
image

Current
image
Variability level
This can be displayed only for [Average Quality Image] which is displayed after learning of quality images.
Areas with large variation in learned images can be displayed. The larger the variation is, the darker light blue
the area shows.



Profile size is
a little
different.
CV-X UM_E
2-7
Presence/Absence
When quality images are added, the areas different from the reference image for position adjustment can be
displayed.
Areas darker than the reference image are displayed in blue and areas brighter than the reference image are
displayed in red.
Judged with Quality Learning
4.Verifying learning results
Presence/Absence
Adjust the set value for judgment to verify if the inspection
is performed correctly. Make adjustments while
inspecting a few objects for verification as necessary.
The areas color-displayed in Contrast view are the parts
detected as difference.
For a problem like this
A large area without defect has been detected.
Adjust [Defect Strength] and [Defect Size] while viewing the detection screen.
If excessive detection has been performed, change [Defect Strength] to a higher (large value) setting.
To ignore small defects, set a larger value for [Defect Size].
A quality image is detected in error as a defective image.
If a quality image is detected in error as a defective image, the number of quality images learned may not be
sufficient.
In this case, left-click
and learn it additionally as a quality image.
Detection is completed, but NG judgment is not given.
Set the lower limit for match %. Make adjustments based on the graph.
Pass (OK)
2-8 CV-X UM_E
Fail (NG)
Judged with Quality Learning
To verify if detection is correctly performed on the images adjusted in the past
When a defective sample is registered, correct detection can be verified later.
1
Capture a defective image.
The graph displayed near the region shows the value of [Quality Match (%)].
Left-click
.
Moves to the defective sample registration screen.
Left-click [Save] to register the image currently displayed as a defective sample image.
When several defective images are registered, left-click [Close] and return to [Verify/Judge] screen.
3
Left-click
.
Verify if detection is correctly performed for registered defective sample images.
When all defective sample images are correctly detected, settings are complete.
If detection cannot be correctly performed, select the target image and go to Step 4.
4
Adjust [Defect Strength] and [Defect Size] while viewing the detection screen.
Confirm that only the area different from quality image is displayed in color. For excessive detection,
change [Defect Strength] to a higher (large value) setting. For non-detection, change it to a lower (small
value) setting. Make adjustments so that only desired areas for detection may be displayed in color.
If excessive detection still occurs, adjust the value for [Defect Size].
5
Set the lower limit for quality match %.
If multiple regions are set, the lower limit can also be changed individually for each region.
6
Left-click
again.
If detection is correctly performed, settings are complete.
If detection cannot be correctly performed, return to Step 4. Or, verify whether a quality image has been
mistakenly registered as a defective sample image.
CV-X UM_E
2-9
Presence/Absence
2
Judged with Quality Learning
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
To verify if detection is correctly performed on the images
adjusted in the past


Detection is performed with Contrast, but NG judgment is
not given.
Adjust the defect strength to increase the level or value.

A large area without defect has been detected erroneously.
Since the number of images for composite image learning
is not sufficient, register the erroneously detected image
for additional learning. If an incorrect position is found,
reset the position adjustment and correct it.
Increase the lower limit of Quality Match (%).

Register the target image as a defective sample.
Increase [Defect Enhancement] in Details of Quality
Learning
.

Unable to detect around the profile.
Increase [Noise Reduction] in Details of Quality Learning
.
Erroneous detection occurs around the profile.
Example of representative settings
• A quality image is detected erroneously as a defective image.
→ Since the number of images for composite image learning is not sufficient, register the erroneously
detected image for additional learning.
• A large area without defect has been detected in error.
→ Adjust the defect strength to increase the level or value.
Step 1
Confirmation
Set the region for position adjustment.
Confirm profile extraction status with Filtered.

Presence/Absence
A quality image is detected erroneously as a defective
image.
Select Contrast.

Corrective action

Status
Status of defect detection is not visible.
Step 2
Set the region for defect detection target.
2-10 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Quality Learning
Step 3
and capture images for composite
Left-click
after registration of 30
images or more as a guideline.
Presence/Absence

Left-click
image learning.
Confirmation
Confirmation
Measure many inspection target objects for verification.
If an item which should be OK is NG, perform additional
learning.
Confirm effect of additional learning with Contrast.
(Multiple additional learning can be more effective.)

Step 4
Confirmation
If weak (close to blue) defect on the overall screen is
detected, set the defect strength to normal or higher.
Check defect detection status with Contrast.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-11
Judged with Quality Learning
Step 6
Confirmation
Measure many inspection target objects for verification.
Set the lower limit of Quality Match (%) so that an NG item
can be NG.
Check defect detection status and Quality Match (%)
measured value with Contrast.

Presence/Absence
2-12 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Black/White-Specific Area
Judged with Black/White-Specific
Area
Binarizes an image (black & white) to measure the area of “Black” or “White”. The size judgment or presence
inspection can be conducted for a measurement target.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Area" (Page 2-267).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Measured color: Black
Inspection region
Target
The number of white
(or black) pixels are
counted.
Area
70,000 (pixels)
Inspection example for use
Chip capacitor presence inspection in tape
It can detect presence of capacitor in the emboss tape.
Black-and-white binary processing is performed in the inspection region and the tolerance is set with regard
to the calculated area.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-13
Presence/Absence
"Judged with Black/White-Specific Area" measurement
Judged with Black/White-Specific Area
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Presence/Absence
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the threshold of binary.
Set the Detection Color.
Selects which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
6
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
Specifies the area range to judge as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-14 CV-X UM_E
6
Judged with Black/White-Specific Area
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select black and white again of Detection Color.
To execute color binary (when using color image sensor)

Automatic binary setting does not show an ideal binary
screen.

The binary screen is totally black or white.
Select Filtered.
Presence/Absence
The binary screen is not displayed.
  
Status
The number of pixels is larger or smaller than it looks.
Perform automatic binary setting.
Drag LO on the binary histogram for adjustment.
Select "Color-Specific Area" from the tool catalog.
Example of representative settings
Automatic binary setting does not show an ideal binary screen.
→ Drag LO on the binary histogram for adjustment.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Unnecessary black pixel is found in the object on the
binary screen.

Step 1
Confirmation
Drag LO on the histogram to the left and check if settings
are correct on the binary screen.
In the histogram, the range between LO and UP is white
and the range in other areas is black.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-15
Judged with Color-Specific Area
Judged with Color-Specific Area
Presence/Absence
"Judged with Color-Specific Area" measurement
Extracts an arbitrary color (color binary) from an image to measure the area of the extracted color. This is
recommended when making a difference is not easy in a black & white (binarized) image.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Area" (Page 2-267).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Inspection region
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Measured Color: Black
Target
The number of white
(or black) pixels are
counted.
Area
70,000 (pixels)
Inspection example for use
Inspection of grease application to metal parts
The amount of grease application in metal parts is inspected. Color binary processing is performed in the
inspection region and the tolerance is set for the area of the specified color.
Example of inspection line
2-16 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Judged with Color-Specific Area
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
Specify the color for detection target (Extract colors, Page 1-46).
Specify the target color for inspection.
The display of the specified area on the screen turns into yellow.
4
Set the Detection Color.
Selects which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
Reference
5
When using the color binarization image, the extracted color becomes "White".
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
Specifies the area range to judge as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-17
Presence/Absence
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Judged with Color-Specific Area
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select black and white again of Detection Color.
The color extraction is insufficient.
Select Filtered.
Select Widen. Or, extract the color from other regions.
Example of representative settings
The color extraction is insufficient.
→ Select Widen. Or, extract the color from other regions.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region. Extract the color from
the desired regions.
Confirm the reflected extraction with Extract Image 1.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Execute Widen for a required number of times while
viewing Extract Image 1.
Confirm the extracted area with Extract Image 1.

Presence/Absence
The binary screen is not displayed.
  
Status
The number of pixels is larger or smaller than it looks.
2-18 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Pattern Match (Shading)
Judged with Pattern Match (Shading)
Presence/Absence
"Judged with Pattern Match (Shading)" measurement
Detects the portion most resemblant to the image pattern registered in advance. This tool is used when
detecting for the object’s presence and when verifying whether variant types are mixed in or not.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Pattern Search" (Page 2-270).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Search region
CV
Pattern region
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
CV
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: X>Y: Ascend
• Judged Label: 0
Registered pattern
(0,0)
Y
Y
X
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
Tilt Angle
Search region
CV
C
CV V
CV CV
Match %
98
Count
3
Origin
(0,0)
C
CV V
CV CV
CV
During operation
Tilt Angle
-30°
X
Inspection example for use
Type judgment of plastic cap
Type of plastic cap is judged. In the screen, search for the cap pattern registered in advance and set the
tolerance for the match% between the detected pattern and the registered pattern.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-19
Judged with Pattern Match (Shading)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Presence/Absence
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
2
3
4
5
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to detect.
3
4
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47)
as necessary.
Set the detection angle.
In [Angle Range], Specifies the angle range by +/- for tilted search targets. The smaller the angle range
is, the shorter the processing time.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Match %], Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
2-20 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Pattern Match (Shading)
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select Filtered.
A wrong target is searched.
The target is searched, but there is positional deviation.
The target is out of the search region and detection is
unstable.
To judge acceptance by position gap
Increase the [Detection Count].
Set [Search Sensitivity] to [High].
Set [Accuracy] to [High].

There are multiple targets but only one is searched.
Increase the [Angle Range].
Change the pattern region to a region which does not go
out of the search region.

A target with large inclination cannot be searched.
Reduce the [Min. Match %].
Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment
Conditions].
Example of representative settings
• The target is out of the search region and detection is unstable.
→ Change the pattern region to a region which does not go out of the search region.
• To judge acceptance by position gap
→ Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment conditions].
Confirmation
Show the target and set the pattern region.
Confirm the detected position (green arrow) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
If the pattern is out of the search region as shown in the
figure below, search is unstable.
CV-X UM_E
2-21
Presence/Absence
Some targets cannot be searched.
     
Status
Detect point is not visible.
Judged with Pattern Match (Shading)
Step 3
Confirmation
Set the pattern region again so that it may not be out of
the search region.
Confirm that the label is correctly searched even if the
overall image is moved upward.

Presence/Absence
Confirmation
Set the minimum match % as necessary.
Confirm that NG is detected by inspecting other product
types.

Step 4
2-22 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Pattern Match (Profile)
Judged with Pattern Match (Profile)
Detects the portion most resemblant to the profile information registered in advance. It is effective for an
inspection target with a profile information that changes much.
For more details on items of
, refer to the base tool "ShapeTrax3(A)" (Page 2-274) (for CV-X400/X300/X100
Series) or "ShapeTrax2" (Page 2-281) (for CV-X200 Series).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Detection Order: From upper left (downward)
• Judged Label: 0
Search region
Pattern region
Origin
(0,0)
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
Y
X
Tilt Angle
+30°
Match %
85
Count
3
Registered pattern
Scale
1.025
During operation
Origin
(0,0)
X
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
Tilt Angle
Search region
Y
Even when some part is missing,
a pattern is detected based on
the registered pattern.
Even when a pattern is
overlapped, it is detected based
on the registered pattern.
Inspection example for use
Type judgment of automobile wheels
Types of aluminum wheels are judged.
In the screen, search the profile registered in advance and set the tolerance for the match% between the
detected profile and the registered quality profile.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-23
Presence/Absence
"Judged with Pattern Match (Profile)" measurement
Judged with Pattern Match (Profile)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Presence/Absence
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
5
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
4
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47)
as necessary.
Set the detection angle.
In [Angle Range], Specifies the angle range by +/- for tilted search targets. The smaller the angle range
is, the shorter the processing time.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Match %], Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
2-24 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Pattern Match (Profile)

Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction
Conditions].
Reduce [Min. Match %].
Target with different size cannot be searched.
Increase [Detection Count].

Multiple targets are available, but only one can be
searched.
Change the upper and lower limits of [Scale].

Some targets cannot be searched.

Corrective action
• Select [Fast] in [Fine Search Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax3)
or select [Low] in [Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax2).
Processing time is long.




Change the [Rotation Direction-Added Search] setting to
detect the rotation direction (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/
X300 Series only).
Reduce [Minimum Distance] and [Angle Range] in
[Minimum Settings] ([Minimum Distance] and [Angle
Range] operate in logical AND condition).

Only the detected angle is unstable for a workpiece with
rotational symmetry.
Select [All] for [Elimination Target] under [Eliminate Overlap].
Change the settings such as the feature reference region,
search target specification, etc. in [Select By Feature Pixel
Count] (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/X300 Series only).
Select [Detailed] (for ShapeTrax3) or [High] (for ShapeTrax2)
in [Search Sensitivity] under [Feature Extraction Conditions].
Overlapping targets cannot be detected.
You do not wish to detect overlapping targets.
You wish to additionally specify whether to include or
exclude the object that was detected as a detection
target based on the features around the pattern.
There is little Current Feature and the search is not stable.
Increase the [Allowable Distortion].

Sometimes searching cannot be done because of the
angle of view or the object’s tilt.
Put a check mark on [Reverse Detect].

Target with reverse shading cannot be searched.
Use the eraser tool and erase unnecessary features, or
edit the features via the Feature Drawing Tool.

• Narrow down the search region.
Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the
search is not stable.
CV-X UM_E
2-25
Presence/Absence
Status
Registered Feature and Current Feature are not visible.

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Judged with Pattern Match (Profile)
Example of representative settings
• Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the search is not stable.
→ Erase unnecessary feature with the eraser tool.
• Registered Feature and Current Feature are not visible.
Step 1
Show the target and set the pattern region and the search
region.
Confirmation
Select the eraser tool and determine the size. Drag on the
unnecessary feature and delete it.
Fine segment of registered feature is displayed in green,
and coarse segment is displayed in light blue.

Step 2
Step 3
Confirmation
Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction
Conditions].
Current feature is displayed in blue. Confirm that the area
to be detected as feature is displayed in blue.

Presence/Absence
→ Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction Conditions].
2-26 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Pattern Match (Profile)
Step 4
Confirmation
Set the minimum match % as necessary.
Inspect other product types and confirm that NG
judgment is given.

Presence/Absence
CV-X UM_E
2-27
Judged with Shading
Judged with Shading
Presence/Absence
"Judged with Shading" measurement
Measures the brightness (intensity) of an object. The object’s presence can be inspected by comparing the
intensity difference between the objects and the background.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Intensity" (Page 2-333).
Image of the Measurement
When the intensity difference is large
When the intensity difference is small
Intensity tool 1
Intensity tool 1
Intensity tool 2
Intensity tool 2
Target
Target
• Average intensity of intensity tool 1: 50
• Average intensity of intensity tool 2: 200
• Intensity difference: 150
• Average intensity of intensity tool 1: 150
• Average intensity of intensity tool 2: 200
• Intensity difference: 50
Inspection example for use
Inspection for electrolytic capacitor print intensity
Intensity of the capacitor print surface is inspected.
Classify the intensity in the inspection region for shading check into 256 tones, and set the tolerance for
intensity difference from a quality image.
Example of inspection line
2-28 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Judged with Shading
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Average], Specifies the range of the average intensity judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-29
Presence/Absence
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Judged with Shading
Corrective action
Only average values are visible.

Left-click
Set the upper/lower limits of [Intensity] in judgment
conditions.
The intensity difference should be judged as NG.
of judgment conditions for confirmation.
Example of representative settings
• Only average values are visible.
→ Left-click
of judgment conditions for confirmation.
• The intensity difference should be judged as NG.
→ Set the upper/lower limits of [Intensity] in judgment conditions.
Step 1
Left-click
of Judgment Conditions.
Step 2
Confirmation
Among the judgment conditions displayed, set the
upper/lower limits of [Intensity].
Check the judgment result of an NG object.

Presence/Absence
Status

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
2-30 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Color Component
Judged with Color Component
Presence/Absence
"Judged with Color Component" measurement
Detects the portion most resemblant to the image pattern registered in advance. This tool is used when
detecting for the object’s presence and when verifying whether variant types are mixed in or not.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Color Detection" (Page 2-335).
Image of the Measurement
Example of measuring a red object
Example of measuring an orange object
Inspection region
• R-Ave: 200
• G-Ave: 50
• B-Ave: 50
Inspection region
• R-Ave: 250
• G-Ave: 200
• B-Ave: 40
Inspection example for use
Inspection for mix-in of different type aluminum bottle
Type of aluminum can is judged.
Using color inspection, label color information is detected. The tolerance is set for difference from the label
color information registered in advance.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-31
Judged with Color Component
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Presence/Absence
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
3
Registering reference image (Page
1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
4
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
Select the color system.
Selects the measurement parameter of the color.
• RGB: Measures using the parameter of Red (R), Green (G) and Blue (B).
• HSB: Measures using the parameter of the hue (H), saturation (S) and brightness (B).
Reference
4
In MultiSpectrum mode (Page 7-6), [MultiSpectrum] is displayed and cannot be changed.
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Average], Specifies the range of the average intensity judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
2-32 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Color Component
Corrective action

Set the upper/lower limits in RGB or HSB in judgment
conditions.
Select HSB from [Color System] of [Detection Conditions].
To set the color system to HSB
Example of representative settings
To set the color system to HSB
→ Select HSB from [Color System] of [Detection Conditions].
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Check the R/G/B values in judgment conditions.

Step 1
Confirmation
Select HSB from [Color System] of [Detection Conditions].
Check the H/S/B values in judgment conditions.

Step 2
Confirmation
Set the upper/lower limits of H to make color difference
NG.
Confirm that a color difference is judged as NG.

Step 3
CV-X UM_E
2-33
Presence/Absence
Status
To judge color difference as NG

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Color Sorting
Color Sorting
Presence/Absence
"Color Sorting" measurement
Measures the area of colors similar to the colors registered in advance based on the color information of the
object. By measuring the group with the largest area, sorting and product type discrimination can be done.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Color Grouping (CV-X400 Series Only)" (Page 2-338).
Image of the Measurement
(When red is registered in color group 0 and
orange is registered in color group 1)
Example of when a red object is measured
Example of when an orange object is measured
Inspection Region
Inspection Region
• Primary Candidate (Group No.) : 0
• Primary Candidate (Area) : 1800
• Primary Candidate (Group No.) : 1
• Primary Candidate (Area) : 2100
Inspection example for use
Product type sorting inspection of aluminum bottles
The type of product is sorted by the color of the aluminum can label.
The type of product can be determined by judging which color group's color, among the multiple pre-registered
color groups, is found most on the label.
Example of inspection line
2-34 CV-X UM_E
Type 1
Type 2
Color Sorting
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
Registering reference image (Page
1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
6
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
On the "Color Group Registration" screen that appears, left-click [Add] for the color
group number that you want to register.
The "Color Extraction Navi" (when [Use Color Extraction Navigation] is enabled) or "Color Group
Registration" screen (when [Use Color Extraction Navigation] is disabled) will appear. Select the color
detection parameters.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the color that you want to extract.
For more details on registering color groups, refer to "Setting the optimal parameters for color extraction
(Color Extraction Navi)" (Page 9-31).
5
For the number of colors that need to be registered, repeat steps 3 to 4.
You can also register colors that you do not want to detect as excluded colors.
6
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In the [Primary Candidate (Group No.)] field, select the group to use for judging the primary candidate
as OK and for discerning when it is a different type (multiple groups can be set).
You can also specify the range of the area judged as OK by setting [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] in
the [Primary Candidate (Area)] field.
CV-X UM_E
2-35
Presence/Absence
2
3
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Color Sorting
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
In the judgment conditions, specify only the color group
that is acceptable as the OK Group.
In the [Primary Candidate (Area)] judgment conditions,
specify [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the label area.
Adjust the color and brightness range of the color group
that is not extracted correctly or register additionally the
color of the parts that are not extracted.
Colors are not extracted as they look.
Example of representative settings
Colors are not extracted as they look.
→Adjust the color and brightness range of the color group that is not extracted correctly or register additionally
the color of the parts that are not extracted.
Confirmation
Capture the detection target and select the individual
setting under [Color Group Registration] for the extraction
color of the color group that is not correctly detected.
Set the color and brightness range, and check that the
color is correctly extracted. You can also select [Select
from Images] and configure the setting while checking
the effect from the value.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
For colors that cannot be adjusted by using a different
color and brightness range, register a new color.
Check that the color is correctly detected.

Presence/Absence
To also detect rips or folds on the labels.

To remove different products.

Corrective action

Status
2-36 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Color Distribution
Judged with Color Distribution
Measures the distribution of the area of colors similar to the colors registered in advance based on the color
information of the object. When there exist different colors within one object, the distribution quantity of each
color can be measured. By measuring the area distribution, you can detect whether the object is present or
not, and verify whether different colored objects are mixed in or not.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Color Grouping (CV-X400 Series Only)" (Page 2-338).
Image of the Measurement
(When red is registered in color group 0 and
orange is registered in color group 1)
Example of when a red object is measured
Example of when an orange object is measured
Inspection Region
Inspection Region
• Color Group 00 Area : 1800
• Color Group 01 Area : 0
• Color Group 00 Area : 0
• Color Group 01 Area : 2100
Inspection example for use
Inspection for mix-in of a different type of aluminum bottle
The type of the aluminum bottle is judged.
The presence or absence of a workpiece, or the product type is determined by judging to what extent each
of the multiple color groups that were registered in advance is distributed on the label.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-37
Presence/Absence
"Judged with Color Distribution" measurement
Judged with Color Distribution
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Presence/Absence
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
3
>
Registering reference image (Page
1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
6
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
On the "Color Group Registration" screen
that appears, left-click [Add] for the color
group number that you want to register.
The "Color Extraction Navi" (when [Use Color
Extraction Navigation] is enabled) or "Color Group
Registration" screen (when [Use Color Extraction
Navigation] is disabled) will appear. Select the
color detection parameters.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the color that you want to extract.
For more details on registering color groups, refer to "Setting the optimal parameters for color extraction
(Color Extraction Navi)" (Page 9-31).
5
For the number of colors that need to be registered, repeat steps 3 to 4.
You can also register colors that you do not want to detect as excluded colors.
6
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In the [Individual Area] field, specify the range of the area judged as OK for each group by setting
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
In the [Area of All Groups] field, specify the range of the area of all groups judged as OK by setting
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-38 CV-X UM_E
Judged with Color Distribution
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
In the judgment conditions, specify only the color group
that is acceptable as the OK Group.
In the [Primary Candidate (Area)] judgment conditions,
specify [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the label area.
Adjust the color and brightness range of the color group
that is not extracted correctly or register additionally the
color of the parts that are not extracted.
Colors are not extracted as they look.
Example of representative settings
Colors are not extracted as they look.
→Adjust the color and brightness range of the color group that is not extracted correctly or register additionally
the color of the parts that are not extracted.
Confirmation
Capture the detection target and select the individual
setting under [Color Group Registration] for the extraction
color of the color group that is not correctly detected.
Set the color and brightness range, and check that the
color is correctly extracted. You can also select [Select
from Images] and configure the setting while checking
the effect from the value.

Step 1
Confirmation
For colors that cannot be adjusted by using a different
color and brightness range, register a new color.
Check that the color is correctly detected.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-39
Presence/Absence
To also detect rips or folds on the labels.

To remove different products.

Corrective action

Status
Flaw Detection
Flaw Detection
Presence/Absence
q Flaw Detection
Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
Count
ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
Function List
Position Adjustment
2-40 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
This tool learns the quality images through the image sensor and recognizes images other than the quality
images as defective images. It is so useful that the influence from variabilities or individual differences existing
in the quality images can be removed.
For more details on items of
, refer to the base tool "Auto-Teach Inspection" (Page 2-263) (for CV-X400/X300/
X100 Series) or "Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2)" (Page 2-367) (for CV-X200 Series).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the quality image is registered
When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)"
OK workpieces with variation of color
Generate the quality learning image
in consideration of variation
A A
A A
A
A
Quality match (%): 90
When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume"
During operation
Inspection target
Detect the difference by comparing
with the quality learning image
A A
A A
A
A
Defect volume: 400
Inspection example for use
Appearance inspection of LED device
Foreign matter on the LED chip surface is detected.
Multiple quality images are registered in advance. Images which are different from the master image for
variation in quality images or difference of individual images are considered defective.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-41
Flaw Detection
"Detect Flaw with Quality Learning" measurement
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Flaw Detection
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
Set position adjustment (Page 2-43).
Set it to perform position adjustment for the target object.
Setting to find the object position makes the inspection region to follow the object.
For details of setting items
, refer to the base tool "Auto-Teach Inspection" (Page 2-263).
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
3
Edit the inspection region (Page 2-43).
Specify the desired region range for inspection.
Multiple places for inspection can be selected.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
4
Learn quality images (Page 2-44).
With registration of multiple quality images, what is learned is that variation in the registered range is OK
and items out of the range is NG. The more number of quality image registrations there are, the more
redundant the quality image is against variation. More precise learning can be achieved.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
5
Verify the learn result (Page 2-46).
Capture quality images and defective images to verify if correct inspection can be performed.
Registration of multiple defective samples in advance is useful to verify if a defective sample after
change of the setting values is correctly judged.
6
Set judgment conditions.
• When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume": In [Defect Volume Upper Limit], specify the upper limit
of the defect volume to judge as OK.
• When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)": In [Quality Match(%) Lower Limit], set a resemblance
percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target objects will be judged as OK.
2-42 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
1.Setting position adjustment
Set the position adjustment.
If position adjustment is not necessary, remove the check from the [Position Adjustment] box.
2
3
Take the reference image for position
adjustment.
Flaw Detection
1
Move the green frame so that the
characteristic shape of the object may be
surrounded.
Left-click
.
The green line shape displayed along the object
shape is registered as the data for position
adjustment.
4
Set the assumed angle range of position
gap.
Smaller angle range can reduce the processing
time.
For details of setting items
, refer to "AutoTeach Inspection" (Page 2-263).
2.Editing an Inspection Region
Set an inspection region.
1
Select the type of region.
• Multiple regions: Up to 32 [Rectangle], [Rotated
Rectangle], [Circle], [Oval], [Ring], or [Arc]
regions can be specified. This is convenient
when specifying the inspection areas in detail.
• Figure region: The method to specify the region
is the same as that of a normal tool. See "Editing
an inspection region" (Page 1-39) for more
details.
2
Add a region.
This section describes the procedure in [Multiple
Regions].
After selecting a region shape, left-click [Add
Inspection Region] to add an inspection region. Leftclick [Add Mask Region] to add a mask region.
3
Adjust the region size according to the
inspection target area.
To delete a region, select the region for deletion and left-click
.
CV-X UM_E
2-43
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
3.Learning quality image
Add quality images to create learning data.
Flaw Detection
1
2
Left-click
.
Capture the quality image.
Every time [Add] is left-clicked or a trigger is
externally input, it is added to the quality image.
The guideline is to add 30 or more quality images.
3
Left-click
.
Create the learning data from quality images
archived.
An image whose feature failed to be detected or an
image judged as defective when [Cut Incorrect
Learning] in Details of Composite Image Learning
is ON is removed from learning target and an X
mark is put.
To include the image with X as learning target, turn OFF [Cut Incorrect Learning].
However, an image whose feature failed to be detected cannot be a learning target.
An image on the image strip can be learned as a quality image.
After displaying the image strip, select the image to use and left-click [Add Selected Image to Learning] to
add it.
However, in this case, the function of registering current images as quality images using
used.
2-44 CV-X UM_E
cannot be
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
[Position Gap] and [Variability Level]
Position gap
Raw image
Position gap

Reference
image

Current
image
Variability level
This can be displayed only for [Average Quality Image] which is displayed after learning of quality images.
Areas with large variation in learned images can be displayed. The larger the variation is, the darker light blue
the area shows.



Profile size is
a little
different.
CV-X UM_E
2-45
Flaw Detection
When quality images are added, the areas different from the reference image for position adjustment can be
displayed.
Areas darker than the reference image are displayed in blue and areas brighter than the reference image are
displayed in red.
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
4.Verifying learning results
Flaw Detection
Adjust the set value for judgment to verify if the inspection
is performed correctly. Make adjustments while
inspecting a few objects for verification as necessary.
The areas color-displayed in Contrast view are the parts
detected as difference.
For a problem like this
A large area without defect has been detected.
Adjust [Defect Strength] and [Defect Size] while viewing the detection screen.
If excessive detection has been performed, change [Defect Strength] to a higher (large value) setting.
To ignore small defects, set a larger value for [Defect Size].
A quality image is detected in error as a defective image.
If a quality image is detected in error as a defective image, the number of quality images learned may not be
sufficient.
In this case, left-click
and learn it additionally as a quality image.
Detection is completed, but NG judgment is not given.
Set the upper limit for defect volume. Make adjustments based on the defect volume for each region.
2-46 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
To verify if detection is correctly performed on the images adjusted in the past
When a defective sample is registered, correct detection can be verified later.
Capture a defective image.
Left-click
.
Moves to the defective sample registration screen.
Left-click "Save" to register the image currently displayed as a defective sample image.
When several defective images are registered, left-click [Close] and return to [Verify/Judge] screen.
3
Left-click
.
Verify if detection is correctly performed for registered defective sample images.
When all defective sample images are correctly detected, settings are complete.
If detection cannot be correctly performed, select the target image and go to Step 4.
4
Adjust [Defect Strength] and [Defect Size] while viewing the detection screen.
Confirm that only the area different from quality image is displayed in color. For excessive detection,
change [Defect Strength] to a higher (large value) setting. For non-detection, change it to a lower (small
value) setting. Make adjustments so that only desired areas for detection may be displayed in color.
To ignore small defects, set a larger value for [Defect Size].
5
Set the upper limit for defect volume.
If multiple regions are set, the upper limit for defect volume can also be changed individually for each
region.
6
Left-click
again.
If detection is correctly performed, settings are complete.
If detection cannot be correctly performed, return to Step 4. Or, verify whether a quality image has been
mistakenly registered as a defective sample image.
CV-X UM_E
2-47
Flaw Detection
1
2
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning

Select Contrast.
Since the number of images for composite image learning
is not sufficient, register the erroneously detected image
for additional learning. If an incorrect position is found,
reset the position adjustment and correct it.
Detection is performed with Contrast, but NG judgment is
not given.
To verify if detection is correctly performed on the images
adjusted in the past

A large area without defect has been detected
erroneously.

A quality image is detected erroneously as a defective
image.

Corrective action
Adjust the defect strength to increase the level or value.
Reduce the upper limit value of defect size.

Register the target image as a defective sample.
Increase [Defect Enhancement] in Details of Quality
Learning
.

Unable to detect around the profile.
Increase [Noise Reduction] in Details of Quality Learning
.
Erroneous detection occurs around the profile.
Example of representative settings
• A quality image is detected erroneously as a defective image.
→ Since the number of images for composite image learning is not sufficient, register the erroneously
detected image for additional learning.
• A large area without defect has been detected in error.
→ Adjust the defect strength to increase the level or value.
Step 1
Confirmation
Set the region for position adjustment.
Confirm profile extraction status with Filtered.

Flaw Detection
Status
Status of defect detection is not visible.

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Step 2
Set the region for defect detection target.
2-48 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
Step 3
Confirmation
Left-click
and capture images for composite
image learning.
Left-click
after registration of 30
images or more as a guideline.

Flaw Detection
Confirmation
Measure many inspection target objects for verification.
If an item which should be OK is NG, perform additional
learning.
Confirm effect of additional learning with Contrast.
(Multiple additional learning can be more effective.)

Step 4
Confirmation
If weak (close to blue) defect on the overall screen is
detected, set the defect strength to normal or higher.
Check defect detection status with Contrast.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-49
Detect Flaw with Quality Learning
Step 6
Confirmation
Measure many inspection target objects for verification.
Set the upper limit of defect Volume so that an NG item
can be NG.
Check the defect detection status and the defect volume
measured value with Contrast.

Flaw Detection
2-50 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Total Defect Area
Detect Flaw with Total Defect Area
Recognizes a portion whose intensity difference exceeds a specific level as a defect or dirt in the inspection
region, and outputs its total amount (size).
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Defect" (Page 2-306).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example when the scan direction is either X or Y or
XY
When a defect on the surface of a target is detected
• Scan Direction: XY
Segment
Detected defect
Total area
20
Inspection region
Target
Example when the scan direction is circumferential
Segment
Shifts in a circumferential
direction
Inspection region
Target
Detected defect
When a crack or burr on the surface of a target is
detected
• Scan Direction: X
Total area
55
When a crack or burr on the round surface of a target
is detected
• Scan Direction: Circumference
Total area
35
CV-X UM_E
2-51
Flaw Detection
"Detect Flaw with Total Defect Area" measurement
Detect Flaw with Total Defect Area
Inspection example for use
Foreign matter inspection of CCD module
Flaw Detection
Foreign matter on the CCD module surface is detected.
Defect inspection is performed in the set region and the intensity difference from the surrounding area is
calculated to set the tolerance.
Example of inspection line
2-52 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Detect Flaw with Total Defect Area
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
3
>
4
5
6
7
8
Registering reference image (Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available, register
the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
6
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the scan direction.
Select the direction to scan the region with [Scan Direction].
Set the segment size.
Sets the size of the segment used for scanning the inspection region. The current segment size is
displayed as a frame border in orange on the upper left corner of the screen.
Set the gain.
If you want to detect defects with a small difference in intensity, set the gain value to a larger number.
Point
7
8
When using a 21-megapixel or greater camera, the gain cannot be specified.
Set the defect level.
Defines the [Intensity] to be detected as a spot, foreign object or defect. It is useful for distinguishing
between a detection target and background noise. While checking the contrast, adjust accordingly until
only the detection target is displayed.
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Total Area], Specifies the range of the total defect area (summation of defect areas within the
inspection region) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-53
Flaw Detection
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Detect Flaw with Total Defect Area
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained


Light defect cannot be detected.

Thin defect like a vertical streak cannot be detected.

The segment size cannot be set to less than 4.
Since the segment size is too large for the region, reduce
the segment size.

[No valid segment is found] is displayed.
Reduce the segment size (set the size equivalent to the
minimum defect to be detected).
Remove the check from the high speed mode and reduce
the segment size.

When the defect level is increased, small defect cannot
be detected.
Increase the defect level so that only defect may be
colored.
Put a check for Individual and change the X/Y ratio of the
segment size.
Select Manual with Comparison and increase the
Compare Element.
In Scan Direction, select Y for vertical stripes and X for
horizontal stripes (when the region is ring/arc,
Circumference and Radius can be selected).
To detect defect by ignoring vertical stripes on the object
Example of representative settings
• Contrast shows color other than defect.
→ Increase the defect level so that only defect may be colored.
• When the defect level is increased, small defect cannot be detected.
→ Reduce the segment size (set the size equivalent to the minimum defect to be detected).
Step 1
Confirmation

Show the target and set the region.
Step 2
Confirmation
With Contrast, check status of defect and background.
If the background as well as defect are colored, it is
necessary to adjust the defect level.

Flaw Detection
Contrast shows color other than defect.
Check with Contrast if the difference between defect and
background can be judged by color.

Corrective action

Status
Status of defect detection is not visible.
2-54 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Total Defect Area
Step 3
Confirmation
Increase the defect level and check change of Contrast.
It is successful when the defect color remains and the
background goes off (a small defect has gone in this
example).

Flaw Detection
Confirmation
Reduce the segment size and adjust the defect level
again (set the size equivalent to the minimum defect to be
detected).
Adjust the defect level while viewing Contrast.

Step 4
Confirmation
Set the judgment conditions to make an object with defect
NG.
Check the judgment result of an NG object.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-55
Detect Flaw with Each Defect
Detect Flaw with Each Defect
Flaw Detection
"Detect Flaw with Each Defect" measurement
Recognizes a portion whose intensity exceeds a specific level as a defect or flaw in the inspection region. This
tool is used for measuring the size, position and count of the individual defect or flaw.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Defect" (Page 2-306).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example when the scan direction is either X or Y or
XY
When a defect on the surface of a target is detected
• Scan Direction: XY
Segment
Detected defect
Total area
20
Inspection region
Target
When a crack or burr on the surface of a target is
detected
• Scan Direction: X
Total area
55
When the position of a defect on the surface of a
target is detected
• Scan Direction: XY
• Grouping: ON
• Detection Count: 2
• Detection Order: Y>X: Ascend
Result of the first defect
Defect area: 70
Center of gravity:
X100, Y100
Result of the second defect
Defect area: 100
Center of gravity:
X200, Y400
2-56 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Each Defect
Inspection example for use
Appearance inspection of diapers
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
>
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
CV-X UM_E
2-57
Flaw Detection
Foreign matter on the diaper surface is detected.
Multiple defect inspections are performed in the set region and the intensity difference from the surrounding
area is calculated for each detection group to set the tolerance.
Detect Flaw with Each Defect
Flaw Detection
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set the scan direction.
Select the direction to scan the region with [Scan Direction].
5
Set the segment size.
Sets the size of the segment used for scanning the inspection region. The current segment size is
displayed as a frame border in orange on the upper left corner of the screen.
6
Set the gain.
If you want to detect defects with a small difference in intensity, set the gain value to a larger number.
Point
7
The gain cannot be set with the following conditions:
• When Fine Color is selected in Extract Colors
• When using a 21-megapixel or greater camera
• When the image size exceeds a width of 2,432 pixels or a height of 2,050 pixels
Set the defect level.
Defines the [Intensity] to be detected as a spot, foreign object or defect. It is useful for distinguishing
between a detection target and background noise. While checking the contrast, adjust accordingly until
only the detection target is displayed.
8
Set the detection count.
Specifies the maximum number of defect groups to be detected.
9
Set Fill Holes.
Setting this option to ON infills the interior portion of the group as a detected defect.
10
Set Active Border.
Excludes groups found on the border of the inspection region from the detected target. Turning this
option ON enables cancellation of objects, such as a background, that touch the inspection region
border.
11
Set Lower Defect.
Defects with an area smaller than the lower limit specified here will not be detected as a group. Increase
the value when unnecessary noise components are counted.
12
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Groups], Specifies the range of the detected number of groups judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Defect Area], Specifies the range of the defect area (of the judged label) judged as OK by setting
the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-58 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Each Defect
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained



Light defect cannot be detected.

Thin defect like a vertical streak cannot be detected.

The segment size cannot be set to less than 4.
Since the segment size is too large for the region, reduce
the segment size.
Remove the check from the high speed mode and reduce
the segment size.

[No valid segment is found] is displayed.
Reduce the segment size (set the size equivalent to the
minimum defect to be detected).
Put a check for Individual and change the X/Y ratio of the
segment size.

When the defect level is increased, small defect cannot
be detected.
Increase the defect level so that only defect may be
colored.
Select Manual with Comparison and increase the
Compare Element.
In Scan Direction, select Y for vertical stripes and X for
horizontal stripes (when the region is arc, Circumference
and Radius can be selected).
Set the upper/lower limits of Center of Gravity (X or Y) in
judgment conditions.
To detect defect by ignoring vertical stripes on the object
To set the judgment conditions with the defect position.
Example of representative settings
• Contrast shows color other than defect.
→ Increase the defect level so that only defect may be colored.
• When the defect level is increased, small defect cannot be detected.
→ Reduce the segment size (set the size equivalent to the minimum defect to be detected).
Step 1
Confirmation

Show the target and set the region.
CV-X UM_E
2-59
Flaw Detection
Contrast shows color other than defect.
Check with Contrast if the difference between defect and
background can be judged by color.

Corrective action

Status
Status of defect detection is not visible.
Detect Flaw with Each Defect
Step 2
Confirmation
With Contrast, check status of defect and background.
If the background as well as defect are colored, it is
necessary to adjust the defect level.

Flaw Detection
Confirmation
Increase the defect level and check change of Contrast.
It is successful when the defect color remains and the
background goes off (a small defect has gone in this
example).

Step 3
Confirmation
Set the judgment conditions to make an object with defect
NG.
Check the judgment result of an NG object.

Step 4
2-60 CV-X UM_E
Detect Flaw with Black & White Area
Detect Flaw with Black & White Area
Binarizes an image (black & white) to measure the area of “black” or “white”. This tool is used when performing
an inspection by judging the dirt and cracks on the solid background by area.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Area" (Page 2-267).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Measured color: Black
Inspection region
Target
The number of white
(or black) pixels are
counted.
Area
70,000 (pixels)
Inspection example for use
Pin hole inspection of steel plate
Pin hole inspection is performed on the steel plate.
Put a transmission light through pin holes and set the tolerance for the pin hole area calculated by binary
processing.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-61
Flaw Detection
"Detect Flaw with Black & White Area" measurement
Detect Flaw with Black & White Area
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Flaw Detection
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the threshold of binary.
Set the Detection Color.
Select which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
6
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
Specifies the area range to judge as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-62 CV-X UM_E
6
Detect Flaw with Black & White Area
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select black and white again of Detection Color.
Automatic binary setting does not show an ideal binary
screen.

The binary screen is totally black or white.
Select Filtered.
Flaw Detection
The binary screen is not displayed.
  
Status
The number of pixels is larger or smaller than it looks.
Perform automatic binary setting.
Drag LO on the binary histogram for adjustment.
Example of representative settings
Automatic binary setting does not show an ideal binary screen.
→ Drag LO on the binary histogram for adjustment.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Unnecessary black pixel is found in the object on the
binary screen.

Step 1
Confirmation
Drag LO on the histogram to the left and check if settings
are correct on the binary screen.
In the histogram, the range between LO and UP is white
and the range in other areas is black.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-63
Detect Flaw with Contrast with Background
Detect Flaw with Contrast with
Background
Flaw Detection
"Detect Flaw with Contrast with Background" measurement
Recognizes clusters that are darker or brighter than the background as defects or dirt, and outputs the amount
(size) of the detected defect or dirt individually. This tool is used when measuring the count of defects or dirt,
as well as their individual area and volume (total shading) and position.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Grayscale Blob" (Page 2-314).
Inspection example for use
Appearance inspection of various types of chip capacitors
It detects dirt and cracks on the surface of the chip capacitor.
It can detect both bright and dark defects from the shading difference in the set region.
Example of inspection line
2-64 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Detect Flaw with Contrast with Background
Flow of Setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
7
Reference
3
8
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
9
4
Specify the Detection Target.
Select whether “bright” or “dark” is the target
feature to detect.
5
Set the Reference Intensity.
Select the intensity value that will serve as the
reference for the intensity difference.
6
Set the Intensity Threshold Level.
Specify the lower limit for the intensity difference
that is to be detected as a blob in the range of 0 to
254.
CV-X UM_E
2-65
Flaw Detection
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Detect Flaw with Contrast with Background
7
Set the Segment Size.
When the value is increased, the noise reduction effect improves. However, since the intensity difference
that will be detected may also vary, adjust the value in a way that the target can be detected stably.
Set the cluster that is to be detected as a blob.
For more details on each setting item, see "Setting blob detection conditions" (Page 2-317).
9
Set the Judgment Conditions.
Set the tolerances (upper limit and lower limit) for the measured values.
• Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] on the [Labels] column.
• Specifies the range of the area judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] on the
[Area] column.
• Specifies the range of the volume judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] on the
[Volume] column.
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained


Select Specified in Reference Intensity and input the
value you want.

Change to Contrast view and check that the difference
between the defect and the background can be
differentiated via color.

Increase Intensity Threshold Level to show colors on
defects only.

You want to choose a value instead of it being
automatically determined by the Reference Intensity.
Select [Bright] or [Dark] on Detection Target.
Decrease the Segment Size. Set the Segment Size to the
equivalent size of the smallest defect that you want to
detect.

Corrective action
Uncheck High Speed Mode and then decrease the
Segment Size.

Status
You only want to detect either bright or dark defects.
Increase Lower Area Filter under Blob Settings.
Defect detection status is not visible.
Things other than defects are also colored in Contrast
view.
Small defects can no longer be detected if the Intensity
Threshold Level is increased.
The Segment Size cannot be set to under 4.
You only want to detect a defect with a large area.
The area is large but you do not want to detect defects
with a small shading difference.
2-66 CV-X UM_E

Flaw Detection
8
Increase Lower Volume Filter under Blob Settings.
Detect Flaw with Contrast with Background
Example of representative settings
• The area is large but you do not want to count defects with a small shading difference.
→ Increase Lower Volume Filter under Blob Settings.
Adjust the Intensity Threshold Level and Segment Size to
detect the defect.
Of the two defects, it can be seen that the lower defect is
light and the difference in shading is minor.
Change the Lower Volume Filter setting so that it is not
counted.

Confirmation
Confirmation
In [Lower Volume Filter] under [Blob Settings], input a
volume value wherein the first (top) defect will be
detected and the second (bottom) defect will not be
detected.
You can check that the defect (bottom defect) with a small
shading difference is not detected and only the defect
(top defect) with a large shading difference is detected.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-67
Flaw Detection
Step 1
Flaw on a Line
Flaw on a Line
Flaw Detection
"Flaw on a Line" measurement
Detects portions far from the reference line of the outline calculated from information of multiple edges as
defects (burrs/flaws). This tool is used when the profile to be measured is “Line”.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Defect" (Page 2-328).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example with a rectangle or rotated rectangle
inspection region and a line Reference Line
Example of a rectangle inspection region and a line
Reference Line
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Reference line: Line
• Scan direction: ↑
• Defect scan direction: +
Defect width
Defect level
Reference line (line)
Defect size (colored area)
Defect position
Inspection region
Defect width
5
Defect level
3.328
Edge scan
direction
Defect size
12.285
Defect position
X: 128.235, Y: 54.332
Inspection example for use
Chipping inspection of glass edge for FPD
Chipping of FPD glass edge is detected.
Calculate the Reference Line (line) with Profile Defect and set the tolerance for irregularity between the
Reference Line and the detection point.
Example of inspection line
2-68 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Flaw on a Line
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
4
5
6
7
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the edge detection conditions.
Set the scan direction or edge direction to detect the edge.
See "What are the profile position/profile width/profile defect tools?" (Page 9-42) for more details.
5
Set the defect scan direction.
Select the direction to detect the defect from among [+], [-], [+/-] and [+/- (Each)]
6
7
Set the detection threshold.
Defines the distance (in pixels) from the reference line and detects an exceeding value as a defect.
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Defect Count], Specifies the range of the number of detected defects judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Total Size], Specifies the range of the total defect size judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-69
Flaw Detection
2
3
4
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Flaw on a Line
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained


While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
Reduce the detection threshold while viewing the Defect
Level Wave.
Increase the Max. Segments.
The curve of the object is detected erroneously as a
defect.
To detect only burr or only dent.
To detect only edges that become dark
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
 
The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.

A minor defect cannot be detected as defect count.

A minor defect cannot be detected as detection point.
Select [Flaw on a Curve] from the tool catalog.
Select [+] or [-] from the defect scan direction.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Example of representative settings
• A minor defect cannot be detected as detection point.
→ While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift (the
segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
• A minor defect cannot be detected as defect count.
→ Reduce the detection threshold while viewing the Defect Level Wave.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
To detect a minor defect, reduce the segment size and
the segment shift while viewing the Filtered image.
Check change of the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered.

Flaw Detection
Select [→] for the trend direction (The scan direction is
automatically [↓].)

Corrective action

Status
An edge in the vertical direction cannot be detected.
2-70 CV-X UM_E
Flaw on a Line
Step 3
Confirmation
To count a minor defect as defect count, reduce the
detection threshold while viewing the Filtered image.
Confirm with Filtered that a minor defect is marked and
counted in the defect count.

Flaw Detection
Confirmation
In the judgment conditions, set the upper limit of the
defect count to 0.
Inspect OK and NG objects and confirm that the correct
judgment is performed.

Step 4
CV-X UM_E
2-71
Flaw on a Ring
Flaw on a Ring
Flaw Detection
"Flaw on a Ring" measurement
Detects portions far from the reference line of the outline calculated from information of multiple edges as
defects (burrs/flaws). This tool is used when the profile to be measured is “Circle” or “Oval”.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Defect" (Page 2-328).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example of a ring inspection region and a circle
Reference Line
Example of a ring inspection region and a circle
Reference Line
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Reference Line: Circle
• Scan Direction: Out to Center
• Defect Scan Direction: ±
Defect position
Defect size (colored area)
Reference Line (circle)
Inspection region
Defect level
Defect width
Edge scan direction
Defect position
X: 125.432, Y: 198.631
Example of an arc inspection region and an oval
Reference Line
Defect size
11.376
Defect position
Defect width
Defect level
2.149
Defect size (colored area)
Defect level
Inspection region
Defect width
4
Reference Line (oval)
Example of an arc inspection region and an oval
Reference Line
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Reference Line: Oval
• Scan Direction: Center to Out
• Defect Scan Direction: -
Edge scan direction
Defect position
X: 285.211, Y: 98.631
Defect width
5
Defect size
14.562
Defect level
5.482
2-72 CV-X UM_E
Flaw on a Ring
Inspection example for use
Burr inspection of washers
Burr/chipping of washers is detected. Calculate the Reference Line (curve) with Profile Defect and set the
tolerance for irregularity between the Reference Line and the detection point.
Example of quality image
Flaw Detection
Example of inspection line
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-73
Flaw on a Ring
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Flaw Detection
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
4
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
5
6
7
8
Set the edge detection conditions.
Set the scan direction or edge direction to detect the edge.
See "What are the profile position/profile width/profile defect tools?" (Page 9-42) for more details.
5
6
7
8
Select the reference line.
Select the reference line suitable for the profile of the inspection target from [Circle] or [Oval].
Set the defect scan direction.
Select the direction to detect the defect from among [+], [-], [+/-] and [+/- (Each)]
Set the detection threshold.
Defines the distance (in pixels) from the reference line and detects an exceeding value as a defect.
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Defect Count], Specifies the range of the number of detected defects judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Total Size], Specifies the range of the total defect size judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
2-74 CV-X UM_E
Flaw on a Ring
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained


While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
Reduce the detection threshold while viewing the Defect
Level Wave.
Increase the Max. Segments.
The curve of the object is detected erroneously as a
defect.
To detect only burr or only dent.
To detect only edges that become dark
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
 
The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.

A minor defect cannot be detected as defect count.

A minor defect cannot be detected as detection point.
Select [Flaw on a Curve] from the tool catalog.
Select [+] or [-] from the defect scan direction.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Example of representative settings
• A minor defect cannot be detected as detection point.
→ While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift (the
segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
• A minor defect cannot be detected as defect count.
→ Reduce the detection threshold while viewing the Defect Level Wave.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Confirmation
To detect a burr on the outer circumference, select [Out to
Center] from the scan direction.
Check change of the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-75
Flaw Detection
Select [Out to Center] from the scan direction.

Corrective action

Status
Burr on the outer circumference cannot be detected.
Flaw on a Ring
Step 3
Confirmation
To detect a minor defect, reduce the segment size and
the segment shift while viewing the Filtered image.
Check change of the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered.

Flaw Detection
Confirmation
To count a minor burr or crack as a defect, reduce the
detection threshold while viewing the Filtered image.
Confirm with Filtered that a minor defect is marked and
counted in the defect count.

Step 4
Confirmation
In the judgment conditions, set the upper limit of the
defect count to 0.
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.

Step 5
2-76 CV-X UM_E
Flaw on a Curve
Flaw on a Curve
Detects portions far from the reference line of the outline calculated from information of multiple edges as
defects (burrs/flaws). This tool is used when the profile to be measured is “Free Curve Line”.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Defect" (Page 2-328).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example of a rectangle inspection region and a
curved Reference Line
Example of a rectangle inspection region and a
curved Reference Line
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Scan direction: ↑
• Defect scan direction: +
Edge scan direction
Defect
Conceptual detection image
Trend direction
Defect position
X:125.343, Y:52.784
Conceptual detection image
Edge position points
detected (Profile
Position method)
Defect level graph
Defect scan direction
+ side
Defect graph
Defect scan direction
+ side
Defect level
3.453
Reference line
determined from
the edge points
- side
Defect width
Defect width
3
Defect size (colored area)
10.384
Defect level
Defect threshold
- side
Defect threshold
Defect size (colored area)
Defect position
Defect level wave
CV-X UM_E
2-77
Flaw Detection
"Flaw on a Curve" measurement
Flaw on a Curve
Inspection example for use
Short shot inspection of plastic cap
Flaw Detection
Short shot of plastic cap is inspected.
Calculate the Reference Line (curve) with Profile Defect and set the tolerance for irregularity between the
Reference Line and the detection point.
Example of inspection line
2-78 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Flaw on a Curve
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the edge detection conditions.
Set the scan direction or edge direction to detect the edge.
See "What are the profile position/profile width/profile defect tools?" (Page 9-42) for more details.
5
Set the smoothing range.
Increase the smoothing range to make the free curve smoother to the shape of the measured target.
To make more precipitous, decrease it.
CV-X UM_E
2-79
Flaw Detection
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Flaw on a Curve
6
Set the defect scan direction.
Select the direction to detect the defect from among [+], [-], [+/-] and [+/- (Each)].
7
Set the detection threshold.
Flaw Detection
Defines the distance (in pixels) from the reference line and detects an exceeding value as a defect.
8
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Defect Count], Specifies the range of the number of detected defects judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Total Size], Specifies the range of the total defect size judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
2-80 CV-X UM_E
Flaw on a Curve
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained

Select [→] for the trend direction (The scan direction is
automatically [↓].)

While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).

Corrective action
Reduce the detection threshold while viewing the Defect
Level Wave.
The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.
To detect only burr or only dent.
To detect only edges that become dark
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.

A minor defect cannot be detected as defect count.
  
A minor defect cannot be detected as detection point.
Increase the Max. Segments.
Select [+] or [-] from the defect scan direction.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Example of representative settings
• A minor defect cannot be detected as detection point.
→ While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift (the
segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
• A minor defect cannot be detected as defect count.
→ Reduce the detection threshold while viewing the Defect Level Wave.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Confirmation
To obtain a reference line along the object, select [Out to
Center] from the scan direction.
Check change of the edge detection point (orange) and
the reference line (green) with Filtered.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-81
Flaw Detection
Status
Edge in the vertical direction cannot be detected (for
rectangle region).
Flaw on a Curve
Step 3
Confirmation
To obtain a reference line (Free Curve Line) along the
object, change the smoothing range from 15 to 3.
Confirm that the reference line is along the object with
Filtered.

Flaw Detection
Confirmation
Inspect an NG image and adjust the detection threshold
so that the defect may be detected.
Check the value of the defect height on Detected Defect
Position and Defect Level Wave with Filtered.

Step 4
Confirmation
Set the judgment conditions so that the NG image will be
NG during defect detection.
Inspect OK and NG objects and confirm that the correct
judgment is performed.

Step 5
2-82 CV-X UM_E
Alignment
Alignment
Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
q Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
Count
ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
Function List
Position Adjustment
CV-X UM_E
2-83
Pattern Match (Shading) Position
Pattern Match (Shading) Position
Alignment
"Pattern Match (Shading) Position" measurement
Detects the most similar portion to the image pattern registered in advance to output the position and angle of
the target object.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Pattern Search" (Page 2-270).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Search region
CV
Pattern region
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
CV
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: X>Y: Ascend
• Judged Label: 0
Registered pattern
(0,0)
Y
C
CV V
CV CV
CV
During operation
Y
X
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
Tilt Angle
Search region
CV
C
CV V
CV CV
Match %
98
Count
3
Origin
(0,0)
Tilt Angle
-30°
X
Inspection example for use
Inspection for incorrect affixing position of container label
Incorrect position/slope of the label affixed on the bottle is detected.
Search for the label pattern registered in advance on the screen and set the tolerance for the position/slope
detected.
Example of inspection line
2-84 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Pattern Match (Shading) Position
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
4
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 147).
Set the angle range.
Specifies the angle range by +/- for tilted search targets. The smaller the angle range is, the shorter the
processing time.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Position], Specifies the range of the X coordinate and Y coordinate judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Angle], Specifies the range of the detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
• In [Match %], Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-85
Alignment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Pattern Match (Shading) Position
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select Filtered.
The target is searched, but there is positional deviation.
The target is out of the search region and detection is
unstable.
To judge acceptance by position gap

 
A wrong target is searched.
Increase [Angle Range].
Increase [Detection Count].
Set [Search Sensitivity] to [High].
Set [Accuracy] to [High].

Multiple targets are available, but only one can be
searched.
Reduce the [Min. Match %].
Change the pattern region to a region which does not go
out of the search region.

A target with large inclination cannot be searched.
Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment
Conditions].
Example of representative settings
• The target is out of the search region and detection is unstable.
→ Change the pattern region to a region which does not go out of the search region.
• To judge acceptance by position gap
→ Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment conditions].
Step 1
Confirmation
Show the target and set the pattern region.
Confirm the detection position (green arrow) with Filtered.

Alignment
Some targets cannot be searched.
  
Status
Detect point is not visible.
Step 2
If the pattern is out of the search region as shown in the
figure below, search is unstable.
2-86 CV-X UM_E
Pattern Match (Shading) Position
Step 3
Confirmation
Set the pattern region again so that it may not be out of
the search region.
Confirm that the label is correctly searched even if the
overall image is moved upward.

Alignment
Step 4
Set the angle range, search sensitivity, accuracy and
minimum match % as necessary.
Confirmation
Set upper/lower limit of [Position X/Y] in [Judgment
Conditions].
Confirm that NG is detected by inspecting an object with
position gap.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-87
Pattern Match (Profile) Position
Pattern Match (Profile) Position
Alignment
"Pattern Match (Profile) Position" measurement
Searches the portion most resemblant to the profile information registered in advance. The object is followed
even if a crack, overlapping or surface variation exists on it because the tool searches for the pattern using the
profile information.
For more details on items of
, refer to the base tool "ShapeTrax3(A)" (Page 2-274) (for CV-X400/X300/X100
Series) or "ShapeTrax2" (Page 2-281) (for CV-X200 Series).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: From upper left (downward)
• Judged Label: 0
Search region
Pattern region
Origin
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
(0,0)
Y
Registered pattern
Match %
85
Count
3
Scale
1.025
Origin
X
Tilt Angle
+30°
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
During operation
(0,0)
X
Tilt Angle
Search region
Y
Even when some part is missing,
a pattern is detected based on
the registered pattern.
Even when a pattern is
overlapped, it is detected based
on the registered pattern.
Inspection example for use
Alignment of LCD panel
The alignment mark position on the LCD panel is detected by profile. Search the mark shape registered in
advance on the screen and control the position using the detected position/slope information.
Example of inspection line
2-88 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Pattern Match (Profile) Position
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
6
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
4
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 147).
Set the angle range.
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
5
6
Set the Feature Extraction Conditions (Page 2-279).
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Position], Specifies the range of the X/Y coordinates judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
• In [Angle], Specifies the range of detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
• In [Match %], Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-89
Alignment
2
3
4
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Pattern Match (Profile) Position

Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction
Conditions].
Reduce [Min. Match %].
Target with different size cannot be searched.
Increase [Detection Count].

Multiple targets are available, but only one can be
searched.
Change the upper and lower limits of [Scale].

Some targets cannot be searched.

Corrective action
• Select [Fast] in [Fine Search Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax3)
or select [Low] in [Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax2).
Processing time is long.



Change the [Rotation Direction-Added Search] setting to
detect the rotation direction (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/
X300 Series only).

Only the detected angle is unstable for a workpiece with
rotational symmetry.
Reduce [Minimum Distance] and [Angle Range] in
[Minimum Settings] ([Minimum Distance] and [Angle
Range] operate in logical AND condition).
Select [All] for [Elimination Target] under [Eliminate Overlap].
Change the settings such as the feature reference region,
search target specification, etc. in [Select By Feature Pixel
Count] (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/X300 Series only).
Select [Detailed] (for ShapeTrax3) or [High] (for ShapeTrax2)
in [Search Sensitivity] under [Feature Extraction Conditions].
Overlapping targets cannot be detected.
You do not wish to detect overlapping targets.
You wish to additionally specify whether to include or
exclude the object that was detected as a detection
target based on the features around the pattern.
There is little Current Feature and the search is not stable.
Increase the [Allowable Distortion].

Sometimes searching cannot be done because of the
angle of view or the object’s tilt.
Put a check mark on [Reverse Detect].

Target with reverse shading cannot be searched.
Use the eraser tool and erase unnecessary features, or
edit the features via the Feature Drawing Tool.

• Narrow down the search region.
Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the
search is not stable.

Alignment
Status
Registered Feature and Current Feature are not visible.

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Example of representative settings
• Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the search is not stable.
→ Erase unnecessary feature with the eraser tool.
• Registered Feature and Current Feature are not visible.
→ Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction Conditions].
Step 1
Show the target and set the pattern region and the search
region.
2-90 CV-X UM_E
Pattern Match (Profile) Position
Step 2
Confirmation
Select the eraser tool and determine the size. Drag on the
unnecessary feature and delete it.
Fine segment of registered feature is displayed in green,
and coarse segment is displayed in light blue.

Alignment
Confirmation
Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction
Conditions].
Current feature is displayed in blue. Confirm that the area
to be detected as feature is displayed in blue.

Step 3
Confirmation
Set the angle range and the minimum match % as
necessary.
Capture multiple images and check if stable detection is
performed.

Step 4
CV-X UM_E
2-91
Edge Position
Edge Position
Alignment
"Edge Position" measurement
Detects the edge (X or Y direction) in the inspection region and outputs the position. This tool is used when
detecting the coordinate of the edge (edge face) of the target object.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Position" (Page 2-291).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example: When the inspection region is a rectangle
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Edge to be detected
(0,0)
X
Target
Inspection region
Y
Detected position
X: 560, Y: 480
Edge count
3
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
Inspection example for use
Inspection of switch incorrect assembly position
Assembly position of the switch cover is detected.
With Edge Position, detect the positions of the switch base edge and the cover edge, and set the tolerance
for deviation from the reference position.
Example of inspection line
2-92 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Edge Position
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
7
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set the scan direction.
Specify the direction to scan the edge within the inspection region.
5
Set the edge direction.
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among [Light to
Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
6
Set the edge sensitivity.
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
See "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
7
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Position], Specifies the range of the edge position (X or Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-93
Alignment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Edge Position
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select Filtered.
Multiple edges are available, but only one can be
detected.
Angled detected edge position is not stable.


Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected
edge position.

Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.
Set the scan direction to [←].
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
While viewing the Edge Graph, increase the lower edge
intensity or the edge sensitivity.

A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.

To detect only edges that become dark
Increase the Max. Edge Count.
Put a checkmark on the Angled Edge Detection or
increase the Edge Filter Width.
Example of representative settings
• A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is detected erroneously.
→ Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge Graph.
• Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes inward.
→ Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected edge position.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Check the Detected Edge Position (green line) and the
Edge Graph (red line) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Change the scan direction to [←] and set the edge
sensitivity to 10.
Check if gray and black edges are detected (yellow line
of the edge graph is edge sensitivity).

Alignment
To detect an edge on the right, not on the left
  
Status
Edge graph is not displayed.
2-94 CV-X UM_E
Edge Position
Step 3
Confirmation
Change the scan direction to [→] and set the edge filter
width to 1.
While viewing the detected edge position, check if the
vertex of the curve can be detected.

Alignment
Step 4
Set the upper/lower limit of position X for judgment with
the position coordinate.
CV-X UM_E
2-95
Position and Angle of Line
Position and Angle of Line
Alignment
"Position and Angle of Line" measurement
Detects multiple edge points in the inspection region to find a line from the information of the edge points. This
tool measures the angle formed by the horizontal axis and the found line.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Position" (Page 2-319).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
In the instance the scan direction is [→] and the trend
direction is [↓]
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Trend
direction
Target
Maximum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Minimum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
Scan direction
Trend
direction
Maximum edge
position measured
300
Minimum edge
position measured
160
Scan direction
Inspection example for use
Positioning of solar battery cell
Alignment of the solar battery cell is detected.
Obtain multiple detection points with the trend edge, draw an approximate line, and control the position
using the intersection information of two lines.
Example of inspection line
2-96 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Position and Angle of Line
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Left-click 2 points on the line for detection.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
If the line is not detected, remove check from [Optimize] and adjust the setting values.
See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the setting values.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Line Angle], Specifies the range of the detected line angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
CV-X UM_E
2-97
Alignment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Position and Angle of Line
Corrective action

Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction
and edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Example of representative settings
The desired line is not detected.
→ Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction and edge direction.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Remove check from [Optimize] as necessary and set the
scan direction/edge direction/edge sensitivity.
Verify the angle of the detected line.

Alignment
Status
The desired line is not detected.

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
2-98 CV-X UM_E
Center Position of Circle
Center Position of Circle
Detects multiple edge points in the inspection region to find a circle from the information of the edge points.
The central coordinate and radius/diameter of the circle found are outputted.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Position" (Page 2-319).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
When the trend direction is [Clockwise]
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: Clockwise
• Scan Direction: Out to Center
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Maximum detected
edge on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Inspection region
Scan direction
Segment size
Trend direction
Target
Minimum detected
edge on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Trend direction
Maximum radius measured
400
Minimum radius measured
300
Inspection example for use
Inspection of washer center position offset
Punching position offset of washer is detected.
Detect the outer ring and the inner ring of a washer with the trend edge, obtain two circles and set the
tolerance for center position offset of two circles.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-99
Alignment
"Center Position of Circle" measurement
Center Position of Circle
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Alignment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
2
3
4
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Left-click 3 points on the circle for detection.
3
4
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
If the circle is not detected, remove check from [Optimize] and adjust the setting values.
See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the setting values.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Detect Circle Center], Specifies the range of the detected circle center (X/Y) judged as OK by
setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Detect Circle Radius/Diameter], Specifies the range of the detected circle diameter/radius judged
as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-100 CV-X UM_E
Center Position of Circle
Corrective action

Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction
and edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Example of representative settings
The desired circle is not detected.
→ Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction and edge direction.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Confirmation
Remove check from [Optimize] as necessary and set the
scan direction/edge direction/edge sensitivity.
Verify the center coordinates of the detected circle.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-101
Alignment
Status
The desired circle is not detected.

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Edge Slope
Edge Slope
Alignment
"Edge Slope" measurement
Measures the slope angle from two detected edges .
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Angle" (Page 2-294).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the edge angle is "+75°"
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment
Detected position
(Midpoint of the detected
edges)
Inspection region
Angle
Target
Angle
+75°
Detected edge
When the edge angle is "-20°"
Inspection region
Detected edge
Angle
Segment
Detected Position
(Midpoint of the detected edges)
Target
Inspection example for use
Inspection of capacitor lead terminal slope
Bend of the capacitor lead terminal is detected.
Obtain the lead terminal slope with the edge angle and set the tolerance for the assembly angle against the
capacitor unit.
Inspection line
2-102 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Edge Slope
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
7
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set the scan direction.
Specifies the direction to scan the edge within the inspection region.
• Forward: Detects the edge in the direction of the rotation angle on the rotated rectangle.
• Reverse: Detects the edge in the direction opposite to the rotation angle on the rotated rectangle.
5
Set the edge direction.
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among [Light to
Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
6
Set the edge sensitivity.
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
See "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
7
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Angle], Specifies the angle range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]. The
angle range can be specified within -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
CV-X UM_E
2-103
Alignment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Edge Slope
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select Filtered.
To detect an edge on the right, not on the left
To detect only edges that become dark

A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
To give NG if edges were not found
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Narrow the region width or increase the edge filter width.

To give NG if the angle changes greatly
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Select Individual for edge settings and set detection
conditions each for 1st edge and 2nd edge.

To set different detection conditions for two regions
Select [Reverse] from the scan direction.
Set the upper/lower limits for Angle in judgment conditions.


If slope of the inspection target is large, correct position
cannot be detected.
Set the lower limit for Edge Count to [1] in judgment
conditions.
Example of representative settings
• If slope of the inspection target is large, correct position cannot be detected.
→ Narrow the region width or increase the edge filter width.
• To set different detection conditions for two regions
→ Select Individual for edge settings and set detection conditions each for 1st edge and 2nd edge.
• To give NG if edges were not found
→ Set the lower limit for Edge Count to [1] in judgment conditions.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge line (green line) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Measure the inspection target which is heavily bent.
Confirm that edges are not correctly detected.

Alignment
  
Status
Edge graph is not displayed.
2-104 CV-X UM_E
Edge Slope
Step 3
Confirmation
Narrow the width of the region so that the edge may be
detected.
Confirm that the angle of a target which is heavily bent is
correctly measured.

Alignment
Confirmation
If the problem is not solved in Step 3, increase the filter
width of the 2nd edge.
Check if the edge positions in the two regions are
changed.

Step 4
Confirmation
Set the lower limit for the angle and then set the lower limit
for Edge Count to [1] in judgment conditions.
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-105
Edge Position to Circumference
Edge Position to Circumference
Alignment
"Edge Position to Circumference" measurement
Detects the edge (circumferential direction) in the inspection region and outputs the angle. This tool is used
when detecting the angle of an edge along the circumference of the target object.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Position" (Page 2-291).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is an arc
Example showing an inspection under the following conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
When the inspection region is an arc
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Target
Edge to be detected
Edge count
1
Inspection region
Distance
+60°
Tilt Angle
Angle
+240°
When the inspection region is a ring
Example showing an inspection under the following
conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Counter Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Dark to Light
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Starting angle
Can be specified as desired.
Tilt Angle
Target
Inspection example for use
Needle position inspection of vehicle meter
Needle position of the speedometer is detected.
Detect the needle position with the edge position to circumference and set the tolerance for offset from the
reference position.
Example of inspection line
2-106 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Edge Position to Circumference
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
7
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set the scan direction.
Specifies the direction for scanning for the edge in the inspection region. Select the direction between
[Clockwise] and [Counterclockwise].
5
Set the edge direction.
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among [Light to
Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
6
Set the edge sensitivity.
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
See "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
7
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Angle], Specifies the range of the angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
The range can be specified within 0.000 (degrees) to 360.000 (degrees).
CV-X UM_E
2-107
Alignment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Edge Position to Circumference
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select Filtered.
Multiple edges are available, but only one can be
detected.
Angled detected edge position is not stable.


Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Change the Starting Angle.

Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected
edge position.

The pattern in front of the target is detected as an edge.
Set the scan direction to [Counterclockwise].
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
While viewing the Edge Graph, increase the lower edge
intensity or the edge sensitivity.

A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.

To detect only edges that become dark
Increase the Max. Edge Count.
Put a check mark on the Angled Edge Detection or
increase the Edge Filter Width.
Example of representative settings
• The pattern in front of the target is detected as an edge.
→ Change the Starting Angle.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Change the starting angle to 90 so as not to detect the
pattern in front of the target erroneously.
Verify the position of the detected edge.

Alignment
To detect edge counterclockwise
  
Status
Edge graph is not displayed.
2-108 CV-X UM_E
Edge Position to Circumference
Step 3
Confirmation
Set the upper/lower limits of angle in judgment conditions.
Check if the OK/NG image can be judged.

Alignment
CV-X UM_E
2-109
Tip Position
Tip Position
Alignment
"Tip Position" measurement
Detects multiple edge points in the inspection region and measures the position of the maximum (minimum)
point among them. This tool is used when detecting a prominent point such as the tip of a projection or a dent.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Position" (Page 2-319).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
In the instance the scan direction is [→] and the trend
direction is [↓]
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Trend
direction
Target
Maximum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Minimum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
Scan direction
Trend
direction
Maximum edge
position measured
300
Minimum edge
position measured
160
Scan direction
Inspection example for use
Detection of tip position for injection needle
Tip position for assembly of the injection needle is detected.
Detect the needle tip position with the Profile Position and set the tolerance for offset from the reference
position.
Example of inspection line
2-110 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Tip Position
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
4
6
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the edge detection conditions.
Set the scan direction or edge direction to detect the edge.
See "What are the profile position/profile width/profile defect tools?" (Page 9-42) for more details.
5
6
With [Judged Label], specify the judged label which is detected as tip.
Selects the segment to be judged from among maximum, minimum or specified number.
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Position (X/Y) (Maximum)], Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit] for the maximum value of the detected position (X or Y coordinate) (in case where the
inspection region is [Rectangle] and the trend direction is [To Right] or [Down]).
• In [Position (X/Y) (Minimum)], Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit] for the minimum value of the detected position (X or Y coordinate) (in case where the
inspection region is [Rectangle] and the trend direction is [To Right] or [Down]).
• In [Distance (Max.)], Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]
for the maximum value of the detected distance (in case where the inspection region is [Rotated
Rectangle]).
• In [Distance (Min.)], Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]
for the minimum value of the detected distance (in case where the inspection region is [Rotated
Rectangle]).
CV-X UM_E
2-111
Alignment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Tip Position
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
To detect only edges that become dark
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.


Select [Min.] in Judged Label (initial value is [Max.]).

The desired detect point is on the top, but the detect point
on the bottom is the target.
Increase the Max. Segments.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.

The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.
While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Example of representative settings
• When the region is rectangle, edge in the vertical direction cannot be detected.
→ Select [→] for the trend direction (The scan direction is automatically [↓].)
• The tip cannot be detected.
→ Reduce the segment size and the segment shift while viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Select [→] for the trend direction (The scan direction is
automatically [↓].)
Check change of the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered.

Alignment
When detecting a sharp target, the tip cannot be
detected.
Select [→] for the trend direction (The scan direction is
automatically [↓].)

Corrective action

Status
An edge in the vertical direction cannot be detected.
2-112 CV-X UM_E
Tip Position
Step 3
Confirmation
While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
Check change of the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered.

Alignment
Confirmation
Select [Min.] in Judged Label.
Check the position of the judgment target segment (green
frame) with Filtered.

Step 4
Confirmation
Set the upper/lower limits of position Y (minimum) in
judgment conditions.
Execute the measurement and confirm that NG is
detected with the position shift.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-113
Cluster Position
Cluster Position
Alignment
"Cluster Position" measurement
Detects a cluster of the extracted color to output the center of gravity. This tool is available for the target object
whose shape or orientation is indefinite, but whose color or brightness is definite.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Blob" (Page 2-310).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Blobs are measured, filtered, and identified based on
numerous criteria. When identified, they can be ordered
based on the size or detection direction.
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: Y>X: Ascend
• Judged Label: 2
�
�
�
�
�
Detected blob
�
�
Inspection region
Target
Labels
5
�
�
Target blob
Center of gravity: X: 600, Y: 460
Area: 20,000
Roundness: 0.85
�
Inspection example for use
Inspection of battery terminal welding position offset
Terminal welding position of the battery is detected.
Detect the welding position with blob and set the tolerance for the detected point.
Example of inspection line
2-114 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Cluster Position
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
6
7
8
9
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the binary conditions.
Select the detection color.
Select which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
6
Set the Lower Area Filter.
Excludes a blob which is smaller than the specified lower limit. Increase the value in case an
unnecessary noise component is counted.
CV-X UM_E
2-115
Alignment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Cluster Position
7
Set Fill Holes.
Fills the inside of the blob with the detection color. Setting to ON enables calculation of the area and
positional coordinates of a blob filled-in with the detection color.
Alignment
8
Set Active Border.
Excludes the blobs on the frame border of the inspection region. Setting to ON removes the background
from the inspection region.
9
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Labels], Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
• In [Center of Gravity], Specifies an acceptable range for the position of the center of gravity (X,Y) by
setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-116 CV-X UM_E
Cluster Position
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select black with the detection color.
Inspection is not stable in gray binary.
To specify Judged Label with not size but position.
Select Color to Binary in Extract Colors and extract the
desired colors.
Change the detection order.

To detect the target with the same area filter of which the
center is not extracted
  
Not to detect a target touching the inspection region
To detect only round targets
To detect only long and thin targets
Reduce the Lower Area Filter.

A small target is not detected.
Increase the detection count to the number required.

31 or more cannot be detected.
Put a check mark on Fill Holes.
Put a check mark on Active Border.
Set Roundness in Selection.
Set Axes Ratio in Selection.
Example of representative settings
• The black point is not the detection target.
→ Select black with the detection color.
• To specify Judged Label with not size but position.
→ Change the detection order.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the binary status with Filtered.

Step 1
Confirmation
Select black with the detection color.
Confirm that the black hole can be detected.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-117
Alignment
  
Status
The black point is not the detection target.
Cluster Position
Step 3
Confirmation
To detect the black hole at the bottom, select Y: Descend
in detection order.
Confirm that the black hole at the bottom is detected.

Alignment
Step 4
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.

Set the upper/lower limits of Center of Gravity X/Y in
judgment conditions.
2-118 CV-X UM_E
Dark or Bright Cluster Position
Dark or Bright Cluster Position
Detects clusters that are darker or brighter than the background and outputs their center of gravity.
Measurement is stable even under the conditions of inconstant target object shape or position and varying
brightness within the inspection region.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Grayscale Blob" (Page 2-314).
CV-X UM_E
2-119
Alignment
"Dark or Bright Cluster Position" measurement
Dark or Bright Cluster Position
Flow of Setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Alignment
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
3
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
4
5
6
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
7
Reference
3
4
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
8
9
Specify the Detection Target.
Select whether “bright” or “dark” is the target
feature to detect.
5
Set the Reference Intensity.
Select the intensity value that will serve as the reference for the intensity difference.
6
Set the Intensity Threshold Level.
Specify the lower limit for the intensity difference that is to be detected as a blob in the range of 0 to 254.
2-120 CV-X UM_E
Dark or Bright Cluster Position
7
Set the Segment Size.
When the value is increased, the noise reduction effect improves. However, since the intensity difference
that will be detected may also vary, adjust the value in a way that the target can be detected stably.
Set the cluster that is to be detected as a blob.
Alignment
8
For more details on each setting item, see "Setting blob detection conditions" (Page 2-317).
9
Set the Judgment Conditions.
Set the tolerances (upper limit and lower limit) for the measured values.
• Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] on the [Labels] column.
• Specifies an acceptable range for the position of the center of gravity (X,Y) by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit] under [Center of Gravity].
CV-X UM_E
2-121
Dark or Bright Cluster Position
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained


Select Specified in Reference Intensity and input the
value you want.

Change to Contrast view and check that the difference
between the cluster and the background can be
differentiated via color.
Increase Intensity Threshold Level to show colors on
defects only.
Decrease the Segment Size. Set the Segment Size to the
equivalent size of the smallest cluster that you want to
detect.
Increase Lower Area Filter under Blob Settings.
Cluster and background detection status are not visible.
Things other than clusters are also colored in Contrast
view.
Small clusters can no longer be detected if the Intensity
Threshold Level is increased.
You only want to detect a defect with a large area.
Example of representative settings
• Things other than clusters are also colored in Contrast view.
Increase Intensity Threshold Level to show colors on defects only.
• Small clusters can no longer be detected if the Intensity Threshold Level is increased.
Decrease the Segment Size (set to the equivalent size of the smallest cluster that you want to detect).
Step 1
Confirmation
• Set the inspection region and check the detection
status in Contrast view.
You can see detections other than clusters by changing
the display between Contrast View and Raw View 2.
• Contrast View:

Alignment
You want to choose a value instead of it being
automatically determined by the Reference Intensity.
Select [Bright] or [Dark] on Detection Target.

You want to detect either the bright or dark cluster.

Corrective action

Status
• Raw View 2:
2-122 CV-X UM_E
Dark or Bright Cluster Position
Step 2
Increase the Intensity Threshold Level, change the Segment
Size to the same size as the cluster, and check detection
status.
You can check that only clusters are detected by changing
the display between Contrast View and Raw View 2.
• Contrast View:

Alignment
• Raw View 2:
Step 3
In the [Center of Gravity] column under [Judgment
Conditions], check the Grav. Cent. X and Grav. Cent. Y
coordinates.
CV-X UM_E
2-123
Measurements &
Dimensions
Measurements & Dimensions
Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
Alignment
q Measurements & Dimensions
Count
ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
Function List
Position Adjustment
2-124 CV-X UM_E
Operation of special measurements & dimensions tool
Operation of special measurements & dimensions tool
The special measurements & dimensions tools have different setting method of regions from other tools. By
directly specifying with the mouse the part to measure, the region is created automatically. For details, see the
explanations in the following pages.
CV-X UM_E
2-125
Measurements & Dimensions
The following 14 measurements & dimensions tools are available. Using measurements & dimensions tools,
line or circle can be detected to calculate the distance or angle. Point, line or circle which has already been
detected can be specified to calculate the distance or angle.
• Points Distance
• Point/Line Distance
• Lines Distance
• Point/Circle Distance
• Line/Circle Distance
• Circles Distance
• Line Passing Two Points
• Bisection of Two Lines
• Angle Formed by Two Lines
• Line/V-Line Intersection
• Two Lines Intersection
• Center of Quadrangle
• Midpoint of Points
• Circle Passing Three Points
Operation of special measurements & dimensions tool
Setting point
Method 1: Detect point using an edge.
Measurements & Dimensions
Left-click the point for detection.
Rotated rectangle region is displayed and the edge is detected in the arrow direction.
If the desired points are not detected, Region Size, Rotated Rectangle Angle, Extract Colors, Image
Enhance and Detection Conditions can be adjusted. See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details
about the setting values.
To adjust the region
Drag the green point to change the region size or drag the red point to rotate the region.
Method 2: Refer to the detected point of other tools.
Left-click and specify the green cross displayed on the screen.
If detected points of multiple tools are present at the left-click position, a selection screen appears.
To redo point setting
Left-click [Reset] on the Detect Point screen to redo setting of the point from the beginning.
2-126 CV-X UM_E
Operation of special measurements & dimensions tool
Setting line
Method 1: Detect line using an edge.
Left-click the 1st point on the line.
Measurements & Dimensions
1
To reset the 1st point, left-click [Undo].
2
Left-click the 2nd point on the line.
The region to detect a line appears. Detect the line from the information of multiple points.
If the desired line is not detected, Region Size, Extract Colors, Image Enhance and Detection Conditions
can be adjusted. See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the setting values.
To adjust the region
When two light blue points are dragged to be on the line for detection, a line can be correctly recognized.
To adjust the detection range, drag the green point to change the region size.
Method 2: Refer to the detected line of other tools.
Left-click and specify the green line displayed on the screen.
If multiple detected lines are present at the left-click position, a selection screen appears.
To redo line setting
Left-click [Reset] on the Detect Line screen to redo setting of the line from the beginning.
CV-X UM_E
2-127
Operation of special measurements & dimensions tool
Setting circle
Method 1: Detect circle using an edge (ring region).
Measurements & Dimensions
1
Left-click the 1st point on the circle.
2
Left-click the 2nd point on the circle.
To reset the 1st point and 2nd point, left-click [Undo].
3
Left-click the 3rd point on the circle.
The ring region to detect a circle appears. Detect the circle from the information of multiple points.
If the desired circle is not detected, Region Size, Extract Colors, Image Enhance and Detection
Conditions can be adjusted. See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the setting values.
To adjust the region
When three light blue points are dragged to be on the circle for detection, a circle can be correctly recognized.
To adjust the detection range, drag the green point to change the region size.
2-128 CV-X UM_E
Operation of special measurements & dimensions tool
Method 2: Detect circle using an edge (arc region).
Use an arc to detect a circle from partial information of a circle.
3
Left-click
.
Measurements & Dimensions
1
2
Left-click the starting point on the arc.
Left-click the end point on the arc.
To reset the starting point and end point of the arc, left-click [Undo].
4
Left-click the center point on the arc.
The arc region to detect a circle appears. Detect the circle from the information of multiple points.
If the desired circle is not detected, Region Size, Extract Colors, Image Enhance and Detection
Conditions can be adjusted. See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the setting values.
To adjust the region
When three light blue points are dragged to be on the arc for detection, an arc can be correctly recognized.
To adjust the detection range, drag the green point to change the region size.
Method 3: Refer to the detected circle of other tools.
Left-click and specify the green circle displayed on the screen.
If detected circles of multiple tools are present at the left-click position, a selection screen appears.
To redo circle setting
Left-click [Reset] on the Detect Circle screen to redo setting of the circle from the beginning.
CV-X UM_E
2-129
Measure Distance
Measure Distance
Measurements & Dimensions
Points Distance
Measures the distance between two points. There are two manners to specify the point: Detecting within each
tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Image of the Measurement
P1
Distance between points
P1 and P2
P2
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Specify the 1st point (Page 2-126).
Specify the 2nd point (Page 2-126).
After setting the points, confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the part to measure the distance of.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the distance.
• In [Distance], specify the range of the distance judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• In [Distance (by Direction)], specify the range of distance (X/Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
2-130 CV-X UM_E
Measure Distance
Point/Line Distance
Measures the length of the perpendicular line drawn from the point to the line. There are two manners to
specify the point and line: Detecting within each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in
advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
L
P
Distance between
point P and line L
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Set the point (Page 2-126).
Set the line (Page 2-127).
After setting the point and line, confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the part to measure the
distance of.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the distance.
• In [Distance], specify the range of the distance judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-131
Measure Distance
Lines Distance
Measures the perpendicular distance from the center of line 1 area to line 2. There are two manners to specify
the line: Detecting within each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
L1
L2
Distance between
the region center of
line L1 and line L2
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Specify the 1st line (Page 2-127).
Specify the 2nd line (Page 2-127).
After setting the two lines, confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the part to measure the distance of.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the distance.
• In [Distance], specify the range of the distance judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
2-132 CV-X UM_E
Measure Distance
Point/Circle Distance
Measures the distance from a point to the center of the circle. There are two manners to specify the point and
circle: Detecting within each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
C
P
Distance between
point P and circle C
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Set the point (Page 2-126).
Set the circle (Page 2-128).
After setting the point and circle, confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the part to measure the
distance of.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the distance.
• In [Distance], specify the range of the distance judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• In [Distance (by Direction)], specify the range of distance (X/Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-133
Measure Distance
Line/Circle Distance
Measures the perpendicular distance from the center of the circle to a line. There are two manners to specify
the line and circle: Detecting within each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in
advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
C
L
Distance between
line L and circle C
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Set the line (Page 2-127).
Set the circle (Page 2-126).
After setting the line and circle, confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the part to measure the
distance of.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the distance.
• In [Distance], specify the range of the distance judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
2-134 CV-X UM_E
Measure Distance
Circles Distance
Measures the distance between each center of two circles. There are two manners to specify the circle:
Detecting within each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
C1
C2
1
Distance between
circles C1 and C2
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Set the 1st circle (Page 2-128).
Set the 2nd circle (Page 2-128).
After setting the two circles, confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the part to measure the distance of.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the distance.
• In [Distance], specify the range of the distance judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• In [Distance (by Direction)], specify the range of distance (X/Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-135
Measure Width
Measure Width
Measurements & Dimensions
Edge Width
Detects two edges in the inspection region to measure the width between the edges.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Width" (Page 2-297).
Image of the Measurement
When the inspection region is a rectangle or a rotated
rectangle
• When [Outer Gap] is the selected measurement mode
• When [Specified Edges] is the selected measurement
mode (Example: 3→4)
�
��
Edge angle to be measured
��
�
Edge width to be measured
Inspection region
Target
Inspection region
Target
• When [Inner Gap] is the selected measurement mode
Edge width to be measured
Inspection region
Target
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Specified Edges
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
• Edge 1: 1
• Edge 2: 2
• When [Specified Edges] is the selected measurement
mode (Example: 1→2)
Edge width
160
Edge width to be measured
� �� � � �
Inspection region
� � � � � �
Target
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
• When [Outer Gap] is the selected measurement mode
Edge angle to be measured
Inspection region
Target
When the inspection region is an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Specified Edges
• Scan Direction: (Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Both
• Edge 1: 1
• Edge 2: 2
Angle
60°
• When [Inner Gap] is the selected measurement mode
Edge angle to be measured
Inspection region
Target
2-136 CV-X UM_E
�
��
�
Measure Width
1
Prepare a tool.
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
3
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
7
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select the detection mode.
Select the type of the edge width to be measured among [Outer Gap], [Inner Gap] and [Specified Edges].
• Outer Gap: Measures the distance between the outermost edges within the region.
• Inner Gap: Measures the distance between the innermost edges within the region.
• Specified Edges: Measures the distance between the specified edges.
5
Set the scan direction.
Specify the direction for scanning for the edge in the inspection region. Select one of the four options,
[→], [←], [↓] and [↑].
6
Set the edge sensitivity.
Set the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Refer to "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
7
Set the judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Edge Width], specify the range of the edge width judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-137
Measurements & Dimensions
>
Measure Width
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Edge graph is not displayed.
Select Filtered.
Angled detected edge position is not stable.

Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.

Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.
Select [←] from the scan direction.
Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected
edge position.

A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Increase the lower edge intensity while viewing the Edge
Graph. Or increase the edge sensitivity.
Put a check mark on the Angled Edge Detection. Or
increase the Edge Filter Width.
Example of representative settings
• To measure inside edge width, not outside
→ Select Inner Gap from the select mode.
• A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is detected erroneously.
→ Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge Graph.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Check the Detected Edge Position (green line) and the
Edge Graph (red line) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
To detect the tip of the curve, reduce the edge filter width.
Confirm the detected edge position (green line) with
Filtered.

Measurements & Dimensions
To detect the edge from right to left
Select Inner Gap from the select mode.

To measure inside edge width, not outside
  
Status
2-138 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
Step 3
Confirmation
To measure the inside width, set the select mode to inner
gap and adjust the edge sensitivity while viewing the
Edge Graph.
Check the Detected Edge Position (green line) and the
Edge Graph (red line) with Filtered.

Measurements & Dimensions
Step 4
Set the upper/lower limits based on the measured value
of the reference image.
CV-X UM_E
2-139
Measure Width
Width (Max./Min.)
Detects multiple edges in the inspection region and measures the width between the edges. This tool is useful
because the maximum and minimum width in a certain range can be measured at one time.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Width" (Page 2-323).
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
• In the instance the scan direction is [→] and the trend
direction is [↓]
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Outer Gap
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Maximum detected edge
width on target
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Trend direction
Maximum edge width
500
Minimum detected edge
width on target
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
Target
Scan direction
Minimum edge width
200
Trend direction
Scan direction
1
Prepare a tool.
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
3
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
4
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
5
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
6
2-140 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select the detection mode.
• Outer gap: Measures the distance between the outermost edges within the region.
• Inner gap: Measures the distance between the innermost edges within the region.
5
Set the detection conditions.
Set the scan direction, edge direction and other conditions to detect the edge.
See "What are the profile position/profile width/profile defect tools?" (Page 9-42) for more details about
the setting values.
6
Set the judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Edge Width Maximum], specify the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] for the maximum value of the detected edge width.
• In [Edge Width Minimum], specify the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] for the minimum value of the detected edge width.
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-141
Measurements & Dimensions
3
Measure Width
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
To judge quality image with max./min. width.

Select Min. in Judged Label (initial value is Max.).

To detect only edges that become dark
Increase the Max. Segments.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.

Checking of the minimum point of the width is desired, but
the maximum point is the one displayed in green.
While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.

The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.
Select Inner Gap from the Detection Conditions - Select
Mode.
Set the lower limit of the minimum and the upper limit of
the maximum in judgment conditions.
Example of representative settings
• To measure max./min. inside width of the inspection target.
→ Select Inner Gap from the Detection Conditions - Select Mode.
• To judge quality image with max./min. width.
→ Set the lower limit of the minimum and the upper limit of the maximum in judgment conditions.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Select Inner Gap from the select mode.
Confirm that the position of the edge detection point
(orange) moved to the inside.

Measurements & Dimensions
When detecting a sharp target, the tip cannot be
detected.

To measure the inner width of the inspection target

Corrective action

Status
2-142 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
Step 3
Confirmation
Change the scan direction to [←] and then set Edge
Sensitivity (%) to 40.
Confirm that the white band area on the right side can be
detected.

Measurements & Dimensions
Confirmation
To judge a defective image as NG, set the lower limit of
the minimum and the upper limit of the maximum using
the measured value of the reference image as a reference
in judgment conditions.
Measure a defective image and check the measured
value and whether an NG judgment is given.

Step 4
CV-X UM_E
2-143
Measure Width
Diameter (Max./Min.)
Measurements & Dimensions
Detects multiple edges in the inspection region and measures the diameter of the circular object or the width
of the circumferential object. This tool is useful because the maximum/minimum diameter (width) in a certain
range can be measured at one time.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Width" (Page 2-323).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
• In the instance the trend direction is [Clockwise] and
the select mode is [Outer Gap]
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Outer Gap
• Trend Direction: Clockwise
• Scan Direction: Center → Out
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Maximum detected
radial width
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Target
Trend direction
Maximum outer gap width
100
Segment size
Minimum detected
radial width
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
• In the instance the trend direction is [Clockwise] and the
select mode is [Outer Diameter]
Minimum outer gap width
30
Trend
direction
Thickest part of
the measurement target
Segment shift
Inspection region
Maximum detected diameter
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Segment size
Minimum detected diameter
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Target
Trend direction
Thinnest part of
the measurement target
When the inspection region is a ring
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Outer Diameter
• Trend Direction: Clockwise
• Scan Direction: Center to Out
• Edge Direction: Both
Maximum outer diameter
100
Minimum outer diameter
30
Trend direction
2-144 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
1
Prepare a tool.
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
3
>
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
5
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
6
3
4
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Select the detection mode.
• Outer gap: Measures the distance between the outermost edges within the region.
• Inner gap: Measures the distance between the innermost edges within the region.
• Outer diameter: Measures the outer diameter of the edge detected by two segments opposing in a
circle area.
• Inner diameter: Measures the inner diameter of the edge detected by two segments opposing in a
circle area.
5
Set the detection conditions.
Set the scan direction, edge direction and other conditions to detect the edge.
See "What are the profile position/profile width/profile defect tools?" (Page 9-42) for more details about
the setting values.
6
Set the judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Edge Width Maximum], specify the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] for the maximum value of the detected edge width.
• In [Edge Width Minimum], specify the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] for the minimum value of the detected edge width.
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-145
Measurements & Dimensions
>
Measure Width
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
To judge quality image with max./min. width.

Select Min. in Judged Label (initial value is Max.).

To detect only edges that become dark
Increase the Max. Segments.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.

Checking of the minimum point of the width is desired, but
the maximum point is the one displayed in green.
While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.

The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.
Select Outer Gap from the Detection Conditions - Select
Mode.
Set the lower limit of the minimum and the upper limit of
the maximum in judgment conditions.
Example of representative settings
• To measure the max./min. width of the inspection target.
→ Select Outer Gap from the Detection Conditions - Select Mode.
• To judge quality image with max./min. width.
→ Set the lower limit of the minimum and the upper limit of the maximum in judgment conditions.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Select Outer Gap from Select Mode.
Confirm that the judged label display (green frame)
changes to Width (Outer Gap).

Measurements & Dimensions
When detecting a sharp target, the tip cannot be
detected.

To measure the max./min. width of the inspection target.

Corrective action

Status
2-146 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
Step 3
Confirmation
To check the minimum width position, select Min. in
Judged Label.
Confirm that the judged label display (green frame)
changes from the maximum point to the minimum point.

Measurements & Dimensions
Confirmation
To judge a defective image as NG, set the lower limit of
the minimum and the upper limit of the maximum using
the measured value of the reference image as a reference
in judgment conditions.
Measure a defective image and check the measured
value and whether an NG judgment is given.

Step 4
CV-X UM_E
2-147
Measure Width
Center Pitch
Recognizes an odd-nth edge and an even-nth edge among multiple edges detected in the inspection region
to couple them in a pair. The distance between each center of the two edges is output as a center pitch.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Pitch" (Page 2-300).
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Scan Direction: (Counter Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Both
Center pitch
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Center pitch
Pitch angle
Maximum: 47°
Minimum: 44°
Average: 45°
Pitch count
4
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
2-148 CV-X UM_E
2
3
4
5
6
Measure Width
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select the scan direction.
Specify the direction for scanning for the edge in the inspection region. Select one of the four options,
[→], [←], [↓] and [↑].
5
Set the edge sensitivity.
Set the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
See "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
6
Set the judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Count], specify the range of the pitch count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• In [Pitch], specify the range of the pitch judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-149
Measurements & Dimensions
3
Measure Width
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Edge graph is not displayed.
Select Filtered.

To make an abnormal pitch target NG with Center Pitch.

Angled detected edge position is not stable.

Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected
edge position.
Increase the lower edge intensity while viewing the Edge
Graph. Or increase the edge sensitivity.

Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Put a check mark on the Angled Edge Detection. Or
increase the Edge Filter Width.
Set the upper/lower limits in Judgment Conditions - Pitch.
Example of representative settings
• To measure the multiple widths of the inspection target, not the interval of the inspection targets.
→ Select Gap Pitch from the tool catalog, not Center Pitch.
• To make an abnormal pitch target NG with Center Pitch.
→ Set the upper/lower limits in Judgment Conditions - Pitch.
Step 1
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Check the Detected Edge Position (green line) and the
Edge Graph (red line) with Filtered.

Measurements & Dimensions
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Select [←] from the scan direction.

To detect the edge from right to left
 
Status
Step 2
Set the upper/lower limits based on the maximum/
minimum of the reference image in Judgment Conditions Pitch.
2-150 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
Step 3
Confirmation
Measure an image where the lead position is off.
Check the Detected Edge Position with Filtered and the
maximum/minimum in Judgment Conditions.

Measurements & Dimensions
CV-X UM_E
2-151
Measure Width
Gap Pitch
Recognizes an odd-nth edge and an even-nth edge among multiple edges detected in the inspection region
to couple them in a pair. The distance between the edges of the pair is output as a gap pitch.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Pitch" (Page 2-300).
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
Gap pitch
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Pitch
Maximum: 200
Minimum: 180
Average: 190
Pitch count
3
Gap pitch
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
2-152 CV-X UM_E
2
3
4
5
6
Measure Width
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select the scan direction.
Specify the direction for scanning for the edge in the inspection region. Select one of the four options,
[→], [←], [↓] and [↑].
5
Set the edge sensitivity.
Set the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
See "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
6
Set the judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Count], specify the range of the pitch count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• In [Pitch], specify the range of the pitch judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-153
Measurements & Dimensions
3
Measure Width
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Edge graph is not displayed.
Select Filtered.

To make an abnormal pitch target NG with Gap Pitch.

Angled detected edge position is not stable.

Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected
edge position.
Increase the lower edge intensity while viewing the Edge
Graph. Or increase the edge sensitivity.

Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Put a check mark on the Angled Edge Detection. Or
increase the Edge Filter Width.
Set the upper/lower limits in Judgment Conditions - Pitch.
Example of representative settings
To make an abnormal pitch target NG with Gap Pitch.
→ Set the upper/lower limits in Judgment Conditions - Pitch.
Step 1
Set the upper/lower limits based on the maximum/
minimum of the reference image in Judgment Conditions Pitch.
Step 2
Confirmation
Measure an image with abnormal lead width.
Check the Detected Edge Position with Filtered and the
maximum/minimum in Judgment Conditions.

Measurements & Dimensions
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Select [←] from the scan direction.

To detect the edge from right to left.
 
Status
2-154 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
Gap Pitch (Edge Pairs)
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle or a rotated
rectangle
When the inspection region is a rectangle or a rotated
rectangle
Example 1: Results of a gap pitch measurement
performed under the following conditions
• Scan Direction (1st scan): →
• Scan Direction (2nd scan): →
• Edge Direction (1st scan): Light to Dark
• Edge Direction (2nd scan): Dark to Light
• Gap Pitch Upper Limit: 99999.999
• Gap Pitch Lower Limit: 0050.000
Width to be measured
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
Width to be measured
Width
Maximum: 100
Minimum: 70
Average: 80
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Pair count
4
Target
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Reference
Width to be measured
The central pin is below the gap pitch lower limit
and is therefore excluded from the search.
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
CV-X UM_E
2-155
Measurements & Dimensions
Detects two edges (an edge pair) in the inspection region to measure the width between the edges.In
detecting two edges, various scan conditions and pairing configurations can be set in detail. This more
stabilizes the detection.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Pairs" (Page 2-303).
Measure Width
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Measurements & Dimensions
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
4
5
6
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Select the desired scan to adjust out of the 1st scan and the 2nd scan.
Select the scan direction.
Specify the direction for scanning for the edge in the inspection region. Select one of the four options,
[→], [←], [↓] and [↑].
Select the edge direction.
Specify a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among [Light to
Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
7
8
Set the edge sensitivity.
Set the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
See "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
Set the judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Count], specify the range of the pair count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Width], specify the range of the pair width judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
2-156 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Angled detected edge position is not stable.
To make an abnormal pitch target NG


Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.

Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.
Check the Edge Graph for confirmation.
Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected
edge position.

A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Change the scan direction and the edge direction of the
1st scan and the 2nd scan in Detection Conditions - Scan.
Increase the lower edge intensity while viewing the Edge
Graph. Or increase the edge sensitivity.

The detected edge position of the 1st scan or the 2nd
scan is unknown.
Select Center Pitch from the tool catalog, not Gap Pitch
(Edge Pairs).
Put a check mark on the Angled Edge Detection. Or
increase the Edge Filter Width.
Set the upper/lower limits in Judgment Conditions - Width.
Example of representative settings
• To measure the pitch other than the initial value
→ Change the scan direction and the edge direction of the 1st scan and the 2nd scan in Detection
Conditions - Scan.
• The detected edge position of the 1st scan or the 2nd scan is unknown.
→ Check the Edge Graph for confirmation.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Check the Detected Edge Position (green line) and the
Edge Graph (red line) with Filtered.

Step 1
Confirmation
Check the scan direction and the edge direction of the 1st
scan and the 2nd scan in Detection Conditions - Scan.
Confirm that with the initial value, the 1st scan detects the
edge from the left end to the right and the 2nd scan
detects the edge from the right end to the left, and that
measurement is taken from a large pitch.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-157
Measurements & Dimensions
To measure the pitch other than the initial value
Select Filtered.

To measure Center Pitch, not Gap Pitch (Edge Pairs)

Edge graph is not displayed.

Corrective action

Status
Measure Width
Confirmation
At this time, the lead width is desired to be measured in
pitch. For the 1st scan, change the scan direction to [→]
and the edge direction to [Dark to Light].
In the Edge Graph, confirm that only the edge at the 1st
scan position is detected.
Confirmation
For the 2nd scan, change the scan direction to [→] and
the edge direction to [Light to Dark].
In the Edge Graph, confirm that only the edge at the 2nd
scan position is detected. Also confirm that the maximum
value and the minimum value of the measurement results
are close.

Step 4
Step 5
Confirmation
Set the upper/lower limits of Judgment Conditions - Width
so that an image with abnormal lead width may be
distinguished.
Measure an image with abnormal lead width and confirm
that it can be correctly judged as NG.

Measurements & Dimensions

Step 3
2-158 CV-X UM_E
Measure Width
Points Distance
Measures the distance between two points. There are two manners to specify the point: Detecting within each
tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
P1
Distance between
points P1 and P2
P2
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Specify the 1st point. (Page 2-126).
Specify the 2nd point. (Page 2-126).
After setting the two points, confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the part to measure the distance of.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the distance.
• In [Distance], specify the range of the distance judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
• In [Distance (by Direction)], specify the range of distance (X/Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-159
Measure Width
Peak-to-Peak Width
Measurements & Dimensions
Measures distances between multiple edge pairs in the inspection region, detects upper and lower (or left and
right) peaks and measures the distance between the peaks (P-P width). This tool is useful because the
maximum and minimum widths in a certain range can be measured at one time.
For the detailed item settings
, see the base tool "Profile Width" (Page 2-323).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example: When the inspection region is a rectangle
In the instance the scan direction is Forward and the trend
direction is [↓].
Example: When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Select Mode: Outer Gap
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: Forward
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Minimum detected
peak-to-peak width
Minimum
peak-to-peak width
100
Trend direction
Maximum detected
peak-to-peak width
Trend direction
Inspection region
Maximum
peak-to-peak width
450
Target
Scan direction
Scan direction
1
Prepare the tool.
Add the tool (Page 1-32).
>
>
Register a reference image
(Page 1-26).
2
3
4
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
5
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
2-160 CV-X UM_E
6
Measure Width
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select the detection mode.
• Outer Gap: Measures the distance between the outermost edges within the region.
• Inner Gap: Measures the distance between the innermost edges within the region.
5
Set the detection conditions.
Set the scan direction, edge direction and other conditions to detect the edge.
Refer to "What are the profile position/profile width/profile defect tools?" (Page 9-42) for more details on
the setting values.
6
Set the judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Max. Peak to Peak Width], specify an acceptable range by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] for the detected maximum peak-to-peak width (Max. P-P width).
• In [Min. Peak to Peak Width], specify an acceptable range by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] for the detected minimum peak-to-peak width (Min. P-P width).
• You can also left-click the
displayed on the measurement item to apply correction to the
measurement for that particular item. For more details, refer to "Correcting individual measurement
results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
CV-X UM_E
2-161
Measurements & Dimensions
3
Measure Width
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
When detecting a sharp target, the tip cannot be
detected.
While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
To judge quality image by max./min. peak-to-peak width
 
Increase the Max. Segments.
Select [Light to Dark] from Edge Direction.

To detect only edges that become dark.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.

The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.

Corrective action
Set the lower limit of the minimum and the upper limit of
the maximum in judgment conditions.
Example of representative settings
When detecting a sharp target, the tip cannot be detected.
→ While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment
shift (the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered,
and check that the tip of the inspection target has not
been detected.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Reduce the segment size and segment shift.
Check that a detection point is displayed on the tip.

Measurements & Dimensions
Status
2-162 CV-X UM_E
Line/Angle
Line/Angle
Detects multiple edges in the inspection region to find a line from information of the edges. The angle formed
by the horizontal axis and the found line is measured.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Position" (Page 2-319).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
In the instance the scan direction is Forward and the
trend direction is [↓]
When the inspection region is a rectangle/rotated
rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: Forward
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Trend
direction
Target
Maximum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Minimum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
Trend
direction
Maximum edge
position measured
300
Minimum edge
position measured
160
Scan direction
Scan direction
1
Prepare a tool.
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
3
>
4
Registering reference image (Page
1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Left-click 2 points on the line for detection
to specify the line.
The region is automatically created.
For correction, select
.
CV-X UM_E
2-163
Measurements & Dimensions
Line along with Profile
Line/Angle
Measurements & Dimensions
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
If the line is not detected, remove check from [Optimize] and adjust the set value.
See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the set value.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In "Line Angle", Specifies the range of the detected line angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
2-164 CV-X UM_E
Line/Angle
Corrective action
The desired line is not detected.

Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction
and edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Example of representative settings
The desired line is not detected.
→ Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction and edge direction.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Confirmation
Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan
direction/edge direction/edge sensitivity as necessary.
Verify the angle of the detected line.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-165
Measurements & Dimensions
Status

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Line/Angle
Line Passing Two Points
Finds the line passing through two positions to measure the angle formed by the horizontal axis and that line.
There are two manners to specify the position: Detecting within each tool and referencing the detected position
of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
P1
Line passing P1 and P2
P2
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Specify the 1st point. (Page 2-126).
Specify the 2nd point. (Page 2-126).
Confirm that the desired line for detection is displayed in light blue.
4
Select the angle for measurement.
Confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the desired area for angle measurement.
5
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the angle.
In [Detected Line Angle], Specifies the range of the detected line angle judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to
180.000 (degrees).
2-166 CV-X UM_E
Line/Angle
Bisection of Two Lines
Finds the bisector between the lines 1 and 2 to measure the angle formed by the horizontal axis and that line.
There are two manners to specify the lines: Detecting within each tool and referencing the detect position of
other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
L1
Median of L1 and L2
L2
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
4
Specify the 1st line (Page 2-127).
Specify the 2nd line (Page 2-127).
Select the median for measurement.
Confirm that the desired median for detection is displayed in light blue.
5
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the angle.
In [Median Angle], Specifies the range of the angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -90.000 (degrees) to 90.000 (degrees).
CV-X UM_E
2-167
Line/Angle
Angle Formed by Two Lines
Measures the angle formed by the lines 1 and 2. There are two manners to specify the lines: Detecting within
each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
L1
Angle formed by L1 and L2
L2
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
4
Specify the 1st line (Page 2-127).
Specify the 2nd line (Page 2-127).
Select the angle for measurement.
Confirm that a light blue line is displayed at the desired area for angle measurement.
5
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the angle.
In [Angle], Specifies the range of angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
The angle can be specified in the range of 0.000 (degrees) to 360.000 (degrees).
2-168 CV-X UM_E
Intersection/Center
Intersection/Center
Outputs the intersection coordinate formed by the line and the perpendicular from a point to a line. There are
two manners to specify the point and line: Detecting within each tool and referencing the detected position of
other tools set in advance.
Image of the Measurement
L
P
1
Intersecting point of L
and the perpendicular
line from P
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Specify a line (Page 2-127).
Specify a point (Page 2-126).
After setting a line and a point, confirm that the desired intersection position for detection is indicated by
a light blue cross.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the position coordinate.
In [Intersection], Specifies the range of X/Y coordinate judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-169
Measurements & Dimensions
Line/V-Line Intersection
Intersection/Center
Two Lines Intersection
Outputs the intersection coordinate of two lines. There are two manners to specify the line: Detecting within
each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
Intersecting point of
L1 and L2
L1
L2
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Specify the 1st line (Page 2-127).
Specify the 2nd line (Page 2-127).
After specifying the two lines, confirm that the desired intersection position for detection is indicated by
a light blue cross.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the position coordinate.
In [Intersection], Specifies the range of X/Y coordinate judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
2-170 CV-X UM_E
Intersection/Center
Center of Quadrangle
Outputs the central coordinate of the quadrangle consisting of four lines. There are two manners to specify the
lines: Detecting within each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
L2
L3
L1
L4
1
Average coordinate of 4 vertices
of quadrangle formed
by L1/L2/L3/L4
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
4
5
Specify a line for the upper side (Page 2-127).
Specify a line for the right side (Page 2-127).
Specify a line for the lower side (Page 2-127).
Specify a line for the left side (Page 2-127).
After specifying the 4 sides, confirm that the desired center position for detection is indicated by a light
blue cross.
If the 4 sides are not specified in clockwise or counterclockwise order, the center cannot be correctly
detected.
6
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the position coordinate.
In [Center], Specifies the range of X/Y coordinate judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-171
Intersection/Center
Midpoint of Points
Outputs the midpoint coordinate between two points. There are two manners to specify the point: Detecting
within each tool and referencing the detected position of other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
P1
Midpoint between
P1 and P2
P2
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
Specify the 1st point (Page 2-126).
Specify the 2nd point (Page 2-126).
After specifying the two points, confirm that the desired midpoint position for detection is indicated by a
light blue cross.
4
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the position coordinate.
In [Midpoint], Specifies the range of X/Y coordinate judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
2-172 CV-X UM_E
Detect Circle
Detect Circle
Detects multiple edges in the inspection region to find a circle from the information of the edges. The center
coordinate and radius/diameter of the found circle are output.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Position" (Page 2-319).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
When the trend direction is [Clockwise]
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: Clockwise
• Scan Direction: Out to Center
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Maximum detected
edge on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Inspection region
Scan direction
Segment size
Trend direction
Target
Minimum detected
edge on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Trend direction
Maximum radius measured
400
Minimum radius measured
300
CV-X UM_E
2-173
Measurements & Dimensions
Circle along with Profile
Detect Circle
1
Prepare a tool.
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Measurements & Dimensions
>
3
>
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Left-click 3 points on the desired circle.
The region is automatically created.
Left-click
3
4
for correction.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
If the circle is not detected, remove the checkmark from [Optimize] and adjust the setting
values.
See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the setting values.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Detect Circle Center], Specifies the range of the detected circle center (X/Y) judged as OK by
setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Detect Circle Radius/Diameter], Specifies the range of the detected circle diameter/radius judged
as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.
Increase the Max. Segments.
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
2-174 CV-X UM_E

To detect only edges that become dark
 
Status
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Detect Circle
Circle Passing Three Points
Finds a circle passing through three positions to output the central coordinate, the radius and diameter of that
circle. There are two manners to specify the position: Detecting by this tool and referencing to the position
detected by other tools set in advance.
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
P1
Circle passing P1/P2/P3
P2
P3
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
4
Specify the 1st point (Page 2-126).
Specify the 2nd point (Page 2-126).
Specify the 3rd point (Page 2-126).
After specifying the three points, confirm that the desired circle for detection is displayed in light blue
line.
5
Edit the conditions for judgment.
Set the tolerance for judgment relating to the position coordinate.
• In [Detected Circle Center], Specifies the range of the detected circle center (X/Y) judged as OK by
setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Detected Circle Radius/Diameter], Specifies the range of the detected circle diameter/radius
judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-175
Detect Point
Detect Point
Measurements & Dimensions
Pattern Match (Shading) Position
Detects the most similar portion to the image pattern registered in advance to output the position of the
detected target.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Pattern Search" (Page 2-270).
Image of the Measurement
During pattern registration
Search region
CV
Registered pattern
Origin
Y
X
CV
C
CV V
CV CV
2-176 CV-X UM_E
(0,0)
Y
X
C
CV V
CV CV
CV
During operation
(0,0)
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: X>Y: Ascend
• Judged Label: 0
Pattern region
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
CV
Measurement Example
Tilt Angle
Search region
Tilt Angle
-30°
Match %
98
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
Count
3
Detect Point
1
Prepare a tool.
2
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
4
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47)
as necessary.
Set the angle range.
Specifies the angle range by +/- for tilted search targets. The smaller the angle range is, the shorter the
processing time.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Position], Specifies the range of the X coordinate and Y coordinate judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Angle], Specifies the range of the detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
• In [Match %], Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-177
Measurements & Dimensions
>
Detect Point
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Detect point is not visible.
Select Filtered.
The target is searched, but there is positional deviation.
The target is out of the search region and detection is
unstable.
To judge acceptance by position gap

 
A wrong target is searched.
Increase [Angle Range].
Increase [Detection Count].
Set [Search Sensitivity] to [High].
Set [Accuracy] to [High].

Multiple targets are available, but only one can be
searched.
Change the pattern region to a region which does not go
out of the search region.
Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment
Conditions].
Example of representative settings
• The target is out of the search region and detection is unstable.
→ Change the pattern region to a region which does not go out of the search region.
• To judge acceptance by position gap
→ Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment Conditions].
Step 1
Confirmation
Show the target and set the pattern region.
Confirm the detected position (green arrow) with Filtered.

Measurements & Dimensions
A target with large inclination cannot be searched.
Reduce the [Min. Match %].

Some targets cannot be searched.
  
Status
Step 2
If the pattern is out of the search region as shown in the
figure below, search is unstable.
2-178 CV-X UM_E
Detect Point
Step 3
Confirmation
Set the pattern region again so that it may not be out of
the search region.
Confirm that the label is correctly searched even if the
overall image is moved upward.

Measurements & Dimensions
Step 4
Set the angle range, search sensitivity, accuracy and
minimum match % as necessary.
Confirmation
Set upper/lower limit of [Position X/Y] in [Judgment
Conditions].
Confirm that NG is detected by inspecting an object with
position gap.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-179
Detect Point
Pattern Match (Profile) Position
Measurements & Dimensions
Detects the most similar portion to the profile information registered in advance to output the position and
angle of the detected object. The object is chased even if a crack, overlapping or surface variation exists on it
because the tool searches the pattern using the profile information.
For more details on items of
, refer to the base tool "ShapeTrax3(A)" (Page 2-274) (for CV-X400/X300/X100
Series) or "ShapeTrax2" (Page 2-281) (for CV-X200 Series).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Detection Order: From upper left (downward)
• Judged Label: 0
Search region
Pattern region
Origin
(0,0)
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
Y
X
Tilt Angle
+30°
Match %
85
Count
3
Registered pattern
During operation
Origin
(0,0)
X
Tilt Angle
Search region
Y
Even when some part is missing,
a pattern is detected based on
the registered pattern.
Even when a pattern is
overlapped, it is detected based
on the registered pattern.
2-180 CV-X UM_E
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
Scale
1.025
Detect Point
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
6
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
4
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47)
as necessary.
Set the angle range.
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
5
6
Set the Feature Extraction Conditions (Page 2-279).
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Position], Specifies the range of the X/Y coordinates judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
• In [Angle], Specifies the range of detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
• In [Match %], Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-181
Measurements & Dimensions
2
3
4
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Detect Point
Registered Feature and Current Feature are not visible.

Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction
Conditions].
Reduce [Min. Match %].
Target with different size cannot be searched.
Increase [Detection Count].

Multiple targets are available, but only one can be
searched.
Change the upper and lower limits of [Scale].

Some targets cannot be searched.

Corrective action
• Select [Fast] in [Fine Search Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax3)
or select [Low] in [Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax2).
Processing time is long.



Change the [Rotation Direction-Added Search] setting to
detect the rotation direction (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/
X300 Series only).

Only the detected angle is unstable for a workpiece with
rotational symmetry.
Reduce [Minimum Distance] and [Angle Range] in
[Minimum Settings] ([Minimum Distance] and [Angle
Range] operate in logical AND condition).
Select [All] for [Elimination Target] under [Eliminate Overlap].
Change the settings such as the feature reference region,
search target specification, etc. in [Select By Feature Pixel
Count] (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/X300 Series only).
Select [Detailed] (for ShapeTrax3) or [High] (for ShapeTrax2)
in [Search Sensitivity] under [Feature Extraction Conditions].
Overlapping targets cannot be detected.
You do not wish to detect overlapping targets.
You wish to additionally specify whether to include or
exclude the object that was detected as a detection
target based on the features around the pattern.
There is little Current Feature and the search is not stable.
Increase the [Allowable Distortion].

Sometimes searching cannot be done because of the
angle of view or the object’s tilt.
Put a check mark on [Reverse Detect].

Target with reverse shading cannot be searched.
Use the eraser tool and erase unnecessary features, or
edit the features via the Feature Drawing Tool.

• Narrow down the search region.
Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the
search is not stable.

Measurements & Dimensions
Status

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Example of representative settings
• Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the search is not stable.
→ Erase unnecessary feature with the eraser tool.
• Registered Feature and Current Feature are not visible.
→ Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction Conditions].
Step 1
Show the target and set the pattern region and the search
region.
2-182 CV-X UM_E
Detect Point
Step 2
Confirmation
Select the eraser tool and determine the size. Drag on the
unnecessary feature and delete it.
Fine segment of registered feature is displayed in green,
and coarse segment is displayed in light blue.

Measurements & Dimensions
Confirmation
Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction
Conditions].
Current feature is displayed in blue. Confirm that the area
to be detected as feature is displayed in blue.

Step 3
Confirmation
Set the angle range and the minimum match % as
necessary.
Capture multiple images and check if stable detection is
performed.

Step 4
CV-X UM_E
2-183
Detect Point
Edge Position
Detects the edge (X or Y direction) in the inspection region to output its position.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Position" (Page 2-291).
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example: When the inspection region is a rectangle
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Edge to be detected
Target
(0,0)
Inspection region
Y
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
X
Detected position
X: 560, Y: 480
Edge count
3
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
4
5
6
7
2-184 CV-X UM_E
Detect Point
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set the scan direction.
Measurements & Dimensions
3
Specifies the direction for scanning for the edge in the inspection region. Select one of the four options,
[To Right], [To Left], [Down] and [Up].
5
Set the edge direction.
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among [Light to
Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
6
Set the edge sensitivity.
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Refer to "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
7
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Position], Specifies the range of the edge position (X or Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-185
Detect Point
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Edge graph is not displayed.
Select Filtered.
Multiple edges are available, but only one can be
detected.
Angled detected edge position is not stable.


Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected
edge position.

Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.
Set the scan direction to [←].
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
While viewing the Edge Graph, increase the lower edge
intensity or the edge sensitivity.

A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Increase the Max. Edge Count.
Put a check mark on the Angled Edge Detection or
increase the Edge Filter Width.
Example of representative settings
• A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is detected erroneously.
→ Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge Graph.
• Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes inward.
→ Reduce the edge filter width while viewing the detected edge position.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Check the Detected Edge Position (green line) and the
Edge Graph (red line) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Change the scan direction to [←] and set the edge
sensitivity to 10.
Check if gray and black edges are detected (yellow line
of the edge graph is edge sensitivity).

Measurements & Dimensions
To detect only edges that become dark.

To detect an edge on the right, not on the left.
  
Status
2-186 CV-X UM_E
Detect Point
Step 3
Confirmation
Change the scan direction to [→] and set the edge filter
width to 1.
While viewing the detected edge position, check if the
vertex of the curve can be detected.

Measurements & Dimensions
Step 4
Set the upper/lower limit of position X for judgment using
the position coordinate.
CV-X UM_E
2-187
Detect Point
Tip Position
Detects the maximum (minimum) point among the multiple edges in the inspection region to output its position.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Position" (Page 2-319).
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
In the instance the scan direction is [→] and the trend
direction is [↓]
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Trend
direction
Target
Maximum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Minimum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
Trend
direction
Maximum edge
position measured
300
Minimum edge
position measured
160
Scan direction
Scan direction
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
2-188 CV-X UM_E
6
Detect Point
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set the edge detection conditions.
Set the scan direction or edge direction to detect the edge.
See "What are the profile position/profile width/profile defect tools?" (Page 9-42) for more details about
the setting values.
5
Specify the judged label to be detected as tip.
Selects the segment to be judged from among maximum, minimum or specified number.
6
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Position X (Y) (Maximum)], Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit] for the maximum value of the detected position (X or Y coordinate) (in case where the
inspection region is [Rectangle] and the trend direction is [To Right] or [Down]).
• In [Position X (Y) (Minimum)], Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit] for the minimum value of the detected position (X or Y coordinate) (in case where the
inspection region is [Rectangle] and the trend direction is [To Right] or [Down]).
• In [Distance (Max.)], Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]
for the maximum value of the detected distance (in case where the inspection region is [Rotated
Rectangle]).
• In [Distance (Min.)], Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]
for the minimum value of the detected distance (in case where the inspection region is [Rotated
Rectangle]).
CV-X UM_E
2-189
Measurements & Dimensions
3
Detect Point
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
When the region is rectangle, edge in the vertical
direction cannot be detected.
Select [→] for the trend direction (The scan direction is
automatically [↓].)
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
 

To detect only edges that become dark
Increase the Max. Segments.
Select [Light to Dark] from the edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
Example of representative settings
When the region is rectangle, edge in the vertical direction cannot be detected.
→ Select [→] for the trend direction (The scan direction is automatically [↓].)
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Select [→] for the trend direction (The scan direction is
automatically [↓].)
Check change of the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered.

Measurements & Dimensions
The edge detection point ends halfway in the region.

Status
2-190 CV-X UM_E
Detect Point
Step 3
Confirmation
While viewing the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered, reduce the segment size and the segment shift
(the segment shift is basically 1/2 of the segment size).
Check change of the edge detection point (orange) with
Filtered.

Measurements & Dimensions
Confirmation
Select Min. in Judged Label.
Check the position of the judgment target segment (green
frame) with Filtered.

Step 4
Confirmation
Set the upper/lower limits of position Y (minimum) in
judgment conditions.
Execute the measurement and confirm that NG is
detected with the position shift.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-191
Detect Point
Gravity Center of Cluster
Detects a cluster of the extracted color and outputs the center of gravity.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Blob" (Page 2-310).
Measurements & Dimensions
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Blobs are measured, filtered, and identified based on
numerous criteria. When identified, they can be ordered
based on the size or detection direction.
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: Y>X: Ascend
• Judged Label: 2
�
�
Detected blob
�
�
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
�
�
Inspection region
�
Target
1
�
�
�
Labels
5
Target blob
Center of gravity: X: 600, Y: 460
Area: 20,000
Roundness: 0.85
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
2-192 CV-X UM_E
5
6
7
8
9
Detect Point
3
Measurements & Dimensions
4
5
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the binary conditions.
Select the detection color.
Select which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
6
Set the Lower Area Filter.
Excludes a blob which is smaller than the specified lower limit. Increase the value in case an
unnecessary noise component is counted.
7
Set Fill Holes.
Fills the inside of the blob with the detection color. Setting to ON enables calculation of the area and
positional coordinates of a blob filled-in with the detection color.
8
Set Active Border.
Excludes the blobs on the frame border of the inspection region. Setting to ON removes the background
from the inspection region.
9
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Labels], Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
• In [Center of Gravity], Specifies an acceptable range for the position of the center of gravity (X,Y) by
setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-193
Detect Point
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
The black point is not the detection target.
Select black in detection color.
Not to detect a target touching the inspection region
To detect only round targets


 
To detect the target with the same area filter of which the
center is not extracted
Select Color to Binary in Extract Colors and extract the
desired colors.
Put a check mark on Fill Holes.
Put a check mark on Active Border.
Set Roundness in Selection.
Set Axes Ratio in Selection. To be able to set Axes Ratio,
put a check mark on [Measure Major/Minor Axes] of
[Options].
Set the upper/lower limits of labels for the judgment
condition.
To detect only long and thin targets
To judge with the number of targets
Reduce the Lower Area Filter.

Inspection is not stable in gray binary.
Example of representative settings
• Inspection is not stable in gray binary.
→ Select Color to Binary in Extract Colors and extract the desired colors.
• To judge with the number of targets
→ Set the upper/lower limits of labels for the judgment condition.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the binary status with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
If it is difficult to make detection with the gray binary,
select Color to Binary from Extract Colors.
Confirm the binary status with Extract Image 1.

Measurements & Dimensions
A small target is not detected.
Increase the detection count to the number required.

31 or more cannot be detected.
  
Status
2-194 CV-X UM_E
Detect Point
Step 3
Confirmation
Select Pick and set the dropper-type cursor to the target
and then left-click.
Confirm the binary status with Extract Image 1.
Left-click multiple areas until extraction is sufficient.

Measurements & Dimensions
Step 4
Set Detection Color, Detection Count, Lower Area Filter,
etc. as necessary.
Confirmation
Set the upper/lower limits of Labels for the judgment
conditions.
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-195
Detect Point
Dark or Bright Cluster Position
Detects clusters that are darker or brighter than the background and outputs their center of gravity.
For more details on items of
Measurements & Dimensions
1
, see base tool "Grayscale Blob" (Page 2-314).
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
2
3
4
5
6
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
7
3
8
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
9
4
Specify the Detection Target.
Select whether “bright” or “dark” is the target
feature to detect.
5
Set the Reference Intensity.
Select the intensity value that will serve as the
reference for the intensity difference.
6
Set the Intensity Threshold Level.
Specify the lower limit for the intensity difference that is to be detected as a blob in the range of 0 to 254.
2-196 CV-X UM_E
Detect Point
7
Set the Segment Size.
When the value is increased, the noise reduction effect improves. However, since the intensity difference
that will be detected may also vary, adjust the value in a way that the target can be detected stably.
Set the cluster that is to be detected as a blob.
For more details on each setting item, see "Setting blob detection conditions" (Page 2-317).
9
Set the Judgment Conditions.
Set the tolerances (upper limit and lower limit) for the measured values.
• Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] on the [Labels] column.
• Specifies an acceptable range for the position of the center of gravity (X,Y) by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit] under [Center of Gravity].
CV-X UM_E
2-197
Measurements & Dimensions
8
Detect Point
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained


Select Specified in Reference Intensity and input the
value you want.

Change to Contrast view and check that the difference
between the cluster and the background can be
differentiated via color.
Increase Intensity Threshold Level to show colors on
defects only.
Decrease the Segment Size. Set the Segment Size to the
equivalent size of the smallest cluster that you want to
detect.
Increase Lower Area Filter under Blob Settings.
Cluster and background detection status is not visible.
Things other than clusters are also colored in Contrast
view.
Small clusters can no longer be detected if the Intensity
Threshold Level is increased.
You only want to detect a defect with a large area.
Example of representative settings
• Things other than clusters are also colored in Contrast view.
→ Increase Intensity Threshold Level to show colors on defects only.
• Small clusters can no longer be detected if the Intensity Threshold Level is increased.
→ Decrease the Segment Size (set to the equivalent size of the smallest cluster that you want to detect).
Step 1
Confirmation
Set the inspection region and check the detection status
in Contrast view.
You can see detections other than clusters by changing
the display between Contrast View and Raw View 2.
• Contrast View:

Measurements & Dimensions
You want to choose a value instead of it being
automatically determined by the Reference Intensity.
Select [Bright] or [Dark] on Detection Target.

You want to detect either the bright or dark cluster.

Corrective action

Status
• Raw View 2:
2-198 CV-X UM_E
Detect Point
Step 2
Increase the Intensity Threshold Level, change the
Segment Size to the same size as the cluster, and check
detection status.
You can check that only clusters are detected by changing
the display between Contrast View and Raw View 2.
• Contrast View:

Measurements & Dimensions
• Raw View 2:
Step 3
In the [Center of Gravity] column under [Judgment
Conditions], check the Grav. Cent. X and Grav. Cent. Y
coordinates.
CV-X UM_E
2-199
Count
Count
Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
q Count
ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
Function List
Position Adjustment
2-200 CV-X UM_E
Cluster Count
Cluster Count
Detects the cluster of the extracted color to output the count. This tool is available for the target object whose
shape or orientation is indefinite, but whose color or brightness is definite.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Blob" (Page 2-310).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Blobs are measured, filtered, and identified based on
numerous criteria. When identified, they can be ordered
based on the size or detection direction.
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: Y>X: Ascend
• Judged Label: 2
�
�
�
�
�
Detected blob
�
�
Inspection region
Target
�
�
�
Labels
5
Target blob
Center of gravity: X: 600, Y: 460
Area: 20,000
Roundness: 0.85
Inspection example for use
Quantity counting of tablets
Quantity of tablets is counted.
Count the quantity of tablets in the region with blob processing and set the tolerance for the quantity
counted.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-201
Count
"Cluster Count" measurement
Cluster Count
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Count
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set Binary conditions.
Select Detection Color.
Select which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
6
Set Detection Count.
Specifies the maximum number of blobs to be detected.
7
Set Lower Area Filter.
Excludes a blob which is smaller than the specified lower limit. Increase the value in case an
unnecessary noise component is counted.
2-202 CV-X UM_E
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cluster Count
8
Set Fill Holes.
Fills the inside of the blob with the detection color. Setting to ON enables calculation of the area and
positional coordinates of a blob filled-in with the detection color.
Set Active Border.
Excludes the blobs on the frame border of the inspection region. Setting to ON removes the background
from the inspection region.
10
Set Judgment Conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Labels], Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-203
Count
9
Cluster Count
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select Black in Detection Color.
Not to detect a target touching the inspection region
To detect only round targets


 
To detect the target with the same area filter of which the
center is not extracted
Select Color to Binary in Extract Colors and extract the
desired colors.
Put a check mark on Fill Holes.
Put a check mark on Active Border.
Set Roundness in Selection.
Set Axes Ratio in Selection. To be able to set Axes Ratio,
put a check mark on [Measure Major/Minor Axes] of
[Options].
Set the Upper/Lower Limits of Labels for Judgment
Conditions.
To detect only long and thin targets
To judge with the number of targets
Reduce Lower Area Filter.

Inspection is not stable in Gray binary.
Increase Detection Count to the number required.

A small target cannot be detected.
Example of representative settings
• Inspection is not stable in Gray binary.
→ Select Color to Binary in Extract Colors and extract the desired colors.
• To judge with the number of targets
→ Set Upper/Lower Limits of Labels for Judgment Conditions.
Confirmation
Show the target and set Inspection Region.
Confirm the binary status with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
If it is difficult to make detection with the Gray binary,
select Color to Binary from Extract Colors.
Confirm the binary status with Extract Image 1 after color
extraction.

Count
31 or more blobs cannot be detected.
  
Status
A black point cannot be detected.
2-204 CV-X UM_E
Cluster Count
Step 3
Confirmation
Select Pick and set the dropper-type cursor to the target
and then left-click.
Confirm the binary status with Extract Image 1 after color
extraction.
Left-click multiple areas until extraction is complete.

Count
Step 4
Set Detection Color, Detection Count, Lower Area Filter,
etc. as necessary.
Confirmation
Set Upper/Lower Limits of Labels for Judgment
Conditions.
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-205
Edge Count
Edge Count
Count
"Edge Count" measurement
Detects multiple edges in the inspection region and outputs the edge count.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Position" (Page 2-291).
Image of the Measurement
Example: When the inspection region is a rectangle
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
When the inspection region is a ring
Example showing the measurement performed under the
following conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Counter Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Dark to Light
Edge to be detected
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
Starting angle
Can be specified as desired.
Inspection region
Tilt Angle
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Target
Measurement Example
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
When the inspection region is an arc
Example showing the measurement performed under the
following conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
(0,0)
Y
X
Detected position
X: 560, Y: 480
Edge count
3
Target
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Tilt Angle
When the inspection region is an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Edge count
1
Distance
+60°
Angle
+240°
2-206 CV-X UM_E
Edge Count
Inspection example for use
Counting the number of drug packages
The number of drug packages is counted.
Detect the package edge by Edge Position and set the tolerance for the number of edges detected.
Example of quality image
Count
Example of inspection line
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-207
Edge Count
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Count
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set Scan Direction.
Specifies the direction for scanning for the edge in the inspection region. Select one of the four options,
[To Right], [To Left], [Down] and [Up].
5
Set Edge Direction.
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among [Light to
Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
6
Set Max. Edge Count.
Specifies the maximum number of edges to be detected. Set this option to detect the number and
position of the edges when multiple edges are found within the inspection region.
2-208 CV-X UM_E
Edge Count
7
Set Edge Sensitivity.
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
See "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
Set Judgment Conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Edge Count], Specifies the range of the edge count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-209
Count
8
Edge Count
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select [↓] from Scan Direction.
Multiple edges are available, but 31 or more cannot be
detected.
Angled detected edge position is not stable.


Reduce Edge Sensitivity while viewing the edge graph.

Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Select [Dark to Light] from Edge Direction.
Reduce Edge Filter Width while viewing the detected
edge position.
While viewing the edge graph, increase Lower Edge
Intensity or Edge Sensitivity.

Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.

A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Increase Max. Edge Count to the number required.
Put a check mark on Angled Edge Detection or increase
Edge Filter Width.
Example of representative settings
• To measure the number of edges in the vertical direction.
→ Select [↓] from Scan Direction.
• Two edges are detected from one object.
→ Select [Dark to Light] from Edge Direction.
Step 1
Show the target and set Inspection Region.
Step 2
Confirmation
To measure the number of edges in the vertical direction,
select [↓] and [Dark to Light] from Detection Conditions.
Confirm the number of edges while viewing the edge
graph with Filtered.

Count
Two edges are detected from one object.
 
Status
To measure the number of edges in the vertical direction
2-210 CV-X UM_E
Edge Count
Step 3
Confirmation
Set Upper/Lower Limits of Edge Count in Judgment
Conditions.
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.

Count
CV-X UM_E
2-211
Pattern Match (Shading) Count
Pattern Match (Shading) Count
Count
"Pattern Match (Shading) Count" measurement
Detects multiple similar portions to the image pattern registered in advance and outputs the count detected.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Pattern Search" (Page 2-270).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Search region
CV
Pattern region
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
CV
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: X>Y: Ascend
• Judged Label: 0
Registered pattern
(0,0)
Y
Y
X
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
Tilt Angle
Search region
CV
C
CV V
CV CV
Match %
98
Count
3
Origin
(0,0)
C
CV V
CV CV
CV
During operation
Tilt Angle
-30°
X
Inspection example for use
Counting number of bottles
The number of bottles is counted.
Search for the bottle cap pattern registered in advance on the screen and set the tolerance for the number
of pattern shape detected.
Example of inspection line
2-212 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Pattern Match (Shading) Count
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to detect.
3
4
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 147).
Set Angle Range.
Specifies the angle range by +/- for tilted search targets. The smaller the angle range is, the shorter the
processing time.
5
Set Detection Count.
Specifies the maximum number of patterns to be detected. Set this option to detect the count and
position of multiple identical patterns on the screen.
6
Set Judgment Conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Count], Specifies the range of the detected count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-213
Count
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Pattern Match (Shading) Count
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Select [Color to Grayscale] in Mode of Extract Colors.
Multiple targets are available, but 11 or more cannot be
detected.
A wrong target is searched.
The target is searched, but there is positional deviation.
The target is out of the search region and detection is
unstable.
  

A target with large inclination cannot be searched.
 
An area without an object has been detected erroneously.

Some targets cannot be searched.

Corrective action
Decrease [Min. Match %].
Increase [Min. Match %].
Increase [Angle Range].
Increase [Detection Count] to the number required.
Set [Search Sensitivity] to [High].
Set [Accuracy] to [High].
Change the pattern region to a region which does not go
out of the search region.
Example of representative settings
• The detection is unstable when Mode of Extract Colors is Gray.
→ Select [Color to Grayscale] in Mode of Extract Colors.
• An area without an object has been detected erroneously.
→ Increase [Min. Match %].
Confirmation
Show the target and set Pattern Region.
Confirm the multiple detected positions with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Since the search is unstable using [Gray] Mode, select
[Color to Grayscale] in Mode of Extract Colors and extract
the desired color.
Confirm the difference between the desired colors
and the background colors with Extract Image 1
after color extraction.

Count
Status
The detection is unstable when Mode of Extract Colors is
Gray.
2-214 CV-X UM_E
Pattern Match (Shading) Count
Step 3
Confirmation
Increase the value of Detection Conditions-Min. Match %
in order to prevent erroneous detections.
Verify that there is no erroneous detection.

Count
Step 4
Confirmation
Set Upper/Lower Limits of Count in Judgment Conditions.
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.
CV-X UM_E
2-215
Pattern Match (Profile) Count
Pattern Match (Profile) Count
Count
"Pattern Match (Profile) Count" measurement
Detects multiple similar portions to the profile information registered in advance and outputs the count
detected.
For more details on items of
, refer to the base tool "ShapeTrax3(A)" (Page 2-274) (for CV-X400/X300/X100
Series) or "ShapeTrax2" (Page 2-281) (for CV-X200 Series).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: From upper left (downward)
• Judged Label: 0
Search region
Pattern region
Origin
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
(0,0)
Y
Registered pattern
Match %
85
Count
3
Scale
1.025
Origin
X
Tilt Angle
+30°
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
During operation
(0,0)
X
Tilt Angle
Search region
Y
Even when some part is missing,
a pattern is detected based on
the registered pattern.
Even when a pattern is
overlapped, it is detected based
on the registered pattern.
Inspection example for use
Counting of SD card quantity in a tray
Quantity of SD cards is counted.
Search for the SD card profile registered in advance on the screen and set the tolerance for the profile
quantity detected.
Example of inspection line
2-216 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Pattern Match (Profile) Count
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
7
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set Angle Range.
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
5
Set Detection Count.
Specifies the maximum number of patterns to be detected. Set this option to detect the count and
position of multiple identical patterns on the screen.
6
7
Set the Feature Extraction Conditions (Page 2-279).
Set Judgment Conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Count], Specifies the range of detected count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-217
Count
2
3
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Pattern Match (Profile) Count
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Reduce [Min. Match %].


Change the Upper and Lower Limits of [Scale].

Target with different size cannot be searched.
Increase [Detection Count] to the number required.
• Select [Fast] in [Fine Search Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax3)
or select [Low] in [Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax2).
Processing time is long.


Change the [Rotation Direction-Added Search] setting to
detect the rotation direction (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/
X300 Series only).
Reduce [Minimum Distance] and [Angle Range] in
[Minimum Settings] ([Minimum Distance] and [Angle
Range] operate in logical AND condition).
Select [All] for [Elimination Target] under [Eliminate Overlap].
Change the settings such as the feature reference region,
search target specification, etc. in [Select By Feature Pixel
Count] (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/X300 Series only).
Select [Detailed] (for ShapeTrax3) or [High] (for ShapeTrax2)
in [Search Sensitivity] under [Feature Extraction Conditions].
Overlapping targets cannot be detected.
You do not wish to detect overlapping targets.
You wish to additionally specify whether to include or
exclude the object that was detected as a detection
target based on the features around the pattern.
There is little Current Feature and the search is not stable.
Increase the [Allowable Distortion].

Only the detected angle is unstable for a workpiece with
rotational symmetry.
Put a check mark on [Reverse Detect].

Sometimes searching cannot be done because of the
angle of view or the object’s tilt.

Target with reverse shading cannot be searched.
Use the eraser tool and erase unnecessary features, or
edit the features via the Feature Drawing Tool.

Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the
search is not stable.

• Narrow down the search region.

Count
Multiple targets are available, but 11 or more cannot be
detected.

Status
Some targets cannot be searched.
Example of representative settings
Multiple targets are available, but 11 or more cannot be detected.
→ Increase [Detection Count] to the number required.
Step 1
Confirmation
Show the target and set Pattern Region.
Verify the detection status.
2-218 CV-X UM_E
Pattern Match (Profile) Count
Step 2
Confirmation
Increase the value of Detection Conditions-Detection
Count.
Verify that all the targets are detected.

Count
Confirmation
Set Upper/Lower Limits of Count for Judgment
Conditions.
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.

Step 3
CV-X UM_E
2-219
Dark or Bright Cluster Count
Dark or Bright Cluster Count
Count
"Dark or Bright Cluster Count" measurement
Detects clusters that are darker or brighter than the background and outputs how many of them are found.
Measurement is stable even under the conditions of inconstant target object shape or position and varying
brightness within the inspection region.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Grayscale Blob" (Page 2-314).
Inspection example for use
Bottle Count
The number of bottles inside the box are counted.
It ignores the reflection of lighting in the background and can reliably only count the bottles.
Example of inspection line
2-220 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
(49 bottles counted)
Example of defective image
(45 bottles counted)
Dark or Bright Cluster Count
Flow of Setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
7
Reference
3
4
8
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
9
Specify the Detection Target.
Select whether “bright” or “dark” is the target feature to detect.
5
Set the Reference Intensity.
Select the intensity value that will serve as the reference for the intensity difference.
6
Set the Intensity Threshold Level.
Specify the lower limit for the intensity difference that is to be detected as a blob in the range of 0 to 254.
CV-X UM_E
2-221
Count
2
3
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Dark or Bright Cluster Count
7
Set the Segment Size.
When the value is increased, the noise reduction effect improves. However, since the intensity difference
that will be detected may also vary, adjust the value in a way that the target can be detected stably.
Count
8
Set the cluster that is to be detected as a blob.
For more details on each setting item, see "Setting blob detection conditions" (Page 2-317).
9
Set the Judgment Conditions.
Set the tolerances (upper limit and lower limit) for the measured values.
• Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] on the [Labels] column.
2-222 CV-X UM_E
Dark or Bright Cluster Count
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained


Select Specified in Reference Intensity and input the
value you want.

Change to Contrast view and check that the difference
between the cluster and the background can be
differentiated via color.
Increase Intensity Threshold Level to show colors on
defects only.
Decrease the Segment Size. Set the Segment Size to the
equivalent size of the smallest cluster that you want to
detect.
Increase Lower Area Filter under Blob Settings.
Cluster and background detection status is not visible.
Things other than clusters are also colored in Contrast
view.
Small clusters can no longer be detected if the Intensity
Threshold Level is increased.
You only want to detect a defect with a large area.
Example of representative settings
• You want to count either the bright or dark cluster.
 Select [Bright] or [Dark] on Detection Target.
• Clusters and background detection status are not visible.
 Change to Contrast view and check that the difference between the cluster and the background can be
differentiated via color.
Confirmation
Set the count region.
When changed to Contrast view, it can be seen that the
background is also detected.

Step 1
Confirmation
Selecting [Bright] in Detection Target under [Detection
Conditions] changes the settings to detect only the bright
bottles.
Check that only the bright cluster is detected (The
reflection of lighting in the background remains.)

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-223
Count
You want to choose a value instead of it being
automatically determined by the Reference Intensity.
Select [Bright] or [Dark] on Detection Target.

You want to count either the bright or dark cluster.

Corrective action

Status
Dark or Bright Cluster Count
Step 3
Confirmation
Increase the Intensity Threshold Level under [Detection
Conditions] until the background disappears and change
the Detection Count under [Blob Settings] to the total
number of bottles that can be detected.
Check that only the bottles have been completely counted.

Count
Step 4
Check the number of detected bottles in [Labels] under
[Judgment Conditions].
2-224 CV-X UM_E
ID & OCR/OCV
ID & OCR/OCV
Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
Count
q ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
Function List
Position Adjustment
CV-X UM_E
2-225
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
ID & OCR/OCV
"Identify Characters" measurement
Extracts character information in the inspection region and matches them against the library data. In this way,
the string in the captured image can be identified.
For more details on items of
Point
, see base tool "OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)" (Page 2-341).
When using the CV-X200/X100 Series, refer to "Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)" (Page 2-234).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Inspection region
Target characters
Character information in
the inspection region is
extracted and recognized
as a string.
Example showing the result of an inspection performed
under the following condition:
• Number of Characters (Block Settings): 6
Detected String
AB.18E
Inspection example for use
Printing inspection of yogurt
Characters printed on containers are inspected.
Extract character information in the inspection region to inspect each character. Register characters in the
library in advance and set the tolerance for the match % between the characters extracted and the
characters registered.
Example of inspection line
2-226 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
7
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
8
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Point
• Only rectangle, rotated rectangle, or arc inspection regions are available in OCR2 (rotated rectangles and arcs are only
available when [Recognition] is selected.)
• The inspection region sizes that can be used in OCR2 have the following restrictions according to the camera
image size:
- When the camera image is 5 megapixels or less:
Rectangle: The width and height must be 2,432 pixels or less and 2,050 pixels or less respectively
Rotated Rectangle: The width and the height must be equal to or less than the number of pixels for the camera
image and the size of the inspection region must be equal to or less than 80% of the size of the camera image
Arc: The length of the outer diameter arc must be 6,720 pixels or less, the difference of Radius 1 and 2 must be
equal to or less than the height of the camera image, and the size of the inspection region must be equal to or less than
80% of the size of the camera image
- When the camera image exceeds 5 megapixels:
Rectangle: The width and height must be 4,864 pixels or less and 4,100 pixels or less respectively
Rotated Rectangle: The width and height must be 4,864 pixels or less and 4,100 pixels or less respectively
and the size of the inspection region must be about 12 megapixels or less
Arc: The length of the outer diameter arc must be 11,000 pixels or less, the difference of Radius 1 and 2 must be
4,096 pixels or less, and the size of the inspection region must be about 10 megapixels or less
• To specify an inspection region of 5 megapixels or more when "Block Mode" (Page 2-344) is set to [Recognition]
and the inspection region shape is set to [Rectangle], "Large Area Mode" (Page 2-347) must be enabled.
• Enabling [Large Area Mode] consumes a large amount of the resource memory. Additionally, when [Rotated Rectangle]
or [Arc] is specified for the inspection region shape, the consumption of the resource memory increases if the
camera image pixels are increased. Note that the resource memory may be exceeded if the camera is changed
to a high resolution camera (such as the CA-HF6400C/M) when multiple OCR2 units are added to the program.
CV-X UM_E
2-227
ID & OCR/OCV
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
ID & OCR/OCV
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select Font Color.
Sets the color as a character to be recognized comparing the character with the background.
• Black: Recognizes the black part as a character.
• White: Recognizes the white part as a character.
5
6
If the inspection region is an arc, select the string direction.
Set the direction to extract the string in the region.
• Clockwise: Extracts the string in the region in a clockwise direction.
• Counterclockwise: Extracts the string in the region in a counterclockwise direction.
Left-click [Execute Tuning].
Tuning is executed for the settings selected in [Tuning Target] and the block setting is adjusted so that
the string is appropriately extracted.
For details on block settings, refer to "Setting Block Settings" (Page 2-344).
7
Set Number of Characters.
Specifies the number of characters to be extracted from the inspection region.
• Check the [Follow Zero Suppress] box for the extracted strings to follow the [Zero Suppress] setting in
Judgment Conditions.
Example: Zero Suppress: [Move Left]
Character string in the inspection region: 2017/10/01
Follow Zero Suppress: Enabled
String to be extracted: 2017/10/1
• Base the setting on the maximum number of characters of the string to be extracted.
8
If characters are not correctly recognized by the built-in library, you can create a library
and register character patterns.
By specifying the library number and selecting [Create], the characters that you want to recognize can
be registered in the specified library.
You can also reference libraries created with other program settings. Refer to "Editing the library" (Page
2-230) for more details.
9
Left-click
2-228 CV-X UM_E
.
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
10
Set Judgment Conditions.
10
ID & OCR/OCV
Measure the image which has the correct string
captured and left-click [Copy Detected String] so that
the string read (string displayed in the Detected String)
is registered as the Registered String for judging.
• In [Registered String], input the judgment string for
checking the recognized content against. Up to 40
characters of letters, numbers and symbols can be
input as a fixed string.
• Left-click the [Calendar Settings] button to set the
detailed settings if the date and time tolerance and
calculation result were used as the Registered String.
• In [Correlation], specify the lower limit of correlation.
[Correlation] is the value indicating how similar the
extracted character is to the library data. If the
extracted character’s value is lower than the
[Correlation Lower Limit], [?] is output indicating that
the character cannot be recognized and it is judged
as NG.
• Left-click [Restriction Settings] to limit the characters
to be referenced from among the characters
registered in the library. This can help resolve
character misrecognition while also improving
processing time.
• Tick the [Match With 1D/2D Code Read Data] box to
check the Detected String against the data read in
"1D Code Reader" (Page 2-243) or "1D Code Reader"
(Page 2-355), and "2D Code Reader" (Page 2-246) or
"2D Code Reader" (Page 2-359).
When characters are not correctly recognized
• If characters cannot be extracted properly, changing Block Mode to [Wave Extraction] or [Fixed] allows you
to extract characters with the same procedure as "Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)" (Page 2-234).
• If a character is incorrectly identified as a recognized character, you can create a library and register the
character pattern that is not recognized or limit unnecessary characters in the library (Page 2-345). You can
also limit the characters to reference for each character position in Restriction Settings in Judgment
Conditions (Page 2-347).
CV-X UM_E
2-229
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
Editing the library
If characters are not correctly recognized by means of the library that is being used, register the characters
you wish to be recognized into the library.
Point
ID & OCR/OCV
1
• You cannot directly edit the contents of the built-in library.
• Select [Library No.] to either use the registered content together with built-in library content or to specify which content
to use. Refer to "Editing and deleting the registered library data" (Page 2-346) for more details.
Select [Library No.] and enter the number of the library that you want to edit (0 to 999).
If the library for the specified number does not exist, you can create a new library.
2
Left-click [Edit].
The [Edit] screen appears.
Point
3
If you cannot click [Edit], create a new library with [Create].
Select [Register].
The [Select Register Mode] screen appears.
Reference
4
To edit a library other than registering new characters, refer to "Registering, adding, updating and deleting the
libraries of characters used for recognition" (Page 9-49).
Select the mode of registration.
The registration mode of the library can be selected from the following two methods.
• Each: Each character extracted is registered in the library one at a time while specifying the type.
• Batch: Allows registration of all the extracted characters together as a string.
5
Perform registration to the library with the registration method selected.
When [Each] is selected
The [Select Character to Register] screen appears. Use the mouse or
/
to select from the screen
the character that you want to register and then register it.Repeat this until all desired characters are
registered.
When [Batch] is selected
The [Batch] screen appears. Input the characters corresponding to the content of the string currently
extracted and press [Register].
6
When registration is completed, left-click [Close].
The screen reverts to the [Edit] screen.
7
Click [Close].
2-230 CV-X UM_E
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Disable [Border Exclusion].
Reduce the value of [Upper Noise Width] and/or [Upper
Noise Height].
Increase the value of [Number of Characters].

Corrective action
• If the line is tilted: Check the Line Rotation Correction
box under Block Condition in Block Settings.



Small characters like ". (dot)" cannot be extracted.

Although two characters should be extracted, they are
extracted as a single character.
Fill the dot character's lacking area to fix this. In Block
Settings - Dot Character Settings, increase the fill amount
in the X and Y directions.
Decrease Upr. Char. Width (Row Hgt. Ratio) under Block
Settings.

Although it is a single character, it is extracted as multiple
characters, such as in the case of a dot character.
Increase the value of Shading Level under Block Settings.
Decrease Upper Noise Width and Upper Noise Height
under Block Settings.

Noise is incorrectly extracted.
• If the characters are tilted: Check the Character Tilt
Correction box under Block Condition in Block
Settings.
Check the Recognize Lower Case Letters box in Block
Settings. Set Valid Characters under Restriction Settings
in Judgment Conditions in such a way that the reading of
lower case letters is enabled.

The line or character is tilted against the region and
correct extraction cannot be performed.
Left-click [Copy Detected String] from Judgment
Conditions - Registered String.
The lower case letters are not being recognized.
To set the results of the reference image as the judgment
conditions
Example of representative settings
• Small characters like ". (dot)" cannot be extracted.
→ Decrease Upper Noise Width and Upper Noise Height under Block Settings.
• To set the results of the reference image as the judgment conditions.
→ Left-click [Copy Detected String] from Judgment Conditions - Registered String.
Confirmation
Show the target and set Inspection Region.
Check the character block frame (green frame) with
Filtered and confirm that [.] is not extracted.

Step 1
CV-X UM_E
2-231
ID & OCR/OCV
Status
Some of the characters could not be well extracted.
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
Step 2
Left-click [Details] for [Block Settings] to display the
[Block Settings] screen.
ID & OCR/OCV
Step 3
Click the [Characters] tab, and under [Block Settings],
check the [Upper Noise Width] and [Upper Noise Height]
settings.
Confirmation
Reduce [Upper Noise Width] and [Upper Noise Height]
from 4 to 2.
Check the size of the orange frame at the lower left corner
and the change of the character block frame (green frame).

Step 4
2-232 CV-X UM_E
Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)
Step 5
Confirmation
Select Library Settings - Edit to register (Page 2-230) the
characters of the reference image by batch.
Confirm that the characters are correctly registered in
Library Settings.

ID & OCR/OCV
Confirmation
Left-click
and then left-click [Copy Detected String]
from Judgment Conditions - Registered String.
Inspect an image with a different character and confirm that
an NG judgment is given.

Step 6
CV-X UM_E
2-233
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
ID & OCR/OCV
"Identify Characters" measurement
Extracts character information in the inspection region and matches them against the library data. In this way,
the string in the captured image can be identified.
For more details on items of
Point
, see base tool "OCR" (Page 2-348).
When using the CV-X400/X300 Series, refer to "Identify Characters (CV-X400/X300 Series)" (Page 2-226).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Inspection region
Target characters
Character information in
the inspection region is
extracted and recognized
as a string.
Example showing the result of an inspection performed
under the following condition:
• Number of Characters (Block Set): 6
Detected String
AB.18E
Inspection example for use
Printing inspection of yogurt
Characters printed on containers are inspected.
Extract character information in the inspection region to inspect each character. Register characters in the
library in advance and set the tolerance for the match % between the characters extracted and the
characters registered.
Example of inspection line
2-234 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
5
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
6
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select Font Color.
Sets the color as a character to be recognized comparing the character with the background.
• Black: Recognizes the black part as a character.
• White: Recognizes the white part as a character.
CV-X UM_E
2-235
ID & OCR/OCV
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
5
Left-click [Wave Extraction] to select Block Mode.
ID & OCR/OCV
"Block" is the process that separates the character information in the inspection region into individual
characters. A proper block process is necessary for correctly recognizing characters. Select the Block
Mode so that each character can be extracted as one character.
• Wave Extraction: The character extraction position is determined based on the wave projections of
the inspection region.
• Fixed: This is used for the following cases when wave extraction is not successful.
- The boundary of the characters cannot be judged from the wave.
- Characters are not laid out in one line.
This section describes general operation when "Wave Extraction" is selected. If "Fixed" is selected, refer
to "When characters are not correctly recognized with a normal block mode (Fixed)" (Page 2-239) for
details.
6
Select Text Direction and the use/non-use of Mirrored Reading, and left-click
.
Edit [Text Direction] and [Mirrored Reading] to adjust the character layout for inspection and the image
character layout on the screen.
7
Set Line Rotation Correction.
Check the box when the line block is tilted against
the inspection region and the line height varies.
8
Set Wave Threshold and left-click
.
7
8
Specifies the lower threshold of the wave by the
wave intensity. Lowering the threshold improves the
extraction sensitivity. However, it may become
sensitive to wave changes due to noise.
9
Set Number of Characters.
Specifies the number of characters to be extracted
from the inspection region.
10
Select the use/non-use of Character Tilt
Correction.
When the extracted characters are deformed with a
slope, turn “Character Tilt Correction” to ON. This
option performs corrective measures regarding the
slope.
11
Set Wave Threshold and left-click
.
Specifies the lower threshold of the wave used for
blocking by the wave intensity. Lowering the
threshold improves the extraction sensitivity.
However, it may become sensitive to wave changes due to noise.
2-236 CV-X UM_E
9
10
11
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
12
Register the library (Page 2-352) and left-click
.
12
ID & OCR/OCV
13
Set Judgment Conditions.
13
Measure the image which has the correct string
captured and left-click [Copy Detected String] so
that the string read (string displayed in the
Detected String) is registered as the Registered
String for judging.
• In [Registered String], input the judgment string
for checking the recognized content against. Up
to 20 characters of letters, numbers and symbols
can be input as a fixed string.
• In [Correlation], specify the lower limit of
correlation. [Correlation] is the value indicating
how similar the extracted character is to the
library data. If the extracted character’s value is
lower than the [Correlation Lower Limit], [?] is
output indicating that the character cannot be
recognized and it is judged as NG.
• Tick the [Match With 1D/2D Code Read Data]
box to check the Detected String against the
data read in "1D Code Reader" (Page 2-243) or
"1D Code Reader" (Page 2-355), and "2D Code
Reader" (Page 2-246) or "2D Code Reader"
(Page 2-359).
When characters are not correctly recognized
Instead of Steps 6 to 11 above, perform the operation in "When characters are not correctly recognized with a
normal extraction method (Fixed)" (Page 2-354).
CV-X UM_E
2-237
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
Editing the library
1
Left-click [Edit].
The [Edit] screen appears.
ID & OCR/OCV
2
Select the register destination library file by choosing the [Library No.] (0 - 999).
To change the list format, change [View Mode].
• Character (default): Displays the list of the registered characters in a matrix format.
• Registered: Displays the registration status of each character type.
To change the library name, input a desired name in [Library Name] (up to 30 double-byte characters or
60 single-byte characters).
3
Select [Register].
The [Select Register Mode] screen appears.
4
Select the mode of registration.
The registration mode of the library can be selected from the following two methods.
• Each: Each character extracted is registered in the library one at a time while specifying the type.
• Batch: Allows registration of all the extracted characters together as a string.
5
Perform registration to the library with the registration method selected.
When [Each] is selected
Select an extracted character from the screen and press [Register]. The [Select Registration
Destination] screen is displayed. Select the destination character row and register it. Repeat this until all
desired characters are registered.
When [Batch] is selected
The [Batch] screen appears. Input the characters corresponding to the content of the string currently
extracted and press [Register].
6
When registration is completed, left-click [Close].
The screen reverts to the [Edit] screen.
7
Click [Close].
2-238 CV-X UM_E
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
When characters are not correctly recognized with a normal block mode (Fixed)
1
Left-click [Wave Extraction] on the [Primary Settings]
screen.
2
3
4
ID & OCR/OCV
The [Block Mode] screen appears.
Left-click [Fixed] and left-click [OK].
Left-click
.
Add Block Region.
Left-click
and left-click the upper left and lower right
of the character so that the character may be surrounded.
(Repeat this for the required number of characters.)
5
6
To make fitting valid, put a check mark on [Fitting].
Left-click
.
From this point onward, perform operation according to the
description in "Flow of setting" (Page 2-235).
CV-X UM_E
2-239
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Set Text Direction. ([→], [←], [↑] or [↓] can be selected
and mirrored reading for each direction can be used.)
Error extraction due to noise cannot be avoided only by
the extraction threshold.
Small characters like ". (dot)" cannot be extracted.
To set the results of the reference image as the judgment
conditions




Although two characters should be extracted, they are
extracted as a single character.
Block Set - Increase Wave Threshold.
Block Set - Adjust Wave - Increase Smoothing Filter.
Block Set - Adjust Wave - Decrease Upper Line Height.

Although it is a single character, it is extracted as multiple
characters, such as in the case of a dot character.
• Character: Put a check mark on Character Tilt
Correction of Block Set.
Block Set - Denoising Filter - Set Upper Noise Intensity to
be larger than the noise wave.

Noise is incorrectly extracted.
• Line: Put a check mark on Line Rotation Correction of
Line Block Set.
Block Set - Denoising Filter - Decrease Upper Noise
Width.

The line or character is tilted against the region and
correct extraction cannot be performed.

Corrective action
Left-click [Copy Detected String] from Judgment
Conditions - Registered String.
Example of representative settings
• Small characters like ". (dot)" cannot be extracted.
→ Block Set - Denoising Filter - Decrease Upper Noise Width.
• To set the results of the reference image as the judgment conditions
→ Left-click [Copy Detected String] from Judgment Conditions - Registered String.
Step 1
Confirmation
Show the target and set Inspection Region.
Check the character block frame (green frame) and the
wave with Filtered and confirm that [.] is not extracted.

ID & OCR/OCV
Status
To extract and recognize characters in directions besides
the left to right direction
Step 2
Left-click
twice to display the [Block Set] screen.
2-240 CV-X UM_E
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
Step 3
to check the denoising filter setting.
ID & OCR/OCV

Left-click
Confirmation
Confirmation
Decrease Upper Noise Width from 5 to 2.
Check the size of the orange frame at the upper left
corner of the character wave and the change of the
character block frame (green frame).

Step 4
Confirmation
Select Library Settings - Edit to register the characters of
the reference image by batch.
Confirm that the characters are correctly registered in
Library Settings.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-241
Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)
Step 6
Confirmation
Left-click [Copy Detected String] from Judgment
Conditions - Registered String.
Inspect an image with a different character and confirm that
an NG judgment is given.

ID & OCR/OCV
2-242 CV-X UM_E
1D Code Reader
1D Code Reader
Detects information of a 1D code in the inspection region and reads a text string contained in the code. It can
output the read text externally and perform judgment of acceptance by matching read data with the built-in
calendar. Also, this tool can be used for sorting.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "1D Code Reader" (Page 2-355).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Inspection region
Read target code
1D code information in the
inspection region is detected
and recognized as a string.
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Code type: Code39
• Start digit: 1
• Data length: 100
• Split Data: ON
- Data 1: Start digit 9, data length 2
- Data 2: Start digit 12, data length 4
Read data
KEYENCE CV-X100 SERIES
Split data 1 CV
Split data 2 X100
Inspection example for use
Identification of juice type
This tool can be used to identify juice type. It reads the barcode information and compares it with the
registered information in order to identify the type.
Example of inspection line
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
CV-X UM_E
2-243
ID & OCR/OCV
"1D Code Reader" measurement
1D Code Reader
Flow of setting
1
Prepare the tool.
2
Add the tool (Page 1-32).
ID & OCR/OCV
>
3
>
Register a reference image (Page 1-26).
If a reference image is not available, register
the reference image.
2
4
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
7
Point
• A width of up to 4,864 pixels and a height of
up to 4,100 pixels can be set for the
inspection region. However, to set a region
size that exceeds a width of 2,432 pixels or a
height of 2,050 pixels, the "Large Area
Mode" (Page 2-357) needs to be enabled.
• The "Large Area Mode" and the "Verification"
(Page 2-358) cannot be used simultaneously.
To enable the Large Area Mode, set
Verification to [OFF].
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select the code type.
5
Select the type of the 1D code. After a code type is selected, “Auto-Tuning” automatically runs, and
optimal settings for code detection are adjusted.
Left-click [Auto-Tuning] to execute automatic tuning.
If automatic tuning fails, left-click [
6
7
] and check the details.
Check that the code was read correctly following automatic tuning.
Set judgment conditions.
After an image showing correctly read data has been measured, left-click [Copy from Read Data] to
register the read character string (character string displayed in Read Data) as the reference pattern.
• In [Reference Pattern], Enter a reference pattern which will be collated with the read code.
2-244 CV-X UM_E
1D Code Reader
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Automatic tuning or reading fails, or code reading is
unstable.
• Either capture a larger image, generally for a detection
code resolution of 1.5 pixels or more, or else capture
the image using a high-resolution camera.

• Adjust the lens focus.
• Use Contrast Conversion or another image
enhancement filter to improve the contrast.
• Adjust the inspection region to ensure sufficient blank
area (quiet zone) around the code.
• When reading Pharmacodes, execute automatic tuning
using a Pharmacode containing 3 or more digits.
Alternatively, set the number of digits to read manually,
and then execute automatic tuning.
Reference
If correct detection is not possible, left-click (
) and check the information in the displayed guide.
Example of representative settings
Automatic tuning fails.
→ Either capture a larger image or else capture the image using a high-resolution camera.
Confirmation
If automatic tuning fails, a confirmation message appears.
Check that the correct code type has been selected.

Step 1
Step 2
If automatic tuning is successful, a green box is
displayed, and blue characters are displayed in the code
resolution.

Capture a larger image, and then left-click [Auto-Tuning].
CV-X UM_E
2-245
ID & OCR/OCV
Status
2D Code Reader
2D Code Reader
ID & OCR/OCV
"2D Code Reader" measurement
Detects information of a 2D code in the inspection region and reads a text string contained in the code. It can
output the read text externally and perform judgment of acceptance by matching read data with the built-in
calendar. Also, this tool can be used for sorting.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "2D Code Reader" (Page 2-359).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Inspection region
Read target code
2D code information in the
inspection region is detected
and recognized as a string.
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Code type: QR
• Start digit: 1
• Data length: 100
• Split Data: ON
- Data 1: Start digit 9, data length 2
- Data 2: Start digit 12, data length 4
Read data
KEYENCE CV-X100 SERIES
Split data 1 CV
Split data 2 X100
Inspection example for use
Identification of IC type
This tool can be used to identify the IC type. It reads the 2D code information and compares it with the
registered information in order to identify the type.
Example of inspection line
2-246 CV-X UM_E
Example of quality image
Example of defective image
2D Code Reader
Flow of setting
1
Prepare the tool.
2
Add the tool (Page 1-32).
3
>
4
5
Register a reference image (Page 1-26).
If a reference image is not available, register
the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Point
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Select the code type.
5
Select the type of the 2D code. After a code type is selected, “Auto-Tuning” automatically runs, and
optimal settings for code detection are adjusted.
Left-click [Auto-Tuning] to execute automatic tuning.
If automatic tuning fails, left-click [
6
7
7
• A width of up to 4,864 pixels and a height of
up to 4,100 pixels can be set for the
inspection region. However, to set a region
size that exceeds a width of 2,432 pixels or a
height of 2,050 pixels, the "Large Area
Mode" (Page 2-361) needs to be enabled.
• The "Large Area Mode" and the "Verification"
(Page 2-362) cannot be used simultaneously.
To enable the Large Area Mode, set
Verification to [OFF].
] and check the details.
Check that the code was read correctly following automatic tuning.
Set judgment conditions.
After an image showing correctly read data has been measured, left-click [Copy from Read Data] to
register the read character string (character string displayed in Read Data) as the reference pattern.
• In [Reference Pattern], Enter a reference pattern which will be collated with the read code.
CV-X UM_E
2-247
ID & OCR/OCV
>
2D Code Reader
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
• Either capture a larger image, generally for a detection
code resolution of 4 pixels or more, or else capture the
image using a high-resolution camera.

Corrective action
• Adjust the lens focus.
• Use Contrast Conversion or another image
enhancement filter to improve the contrast.
• Adjust the inspection region to ensure sufficient blank
area (quiet zone) around the code.
Reference
If correct detection is not possible, left-click
and check the information in the displayed guide.
Example of representative settings
Automatic tuning fails.
→ Either capture a larger image or else capture the image using a high-resolution camera.
Confirmation
If automatic tuning fails, a confirmation message appears.
Check that the correct code type has been selected.

Step 1
Step 2
Capture a larger image, and then left-click [Auto-Tuning].
If automatic tuning is successful, a green box is
displayed, and blue characters are displayed in the code
resolution.

ID & OCR/OCV
Status
Automatic tuning or reading fails, or code reading is
unstable.
2-248 CV-X UM_E
Graphic Display
Graphic Display
Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
Count
ID & OCR/OCV
q Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
Function List
Position Adjustment
CV-X UM_E
2-249
Line Display
Line Display
Graphic Display
This tool displays a line (line connecting 2 points, horizontal line, or vertical line).
Points selection can be performed by selecting fixed points, or by referencing the positions detected by
another preset tool.
Image of display
Line connecting 2 points (line segment) Horizontal line
P1
Vertical line
P1
P1
P2
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Add the tool (Page 1-32).
>
>
Register a reference image
(Page 1-26).
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
In [Straight Line Type], select the type of line.
Draw a line.
2-250 CV-X UM_E
Line Display
Drawing a line connecting 2 points
In [Straight Line Type], select [Point-to-Point].
Either left-click directly on the desired coordinate, or left-click the point (green point)
detected by another tool to select the 1st point for the line.
To reset the 1st point, left-click [Undo].
3
Left-click the 2nd point for the line.
A line is drawn between the 2 selected points.
Drawing a horizontal or vertical line
1
2
In [Straight Line Type], select [Horizontal] (to draw a horizontal line) or [Vertical] (to draw
a vertical line).
Either left-click directly on the desired coordinate, or left-click the point (green point)
detected by another tool.
A horizontal or vertical line passing through the selected point is drawn.
Correcting a drawn line
Correcting the point which the line passes through
Use either of the methods below to correct the point.
• Left-click [Reset] for [Point 1] or [Point 2] and then either left-click directly on the desired coordinate, or leftclick the point (green point) detected by another tool.
• Left-click on the coordinates and enter the coordinates directly. Left-click on [Point 1] or [Point 2] and enter
the coordinates directly.
Changing the line thickness or color displayed in run mode
1
Left-click [Display].
The [Display] screen appears.
2
Change [Line Thickness] or [Color] as necessary.
CV-X UM_E
2-251
Graphic Display
1
2
Circle Display
Circle Display
Graphic Display
Shows a circle or an arc.
Image of display
Circle
Arc
P1
P2
P1
P3
P2
P3
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Add the tool (Page 1-32).
>
>
Register a reference image
(Page 1-26).
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
In [Circle Type], select the type of circle.
Draw a circle.
2-252 CV-X UM_E
Circle Display
Drawing a circle
3
In [Circle Type], select [Circle].
Left-click the 1st point on the circle.
Graphic Display
1
2
Left-click the 2nd point on the circle.
To reset the 1st point or 2nd point, left-click [Undo].
4
Left-click the 3rd point on the circle.
A circle that passes through the 3 selected points is drawn.
CV-X UM_E
2-253
Circle Display
Drawing an arc
Graphic Display
1
2
3
In [Circle Type], select [Arc].
Left-click the starting point on the arc.
Left-click the end point on the arc.
To reset the starting point and end point of the arc, left-click [Undo].
4
Left-click the center point on the arc.
An arc that passes through the 3 selected points is drawn.
Correcting a drawn circle/arc
Correcting a circle/arc
Left-click on the [Center] or [Radius] coordinates in the case of [Circle], or on [Center],
[Radius], [Starting Angle], or [Ending Angle] coordinates in the case of [Arc] and enter
the coordinates directly.
Changing the circle/arc thickness or color displayed in run mode
1
Left-click [Display].
The [Display] screen appears.
2
Change [Line Thickness] or [Color] as necessary.
2-254 CV-X UM_E
Point Display
Point Display
Graphic Display
Shows a point (rotating cross).
Image of display
Horizontal
P1
Drawing a point
1
Prepare a tool.
Add the tool (Page 1-32).
>
>
Register a reference image
(Page 1-26).
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Left-click directly on the desired coordinate.
A cross is drawn with the center at the selected point.
CV-X UM_E
2-255
Point Display
Correcting a drawn point
Correcting the point position
Graphic Display
1
2
3
Left-click on the [Center] coordinates and enter the coordinates directly.
Left-click [Angle] and enter the rotation angle for the cross.
Left-click [Width] and select the cross size.
Changing the point thickness or color displayed in run mode
1
Left-click [Display].
The [Display] screen appears.
2
Change [Line Thickness] or [Color] as necessary.
2-256 CV-X UM_E
Scale Display
Scale Display
Image of display
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal/Vertical
P1
P1
P1
Drawing a scale
1
Prepare a tool.
Add the tool (Page 1-32).
>
>
Register a reference image
(Page 1-26).
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
3
In [Type], select the scale type.
Either left-click directly on the desired coordinate, or left-click the point (green point)
detected by another tool.
A scale passing through the selected point is drawn.
CV-X UM_E
2-257
Graphic Display
This tool displays scales.
Point selection can be performed by selecting a fixed point, or by referencing the position detected by another
preset tool.
Scale Display
Correcting a drawn scale
Correcting the scale position or scale span
Graphic Display
1
2
3
Left-click on the [Position] coordinates and enter the coordinates directly.
Left-click [Large Scale Span] and select the interval for the large scale tick marks.
Left-click [Small Scale Span] and select the interval for the small scale tick marks.
Changing the scale color displayed in run mode
1
Left-click [Display].
The [Display] screen appears.
2
Change [Color] as necessary.
2-258 CV-X UM_E
Mathematical Operations
Mathematical Operations
Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
Count
ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
q Mathematical Operations
Function List
Position Adjustment
CV-X UM_E
2-259
Calculation
Calculation
Mathematical Operations
Calculation
The calculation tool substitutes the operation result by the arbitrary result data into the user variables as well as
judges the upper or lower limit for the operation result. Two or more operation results can be substituted into
other operation and this tool is available for correspondent to the various judgment results or the complicated
judgment based on a measured value.
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
Set the calculation details.
Left-click the following buttons to enter functions other than values.
See "Operation Notations" (Page 3-22) for more details on functions.
2-260 CV-X UM_E
Calculation
3
Set the calculation results.
4
Execute a calculation test to check if there is a calculation error.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Set the tolerance (upper limit and lower limit) for "ANS0", "ANS1" and "ANS2".
CV-X UM_E
2-261
Mathematical Operations
Input of the value in any of calculation results "ANS0", "ANS1" or "ANS2" can be used as the calculation
result.
• Example: ANS0 = T100.RSLT.N[0] : MS
• Judgment tolerance can be set for the calculation result.
Function List
Function List
Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
Count
ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
q Function List
Position Adjustment
2-262 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection
Auto-Teach Inspection
This tool learns the quality images through the image sensor and recognizes images different from the quality
images as defective images.
It is so useful in that the influence from variabilities or individual differences existing in quality images can be
removed.
Reference
This tool includes the function of "Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Profile)" (Page 2-392).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the quality image is registered
When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)"
OK workpieces with variation of color
A A
A A
Generate the quality learning image
in consideration of variation
A
A
Quality match (%): 90
When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume"
During operation
Inspection target
A A
A A
Detect the difference by comparing
with the quality learning image
A
A
Defect volume: 400
CV-X UM_E
2-263
Function List
"Auto-Teach Inspection" measurement
Auto-Teach Inspection
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
Set position adjustment.
Set it to perform position adjustment for the target object. By performing settings to look for the position
of the work, the inspection region can be made to follow the work.
If position adjustment is not necessary, remove the check from the [Position Adjustment] box.
For more details on items of
, refer to "ShapeTrax3(A)" (Page 2-274) (for CV-X400/X300/X100 Series)
or "ShapeTrax2" (Page 2-281) (for CV-X200 Series).
[Extract Colors] and [Image Enhance] can also be set on this screen.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
3
Edit the inspection region.
Specify the desired region range for inspection.
Multiple areas for inspection can be set.
See "2.Editing an inspection region" (Page 2-5) for more details.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
4
Learn the quality images.
With registration of multiple quality images, what is learned is that variation in the registered range is OK
and items out of the range is NG. The more number of quality image registrations there are, the more
redundant the quality image is against variation. More precise learning can be achieved.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
5
Verify the learned result.
Capture quality images and defective images to verify if correct inspection can be performed.
Registration of multiple defective samples in advance is useful to verify if a defective sample after
change of the setting values is correctly judged.
If correct inspection cannot be performed, adjust settings (Page 2-8) or execute additional learning.
6
Set judgment conditions.
• When the judgment mode is [Defect Volume]: Specify the upper limit for the defect volume judged as
OK in the Upper Limit field for Defect Volume.
• When the judgment mode is [Quality Match (%)]: Set a resemblance percentage of the specified region
against the quality image, where target objects will be judged as OK in the Lower Limit field for Quality
Match (%).
2-264 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection
Setting detailed conditions
Position Adjustment
Settings
Angle range
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
Min. match %
[Match%], or the correlation value, shows the current image's resemblance percentage against a
registered pattern.
A pattern having a correlation value lower than the set [Min. Match%] is excluded from the
measurement, and faulty detections are decreased.
Check the deviation in the correlation values among quality images and set a lower limit. Note that
faulty detection increases if the value is lowered extremely.
Search sensitivity
Changes the reduction rate of an image or feature to specify the priority between the search speed
and stability.
• Fast: Select when prioritizing the search speed.
• Standard: Select for normal.
• Detailed: Select when prioritizing stability.
Feat. Extraction
Settings
Set the edge feature intensity for the search.
• Automatic: Extracts the optimum edge features based on the reference image and pattern region.
• Automatic (Low Contrast): Select this when the search is unstable due to such factors as low
contrast of the current image.
Feature Drawing Tool When this option is turned on, the feature drawing tool can be used. Draws figures, such as
straight lines and circles, and profile information that is automatically extracted with regard to the
reference image as features. Use this in such cases as when detection is unstable because
appropriate features could not be extracted from the reference image.
• Refer to "Creating feature information from the profile information of figures and images in
ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 (Feature Drawing Tool)" (Page 1-44) for more details.
• Simultaneous use with the [Eraser Tool] is not possible.
Eraser Tool
By specifying an arbitrary part on the reference image, detected edges that are within the range can be
eliminated from the feature information as noise components.
• In the [Size] field, specify the size of the range to remove the noise component when specifying
an arbitrary point on the image.
• In addition, simultaneous use with the [Feature Drawing Tool] is not possible.
Extract Colors
settings
Converts the captured color image to the black & white (gray or binary) image suited for the image
processing by arbitrary extraction method.
Image Enhance
settings
Specifies the filter processing applied to the image.
When multiple filters are specified, the process flows from the upper in the menu in sequence.
Composite Image Learning
Setting item
Settings
Select color
Selects the color information to use in learning the quality image.
• Color: Uses the color information for learning.
• Gray: Uses only gray information for learning.
Noise Reduction
Heighten this to reduce false detection around the ends of the object or pattern.
Also, turn it up when the target has large variability of color, like a sandy surface.
Defect enhancement
This is useful for detecting a slight change in a part where tone variation is small.
It is also effective for detecting shape variations of the profile.
Segment size
Specifies the segment size to be used for learning.
Set a small value for precise detection of slighter changes,
while set a large value for higher-speed learning and processing.
CV-X UM_E
2-265
Function List
Setting item
Auto-Teach Inspection
Setting item
Settings
Cut incorrect learning Turning this option on excludes the image which apparently seems to be defective and conducts
the auto-teach inspection.
Set auto threshold
Function List
Turning this option on changes the settings in the [Verify/Judge] screen to the most suitable value
when learning the quality image.
The target settings are as follows:
• Defect Strength
• Defect Volume: Upper Limit
Terminal Output
During "REC"
Operation
Selects the way to output signals via output terminal during the "REC" operation.
Turning this option on enables output via terminals as during Run Mode.
Turning this option off (default) enables output of only the BUSY, READY, and FLASH signals.
Verification
Setting item
Settings
Defect strength
Detects a portion whose intensity difference from the quality image is larger than the specified
value as a defect.
Defect size
Detects the defect whose area is larger than or equal to the specified value as a defective part.
Target
Selects the color to be detected as a defect.
• Bright: Detects only defect brighter than the quality image.
• Dark: Detects only defect darker than the quality image.
• Bright & Dark: Detects both bright and dark defects.
Available only when "Gray" is chosen in "Select Color".
Judgment mode
Specifies the following judgment options.
• Quality Match(%): Specifies the OK-judged ratio of what percentage is matched with the quality
assuming the region area is the ratio of 100%.
• Defect Volume: Judges how much different portions (defect) from the quality image there are
within the region.
Display graph during Turning this option on shows the bar graph indicating the match degree during operation.
operation
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Defect volume
Specifies the upper limit of the defect volume judged as OK.
Quality match (%)
Sets a resemblance percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target
objects will be judged as OK.
2-266 CV-X UM_E
Area
Area
Measures the “White” or “Black” area after binarization (black-and-white processing) of the captured image.
Image of the Measurement
Inspection region
Measurement Example
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Measured Color: Black
Target
The number of white
(or black) pixels are
counted.
Area
70,000 (pixels)
CV-X UM_E
2-267
Function List
"Area" measurement
Area
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
6
Reference
3
4
5
6
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the threshold of binary.
Set detection conditions (Page 2-269).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-269).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
2-268 CV-X UM_E
Area
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Detection Color
Selects which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
When using Color to Binary, the extracted color becomes "White".
Function List
Reference
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Area
Specifies the area range to judge as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-269
Pattern Search
Pattern Search
Function List
"Pattern Search" measurement
Detects the portion most resemblant to the registered image pattern and outputs the position, angle and
correlation value of the detected object.
Image of the Measurement
During pattern registration
Search region
CV
Measurement Example
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: X>Y: Ascend
• Judged Label: 0
Pattern region
(0,0)
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
Y
Registered pattern
Origin
Y
X
CV
C
CV V
CV CV
2-270 CV-X UM_E
Tilt Angle
-30°
Match %
98
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
Count
3
During operation
(0,0)
C
CV V
CV CV
CV
CV
X
Tilt Angle
Search region
Pattern Search
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
6
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
Set Search Region (Page 1-39).
Outline the region on the captured image to be used for
searching.
4
5
6
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-272).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-273).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-271
Function List
2
3
4
5
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Pattern Search
Setting detection conditions
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Angle range
Specifies the angle range by +/- for tilted search targets. The smaller the angle range is, the
shorter the processing time.
Reference
The smaller the angle range is, the shorter the processing time.
Detection count
Specifies the maximum number of patterns to be detected. Set this option to detect the count and
position of multiple identical patterns on the screen.
Search sensitivity
This is an option related to pattern detection. When an invalid search occurs, that is, a position
different from the search target was detected, increase the [Search Sensitivity] level. Increasing
the [Search Sensitivity] level improves detection stability. However, the processing time becomes
longer.
Reference
Accuracy
This is an option related to detection accuracy. To increase the detection accuracy, set [Accuracy]
to a higher level. When the [Accuracy] level is set to a higher level, the detection accuracy
improves. However, the processing time becomes longer.
Reference
Min. match %
When the [Search Sensitivity] level is set higher, the detection stability improves. However, the
processing time is longer.
When the [Accuracy] level is set higher, the detection accuracy improves. However, the
processing time is longer.
[Match%] shows how close to the registered pattern the target is.
The pattern with the lower correlation value than [Min. Match%] is excluded from the candidate to
be measured. This function is useful to prevent the false detection.
Reference
Check the variation range of the correlation value of the quality images and set a lower
correlation value. Note that faulty detection increases if lowering the value extremely.
Large Area Search Mode Select this when using a camera that is 21 megapixels or greater or the LJ-V Series head. Select
this when setting a large area for the pattern region.
• Disabled: Large Area Search Mode is not used.
• Mode 1: This mode needs to be set when the region size is more than 2432 pixels in width or more than
2050 pixels in height.
• Mode 2: This mode needs to be set when the region size is more than 4096 pixels in width or more than
4096 pixels in height.
Detection order
Selects the order of numbering for the multiple detected patterns.
• Y>X:Ascend: Sort by Y in ascending order. If Y is close in range, sort by X in ascending order.
• X>Y:Ascend: Sort by X in ascending order. If X is close in range, sort by Y in ascending order.
• X:Ascend: Sort by X in ascending order.
• X:Descend: Sort by X in descending order.
• Y:Ascend: Sort by Y in ascending order.
• Y:Descend: Sort by Y in descending order.
• Match%:Ascend: Sort by the correlation value in ascending order.
• Match%:Descend: Sort by the correlation value in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort the patterns in clockwise sequence beginning from the center of the region and
starting from the angle specified in [Starting Angle].
• Counter Clockwise: Sets the angle specified in [Starting Angle] as the start position, and orders
in counterclockwise sequence beginning from the region center.
Starting angle
Specifies the angle that will serve as the starting position for sorting when [Clockwise] or
[Counterclockwise] is selected in [Detection Order].
Judged label
Specifies the pattern to be judged. Specify the number (0 to 98) of the pattern to be judged. Only
the pattern with the number specified in this option becomes the Judgment target.
2-272 CV-X UM_E
Pattern Search
Setting judgment conditions
Settings
Count
Specifies the range of the detected count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Position
Specifies the range of the X coordinate and Y coordinate judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Angle
Specifies the range of the detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
Match %
Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-273
Function List
Setting item
ShapeTrax3(A)
ShapeTrax3(A)
Function List
"ShapeTrax3" measurement
Searches the portion in the current image most resemblant to the profile information of the pattern registered in
advance, and measures the position, tilt angle and correlation value of the pattern.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: From upper left (downward)
• Judged Label: 0
Search region
Pattern region
Origin
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
(0,0)
Y
Registered pattern
Origin
X
Tilt Angle
Search region
Even when some part is missing,
a pattern is detected based on
the registered pattern.
Y
Even when a pattern is
overlapped, it is detected based
on the registered pattern.
Reference
ShapeTrax3 is available on the CV-X400/X300/X100 Series.
ShapeTrax3A is only available on the CV-X400/X300 Series.
2-274 CV-X UM_E
Tilt Angle
+30°
Match %
85
Count
3
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
During operation
(0,0)
X
Scale
1.025
ShapeTrax3(A)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
6
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
7
3
Set Search Region (Page 1-39).
Outline the region on the captured image to be used for
searching.
4
5
6
7
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-283).
Set the feature extraction conditions (Page 2-279).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-285).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-275
Function List
2
3
4
5
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
ShapeTrax3(A)
Setting detection conditions
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Angle range
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
Scale
Sets the size variation range for the search target regarding the size of the registered characteristic
as 1.000.
Detection count
Specifies the maximum number of patterns to be detected.
Set this option to detect the count and position of multiple identical patterns on the screen.
Fine Search Accuracy Specifies the precision of the fine search.
• Detailed: Conducts the fine search in depth to increase the accuracy.
• Fast: Select this when prioritizing the processing speed over the accuracy.
Reverse Detect
Turn this option ON to also search for the target whose shading (black & white) is the reversed of
the registered pattern.
Allowable Distortion
When each edge of the detected candidate deviates in relation to the registered pattern due to
factors such as the angle of view of the lens or tilting of the work, the deviated edges will be detected
as edges during fine search if the deviation is about equal to or below the specified value (pixel).
Min. match %
[Match%], or the correlation value, shows the current image's resemblance percentage against a
registered pattern.
A pattern having a correlation value lower than the set [Min. Match%] is excluded from the
measurement, and faulty detections are decreased.
Check the deviation in the correlation values among quality images and set a lower limit. Note that
faulty detection increases if the value is lowered extremely.
Rotation Direction Added Search
(Supported in
CV-X400/X300 Series
only)
Used to calculate the rotation angle of a point-symmetry workpiece such as circles or n-sided
polygons using a feature with a particular circumferential direction. Since the search is performed
separately from the features of the entire workpiece, this method is effective when the feature point
determining the rotation angle is small.
• Rotation Feature Region Settings: Specifies the characteristic shape for determining the rotation
angle by using the region. Check the [Use as Mask] check box to specify the region you wish to
exclude from the rotation feature region.
• Rotation Condition: The angle can be matched fast and stably by setting this when the
correction range for the rotation direction is definite.
- Whole Circum.: Effective for workpieces with an overall circular shape.
- 180° Rotation: Effective for workpieces with an overall rectangular or oval shape.
- Polygon: Effective for workpieces with an overall polygonal (with 3 to 16 vertices) shape such as a
gear.
• Rotation Center Settings: When the rotation angle is erroneously searched due to the rotation
center being off, the search can be done correctly by modifying the position of the rotation center.
- Specified Point: Sets the rotation center by adding the values specified in [X Offset] and [Y
Offset] to the center coordinates of the pattern region.
- Center of Gravity: Sets the position of the center of gravity of the group of registered edge
points extracted from the reference image as the rotation center.
• Follow Detection Condition Angle Range: Enable to limit the angle range of the rotation
direction-added search to that in the condition settings. If this setting is disabled, the rotation
direction-added search is performed at a range of 360° (the setting is disabled when the
rotation condition is [180° Rotation]).
• Concentricity Margin Range: When the rotation center may become off due to factors such as
the angle of view of the lens or tilting of the object, the search range can be expanded up to the
shift of the specified value (pixels) to make the detection stable.
Eliminate Overlap
Eliminates from the detected candidates based on the extent of overlap of their areas when
multiple search results overlap.
• Elimination Target: Specifies the criterion for elimination from the detected candidates when
multiple search results overlap.
- Other Than Best Match: From among the multiple overlapping candidates, the one with the
highest correlation value is kept
- All: When multiple candidates are overlapping, all candidates are eliminated.
• Overlap Area: Specifies the extent of overlap (%) of the areas of the detected candidates that is
to serve as the criterion for elimination from the detected candidates when multiple search
results overlap.
2-276 CV-X UM_E
ShapeTrax3(A)
Setting item
Settings
• Feat. Extraction Settings: Sets the measurement target conditions for the feature pixel count.
- Link w/ Current Feat.: The parameters used for the search will be used directly.
- Specified Value: Change the lower edge intensity as desired. This is effective when it is
difficult to set the feature pixel count conditions.
• Det. Target Retainment Condition: Specifies the condition regarding the feature pixel count for
retaining a detected candidate in the detection results of the search.
- Or More are Retained: Retains the detection results having a higher feature pixel count than
the specified value. This is effective for when setting the existence of a characteristic part as
a condition.
- Or Less are Retained: Retains the detection results having a lower feature pixel count than the
specified value. This is effective for when setting the non-existence of a characteristic part as
a condition, such as in the case of object surrounding overlap elimination.
Minimum Settings
• Minimum Distance: Specifies a distance (in pixel) from the center of a registered (fine) feature’s
major axis bounding box to eliminate the one(s) that fall below the specified distance from the
search scope when searched shapes overlap. Patterns which meet all the parameters (this
parameter and the other parameters) under "Minimum Settings" are eliminated from the
detection.
• Minimum Angle: Specifies an angle centered on the detection target angle (to be specified in
"Starting Angle") to eliminate the one(s) that fall below the specified angle range from the search
scope when searched shapes overlap. Patterns which meet all the parameters (this parameter
and the other parameters) under "Minimum Settings" are eliminated from the detection.
• Minimum Scale (%): Specifies a scale (%) from the detection target size to eliminate the one(s)
that fall below the specified scale(%) from the search scope when searched shapes overlap.
Patterns which meet all the parameters (this parameter and the other parameters) under
"Minimum Settings" are eliminated from the detection.
CV-X UM_E
2-277
Function List
Select By Feature Pixel This is a function where a region other than the inspection region is set to choose whether to
Count (Detect. Target include an object searched as a detected target or not based on the feature amount in that region.
Selection Conditions) This is effective for such cases as excluding an object that is facing down from the detected
targets by setting the region on a feature (a mark etc.) that only exists on the front face of the
(Supported in
CV-X400/X300 Series object. The region can also be set around the object to eliminate overlapping detections. Up to two
detection target selection conditions can be specified.
only)
• Feature Pixel Region Settings: Specifies the region for determining the feature pixel count.
ShapeTrax3(A)
Settings
Detection order
Selects the identification order of the multiple detected patterns.
• X: Ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X: Descend: Sort by X coordinate in descending order.
• Y: Ascend: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• Y: Descend: Sort by Y coordinate in descending order.
• Match%: Ascend: Sort by correlation value in ascending order.
• Match%: Descend: Sort by correlation value in descending order.
Function List
Setting item
• Feature Pixel Count 1/2:Ascend: Sorts the edge feature pixel count output based on the detection
target selection conditions from smallest to largest (Supported in CV-X400/X300 Series only).
• Feature Pixel Count 1/2:Descend: Sorts the edge feature pixel count output based on the detection
target selection conditions from largest to smallest (Supported in CV-X400/X300 Series only).
• Clockwise: Sort the patterns clockwise setting the reference angle to a start angle from the
region center.
• Counterclockwise: Sort the patterns counterclockwise setting the reference angle to a start
angle from the region center.
• From Upper Left (Left to Right) (In Ver. 3.2 or lower: Y > X: Ascend): Sort by the Y coordinate of
the detected points in ascending order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are
treated as being on the same row and are sorted by their X coordinates in ascending order.
• From Upper Left (Downward) (In Ver. 3.2 or lower: X > Y: Ascend): Sort by the X coordinate of
the detected points in ascending order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are
treated as being on the same column and are sorted by their Y coordinates in ascending order.
• From Upper Right (Right to Left): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in ascending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in descending order.
• From Upper Right (Downward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column
and are sorted by their Y coordinates in ascending order.
• From Lower Left (Left to Right): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in ascending order.
• From Lower Left (Upward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in ascending order.
Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column and are
sorted by their Y coordinates in descending order.
• From Lower Right (Right to Left): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in descending order.
• From Lower Right (Upward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column
and are sorted by their Y coordinates in descending order.
Starting angle
Specifies the starting angle for sorting when selecting [Clockwise] or [Counterclockwise] under
[Detection Order].
Grouping Method
Specifies the range for considering detected points as being on the same row or on the same
column when sorting using Detection Order.
• Pattern Length (Long Side): Uses the length of the long side of the bounding rectangle of the
pattern region as the range for considering detected points as being on the same row or on the
same column.
• Pattern Length (XY Individual): Uses the length of the vertical side of the bounding rectangle of the
pattern region when seeking for the range for considering detected points as being on the same row.
In addition, the length of the horizontal side of the bounding rectangle of the pattern region is used
when seeking for the range for considering detected points as being on the same column.
• Specified Value: Specifies in pixels the range for considering detected points as being on the
same row or on the same column.
Judged label
Specifies the pattern number (0 to 1999) of the pattern to be judged. Only the pattern with the
number specified in this option becomes the judgment target.
Timeout
Sets the upper limit of the processing time. When the processing time of the tool in a single tool is
out of the set value (0.5 to 60 sec.) due to the condition of the current image, the processing under
the tool fails and a timeout comes leaving all outputs 0.
2-278 CV-X UM_E
ShapeTrax3(A)
Setting feature extraction conditions
Setting item
Settings
Display feature
Specifies the aspects to be displayed.
• Coarse: Shows the coarse aspect used for the coarse search.
Set the edge feature intensity for the search.
• Automatic: Extracts the optimum edge features based on the reference image and pattern region.
• Automatic (Low Contrast): Select this when the search is unstable due to such factors as low
contrast of the current image.
• Custom: Set the edge feature extraction conditions manually.
- Lower Edge Intensity (Registered): An edge whose intensity (tone change) is lower than the
lower limit is eliminated from the feature.
- Lower Edge Intensity (Current): An edge whose intensity (tone change) is lower than the
lower limit is eliminated from the feature.
Search sensitivity
Changes the reduction rate of an image or feature to specify the priority between the search speed
and stability.
• Fast: Select when prioritizing the search speed.
• Standard: Select for normal.
• Detailed: Select when prioritizing stability.
• Custom: When the detection is not stable, this option adjusts the reduction rate of the image for
the coarse and fine search as well as the feature reduction rate for the coarse search.
Coarse Image
Reduction
Specifies image reduction rate applied to the reference image and current image in "Coarse Search".
0 (Reduction: Small) to 10 (Reduction: Large)
Coarse Feature
Reduction
Specifies reduction rate to features extracted from the reference image and current image in
"Coarse Search".
0 (Reduction: Small) to 10 (Reduction: Large)
Fine Image Reduction Specifies image reduction rate applied to the reference image and current image in "Fine Search".
0 (Reduction: Small) to 10 (Reduction: Large)
Feature Densification To search with even finer features, strengthen the setting. The stronger the setting is, the slower the
search speed becomes. Therefore, select a setting where the processing speed is acceptable.
Selecting [Automatic] will retain stability while keeping the processing speed.
Large Area Search
Mode
Select this when using a camera that is 21 megapixels or greater or the LJ-V Series head. The
Large Area Search mode is used when this option is enabled. This mode needs to be set when the
search region size or pattern region (including the rotation feature region) is greater than 2432
pixels wide or 2050 pixels high.
Feature Drawing Tool When this option is turned on, the feature drawing tool can be used. Draws figures, such as
straight lines and circles, and edges that are automatically extracted with regard to the reference
image as features. Use this in such cases as when detection is unstable because appropriate
features could not be extracted from the reference image.
• Refer to "Creating feature information from the profile information of figures and images in ShapeTrax3/
ShapeTrax2 (Feature Drawing Tool)" (Page 1-44) for more details.
• Simultaneous use with the [Eraser Tool] is not possible.
Eraser Tool
When this option is turned on, the eraser tool can be set.
By specifying an arbitrary part on the reference image, detected edges that are within the range
can be eliminated from the feature information as noise components. The tool can select both or
either of [Display Feature], "Coarse" and "Fine". It is useful to check attribute for each noise.
• In the [Size] field, specify the size of the range to remove the noise component when specifying
an arbitrary point on the image.
• Specifies whether or not to display the coarse features used for the Coarse search and the fine
features used for the Fine search by selecting or deselecting [Coarse] and [Fine] in the [Display
Feature] field, respectively.
• In addition, simultaneous use with the [Feature Drawing Tool] is not possible.
CV-X UM_E
2-279
Function List
• Fine: Shows the fine aspect used for the fine search.
Feat.Extraction
Settings
ShapeTrax3(A)
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Function List
Count
Specifies the range of detected count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Position
Specifies the range of the X/Y coordinates judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Angle
Specifies the range of detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
Match %
Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Scale
Specifies the range of the scale of variation of the detected pattern from the registered pattern image
judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Feature Pixel Count
(Supported in
CV-X400/X300 Series
only)
Specify the tolerance for the feature pixel count inside and outside of the pattern output based on the
detection target selection conditions. The tolerance can be set separately for the feature pixel count for
detection target selection conditions 1/2.
2-280 CV-X UM_E
ShapeTrax2
ShapeTrax2
Searches the portion in the current image most resemblant to the profile information of the pattern registered in
advance, and measures the position, sloped angle and correlation value of the pattern.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: From upper left (downward)
• Judged Label: 0
Search region
Pattern region
Origin
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
(0,0)
Y
Registered pattern
Origin
X
Tilt Angle
+30°
Match %
85
Count
3
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
During operation
(0,0)
X
Scale
1.025
Tilt Angle
Search region
Y
Even when some part is missing,
a pattern is detected based on
the registered pattern.
Even when a pattern is
overlapped, it is detected based
on the registered pattern.
CV-X UM_E
2-281
Function List
"ShapeTrax2" measurement
ShapeTrax2
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
5
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
6
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
7
3
Set Search Region (Page 1-39).
Outline the region on the captured image to be used for
searching.
4
5
6
7
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-283).
Set the feature extraction conditions (Page 2-284).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-285).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
2-282 CV-X UM_E
ShapeTrax2
Setting detection conditions
Settings
Angle range
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
Scale
Sets the size variation range for the search target regarding the size of the registered
characteristic as 1.000.
Detection count
Specifies the maximum number of patterns to be detected. Set this option to detect the count and
position of multiple identical patterns on the screen.
Accuracy
Specifies the accuracy of the fine search.
• High: Conducts the fine search in depth to increases the accuracy.
• Low: Selects the process speed prior to the accuracy.
Allowable Distortion
When each edge of the detected candidate deviates in relation to the registered pattern due to
factors such as the angle of view of the lens or tilting of the work, the deviated edges will be detected
as edges during fine search if the deviation is about equal to or below the specified value (pixel).
Min. match %
[Match%], or the correlation value, shows the current image’s resemblance percentage against a
registered pattern. A pattern having a correlation value lower than the set [Min. Match%] is
excluded from the measurement, and faulty detections are decreased. Check the deviation in the
correlation values among quality images and set a lower limit. Note that faulty detection increases
if the value is lowered extremely.
Detection order
Selects the identification order of the multiple detected patterns.
• X: Ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X: Descend: Sort by X coordinate in descending order.
• Y: Ascend: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• Y: Descend: Sort by Y coordinate in descending order.
• Match%: Ascend: Sort by correlation values in ascending order.
• Match%: Descend: Sort by correlation values in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort the patterns clockwise setting the reference angle to a start angle from the
region center.
• Counterclockwise: Sort the patterns counterclockwise setting the reference angle to a start
angle from the region center.
• From Upper Left (Left to Right) (For Ver.3.2 or below: Y>X: Ascend): Sort by the Y coordinate of
the detected points in ascending order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are
treated as being on the same row and are sorted by their X coordinates in ascending order.
• From Upper Left (Downward) (For Ver.3.2 or below : X>Y: Ascend) : Sort by the X coordinate of
the detected points in ascending order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are
treated as being on the same column and are sorted by their Y coordinates in ascending order.
• From Upper Right (Right to Left): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in ascending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in descending order.
• From Upper Right (Downward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column
and are sorted by their Y coordinates in ascending order.
• From Lower Left (Left to Right): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in ascending order.
• From Lower Left (Upward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in ascending order.
Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column and are
sorted by their Y coordinates in descending order.
• From Lower Right (Right to Left): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in descending order.
• From Lower Right (Upward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column
and are sorted by their Y coordinates in descending order.
Starting angle
Specifies the starting angle for sorting when selecting [Clockwise] or [Counterclockwise] under
[Detection Order].
CV-X UM_E
2-283
Function List
Setting item
ShapeTrax2
Settings
Grouping Method
Specifies the range for considering detected points as being on the same row or on the same
column when sorting using Detection Order.
• Pattern Length (Long Side): Uses the length of the long side of the bounding rectangle of the
pattern region for the XY direction as the range for considering detected points as being on the
same row or on the same column.
• Pattern Length (XY Individual): Uses the length of the vertical side of the bounding rectangle of the
pattern region when seeking for the range for considering detected points as being on the same row.
In addition, the length of the horizontal side of the bounding rectangle of the pattern region is used
when seeking for the range for considering detected points as being on the same column.
• Specified Value: Specifies in pixels the range for considering detected points as being on the
same row or on the same column.
Judged label
Specifies the pattern number (0 to 1999) of the pattern to be judged. Only the pattern with the
number specified in this option becomes the judgment target.
Reverse detect
Turn this option ON to also search for the target whose shading (black & white) is the reversed of
the registered pattern.
Timeout
Sets the upper limit of the processing time. When the processing time of the tool in a single tool is
out of the set value (0.5 to 60 sec.) due to the condition of the current image, the processing under
the tool fails and a timeout comes leaving all outputs 0.
Minimum distance
Specifies a distance (in pixel) from the center of a registered (fine) feature’s major axis bounding
box to eliminate the one(s) that fall below the specified distance from the search scope when
searched shapes overlap. Patterns which meet all the parameters (this parameter and the other
parameters) under “Minimum Settings” are eliminated from the detection.
Angle range
Specifies an angle centered on the detection target angle (to be specified in “Starting Angle”) to
eliminate the one(s) that fall below the specified angle range from the search scope when
searched shapes overlap. Patterns which meet all the parameters (this parameter and the other
parameters) under “Minimum Settings” are eliminated from the detection.
Starting angle
Selects (an) angle(s) which will be detected as reference angle(s) in “Starting Angle”. When “0/
180 degrees” is selected, patterns which are adjacent to 0 degree and the opposite, 180 degrees,
are eliminated from the detection.
Minimum scale
Specifies a scale (%) from the detection target size to eliminate the one(s) that fall below the specified
scale(%) from the search scope when searched shapes overlap. Patterns which meet all the parameters
(this parameter and the other parameters) under “Minimum Settings” are eliminated from the detection.
Eliminate Overlap
Eliminates from the detected candidates based on the extent of overlap of their areas when
multiple search results overlap.
Elimination Target
Specifies the criterion for elimination from the detected candidates when multiple search results overlap.
• Other Than Best Match: From among the multiple overlapping candidates, the one with the
highest correlation value is kept.
• All: When multiple candidates are overlapping, all candidates are eliminated.
Overlap Area
Specifies the extent of overlap (%) of the areas of the detected candidates which are to be
eliminated from the detected candidates when multiple search results overlap.
Function List
Setting item
Setting feature extraction conditions
Setting item
Settings
Display feature
Specifies the aspects to be displayed.
• Coarse: Shows the coarse aspect used for the coarse search.
• Fine: Shows the fine aspect used for the fine search.
Search sensitivity
Changes the reduction rate of an image or feature to specify the priority between the search speed
and stability.
• Low: Select when prioritizing the search speed.
• Normal: Select for normal.
• High: Select when prioritizing stability.
• Custom: When the detection is not stable, this option adjusts the reduction rate of the image and
feature for the coarse and fine search.
Coarse Image
Reduction
Specifies the image reduction rate applied to the reference image and current image in “Coarse
Search”. 0 (Reduction: Small) to 10 (Reduction: Large)
2-284 CV-X UM_E
ShapeTrax2
Setting item
Settings
Coarse Feature
Reduction
Specifies the reduction rate applied to features extracted from the reference image and current
image in “Coarse Search”. 0 (Reduction: Small) to 10 (Reduction: Large)
Fine Image Reduction Specifies the image reduction rate applied to the reference image and current image in “Fine
Search”. 0 (Reduction: Small) to 10 (Reduction: Large)
Lower edge intensity
An edge whose intensity (contrast level) is lower than the lower limit is eliminated from aspects.
This option specifies the lower edge intensity for every coarse and fine aspects of the reference
image so as to extract only distinctive portions of the object as an edge while checking the edge
displayed on the screen.
Large Area Search
Mode
Select this when using a camera that is 21 megapixels or greater or the LJ-V Series head. Enable
this to use the Large Area Search Mode. This mode needs to be set when the region size is more
than 2432 pixels in width or more than 2050 pixels in height.
Feature Drawing Tool When this option is turned on, the feature drawing tool can be used. Draws figures, such as
straight lines and circles, and profile information that is automatically extracted with regard to the
reference image as features. Use this in such cases as when detection is unstable because
appropriate features could not be extracted from the reference image.
• Refer to "Creating feature information from the profile information of figures and images in ShapeTrax3/
ShapeTrax2 (Feature Drawing Tool)" (Page 1-44) for more details.
• Simultaneous use with the [Eraser Tool] is not possible.
Eraser Tool
When this option is turned on, the eraser tool can be set.
By specifying an arbitrary part on the reference image, detected edges that are within the range
can be eliminated from the feature information as noise components.
In addition, simultaneous use with the [Feature Drawing Tool] is not possible.
• In the [Size] field, specify the size of the range for removing the noise component when
specifying an arbitrary point on the image.
• Specifies whether or not to display the coarse features used for the Coarse search and the fine
features used for the Fine search by selecting or deselecting [Coarse] and [Fine] in the [Display
Feature] field, respectively.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Count
Specifies the range of detected count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Position
Specifies the range of the X/Y coordinates judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Angle
Specifies the range of detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]. The
angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
Match %
Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Scale
Specifies the range of the scale of variation of the detected pattern from the registered pattern image
judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-285
Function List
Feature Densification Heighten the setting when searching using finer features is desired. The higher the setting is, the
slower the search speed becomes.
PatternTrax
PatternTrax
Function List
"PatternTrax" measurement
Detects similar portions using the tone change information around the profile of the image pattern registered in
advance and outputs the position, angle or correlation value of the detected object. The object is tracked even
if the measurement targets have flaws or they overlap, or surface variation exists because the tool searches
using the tone change information around the profile.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: From upper left (downward)
• Judged Label: 0
Search region
Pattern region
Origin
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
(0,0)
Y
Registered pattern
Origin
X
Tilt Angle
Search region
Y
Even when some part is missing,
a pattern is detected based on
the registered pattern.
Even when a pattern is
overlapped, it is detected based
on the registered pattern.
2-286 CV-X UM_E
Tilt Angle
+30°
Match %
85
Count
3
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
During operation
(0,0)
X
PatternTrax
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
6
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
7
3
Set Search Region (Page 1-39).
Outline the region on the captured image to be used for
searching.
4
5
6
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-288).
Set the feature extraction conditions (Page 2-289).
While looking at the contrast view, make adjusments so that the appropriate features are extracted.
7
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-290).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-287
Function List
2
3
4
5
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
PatternTrax
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Angle range
Detection count
Function List
Detection Region
Expansion
Min. match %
Detection order
Starting angle
Grouping Method
2-288 CV-X UM_E
Settings
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
Specifies the maximum number of patterns to be detected. Set this option to detect the count and
position of multiple identical patterns on the screen.
When this option is enabled, targets that, when compared to the registered pattern, are protruding
up until halfway will also be searched if the detected point is inside the search region.
[Match%], or the correlation value, shows the current image’s resemblance percentage against a
registered pattern. A pattern having a correlation value lower than the set [Min. Match%] is
excluded from the measurement, and faulty detections are decreased. Check the deviation in the
correlation values among quality images and set a lower limit. Note that faulty detection increases
if the value is lowered extremely.
Selects the identification order of the multiple detected patterns.
• X: Ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X: Descend: Sort by X coordinate in descending order.
• Y: Ascend: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• Y: Descend: Sort by Y coordinate in descending order.
• Match%: Ascend: Sort by correlation values in ascending order.
• Match%: Descend: Sort by correlation values in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort the patterns clockwise setting the reference angle to a start angle from the region center.
• Counterclockwise: Sort the patterns counterclockwise setting the reference angle to a start
angle from the region center.
• From Upper Left (Left to Right): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in ascending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in ascending order.
• From Upper Left (Downward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in ascending
order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column
and are sorted by their Y coordinates in ascending order.
• From Upper Right (Right to Left): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in ascending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in descending order.
• From Upper Right (Downward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column
and are sorted by their Y coordinates in ascending order.
• From Lower Left (Left to Right): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in ascending order.
• From Lower Left (Upward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in ascending order.
Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column and are
sorted by their Y coordinates in descending order.
• From Lower Right (Right to Left): Sort by the Y coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose Y coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same row and
are sorted by their X coordinates in descending order.
• From Lower Right (Upward): Sort by the X coordinate of the detected points in descending
order. Those whose X coordinates are close in range are treated as being on the same column
and are sorted by their Y coordinates in descending order.
Specifies the starting angle for sorting when selecting [Clockwise] or [Counterclockwise] under
[Detection Order].
Specifies the range for considering detected points as being on the same row or on the same
column when sorting using Detection Order.
• Pattern Length (Long Side): Uses the length of the long side of the bounding rectangle of the
pattern region for the XY direction as the range for considering detected points as being on the
same row or on the same column.
• Pattern Length (XY Individual): Uses the length of the vertical side of the bounding rectangle of
the pattern region when seeking for the range for considering detected points as being on the
same row. In addition, the length of the horizontal side of the bounding rectangle of the pattern
region is used when seeking for the range for considering detected points as being on the same
column.
• Specified Value: Specifies in pixels the range for considering detected points as being on the
same row or on the same column.
PatternTrax
Setting item
Judged label
Reverse detect
Minimum distance
Angle range
Starting angle
Setting feature extraction conditions
Setting item
Settings
Display feature
Specifies the aspects to be displayed.
• Coarse: Shows the coarse aspects used for the coarse search.
• Fine: Shows the fine aspects used for the fine search.
Search sensitivity
Changes the reduction rate of an image to specify the priority between the search speed and
stability.
• Low: Select this when prioritizing the search speed.
• Normal: Select this during normal times.
• High: Select this when prioritizing stability.
• Custom: When the detection is not stable, this option adjusts the image reduction rate for the
coarse and fine search.
Coarse search image Specifies the image reduction rate applied to the reference image and current image in “Coarse
Search”. 0 (Reduction: Small) to 16 (Reduction: Large)
reduction
Fine search image
reduction
Specifies the image reduction rate applied to the reference image and current image in “Fine
Search”. 0 (Reduction: Small) to 16 (Reduction: Large)
Angle Sensitivity
Changes the step width of the angle to specify the priority between the stability of the rotation
direction and speed.
• Low: Select this when prioritizing the search speed.
• Normal: Select this during normal times.
• High: Select this when prioritizing the stability of the rotation direction and accuracy.
• Custom: Sets the step width of the angle by numerical value input.
Angle Step Width
Sets the size of the angle step width during search execution by a numerical value. By making it
small, the stability of the rotation direction and accuracy improves. However, the processing time
increases.
Accuracy
Specifies the accuracy of the fine search.
• Low: Select this when prioritizing the search speed.
• Normal: Select this during normal times.
• High: Select this when prioritizing accuracy.
• Very High: Select this when prioritizing accuracy the most.
Large Area Search
Mode
Select this when using a camera that is 21 megapixels or greater or the LJ-V Series head. Enable
this to use the Large Area Search Mode. This mode needs to be set when the region size is more
than 2432 pixels in width or more than 2050 pixels in height.
CV-X UM_E
2-289
Function List
Timeout
Settings
Specifies the pattern number (0 to 1999) of the pattern to be judged. Only the pattern with the
number specified in this option becomes the judgment target.
Turn this option ON to also search for the target whose shading (black & white) is the reversed of
the registered pattern.
Sets the upper limit of the processing time. When the processing time of the tool in a single tool is
out of the set value (0.5 to 60 sec.) due to the condition of the current image, the processing under
the tool fails and a timeout comes leaving all outputs 0.
When there are overlapping search results for 1 detection target, this specifies the range for
eliminating searched results from the detection candidates by means of the distance (in pixel)
between the center of the bounding box of their pattern windows.
Candidates which meet all the parameters (this parameter and the other parameters) under
"Minimum Settings" are eliminated from the detection.
Specifies an angle centered on the detection target angle (to be specified in “Starting Angle”) to
eliminate the one(s) that fall below the specified angle range from the search scope when
searched shapes overlap. Patterns which meet all the parameters (this parameter and the other
parameters) under “Minimum Settings” are eliminated from the detection.
Selects (an) angle(s) which will be detected as reference angle(s) in “Starting Angle”. When “0/
180 degrees” is selected, patterns which are adjacent to 0 degree and the opposite, 180 degrees,
are eliminated from the detection.
PatternTrax
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Auto Tuning
Automatically sets a part of the feature extraction conditions such that the registered pattern will
be detected.
In the case that unintended features are extracted, deselect this option and set the conditions
manually.
Noise Cut
Tone changes equal to or less than the specified tone are ignored.
Gain
Sets the gain for accentuating the extracted tone change. When the tone change is small, make
the value large.
Feature Extraction
Size
Specifies the size of the tone change desired for extraction. When a gradual tone change is to be
extracted, make the value large.
Deformity Margin
Sets the variation size of the profile desired for extraction by proportion to the feature extraction
size. When the profile deviates in relation to the registered pattern due to such factors as the angle
of view or tilting of the object, make the value large.
Detection Mark
Sets the mark to display on the position that was detected. It does not affect the measured value.
Eraser Tool
When this option is turned on, the eraser tool can be set.
By specifying an arbitrary part on the reference image, tone changes that are within the range can
be eliminated.
• In the [Size] field, specify the size of the range for removing the noise component when
specifying an arbitrary point on the image.
• Specifies whether or not to display the coarse features used for the Coarse search and the fine
features used for the Fine search by selecting or deselecting [Coarse] and [Fine] in the [Display
Feature] field, respectively.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Count
Specifies the range of detected count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Position
Specifies the range of the X/Y coordinates judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Angle
Specifies the range of detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
Match %
Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
2-290 CV-X UM_E
Edge Position
Edge Position
Detects the edge (in X or Y direction) in the inspection region and outputs its position.
Image of the Measurement
Example: When the inspection region is a rectangle
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
When the inspection region is a ring
Example showing the measurement performed under the
following conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Counter Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Dark to Light
Edge to be detected
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
Starting angle
Can be specified as desired.
Inspection region
Tilt Angle
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
When the inspection region is an arc
Example showing the measurement performed under the
following conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Target
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
(0,0)
Y
X
Detected position
X: 560, Y: 480
Edge count
3
Target
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Tilt Angle
When the inspection region is an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: (Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Edge count
1
Distance
+60°
Angle
+240°
CV-X UM_E
2-291
Function List
"Edge Position" measurement
Edge Position
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-293).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-293).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
2-292 CV-X UM_E
Edge Position
Setting detection conditions
Settings
Scan direction
Specifies the direction for scanning for the edge within the inspection region.
Edge direction
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among
[Light to Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
Starting angle
Specifies a start point to scan edges when selecting [Ring] in the inspection region. The setting
range is from 0 (degree) to 359.999 (degree).
Edge sensitivity
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where
the shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Edge filter width
Averages the edge graph. When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower edge intensity
Sets the lower limit for edge detection. Edges falling below the lower limit are not detected. Adjust
the lower edge intensity with reference to the maximum edge intensity value shown on the left of
the edge graph, and unnecessary edges can be excluded.
Max. edge count
Specifies the maximum number of edges to be detected. Set this option to detect the number and
position of the edges when multiple edges are found within the inspection region.
Judged label
Specifies the number (Judged Label) of the edge to be judged. Edges are labeled with numbers
in order from 0 according to the scan direction. (When the edge identified by Judged Label is not
detected, the “Measured” result of Judged Label becomes 0.)
Angled edge
detection
Turn this option on to stabilize the detection for the edge that is angled with respect to the
inspection region. Note that turning on in normal state may affect the measurement precision.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Edge count
Specifies the range of the edge count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Position
Specifies the range of the edge position (X or Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
Angle
Specifies the range of the angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]. The
range can be specified within 0.000 (degrees) to 360.000 (degrees).
CV-X UM_E
2-293
Function List
Setting item
Edge Angle
Edge Angle
Function List
"Edge Angle" measurement
Sets two segments in the inspection region and measures the sloped angle from the edge detected in each segment.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the detected angle is "+75°"
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment
Detected position
(Midpoint of the detected
edges)
Inspection region
Angle
Target
Detected edge
When the detected angle is "-20°"
Inspection region
Detected edge
Angle
Segment
Detected Position
(Midpoint of the detected edges)
Target
2-294 CV-X UM_E
Angle
+75°
Edge Angle
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-296).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-296).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-295
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Edge Angle
Setting detection conditions
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Edge settings
Select [Common] to use common edge-detection conditions over segments, or select [Individual]
to specify the conditions by segment. To measure an object whose individual segments need
varying detection conditions, select [Individual]. This option stabilizes the edge detection and
improves the accuracy.
Select edge
Set the parameters in [Detection Conditions] with [1st Edge] selected and then select [2nd Edge]
to set the parameter in the same way.
Scan direction
Specifies the direction to scan for the edge within the inspection region.
• Forward: Scan in the direction of the rotation (indicated by the arrow) of the inspection region.
• Reverse: Scan in the opposite direction of the rotation (indicated by the arrow) of the inspection
region.
Edge direction
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among
[Light to Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
Specified edge
Specifies which edge will be the judgment target among multiple edges detected. The edge is
numbered in order according to the direction specified in [Scan Direction]. When a negative
(minus) numerical value is specified, the edge is numbered sequentially from the reverse
direction.This setting is not mandatory but optional.
Edge sensitivity
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where
the shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Edge filter width
Averages the edge graph. When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower edge intensity
Sets the lower limit for edge detection. Edges falling below the lower limit are not detected. Adjust
the lower edge intensity with reference to the maximum edge intensity value shown on the left of
the edge graph, and unnecessary edges can be excluded.
Angled edge
detection
Turn this option on to stabilize the detection for the edge that is angled with respect to the
inspection region. Note that turning on in normal state may affect the measurement precision.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Angle
Specifies the angle range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]. The angle
range can be specified within -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
Edge Count
Specifies the range of the edge count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
The lesser number of detected edges between that of the 1st Edge and that of the 2nd Edge is output.
2-296 CV-X UM_E
Edge Width
Edge Width
Function List
"Edge Width" measurement
Detects two edges in the inspection region to measure the width between those edges.
Image of the Measurement
When the inspection region is a rectangle or a rotated
rectangle
• When [Outer Gap] is the selected measurement mode
• When [Specified Edges] is the selected measurement
mode (Example: 3→4)
�
��
Edge angle to be measured
��
�
Edge width to be measured
Inspection region
Target
Inspection region
Target
• When [Inner Gap] is the selected measurement mode
Edge width to be measured
Inspection region
Target
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Specified Edges
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
• Edge 1: 1
• Edge 2: 2
• When [Specified Edges] is the selected measurement
mode (Example: 1→2)
Edge width
160
Edge width to be measured
� �� � � �
Inspection region
� � � � � �
Target
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
• When [Outer Gap] is the selected measurement mode
Edge angle to be measured
Inspection region
Target
When the inspection region is an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Specified Edges
• Scan Direction: (Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Both
• Edge 1: 1
• Edge 2: 2
Angle
60°
• When [Inner Gap] is the selected measurement mode
Edge angle to be measured
�
��
�
Inspection region
Target
CV-X UM_E
2-297
Edge Width
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-299).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-299).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
2-298 CV-X UM_E
5
Edge Width
Setting detection conditions
Settings
Select mode
Selects the type of the edge width to be measured among [Outer Gap], [Inner Gap] and
[Specified Edges].
Function List
Setting item
• Outer Gap: Measures the distance between the outermost edges within the region.
• Inner Gap: Measures the distance between the innermost edges within the region.
• Specified Edges: Measures the distance between the specified edges.
Scan direction
Specifies the direction for scanning for the edge within the inspection region.
Edge direction
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among
[Light to Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
Starting angle
Specifies a start point to scan edges when selecting [Ring] in the inspection region. The setting
range is from 0 (degree) to 359.999 (degree).
Edge1/Edge2
Use [Edge1] and [Edge2] to specify the start and end points of the edge width to be measured,
respectively.
Edge sensitivity
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where
the shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Edge filter width
Averages the edge graph. When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower edge intensity
Sets the lower limit for edge detection. Edges falling below the lower limit are not detected. Adjust
the lower edge intensity with reference to the maximum edge intensity value shown on the left of
the edge graph, and unnecessary edges can be excluded.
Angled edge
detection
Turn this option on to stabilize the detection for the edge that is angled with respect to the
inspection region. Note that turning on in normal state may affect the measurement precision.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Edge width
Specifies the range of the edge width judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-299
Edge Pitch
Edge Pitch
Function List
"Edge Pitch" measurement
Measures the distance between an odd-nth edge and an even-nth edge (gap pitch) among multiple edges
detected in the inspection region and the center-to-center distance of gap pitches (center pitch) and outputs
their measurements. When there are multiple pitches, the maximum, minimum and average values can be
measured.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
• Example of measuring the gap pitch
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Select Mode: Gap pitch
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
Gap pitch
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
• Example of measuring the center pitch
Pitch
Maximum: 200
Minimum: 180
Average: 190
Pitch count
3
Center pitch
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
• Example of measuring the gap pitch
Gap pitch
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
• Example of measuring the center pitch
Center pitch
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
2-300 CV-X UM_E
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Select Mode: Center pitch
• Scan Direction: (Counter Clockwise)
• Edge Direction: Both
Pitch angle
Maximum: 47°
Minimum: 44°
Average: 45°
Pitch count
4
Edge Pitch
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-302).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-302).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-301
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Edge Pitch
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Select mode
Selects the type of the edge pitch to be measured between [Gap Pitch] and [Center Pitch].
Function List
• Gap Pitch: Measures the maximum, minimum, and average values of the distances between
each odd and even nth edge.
• Center Pitch: Measures the maximum, minimum, and average values of the distances between
the center points of gap pitches.
Scan direction
Specifies the direction for scanning for the edge within the inspection region.
Edge direction
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among
[Light to Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
First edge
Specifies the direction of the tone variation of the first edge to be detected.
Starting angle
Specifies a start point to scan edges when selecting [Ring] in the inspection region. The setting
range is from 0 (degree) to 359.999 (degree).
Edge sensitivity
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where
the shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Edge filter width
Averages the edge graph. When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower edge intensity
Sets the lower limit for edge detection. Edges falling below the lower limit are not detected. Adjust
the lower edge intensity with reference to the maximum edge intensity value shown on the left of
the edge graph, and unnecessary edges can be excluded.
Max. pitch count
Sets the maximum number of pitches to be measured.
Angled edge
detection
Turn this option on to stabilize the detection for the edge that is angled with respect to the
inspection region. Note that turning on in normal state may affect the measurement precision.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Count
Specifies the range of the pitch count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Pitch
Specifies the range of the pitch judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-302 CV-X UM_E
Edge Pairs
Edge Pairs
Detects two edges (an edge pair) in the inspection region to measure the width between the edges.
Configurable edge scan conditions and the ability to detect and have multiple edge pairs allows optimized
detection suitable for the measurement target.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle or a rotated
rectangle
• Example of measuring the gap pitch
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example 1: Results of a gap pitch measurement
performed under the following conditions
• Select Mode: Gap Pitch
• Scan Direction (1st scan): →
• Scan Direction (2nd scan): →
• Edge Direction (1st scan): Light to Dark
Width to be measured
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
• Edge Direction (2nd scan): Dark to Light
• Gap Pitch Upper Limit: 99999.999
Target
• Gap Pitch Lower Limit: 0050.000
Edge to be detected
Width
Maximum: 100
Minimum: 70
Average: 80
Inspection region
Pair count
4
Width to be measured
Target
• Example of measuring the center pitch
Reference
The central pin is below the gap pitch lower limit
and is therefore excluded from the search.
Width to be measured
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
• Example of measuring the gap pitch
Width to be measured
Example 2: Results of a center pitch measurement
performed under the following conditions
• Select Mode: Center Pitch
• Scan Direction (1st scan): →
• Scan Direction (2nd scan): →
• Edge Direction (1st scan): Light to Dark
• Edge Direction (2nd scan): Dark to Light
• Gap Pitch Upper Limit: 99999.999
• Gap Pitch Lower Limit: 0050.000
Width
Maximum: 120
Minimum: 100
Average: 110
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Pair count
3
Target
• Example of measuring the center pitch
Width to be measured
Reference
The central pin is below the gap pitch lower limit
and is therefore excluded from the search.
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
CV-X UM_E
2-303
Function List
"Edge Pairs" measurement
Edge Pairs
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-305).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-305).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
2-304 CV-X UM_E
5
Edge Pairs
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Select mode
Selects the type of edge pairs to be measured between [Gap Pitch] and [Center Pitch].
• Center Pitch: Measures the pitch between centers of the gap pitches and finds the maximum,
minimum and average values.
Scan
Selects which of the two scans, “1st Scan” or “2nd Scan”, to set the edge detection conditions of.
Scan direction
Specifies the direction for scanning for the edge within the inspection region.
Edge direction
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among
[Light to Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
Starting angle
Specifies a start point to scan edges when selecting [Ring] in the inspection region. The setting
range is from 0 (degree) to 359.999 (degree).
Skip edges
Specifies the number of edges to skip using the number of edges from the start point of scan.
Edge sensitivity
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where
the shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Edge filter width
Averages the edge graph. When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower edge intensity
Sets the lower limit for edge detection. Edges falling below the lower limit are not detected. Adjust
the lower edge intensity with reference to the maximum edge intensity value shown on the left of
the edge graph, and unnecessary edges can be excluded.
Gap pitch upper/
lower limit
Specifies the upper/lower limit of a pitch which can be detected as an edge pair. When a gap pitch
Max. count
Specifies the maximum number of pairs to be measured.
Judged label
Select [All] to judge the measurements of the maximum and minimum values for all the pairs. To
judge a specific pair, select [Specified] and specify the pair number to be judged. Only the target
bearing the pair number specified here will be judged.
Angled edge
detection
Turn this option on to stabilize the detection for the edge that is angled with respect to the
inspection region. Note that turning on in normal state may affect the measurement precision.
is larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the lower limit, it is not detected as a pair.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Count
Specifies the range of the pair count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Width
Specifies the range of the pair width judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-305
Function List
• Gap Pitch: Detects the edge in the specified detection direction and measures the maximum,
minimum and average values of the distances from the odd-numbers to even-numbers edge.
Defect
Defect
Function List
"Defect" measurement
Recognizes the segment with a intensity difference above a certain level in the inspection region as a defect or
dirt and outputs the total area (size) of the detected defect or dirt. In addition, it is possible to group
successive segments into groups and output the number of defects and their respective positions.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example when the scan direction is either X or Y or
XY
When a defect on the surface of a target is detected
• Scan Direction: XY
Segment
Detected defect
Total area
20
Inspection region
Target
Example when the scan direction is circumferential
Segment
Shifts in a circumferential
direction
Inspection region
Target
Detected defect
When a crack or burr on the surface of a target is
detected
• Scan Direction: X
Total area
55
When a crack or burr on the round surface of a target
is detected
• Scan Direction: Circumference
Total area
35
When the position of a defect on the surface of a
target is detected
• Scan Direction: XY
• Grouping: ON
• Detection Count: 2
• Detection Order: Y>X: Ascend
Result of the first defect
Defect area: 70
Center of gravity:
X100, Y100
Result of the second defect
Defect area: 100
Center of gravity:
X200, Y400
2-306 CV-X UM_E
Defect
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
5
Reference
3
4
5
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-308).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-309).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-307
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Defect
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Scan direction
Selects the direction to scan the defect within the region.
Function List
• X: Detects the intensity differences to the X-direction. This option is used when canceling the
background having directionality (X-direction) during detection. It is also useful for detecting the
burr or crack on the edge of the object.
• Y: Detects the intensity differences to the Y-direction. This option is used when canceling the
background having directionality (Y-direction) during detection. It is also useful for detecting the
burr or crack on the edge of the object.
• XY: Detects the intensity differences to both X- and Y-directions. This is suitable for detecting the
consistent surface such as the object surface.
• Circumference: Detects the intensity differences to the circumferential direction. This option is
used when canceling the background having directionality (circumferential direction) during
detection. It is also useful for detecting the burr or crack on the edge of the object.
• Radius: Detects the intensity differences to the radial direction. This option is used when
canceling the background having directionality (radial direction) during detection. It is also
useful for detecting the burr or crack on the edge of the object.
High speed mode
Turning this option ON accelerates the detection. In the high-speed mode, the segment size and
shift distance can be specified only in multiples of four.
Defect level
Defines the [Intensity] to be detected as a spot, foreign object or defect. It is useful for
distinguishing between a detection target and background noise. While checking the contrast,
adjust accordingly until only the detection target is displayed.
Individual
Turn this option ON when individual setting of segment parameters for each detection direction is
desired. This allows independent setting of the segment size or shift distance in the X and Y
directions (or in the circumferential and radial directions when the inspection region is the ring or arc).
Segment size
Sets the size of the segment used for scanning the inspection region. The current segment size is
displayed as a frame border in orange on the upper left corner of the screen.
Comparison
Select “Manual” and change the detailed settings to make the defect volume greater as a measure
for gradual intensity changes. Defect measurement and detection may be difficult where intensity
changes are gradual such as in overall uneven color shading since normally, the tool detects
intensity differences between closer segments as a defect. In this case, change the settings of
“Element Shift” and “Compare Element” so as to detect the intensity differences far in the distance,
and the defect volume can be greater.
Element shift
Specifies the shift distance when calculating the average intensity of segments. A greater shift
distance enables the calculation of the average intensity of a wider range.
Compare element
Specifies the distance between two segments whose intensities are to be compared. Making it
larger compares a segment with another in a farther distance.
Gain
Sets a gain to the intensity difference for detecting defects. To detect defects that have a small
intensity difference, set the gain to a larger value.
Point
Ignore intensity
The gain cannot be set with the following conditions:
• When Fine Color is selected in Extract Colors
• When using a 21-megapixel or greater camera
• When the image size exceeds a width of 2,432 pixels or a height of 2,050 pixels
Excludes the brightness information to detect only changes in the hue and saturation as a defect
when selecting [Fine Color] in Extract Colors (This cannot be set in MultiSpectrum mode).
• OFF: Changes in brightness are processed as part of the defect level measurement.
• ON: Detects only changes in H (Hue) and S (Saturation).
Grouping
Turning this option ON groups and treats adjacent defects as a group and the defect area and the
center of gravity can be detected by group.
Detection count
Specifies the maximum number of defect groups to be detected.
2-308 CV-X UM_E
Defect
Settings
Fill holes
Setting this option to ON infills the interior portion of the group as a detected defect.
Active border
Excludes groups found on the border of the inspection region from the detected target. Turning
this option ON enables cancellation of objects, such as a background, that touch the inspection
region border.
Defect area
Defects whose total area is larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the specified lower
limit are not detected as a defect group.
Roundness
Excludes a defect group whose roundness is higher than the specified upper limit (closer to a true
circle) or smaller than the lower limit.
Major axis
Excludes the defect group with a major axis larger than the specified upper limit, or smaller than
the lower limit.
Axes ratio (major/
minor)
Excludes the defect group with an axes ratio larger than the specified upper limit (that is, the
shape is elongated) or smaller than the lower limit.
Equivalent oval major Excludes the defect group with an equivalent oval major axis larger than the specified upper limit,
axis
or smaller than the lower limit.
Equivalent oval
aspect ratio
Excludes the defect group with an equivalent oval aspect ratio larger than the specified upper limit
(that is, the equivalent oval is elongated) or smaller than the lower limit.
Detection order
Selects the identification order of the multiple groups detected.
• Y>X ascend: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order. If Y is close in range, sort by X coordinate
in ascending order.
• X>Y ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order. If X is close in range, sort by Y coordinate
in ascending order.
• X ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X descend: Sort by X coordinate in descending order.
• Y ascend: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• Y descend: Sort by Y coordinate in descending order.
• Area Ascend: Sort by the defect area in ascending order.
• Area Descend: Sort by the defect area in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort groups in clockwise sequence with respect to the inspection region.
• Counter Clockwise: Sort groups in counterclockwise sequence with respect to the inspection
region.
• Out to Center: Sort groups in order beginning from the most distant to the closest with respect to
the center of the inspection region.
• Center to Out: Sort groups in order beginning from the closest to the most distant with respect to
the center of the inspection region.
Judged label
Specifies a judgment target from among multiple groups detected.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Total area
Specifies the range of the total defect area (summation of defect areas within the inspection
region) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Groups
Specifies the range of the detected number of groups judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
Defect area
Specifies the range of the defect area (of the judged label) judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Center of gravity
With regard to the center of gravity position (X/Y) of the defect group specified by [Judged Label],
specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-309
Function List
Setting item
Blob
Blob
Function List
"Blob" measurement
A cluster of “Black” or “White” in the binarized image (in black-and-white) is called “Blob”. This tool allows
measurement of characteristic quantities such as blob count and blob’s area and center of gravity.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Blobs are measured, filtered, and identified based on
numerous criteria. When identified, they can be ordered
based on the size or detection direction.
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: Y>X: Ascend
• Judged Label: 2
�
�
�
�
�
Detected blob
�
�
Inspection region
Target
2-310 CV-X UM_E
�
�
�
Labels
5
Target blob
Center of gravity: X: 600, Y: 460
Area: 20,000
Roundness: 0.85
Blob
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
6
Reference
3
4
5
6
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the binary conditions.
Set detection conditions (Page 2-312).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-313).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-311
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Blob
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Detection color
Selects which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
Function List
Reference
When using Color to Binary, the extracted color becomes "White".
Detection count
Specifies the maximum number of blobs to be detected.
Lower area filter
Excludes a blob which is smaller than the specified lower limit. Increase the value in case an
unnecessary noise component is counted.
Fill holes
Fills the inside of the blob with the detection color. Setting to ON enables calculation of the area
and positional coordinates of a blob filled-in with the detection color.
Active border
Excludes the blobs on the frame border of the inspection region. Setting to ON removes the
background from the inspection region.
Angle range
Specifies the range of the Major Angle to be measured.
• [180 (degrees)]: Measures in the range of -89.999 (degrees) to 90.000 (degrees).
• [360 (degrees)]: Measures in the range of -179.999 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
• OFF: Always measures in 0 (degrees) without measuring the Major Angle.
Measure major/minor When this option is turned on, the Major Axis Bounding Box is detected. In addition, the following
axes
are enabled: “Major Axis”, “Minor Axis” and “Axes Ratio (Aspect Ratio)” under Measured Results,
Judgment Conditions, and Filter Settings.
Measure equivalent
oval
When this option is turned on, the Equivalent Oval is detected. In addition, the following are
enabled: “Equivalent Oval Major Axis”, “Equivalent Oval Minor Axis” and “Equivalent Oval Aspect
Ratio” under Measured Results, Judgment Conditions and Filter Settings.
Detection order
Selects the order of numbering for the multiple detected blobs.
• Y>X Ascend: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order. If Y is close in range, sort by X coordinate
in ascending order.
• X>Y Ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order. If X is close in range, sort by Y coordinate
in ascending order.
• X Ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X Descend: Sort by X coordinate in descending order.
• Y Ascend: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• Y Descend: Sort by Y coordinate in descending order.
• Area Ascend: Sort by area in ascending order.
• Area Descend: Sort by area in descending order.
• Roundness Ascend: Sort by roundness in ascending order.
• Roundness Descend: Sort by roundness in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort blobs clockwise beginning from the [Starting Angle].
• Counter Clockwise: Sort blobs counter-clockwise beginning from the [Starting Angle].
Starting angle
Specifies the starting angle for numbering the blobs when the detection order is set to [Clockwise]
or [Counterclockwise].
Judged label
Specifies the blob to be judged.
• Specified: Specifies the blob number to be judged after selecting "Specified" under "Judged
Label". Only the blob with the number specified in this option becomes the Judgment target.
• All: The maximum and minimum values among all the labels are to be judged.
Area
A cluster, whose area is out of the specified upper and lower limit, is not detected as a blob.
Roundness
Excludes the blob with Roundness larger than the specified upper limit (that means the blob is
close to a true circle), or smaller than the lower limit.
Major axis
Excludes the blob with a Major Axis longer than the specified upper limit or shorter than the lower
limit.
2-312 CV-X UM_E
Blob
Setting item
Settings
Axes ratio
Excludes the blob with an Axes Ratio larger (the shape is elongated) than the specified upper limit
or smaller than the lower limit.
Equivalent oval major Excludes the blob with an Equivalent Oval Major Axis larger than the specified upper limit, or
axis
smaller than the lower limit.
Excludes the blob with an Equivalent Oval Aspect Ratio larger (the equivalent oval is elongated)
than the specified upper limit or smaller than the lower limit.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Labels
Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Center of gravity
Specifies an acceptable range for the position of the center of gravity (X,Y) by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Major angle
Specifies the range of the detected Major Angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
Area
Specifies the range of the area judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Feret
Specifies the range of the feret diameters (in X and Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
Perimeter
Specifies the range of the perimeter judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Roundness
Specifies the range of Roundness judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].*
[Roundness] regards the true circle as 1.000 and gradually draws closer to 0.000 the more the
shape varies from a true circle.
Major axis
Specifies the range of Major Axis judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Minor axis
Specifies the range of Minor Axis judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Axes ratio (Major/
Minor)
Specifies the range of Axes Ratio judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Equivalent oval major Specifies the range of Equivalent Oval Major Axis judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
axis
[Lower Limit].
Equivalent oval minor Specifies the range of Equivalent Oval Minor Axis judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
axis
[Lower Limit].
Equivalent oval
aspect ratio
Specifies the range of Equivalent Oval Aspect Ratio judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-313
Function List
Equivalent oval
aspect ratio
Grayscale Blob
Grayscale Blob
Function List
"Grayscale Blob" measurement
Detects as Blobs clusters whose intensity difference from the specified Reference Intensity is greater than a
certain level. The blob volume and shade information, such as tone, as well as the blob count, area and center
of gravity can be measured.
In the Grayscale Blob tool, a cluster whose intensity difference from the specified Reference Intensity is greater
than a certain level is called a "Blob". In the Blob tool, a "white" or "black" cluster in a binarized (in black-andwhite) image is treated as a "Blob". On the other hand, a 256-tone shade information can be utilized in the
Grayscale Blob tool since it processes gray images. From this shade information, the blob's intensity and
volume (integrated value of intensity) can also be measured as feature sizes and this makes it possible to
judge defects or dirt using the blob's intensity. Moreover, since measurements are performed using the
differential value with the Reference Intensity, the differential value does not vary greatly even if the overall
brightness changes. Therefore, with these kinds of conditions, the measurement is more stable than that of the
Blob tool which uses binarization.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
In Grayscale Blob measurement, the measurement
Example showing the results under the following
segment moves in the specified detection direction in the
amount set in the inspection region and measures the
average intensity in each segment. The measured value
is the "intensity" of each segment.
conditions:
• Detection Order: Y > X Ascend
• Judged Label: 2
Segment size
Segment
size
Movement direction
Segment shift
The difference between the intensity of each segment
and the Reference Intensity value is called "intensity
difference" and an aggregation of segments whose
intensity difference exceeds the set threshold is detected
as a blob.
Point
An aggregation of segments exceeding the
threshold level in contact with bright and dark sides
is detected as one blob. To avoid this, you need to
specify the Detection Target as "Bright" or "Dark" to
detect them separately or you need to avoid contact
by setting a high intensity threshold level.
2-314 CV-X UM_E
Bright blob:
Dark blob:
Number of labels: 5
Measurement target blob
Center of gravity: X: 600, Y: 460
Area: 20,000
Roundness: 0.85
Grayscale Blob
Flow of Setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
5
Reference
3
4
5
6
7
6
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
7
Set the detection conditions (Page 2-316).
Set the segment behavior (Page 2-316).
Set the conditions for the blobs to be
detected (Page 2-317).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-318).
Set the tolerances (upper limit and lower limit) for
the measured values.
CV-X UM_E
2-315
Function List
2
3
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Grayscale Blob
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Detection target
Selects which feature, "Bright" or "Dark", is to be the detection target.
Function List
• Bright: Among the segments whose intensity is brighter (greater) than the Reference Intensity,
the segments whose intensity difference exceeds the Intensity Threshold Level are set as the
detection targets.
• Dark: Among the segments whose intensity is darker (lesser) than the Reference Intensity, the
segments whose intensity difference exceeds the Intensity Threshold Level are set as the
detection targets.
• Bright & Dark: The segments whose intensity difference exceeds the Intensity Threshold Level
are set as the detection targets.
• Individual: Sets individual detection thresholds for both the bright and the dark features.
Reference intensity
Selects the intensity value that will serve as the reference for the Intensity Difference. Normally, this is set such
that it is close to the intensity value of the background of the measurement target.
• Average: Sets the average value of the intensities found within the inspection region as the
reference intensity value.
• Median: Sets the intensity found at the center of the intensity distribution within the inspection
region as the reference intensity value.
• Mode: Sets the intensity value that is of the greatest proportion within the inspection region as
the reference intensity value.
• Specified: Sets the specified value as the reference intensity value.
• Extract Plane: Sets the intensity value that corresponds to the height of the Extract Plane as the
reference intensity value. The height from the Extract Plane will then correspond to the Intensity
Difference (This option is available only when the camera is the LJ-V Series head).
Intensity threshold
level
Specifies the lower limit for detecting Intensity Differences as blobs in the range of 0 to 254. A cluster of
segments whose Intensity Difference is greater than this threshold level is detected as a blob.
Real volume
conversion
Outputs the volume in its actual size by converting the Intensity Difference (height) and X/Y dimensions into
their full scale values (mm)(This option is available only when the camera is the LJ-V Series head).
Setting the segment behavior
Setting item
Settings
High speed mode
When this option is turned on, the inspection speeds up.
In the high-speed mode, the segment size and shift distance can be specified only in multiples of four.
Individual
When this option is turned on, the segment size and shift distance in the X and Y direction can be set
individually.
Segment size
When the value is increased, the noise reduction effect improves. However, since the Intensity Difference that
will be detected may also vary, adjust the value in a way that the target can be detected stably.
The current segment size is displayed as an orange frame on the upper left corner of the screen.
Segment interval
When "Auto" is specified, the recommended Segment Shift based on the segment size is automatically set.
When "Manual" is specified, the Segment Shift can be specified as desired.
Segment shift
When the value is increased, the processing time shortens. However, since the detection capability for fine
targets will also deteriorate, adjust the value within a range where the measurement will be stable. Normally, a
value smaller than the segment size is specified.
2-316 CV-X UM_E
Grayscale Blob
Setting blob detection conditions
Settings
Detection count
Specifies the maximum number of blobs to be detected.
Lower area filter
Excludes a blob which has an area that is smaller than the specified lower limit.
Increase the value in case an unnecessary noise component is counted.
Lower volume filter
Excludes a blob which has a volume that is smaller than the specified lower limit.
Fill holes
When this option is turned on, the inside of the blob is filled and then the area and positional
coordinates are calculated. However, with regard to the volume, average intensity difference and
maximum intensity difference, the hole is excluded from the calculation.
Active border
Excludes the blobs on the frame border of the inspection region from the measurement.
When this option is turned on, the background and other things that are touching upon the border
of the inspection region can be cancelled out.
Angle range
Specifies the range of the Major Angle to be measured.
• [180 (degrees)]: Measures in the range of -89.999 (degrees) to 90.000 (degrees).
• [360 (degrees)]: Measures in the range of -179.999 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
• OFF: Always measures in 0 (degrees) without measuring the Major Angle.
Measure volume/
intensity difference
When this option is turned on, the Volume and Intensity Difference are measured.
In addition, the following are enabled: "Volume", "Average Intensity Difference" and "Maximum
Intensity Difference" under Measured Results, Judgment Conditions, and Filter Settings.
Measure major/minor When this option is turned on, the Major Axis Bounding Box is detected.
axes
In addition, the following are enabled: "Major Axis", "Minor Axis" and "Axes Ratio (Aspect Ratio)"
under Measured Results, Judgment Conditions, and Filter Settings.
Measure equivalent
oval
When this option is turned on, the Equivalent Oval is detected.
In addition, the following are enabled: "Equivalent Oval Major Axis", "Equivalent Oval Minor Axis"
and "Equivalent Oval Aspect Ratio" under Measured Results, Judgment Conditions and Filter
Settings.
Detection order
Selects how the multiple detected blobs are numbered.
• Y>X: Ascend: Sorts by Y coordinate in ascending order. If Y coordinates are close in range, they are
sorted by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X>Y: Ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order. If X coordinates are close in range, they are
sorted by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• X: Ascend: Sort by X coordinate in ascending order.
• X: Descend: Sort by X coordinate in descending order.
• Y:Ascend: Sort by Y coordinate in ascending order.
• Y: Descend: Sort by Y coordinate in descending order.
• Area: Ascend: Sort by area in ascending order.
• Area: Descend: Sort by area in descending order.
• Roundness: Ascend: Sort by roundness in ascending order.
• Roundness: Descend: Sort by roundness in descending order.
• Clockwise: Sort blobs clockwise beginning from the [Starting Angle].
• Counterclockwise: Sort blobs counterclockwise beginning from the [Starting Angle].
• Volume: Ascend: Sort by volume in ascending order.
• Volume: Descend: Sort by volume in descending order.
• Ave. Intensity Difference: Ascend: Sort by the average intensity difference in ascending order.
• Ave. Intensity Difference: Descend: Sort by the average intensity difference in descending order.
• Max. Intensity Difference: Ascend: Sort by the maximum intensity difference in ascending order.
• Max. Intensity Difference: Descend: Sort by the maximum intensity difference in descending order.
Starting angle
Specifies the starting angle for numbering the blobs when the detection order is set to [Clockwise] or
[Counterclockwise].
CV-X UM_E
2-317
Function List
Setting item
Grayscale Blob
Setting item
Settings
Judged label
Specifies the blob to be judged.
• Specified: Specifies the blob number to be judged after selecting "Specified" under "Judged Label". Only
the blob with the number specified in this option becomes the Judgment target.
• All: The maximum and minimum values among all the labels are to be judged.
Function List
Area
When the area of a cluster is larger than the specified Upper Limit or smaller than the Lower Limit, the cluster
is not detected as a blob.
Volume
When the volume of a cluster is larger than the specified Upper Limit or smaller than the Lower Limit, the
cluster is not detected as a blob.
Average intensity
difference
When the average intensity difference of a cluster is greater than the specified Upper Limit or lesser than the
Lower Limit, the cluster is not detected as a blob.
Maximum intensity
difference
When the maximum intensity difference of a cluster is greater than the specified Upper Limit or lesser than the
Lower Limit, the cluster is not detected as a blob.
Roundness
Excludes the blob with Roundness larger (that means the blob is close to a true circle) than the specified
upper limit or smaller than the lower limit.
Major axis
Excludes the blob with a Major Axis larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the lower limit.
Axes ratio
Excludes the blob with an Axes Ratio larger (the shape is elongated) than the specified upper limit or smaller
than the lower limit.
Equivalent oval major Excludes the blob with an Equivalent Oval Major Axis larger than the specified upper limit or smaller than the
axis
lower limit.
Equivalent oval
aspect ratio
Excludes the blob with an Equivalent Oval Aspect Ratio larger (the equivalent oval is elongated) than the
specified upper limit or smaller than the lower limit.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Total area
Specifies the range of the total area judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Labels
Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Center of gravity
Specifies an acceptable range for the position of the center of gravity (X,Y) by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
Major angle
Specifies the range of the detected Major Angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
Area
Specifies the area range to judge as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Average intensity
difference
Specifies the range of the average intensity difference judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
Maximum intensity
difference
Specifies the range of the maximum intensity difference judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
Volume
Specifies the range of the volume judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Feret
Specifies the range of the feret diameters (in X and Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
Perimeter
Specifies the range of the perimeter judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Roundness
Specifies the range of Roundness judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
[Roundness] regards the true circle as 1.000 and gradually draws closer to 0.000 the more the shape
varies from a true circle.
Major axis
Specifies the range of Major Axis judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Minor axis
Specifies the range of Minor Axis judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Axes ratio (Major/Minor) Specifies the range of Axes Ratio judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Equivalent oval major
axis
Specifies the range of Equivalent Oval Major Axis judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Equivalent oval minor
axis
Specifies the range of Equivalent Oval Minor Axis judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Equivalent oval aspect Specifies the range of Equivalent Oval Aspect Ratio judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
ratio
[Lower Limit].
2-318 CV-X UM_E
Profile Position
Profile Position
Detects the maximum (minimum) point from among multiple edge points detected in the inspection region and
outputs its position. Also, a circle and a line can be found through the information of the edge points detected.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
In the instance the scan direction is [→] and the trend
direction is [↓]
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Trend
direction
Target
Maximum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Minimum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
Scan direction
Trend
direction
Minimum edge
position measured
160
Scan direction
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
When the trend direction is [Clockwise]
Maximum detected
edge on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Inspection region
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: Clockwise
• Scan Direction: Out to Center
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment size
Trend direction
Maximum edge
position measured
300
Scan direction
Target
Minimum detected
edge on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Trend direction
Maximum radius measured
400
Minimum radius measured
300
CV-X UM_E
2-319
Function List
"Profile Position" measurement
Profile Position
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
5
3
4
5
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-321).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-322).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
2-320 CV-X UM_E
Profile Position
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Trend direction
Selects the direction of moving for the segment which detects the edge.
• When the inspection region is the rotated rectangle, only [Down] (from the upper edge to the
lower) is available and the direction is based on the rotation of the inspection region.
• When the inspection region is the ring or the circular arc, only [Clockwise] is available.
Scan direction
Specifies the edge scan direction in the inspection region (segment).
Edge direction
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among
[Light to Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
Edge sensitivity
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where
the shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Edge filter width
Averages the edge graph. When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower edge intensity
Sets the lower limit for edge detection. Edges falling below the lower limit are not detected. Adjust
the lower edge intensity with reference to the maximum edge intensity value shown on the left of
the edge graph, and unnecessary edges can be excluded.
Segment Size
Specifies the size of a detection segment. When the size is made larger, the smaller light-dark
changes cannot be detected. However, the inspection becomes less susceptible to the influence
of noise.
Segment Shift
Specifies the amount of the segment shift for detecting edges. The smaller the segment shift
value, the longer the processing time while the more number of edges can be measured within the
same region.
Starting Offset/
Starting Angle
Specify the amount of offset (angle) from the starting edge of the inspection region for the first
segment. If there is no detection target near the boundaries of the inspection region, the first
segment can be arranged at an optimum position without changing the inspection region.
Max. segments
Specifies the maximum number of detectable segments. Specify the [Max. Segments] to a larger
value than that of the [Segment Count]. [Segment Count] changes in conjunction with the
inspection region, segment size and segment shift settings.
Judged label
Selects the segment to be judged from among maximum, minimum or specified number.
Best fit circle/line
Detects a circle or a line from the information of detected multiple edge points.
Correction
Turning this option ON reduces the noise influence during circle or line detection.
CV-X UM_E
2-321
Function List
• Select one of the options, [Down] and [To Right].
Profile Position
Setting judgment conditions
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Detection segments
Specifies the range of the number of detected segments judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Position (Max.)
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the maximum
value of the detected position (X or Y coordinate) (in case where the inspection region is
[Rectangle] and the trend direction is [To Right] or [Down]).
Position (Min.)
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the minimum
value of the detected position (X or Y coordinate) (in case where the inspection region is
[Rectangle] and the trend direction is [To Right] or [Down]).
Position
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the position (X
or Y coordinate) which is detected as the judgment target segment (in case where the inspection
region is [Rectangle] and the trend direction is [To Right] or [Down]).
Distance (Max.)
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the maximum
value of the detected distance (in case where the inspection region is [Rotated Rectangle]).
Distance (Min.)
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the minimum
value of the detected distance (in case where the inspection region is [Rotated Rectangle]).
Distance
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the distance
which is detected as the judgment target segment (in case where the inspection region is [Rotated
Rectangle]).
Radius (Max.)
Specify an acceptable range of the detected maximum radius by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit] (in case where the inspection region is [Ring/Arc]).
Radius (Min.)
Specify an acceptable range of the detected minimum radius by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit] (in case where the inspection region is [Ring/Arc]).
Radius
Specify an acceptable range of the radius whose segment is designated in [Judged Label] by
setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] (in case where the inspection region is [Ring/Arc]).
Line angle
Specifies the range of the detected line angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
Circle center
Specifies the range of the detected circle center (X/Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
Circle radius/diameter Specifies the range of the detected circle diameter/radius judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-322 CV-X UM_E
Profile Width
Profile Width
Outputs two or more pitch widths in the inspection region by detecting multiple edges. This tool is useful in that
it can measure the maximum and minimum width in a certain range at one time.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
• In the instance the scan direction is [→] and the trend
direction is [↓]
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Outer Gap
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Maximum detected edge
width on target
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Trend direction
Scan direction
Maximum edge width
500
Minimum detected edge
width on target
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
Target
Minimum edge width
200
Trend direction
Scan direction
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
• In the instance the trend direction is [Clockwise] and
the select mode is [Outer Gap]
g
Maximum detected
radial width
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Target
Trend direction
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc (1)
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Select Mode: Outer Gap
• Trend Direction: Clockwise
• Scan Direction: Center to Out
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment size
Minimum detected
radial width
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
• In the instance the trend direction is [Clockwise] and
the select mode is [Outer Diameter]
Inspection region
Maximum detected diameter
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Segment size
Minimum detected diameter
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Target
Maximum outer gap width
100
Minimum outer gap width
30
Trend
direction
Thickest part of
the measurement target
Thinnest part of
the measurement target
Trend direction
CV-X UM_E
2-323
Function List
"Profile Width" measurement
Profile Width
Measurement Example (continued)
Function List
When the inspection region is a ring
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Select Mode: Outer Diameter
• Trend Direction: Clockwise
• Scan Direction: Center to Out
• Edge Direction: Both
Maximum outer diameter
100
Minimum outer diameter
30
Trend direction
2-324 CV-X UM_E
Profile Width
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
5
3
4
5
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set detection conditions (Page 2-326).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-327).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-325
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Profile Width
Setting detection conditions
Settings
Select mode
Selects the edge width type to be measured from among [Outer Gap], [Inner Gap], [Outer
Diameter (Ring only)] and [Inner diameter (Ring only)].
Function List
Setting item
• Outer Gap: Measures the distance between the two outermost edges in the inspection region.
• Inner Gap: Measures the distance between the two innermost edges in the inspection region.
• Outer Diameter: Measures the outer diameter of the edge detected by two segments opposing
in a circle area.
• Inner Diameter: Measures the inner diameter of the edge detected by two segments opposing
in a circle area.
Trend direction
Selects the direction of moving for the segment which detects the edge.
• Select one of the options, [Down] and [To Right].
• When the inspection region is the rotated rectangle, only [Down] (from the upper edge to the
lower) is available and the direction is based on the rotation of the inspection region.
• When the inspection region is the ring or the circular arc, only [Clockwise] is available.
Scan direction
Specify the edge scan direction in the inspection region (segment).
Edge direction
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among
[Light to Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
Edge sensitivity
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where
the shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Edge filter width
Averages the edge graph. When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower edge intensity
Sets the lower limit for edge detection. Edges falling below the lower limit are not detected. Adjust
the lower edge intensity with reference to the maximum edge intensity value shown on the left of
the edge graph, and unnecessary edges can be excluded.
Lower edge width
Specifies the lower limit of the edge width to be detected as a pair.
Segment size
Specifies the size of a detection segment. When the size is made larger, the smaller light-dark
changes cannot be detected. However, the inspection becomes less susceptible to the influence
of noise.
Segment shift
Specifies the amount of the segment shift for detecting edges. The smaller the segment shift
value, the longer the processing time while the more number of edges can be measured within the
same region.
Starting Offset/
Starting Angle
Specify the amount of offset (angle) from the starting edge of the inspection region for the first
segment. If there is no detection target near the boundaries of the inspection region, the first
segment can be arranged at an optimum position without changing the inspection region.
Max. segments
Specifies the maximum number of detectable segments. Specify the [Max. Segments] to a larger
value than that of the [Segment Count]. [Segment Count] changes in conjunction with the
inspection region, segment size and segment shift settings.
Judged label
Selects the segment to be judged from among Maximum, Minimum and Specified.
Measure peak-to-peak Turning this option on enables detection of the distance between peaks. Also, “Max. Peak-to-Peak
Width” and “Min. Peak-to-Peak Width” in the judgment conditions and “Show Max. Peak-to-Peak
width
Width” and “Show Min. Peak-to-Peak Width” in “Display” are activated.
2-326 CV-X UM_E
Profile Width
Setting judgment conditions
Settings
Detection segments
Specifies the range of the number of detected segments judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Edge Width (Max.)
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the maximum
value of the detected edge width.
Edge Width (Min.)
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the minimum
value of the detected edge width.
Edge Width
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the detected
edge width.
Max. peak-to-peak
width
Specifies an acceptable range by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the detected
Min. peak-to-peak
width
maximum peak-to-peak width (Max. P-P width).
Specifies an acceptable range by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the detected
minimum peak-to-peak width (Min. P-P width).
CV-X UM_E
2-327
Function List
Setting item
Profile Defect
Profile Defect
Function List
"Profile Defect" measurement
Detects the segment that greatly deviates from the basic contour of the reference line (line, circle, oval or free
curve) calculated from the information of multiple edges as a defect (flaw).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example of an inspection region with a curved
reference line
Example of a rectangle inspection region and a
straight reference line
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Reference Line: Line
• Scan Direction: ↑
• Defect Scan Direction: +
Edge scan direction
Defect
Defect width
5
Trend direction
Defect level
3.328
Conceptual detection image
Edge scan
direction
Edge position points
detected (Profile
Position method)
Defect level graph
Defect scan direction
+ side
Reference line
determined from
the edge points
Defect width
Defect size
12.285
Defect position
X: 128.235, Y: 54.332
Example of a ring inspection region and a circle
reference line
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Reference Line: Circle
• Scan Direction: Out to Center
• Defect Scan Direction: ±
Edge scan direction
Defect level
Defect threshold
- side
Defect position
X: 125.432, Y: 198.631
Defect threshold
Defect size (colored area)
Defect size
11.376
Defect position
Defect level wave
Defect level
2.149
Defect width
4
Example of an arc inspection region and an oval
reference line
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Reference Line: Oval
• Scan Direction: Center to Out
• Defect Scan Direction: Edge scan direction
Defect position
X: 285.211, Y: 98.631
Defect width
5
Defect size
14.562
Defect level
5.482
2-328 CV-X UM_E
Profile Defect
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
5
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
6
4
5
6
Set the edge detection conditions (Page 2330).
Set defect detection conditions (Page 2-331).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-332).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-329
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Profile Defect
Setting edge detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Trend direction
Selects the direction of moving for the segment which detects the edge.
Function List
• Select one of the options, [↓] and [→].
• When the inspection region is the rotated rectangle, only [↓] (from the upper edge to the lower)
is available and the direction is based on the rotation of the inspection region.
• When the inspection region is the ring or the circular arc, only [Clockwise] is available.
Scan direction
Specify the edge scan direction in the inspection region (segment).
Edge direction
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among
Edge sensitivity
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where
the shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
Edge filter width
Averages the edge graph. When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
Lower edge intensity
Sets the lower limit for edge detection. Edges falling below the lower limit are not detected. Adjust
the lower edge intensity with reference to the maximum edge intensity value shown on the left of
the edge graph, and unnecessary edges can be excluded.
Segment size
Specifies the size of a detection segment. When the size is made larger, the smaller light-dark
changes cannot be detected. However, the inspection becomes less susceptible to the influence
of noise.
Segment shift
Specifies the amount of the segment shift for detecting edges. The smaller the segment shift
value, the longer the processing time while the more number of edges can be measured within the
same region.
Starting Offset/
Starting Angle
Specify the amount of offset (angle) from the starting edge of the inspection region for the first
segment. If there is no detection target near the boundaries of the inspection region, the first
segment can be arranged at an optimum position without changing the inspection region.
Max. segments
Specifies the maximum number of detectable segments. Specify the [Max. Segments] to a larger
value than that of the [Segment Count]. [Segment Count] changes in conjunction with the
inspection region, segment size and segment shift settings.
[Light to Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
Edge graph segment Specifies a segment whose position and edge graph, edge intensity and detected edge position
No.
will be displayed.
2-330 CV-X UM_E
Profile Defect
Setting defect detection conditions
Settings
Reference line
Selects the reference model line applied to the profile shape of the detected target from among
[Line](only Rectangle/Rotated Rectangle), [Circle] (only Ring/Arc), [Oval ](only Ring/Arc) and
[Free Curve Line].
• Line: Sets the line as a reference model line.
• Circle: Sets the circle as a reference model line.
• Free Curve Line: Sets the free curve line as a reference model line.
• Oval: Sets the oval as a reference model line.
Smoothing range
Set this option when selecting [Free Curve Line] for the reference line. Increase the smoothing
range to draw a free curve smoothly on the shape of the measured target. To make it sharper
decrease the value.
Defect scan direction Selects the direction to detect the defect from among [+], [-], [+/-] and [+/- (Each)].
• [+/-]: Detects the convexo-concave segment in both + and - directions as a defect. ([+]
indicates the forward direction for the direction of the edge detect, and [-] indicates the
backward direction.)
• [+]: Detects only convexo-concave in the + direction as a defect. ([+] indicates the forward
direction for the direction of the edge detect, and [-] indicates the backward direction.)
• [-]: Detects only convexo-concave in the - direction as a defect. ([+] indicates the forward
direction for the direction of the edge detect, and [-] indicates the backward direction.)
• [+/-] (Each): Detects the convexo-concave in both + and - directions as a defect. This option is
available for specifying the level for detecting individual directions of + and - as a defect.
Detection count
Specifies the maximum number of defects to be detected.
Detection threshold
Defines the distance (in pixels) from the reference line and detects an exceeding value as a
defect.
Lower defect level
filter
A defect whose level is lower than the specified lower limit is not detected.
Lower defect width
filter
The portion whose Defect Width is smaller than the specified lower limit is not detected as a
defect.
Lower defect size
filter
A defect whose size is smaller than the specified lower limit is not detected.
Detection order
Selects the way of numbering for the multiple defects detected.
• Segment Ascend: Sort the defects in ascending order for the segment number.
• Segment Descend: Sort the defects in descending order for the segment number.
• X Ascend: Sort the defects in Ascending X order.
• X Descend: Sort the defects in descending X order.
• Y Ascend: Sort the defects in ascending Y order.
• Y Descend: Sort the defects in descending Y order.
• Defect Level Ascend: Sort the defects in Ascending order for the defect level.
• Defect Level Descend: Sort the defects in descending order for the defect level.
• Defect Width Ascend: Sort the defects in ascending order for the number of defect segments.
• Defect Width Descend: Sort the defects in descending order for the number of defect
segments.
• Defect Size Ascend: Sort the defects in ascending order for the defect size.
• Defect Size Descend: Sort the defects in descending order for the defect size.
Judged label
Specifies the defect for the judged target.
• Specified: Only defects with the specified number are the judged target.
• All: Measures the maximum and minimum values for all labels, which are the judged target.
CV-X UM_E
2-331
Function List
Setting item
Profile Defect
Setting judgment conditions
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Detection segments
Specifies the range of the detection count of the segment judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Defect count
Specifies the range of the number of detected defects judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
Total size
Specifies the range of the total defect size judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Defect size
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the defect size
identified by the judged label.
Defect position
Specifies the range judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] for the gravity
center position (X or Y) of the defect specified by the judged label.
2-332 CV-X UM_E
Intensity
Intensity
Measures the average value, maximum value, minimum value and deviation of the intensity (brightness) in the
set inspection region.
Image of the Measurement
When the intensity difference is large
When the intensity difference is small
Intensity tool 1
Intensity tool 1
Intensity tool 2
Intensity tool 2
Target
Target
• Average intensity of intensity tool 1: 50
• Average intensity of intensity tool 2: 200
• Intensity difference: 150
• Average intensity of intensity tool 1: 150
• Average intensity of intensity tool 2: 200
• Intensity difference: 50
CV-X UM_E
2-333
Function List
"Intensity" measurement
Intensity
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-334).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Average
Specifies the range of the average intensity judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Deviation
Specifies the range of the intensity deviation judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Intensity
Specifies the range of the intensity (each pixel contains within the inspection region) judged as OK
by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
2-334 CV-X UM_E
Color Detection
Color Detection
Measures the average value, deviation, and intensity of the color information in the set inspection region.
Image of the Measurement
Example of measuring a red object
Example of measuring a orange object
Inspection region
Inspection region
• R-Average: 200
• R-Average: 250
• G-Average: 50
• B-Average: 50
• G-Average: 200
• B-Average: 40
CV-X UM_E
2-335
Function List
"Color Detection" measurement
Color Detection
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
3
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
Set detection conditions (Page 2-337).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-337).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
2-336 CV-X UM_E
4
Color Detection
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Color system
Selects the measurement parameter of the color.
• HSB: Measures using the parameter of the hue (H), saturation (S) and brightness (B).
Reference
In MultiSpectrum mode (Page 7-6), [MultiSpectrum] is displayed and cannot be changed.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Average
Specifies the range of the average intensity (in RGB or HSB) judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Deviation
Specify the range of the Deviation judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
Intensity
Specify the range of the intensity judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
CV-X UM_E
2-337
Function List
• RGB: Measures using the parameter of Red (R), Green (G) and Blue (B).
Color Grouping (CV-X400 Series Only)
Color Grouping (CV-X400 Series Only)
Function List
"Color Grouping" measurement
Matches the color information of the object against the multiple color groups registered in advance.
ID and Identification of the color group with the largest area (Sorting Mode) or Identification of the object
based on the proportion (%) of the area of each color group (Distribution Mode) can be performed.
Point
This tool can be used when MultiSpectrum mode is enabled on the CV-X400 Series.
Image of the Measurement
(When red is registered in color group 0 and
orange is registered in color group 1)
Example of when a red object is measured
Inspection Region
• Primary Candidate (Group No.) : 0
• Primary Candidate (Area) : 1800
2-338 CV-X UM_E
Example of when an orange object is measured
Inspection Region
• Primary Candidate (Group No.) : 1
• Primary Candidate (Area) : 2100
Color Grouping (CV-X400 Series Only)
Flow of setting
1
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
Register a color group.
The [Color Group Registration] screen appears. Left-click [Add] and register the color group by means
of the [Color Extraction Navi].
For more details on how to use [Color Extraction Navi], refer to "Setting the optimal parameters for color
extraction (Color Extraction Navi)" (Page 9-31).
4
5
Set detection conditions (Page 2-340).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-340).
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
CV-X UM_E
2-339
Function List
2
3
Prepare a tool.
Color Grouping (CV-X400 Series Only)
Setting detection conditions
Setting item
Settings
Mode
Select the mode to suit your purpose for using color grouping.
Function List
• Sorting: Differentiates and sorts the target object by the color.
• Distribution: Measures the distribution of the area of each group.
Measurement Method Selects the measurement method for each group.
(Only when
• Area: Measures the area of each group.
[Distribution] is
• Ratio: Measures by the proportion with respect to the area of all the groups. You can also
selected)
specify [Area of All Groups] or [Entire Insp.Region] as the target when calculating the ratio.
Calculation Target
Selects the target for when the ratio is calculated.
• Area of All Groups: The ratio with respect to the area of all the groups is measured.
• Entire Insp.Region: The ratio with respect to the area of the entire inspection region is measured.
Error If Primary
Candidate Is Not
Found
When this is enabled, the tool will result in an error if a primary candidate is not found.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Primary Candidate
(Group No.)
Specifies the Group Nos. for judging the primary candidate as OK.
Primary Candidate
(Area)
Specifies the range of the area of the primary candidate judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
Individual Area
Specifies the range of the individual area (area of each group) judged as OK by setting the [Upper
Limit] and the [Lower Limit].
Area of All Groups
Specifies the range of the area of all groups judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
2-340 CV-X UM_E
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
The string in the captured image can be recognized by extracting the string information within the inspection
region and then matching it against the library data.
Point
When using the CV-X200/X100 Series, refer to "OCR" (Page 2-348).
Image of the Measurement
Inspection region
Target characters
Character information in
the inspection region is
extracted and recognized
as a string.
Measurement Example
Example showing the result of an OCR2 inspection
performed under the following condition:
• Number of Characters (Block Settings): 6
Detected String
AB.18E
CV-X UM_E
2-341
Function List
"OCR2" measurement
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Function List
>
>
Registering reference image (Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available, register the
reference image.
2
2
3
4
6
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Point
3
• Only rectangle, rotated rectangle, or arc inspection regions are available in OCR2 (rotated rectangles and arcs are only
available when [Recognition] is selected.)
• The inspection region sizes that can be used in OCR2 have the following restrictions according to the camera
image size:
- When the camera image is 5 megapixels or less:
Rectangle: The width and height must be 2,432 pixels or less and 2,050 pixels or less respectively
Rotated Rectangle: The width and the height must be equal to or less than the number of pixels for the camera
image and the size of the inspection region must be equal to or less than 80% of the size of the camera image
Arc: The length of the outer diameter arc must be 6,720 pixels or less, the difference of Radius 1 and 2 must be
equal to or less than the height of the camera image, and the size of the inspection region must be equal to or less than
80% of the size of the camera image
- When the camera image exceeds 5 megapixels:
Rectangle: The width and height must be 4,864 pixels or less and 4,100 pixels or less respectively
Rotated Rectangle: The width and height must be 4,864 pixels or less and 4,100 pixels or less respectively
and the size of the inspection region must be about 12 megapixels or less
Arc: The length of the outer diameter arc must be 11,000 pixels or less, the difference of Radius 1 and 2 must be
4,096 pixels or less, and the size of the inspection region must be about 10 megapixels or less
• To specify an inspection region of 5 megapixels or more when "Block Mode" (Page 2-344) is set to [Recognition]
and the inspection region shape is set to [Rectangle], "Large Area Mode" (Page 2-347) must be enabled.
• Enabling [Large Area Mode] consumes a large amount of the resource memory. Additionally, when [Rotated Rectangle]
or [Arc] is specified for the inspection region shape, the consumption of the resource memory increases if the
camera image pixels are increased. Note that the resource memory may be exceeded if the camera is changed
to a high resolution camera (such as the CA-HF6400C/M) when multiple OCR2 units are added to the program.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
2-342 CV-X UM_E
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
4
Select Font Color.
Sets the color as a character to be recognized comparing the character with the background.
• Black: Recognizes the black part as a character.
• White: Recognizes the white part as a character.
6
Function List
5
If the inspection region is an arc, select the string direction.
Set the direction to extract the string in the region.
• Clockwise: Extracts the string in the region in a clockwise direction.
• Counterclockwise: Extracts the string in the region in a counterclockwise direction.
Left-click [Execute Tuning].
Tuning is executed for the settings selected in [Tuning Target] and the block setting is adjusted so that
the string is appropriately extracted.
If extraction does not work properly, select [Details] of Block Settings, and set the block conditions. For
details on block settings, refer to "Setting Block Settings" (Page 2-344).
7
Check that the characters are correctly
recognized.
7
If the recognized characters are not correct, you
can limit the characters to be referenced in the
built-in library and add new character patterns by
registering a library that is not the built-in library.
For details on library setting, refer to "Editing the
library" (Page 2-345).
8
9
Left-click
.
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-347).
9
Set the judgment string for checking the
recognized content against and the tolerance
(lower limit value) for the recognition result
measured value.
When characters are not correctly recognized
• If characters cannot be extracted properly, changing Block Mode to [Wave Extraction] or [Fixed] allows you
to extract characters with the same procedure as "Identify Characters (CV-X200/X100 Series)" (Page 2-234)
and "OCR" (Page 2-348).
• If a character is incorrectly identified as a recognized character, you can create a library and register the
character pattern that is not recognized or limit unnecessary characters in the library (Page 2-345). You can
also limit the characters to reference for each character position in Restriction Settings in Judgment
Conditions (Page 2-347).
CV-X UM_E
2-343
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Setting Block Settings
Setting item
Settings
Font Color
Sets the color as a character to be recognized comparing the character with the background.
Function List
• Black: Recognizes the black part as a character.
• White: Recognizes the white part as a character.
String Direction
Specifies the direction in which to read the string when the Arc region is used.
• Clockwise: Blocks the characters in the clockwise direction as seen from the region center with
the starting angle as reference.
• Counterclockwise: Blocks the characters in the counterclockwise direction as seen from the
region center with the ending angle as reference.
Recognize Lower
Case Letters
Sets whether or not to reference the library data for lower-case letters while blocking during tuning.
Enable this when tuning is to be performed in regard to a string that includes lower-case letters.
Block Settings
Sets the settings related to block processing.
If the printed characters are not blocked, try the following:
• Disable "Border Exclusion"
• Decrease the value of "Upper Noise Width" and/or "Upper Noise Height"
• Increase the value of "Number of Characters"
• For dot characters or blurred characters, increase the value of "X-Direction Interpolation" and/or
"Y-Direction Interpolation" in "Dot Character Settings".
Number of Characters Specifies the number of characters to be extracted from the inspection region.
Follow Zero Suppress Makes "Number of Characters" automatically adjust according to the changes in length of the
Registered String due to zero suppression. Set "Number of Characters" based on the length of the
longest zero-padded string.
Block Mode
Sets the extraction mode that the character information in the inspection region is divided by one
character.
• Recognition: Determines the extraction positions of the characters while matching them with
the library data.
• Wave Extraction: The character extraction position is determined based on the wave
projections of the inspection region.
• Fixed: This is used for the following cases where wave extraction is not successful.
- The boundary of the characters cannot be judged from the wave.
- The characters are not laid out in one line.
2-344 CV-X UM_E
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Editing the library
Registering characters in the OCR Library
Point
1
• You cannot directly edit the contents of the built-in library.
• Select [Library No.] to either use the registered content together with built-in library content or to specify which content
to use. Refer to "Editing and deleting the registered library data" (Page 2-346) for more details.
Select [Library No.] and enter the number of the library that you want to edit (0 to 999).
If the library for the specified number does not exist, you can create a new library.
2
Left-click [Edit].
The [Edit] screen appears.
Point
3
If you cannot click [Edit], create a new library with [Create].
Select [Register].
The [Select Register Mode] screen appears.
Reference
4
To edit a library other than registering new characters, refer to "Registering, adding, updating and deleting the
libraries of characters used for recognition" (Page 9-49).
Select the mode of registration.
The registration mode of the library can be selected from the following two methods.
• Each: Each character extracted is registered in the library one at a time while specifying the type.
• Batch: Allows registration of all the extracted characters together as a string.
5
Perform registration to the library with the registration method selected.
When [Each] is selected
The [Select Character to Register] screen appears. Use the mouse or
/
to select from the screen
the character that you want to register and then register it.Repeat this until all desired characters are
registered.
When [Batch] is selected
The [Batch] screen appears. Input the characters corresponding to the content of the string currently
extracted and press [Register].
6
When registration is completed, left-click [Close].
The screen reverts to the [Edit] screen.
7
Click [Close].
CV-X UM_E
2-345
Function List
If characters are not correctly recognized by means of the library that is being used, register the characters
you wish to be recognized into the library.
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Editing and deleting the registered library data
The registered library data can be edited or deleted using the procedure below.
1
Function List
Select [Library No.], enter the number of the library that you want to edit (0 to 999), and
then left-click [Edit].
The [Edit] screen appears.
2
Make changes as necessary.
Enable/Disable
Temporarily enables or disables the selected character pattern.
An X mark is used to show that the character has been disabled, but the data is not deleted. The
character pattern can be enabled again later.
Delete
Deletes the selected character pattern.
Delete All
Deletes all the character patterns registered in the selected library number.
Built-in Library Reference Settings
Sets whether to enable or disable the built-in library's character patterns by character type.
Delete All Built-in Characters
Deletes from the current library file all the character patterns which were taken from the built-in library.
3
Click [Close].
2-346 CV-X UM_E
OCR2 (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Setting the options
Setting item
Settings
Large Area Mode
Enable this setting to use the Large Area Mode. This mode needs to be set when the region size is
the amount of resource memory memory that is used. This setting can only be configured when
the [Block Mode] is set to [Recognition] and [Inspection Region] is set to [Rectangle].
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Registered string
Enters the judgment string for checking the recognized content against. Letters, numbers and
symbols can be entered as a fixed string.
Calendar Settings
Configures the settings for when using Date & Time Tolerance, Zero Suppress, Date Encryption,
and Calculation Result for the registered string.
Restriction Settings
Normally, all the characters registered in the library are used for character recognition. However, in
the case where only specific characters are to be recognized and judged, the characters to
reference can also be limited. By limiting the reference characters, the processing speed may be
improved and false recognitions may be resolved.
Correlation
Lower Limit
[Correlation] is the value indicating how similar the extracted character is to the library data.
If the extracted character's value is lower than the [Correlation Lower Limit], [?] is output
indicating that the character cannot be recognized and it is judged as NG.
Stability
Lower Limit
Stability indicates the value of the correlation difference between the 1st and 2nd candidates of
the detected character.
This option specifies the lower limit for the minimum value. If the value is below this lower limit, [?]
is output indicating that the character cannot be recognized and it is judged as NG.
Specified Label
Specifies using the label, between 0 and 39, which among the detected multiple characters is to
be referred to during a mathematical operation.
Match With 1D/2D
Code Read Data
Turn this option on to match the Detected String with the Read Data of a 1D or 2D Code Reader tool.
Detected Character
Count
Specifies the range of number of characters judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
Follow Zero Suppress Makes the upper limit value and lower limit value of "Detected Character Count" automatically
adjust according to the changes in length of the Registered String due to zero suppression. Set the
upper limit value and lower limit value of "Detected Character Count" based on the length of the
longest zero-padded string.
CV-X UM_E
2-347
Function List
more than 2432 pixels in width or more than 2050 pixels in height. Enabling this setting increases
OCR
OCR
Function List
"OCR" measurement
Extracts the character information in the inspection region to match them against the library data, and the
string in the captured image can be recognized.
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example showing the result of an OCR inspection
performed under the following condition:
• Number of Characters (Block Set): 6
Inspection region
Target characters
Character information in
the inspection region is
extracted and recognized
as a string.
Detected String
AB.18E
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
2-348 CV-X UM_E
2
3
4
OCR
4
5
7
8
Set Line Block Set and left-click
2-350).
(Page 2-350).
(Page
5
Function List
6
Set Read Characters and left-click
Set Block Set and left-click
351).
(Page 2-
Set Library Settings and left-click
2-352).
6
(Page
7
Set Judgment Conditions (Page 2-353).
8
Set the judgment string for checking the
recognized content against and the tolerance
(lower limit value) for the recognition result
measured value.
When characters are not correctly recognized
Instead of Steps 4 to 6 above, perform the operation in "When characters are not correctly recognized with a
normal extraction method (Fixed)" (Page 2-354).
CV-X UM_E
2-349
OCR
Setting Read Characters
Setting item
Settings
Font color
Sets the color as a character to be recognized comparing the character with the background.
Function List
• Black: Recognizes the black part as a character.
• White: Recognizes the white part as a character.
Block mode
The processing that the character information in the inspection region is divided by one character
is called “Block”. To recognize the character correctly, a proper block is required. Select the block
mode to set that the character can be extracted by one character.
Text direction
Changes the text direction when the character string rotates by 90 degrees relative to the
horizontal line on the screen.
Mirrored reading
Checking the box enables recognition of the inverted characters captured over the mirror or prism.
Setting Line Block Set
Setting item
Settings
Block target
When the line is not properly extracted due to the background noise, proper blocking may be
made possible by changing the line block position.
Line Rotation Correction Check the box when the line block is tilted against the inspection region and the line height varies.
Wave threshold
Specifies the lower threshold of the wave by the wave intensity. Lowering the threshold improves
the extraction sensitivity. However, it may become sensitive to wave changes due to noise.
Smoothing filter
Deforms the shape of the wave smoothly with application of the expansion processing to the
statistics wave by the specified number of times. This option improves the state that the extraction
is split off more than necessary due to the characters consisted of the dots. However, the
sensitivity may become diminished to detect the minimal space between characters.
Upper row height (region Specifies the upper limit of the height of the line to block by proportion to the inspection region
ratio)
width. When the space between lines is narrow and two lines are erroneously detected as one, the
line can forcibly be extracted into two lines.
Upper noise intensity
Specifies the upper intensity, which is regarded as the noise information in the waves, by the
difference from the threshold value. The noise information whose intensity is less than the upper
limit is eliminated from the block target.
Upper noise width
Specifies the upper waveform width, which is regarded as the noise information in the waves, by
the number of pixels. The noise information whose width is less than the upper limit is eliminated
from the block target.
2-350 CV-X UM_E
OCR
Setting Block Set
Settings
Block target
When the characters are not properly extracted due to the background noise, this option may be
effective by changing the block target.
Number of Characters
Specifies the number of characters to be extracted from the inspection region.
Character Tilt Correction When the extracted characters are deformed with a slope, turn “Character Tilt Correction” to ON.
This option performs corrective measures regarding the slope.
Fitting
Fine-tunes the block region size, which is specified by the wave, with the actual character size. In
case the character size fluctuates, this option reduces an effect on recognition.
Fitting
Selects whether to reflect the actual character size in the extracted region. Setting to ON allows for
(When the block mode is reflection of the actual character size to the block region and reduces the influence to the
[Fixed])
recognition in case the character size fluctuates.
Noise cancellation on
the border
Excludes the noise causing the malfunction on the border of the block region when removing the
margin within the block region of the fixed or wave (specify ratio) block.
Wave threshold
Specifies the lower threshold of the wave used for blocking by the wave intensity. Lowering the
threshold improves the extraction sensitivity. However, it may become sensitive to wave changes
due to noise.
Smoothing filter
Deforms the shape of the wave smoothly with application of the expansion processing to the wave
by the specified number of times. This option improves the state that the block is split off more than
necessary due to the characters consisted of the dots. However, the sensitivity may become
diminished to detect the minimal space between characters.
Upper line height (text
ratio)
Specifies the upper blocked character width by the ratio against the height. If the line space is
narrow and the character width is erroneously detected as one for two characters, the character
can forcibly be extracted.
Upper noise intensity
Specifies the upper intensity, which is regarded as the noise information in the waves, by the
difference from the extraction threshold value. The noise information with the intensity less than the
upper limit is excluded from the block target.
Upper noise width
Specifies the upper waveform width, which is regarded as the noise information in the waves, by
the number of pixels. The noise information with the width less than the upper limit is excluded
from the block target.
CV-X UM_E
2-351
Function List
Setting item
OCR
Editing the library
1
Left-click [Edit].
The [Edit] screen appears.
Function List
2
Select the register destination library file by choosing the [Library No.] (0 - 999).
To change the list format, change [View Mode].
• Character (default): Displays the list of the registered characters in a matrix format.
• Registered: Displays the registration status of each character type.
To change the library name, input a desired name in [Library Name] (up to 30 double-byte characters or
60 single-byte characters).
3
Select [Register].
The [Select Register Mode] screen appears.
4
Select the library registration method.
The registration method of the library can be selected from the following two methods.
• Each: Each character extracted is registered in the library one at a time while specifying the type.
• Batch: Allows registration of all the extracted characters together as a string.
5
Perform registration to the library with the registration method selected.
When [Each] is selected
Select an extracted character from the screen and press [Register]. The [Select Registration
Destination] screen is displayed. Select the destination character row and register it. Repeat this until all
desired characters are registered.
When [Batch] is selected
The [Batch] screen appears. Manually enter the content of the string that is currently extracted to
register them.
6
When registration is completed, left-click [Close].
The screen reverts to the [Edit] screen.
7
Click [Close].
2-352 CV-X UM_E
OCR
Editing and deleting the registered library data
The registered library data can be edited or deleted using the procedure below.
1
Left-click [Edit] on the [Library Settings] screen.
The [Edit] screen appears.
Make changes as necessary.
Enable/Disable
Temporarily enables or disables the selected character pattern.
An X mark is used to show that the character has been disabled, but the data is not deleted. The
character pattern can be enabled again later.
Delete
Deletes the selected character pattern.
Delete All
Deletes all the character patterns registered in the selected library number.
3
Click [Close].
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Registered string
Inputs the registered strings to check the recognized contents. The characters or symbols up to 20
characters can be input as a fixed character string.
Conversion settings
Specifies the method to spread to strings when using the date & time and calculation result for the
registered string. The Offset Date, Allowable Error, Date Encryption Settings, Number of spread
characters for Calculation Result, N-adic number, Zero Suppression ON/OFF are specified. This
option is only available if the date & time and calculation result are specified for the registered
string.
Restrict detected
strings
Normally, all types of character registered in the library are used for the character recognition.
However, only specific characters can be used for recognition and judgment by limiting the
referenced characters, which may improve the processing speed or resolve the false recognition.
Correlation
[Correlation] is the value indicating how similar the extracted character is to the library data. If the
extracted character’s value is lower than the [Correlation Lower Limit], [?] is output indicating that
the character cannot be recognized and it is judged as NG.
Stability
Stability indicates the value of the correlation difference between the 1st and 2nd candidates of
the detected character. This option specifies the lower limit for the minimum value. If the value is
below this lower limit, [?] is output indicating that the character cannot be recognized and it is
judged as NG.
Lower intensity
deviation
Specifies the lower limit of intensity deviation, by which to judge portions within the extracted
region as a blank space. If the noise components in the base of the inspection target are
recognized as a character, increase the lower limit. Conversely, if a target is recognized as a blank
space due to the low contrast between the character and the background, decrease the lower limit
and the target may be recognized as a character.
Specified label
Specifies using the label, between 0 and 19, which among the detected multiple characters is to
be referred to during a mathematical operation.
Match With 1D/2D
Code Read Data
Tick the [Match With 1D/2D Code Read Data] box to check the Detected String against the data
read in "1D Code Reader" (Page 2-243) or "1D Code Reader" (Page 2-355), and "2D Code Reader"
(Page 2-246) or "2D Code Reader" (Page 2-359).
CV-X UM_E
2-353
Function List
2
OCR
When characters are not correctly recognized with a normal extraction method
(Fixed)
1
Left-click [Wave Extraction] on the [Primary Settings] screen.
Function List
The [Block Mode] screen appears.
2
3
4
Left-click [Fixed] and left-click [OK].
Left-click
.
Add the character block region.
Left-click
and left-click the upper left and
lower right of the character so that the character
may be surrounded. (Repeat this for the required
number of characters.)
5
6
To make fitting valid, put a check mark on
[Fitting].
Left-click
.
From this point onward, perform operation
according to the description in "Flow of setting"
(Page 2-348).
2-354 CV-X UM_E
1D Code Reader
1D Code Reader
Detects information of a 1D code in the inspection region and reads a text string contained in the code. It can
output the read text externally and perform judgment of acceptance by matching read data with the built-in
calendar. Also, this tool can be used for sorting.
Image of the Measurement
Inspection region
Read target code
1D code information in the
inspection region is detected
and recognized as a string.
Measurement Example
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Code type: Code39
• Start digit: 1
• Data length: 100
• Split Data: ON
- Data 1: Start digit 9, data length 2
- Data 2: Start digit 12, data length 4
Read data
KEYENCE CV-X100 SERIES
Split data 1 CV
Split data 2 X100
CV-X UM_E
2-355
Function List
"1D Code Reader" measurement
1D Code Reader
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32).
>
>
2
3
Register a reference image (Page 1-26).
If a reference image is not available, register
the reference image.
2
4
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
5
Point
3
4
5
6
7
• A width of up to 4,864 pixels and a height of
up to 4,100 pixels can be set for the
inspection region. However, to set a region
size that exceeds a width of 2,432 pixels or a
height of 2,050 pixels, the "Large Area
Mode" (Page 2-357) needs to be enabled.
• The "Large Area Mode" and the "Verification"
(Page 2-358) cannot be used simultaneously.
To enable the Large Area Mode, set
Verification to [OFF].
6
7
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the detection conditions (Page 2-357).
Set/check the read data (Page 2-358).
To perform a verification, select the verification method and then specify the judgment
conditions (Page 2-358).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-358).
After an image showing correct read data has been measured, left-click [Copy from Read Data] to
register the read character string (character string displayed in Read Data) as the reference pattern.
• In [Reference Pattern], enter a reference pattern which will be collated with the read code.
2-356 CV-X UM_E
1D Code Reader
Setting detailed conditions
Detection conditions
Settings
Code type
Select the type of the 1D code. After a code type is selected, “Auto-Tuning” automatically runs,
and optimal settings for code detection are adjusted.
Read direction
Specifies the direction to read the code.
Code resolution
Specifies the resolution within a module width (the number of pixels per module) of the 1D code
intended to be read. More stable detection can be performed by setting a value approximate to
the 1D code to be read.
The resolutions (pixel) are recommended by case as follows.
• This tool is not specified as a target tool of position adjustment: 1.50 (3.00)* or more
• This tool uses a black and white camera and is specified as a position adjustment target: 1.50
(3.00)* or more
• This tool uses a color camera and is specified as a position adjustment target: 3.20 (6.40)* or
more
* The figures in the brackets ( ) are the recommended values when the Large Area Mode is enabled.
Code detail
Specifies a detailed code type.
Reference contrast
Specifies the contrast information to be used as reference when extracting the characteristics of
the code. Select one from among “Highest”, “High”, “Normal”, “Low”, “Lowest”. A target having
low contrast becomes more likely to be detected by lowering the value. However, the detection
may become unstable due to the influence from noises.
Code color
Select the color of the codes to detect (code color relative to background).
• Both: Both black-on-white and white-on-black codes can be detected. However the processing
time is longer than when [Black] or [White] is selected.
• Black: Detects only black codes on white backgrounds.
• White: Detects only white codes on black backgrounds.
Number of read digits Specifies the maximum number and minimum number of digits in the code.
Base angle
Specifies the base angle for 1D-code detection.
Scale variations
Select the degree of variation to accept when code sizes vary. A smaller range allows more stable
code detection.
• Small: Accepts size variations of approximately ±10%.
• Medium: Accepts size variations of approximately ±20%.
• Large: Accepts size variations of approximately ±30%.
• Unlimited: Accepts all sizes that can be read.
Enable check digit
Turning this option on enables verification of the check digit (check-character) of the decoded
data.
Check digit
Specifies a verification method on the check digit (check-character) of the decoded data.
Timeout
Sets the upper limit of the processing time. The tool’s processing time varies depending on the
status of a captured image. When the processing time exceeds the set value (0.01 to 60 sec.), the
processing becomes a timeout error.
Large Area Mode
Enable this setting to use the Large Area Mode. This mode needs to be set when the region size is
more than 2432 pixels in width or more than 2050 pixels in height.
If the Large Area Mode setting is changed, then redo the automatic tuning.
Additionally, if an image enhancement filter is being used, then revise the filter parameters.
The Large Area Mode and "Verification" (Page 2-358) cannot be used simultaneously. To enable
the Large Area Mode, set the Verification to [OFF].
CV-X UM_E
2-357
Function List
Setting item
1D Code Reader
Read data settings
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Start digit
Specifies a digit of the detected code where readout starts.
Read data length
Specifies the number of code digits (in Byte) to be read from the start digit.
Split data
Turning this option on splits a portion of the read code data and outputs the split data. The split
data can be collated with the reference pattern.
Output fixed length
Turning this option on outputs a fixed data length by the specified number of code digits. If the
number of read digits is short, a 1-byte character specified in “Filling Character (1 byte)” will be
added to complete the length.
Call text at read error Turning this option on calls the text specified in “Text Called” when data reading fails.
Output symbol
identifier
Turning this option on adds a symbol identifier (3 Byte) defined in the ISO/IEC 15424 / JIS X 0530
data carrier identifiers (including symbol system identifiers) to the top of read data.
Verification
Setting item
Settings
Verification
Select the method for verifying the printing quality.
Overall Symbol Grade Overall Symbol Grade ConditionSpecifies the verification items to include for Overall Symbol
Condition
Grade determination. The Overall Symbol Grade is the lowest value (grade) among the verification
items specified.
Lower Limit
Specifies the Overall Symbol Grade to judge as OK by setting the [Lower Limit].
The Overall Symbol Grade is the lowest value (grade) among the verification items specified.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Condition
Select “Multiple” when setting multiple reference conditions.
Condition list
A maximum of 16 reference conditions can be set. By setting multiple reference conditions,
matching combined two or more ranges of read data and sorting collation results (showing which
range No. is matched) are enabled. For the sort usage, collation can be performed while ignoring
a mismatch result by turning off “Use in Tool’s Judgment”.
Data range
Select a data range which is intended to be matched with the reference pattern. When “Split Data”
is turned on, the read data can be split to up to 8 ranges and any of the split ranges can be
specified to be collated.
Reference pattern
Enter a reference pattern which will be collated with the read code.
Conversion settings
Specify detailed specifications for matching the read code, as needed.
Read data length
Specifies the allowable range of read data length to be judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
Position
Specifies the allowable range of X and Y coordinate value to be judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] of each.
Detected angle
Specifies the allowable angle range to be judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
2-358 CV-X UM_E
2D Code Reader
2D Code Reader
Detects information of a 2D code in the inspection region and reads a text string contained in the code. It can
output the read text externally and perform judgment of acceptance by matching read data with the built-in
calendar. Also, this tool can be used for sorting.
Image of the Measurement
Inspection region
Read target code
2D code information in the
inspection region is detected
and recognized as a string.
Measurement Example
Example showing the results under the following conditions:
• Code type: QR
• Start digit: 1
• Data length: 100
• Split Data: ON
- Data 1: Start digit 9, data length 2
- Data 2: Start digit 12, data length 4
Read data
KEYENCE CV-X100 SERIES
Split data 1 CV
Split data 2 X100
CV-X UM_E
2-359
Function List
"2D Code Reader" measurement
2D Code Reader
Flow of setting
1
2
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32).
3
>
>
Register a reference image (Page 1-26).
If a reference image is not available, register
the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
4
5
6
7
Point
3
4
5
6
7
• A width of up to 4,864 pixels and a height of
up to 4,100 pixels can be set for the
inspection region. However, to set a region
size that exceeds a width of 2,432 pixels or
a height of 2,050 pixels, the "Large Area
Mode" (Page 2-361) needs to be enabled.
• The "Large Area Mode" and the "Verification"
(Page 2-362) cannot be used simultaneously.
To enable the Large Area Mode, set
Verification to [OFF].
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the detection conditions (Page 2-361).
Set/check the read data (Page 2-362).
To perform a verification, select the verification method and then specify the judgment
conditions (Page 2-362).
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-362).
After an image showing correct read data has been measured, left-click [Copy from Read Data] to
register the read character string (character string displayed in Read Data) as the reference pattern.
• In [Reference Pattern], enter a reference pattern which will be collated with the read code.
2-360 CV-X UM_E
2D Code Reader
Setting detailed conditions
Detection conditions
Settings
Code type
Select the type of the 2D code. After a code type is selected, “Auto-Tuning” automatically runs,
and optimal settings for code detection are adjusted.
When "Composite Code" is selected, the detection conditions must be set for both the 1D and 2D
code parts included in the composite code.
Code resolution
(Pixel)
Specifies the base resolution (the number of pixels per cell) of the 2D code intended to be read.
More stable detection can be performed by setting a value approximate to the 2D code to be read.
The resolutions (pixel) are recommended by case as follows.
• QR, Micro QR, DataMatrix, Rectangular DataMatrix: 4.00 (8.00)* or more
• PDF417, MicroPDF417, Composite Code: 1.50 (3.00)* or more
* The figures in the brackets ( ) are the recommended values when the Large Area Mode is enabled.
Reference contrast
Specifies the contrast information to be used as reference when extracting the characteristics of
the code. Select one from among “Highest”, “High”, “Normal”, “Low”, “Lowest”. A target having
low contrast becomes more likely to be detected by lowering the value. However, the detection
may become unstable due to the influence from noises.
The number of cells
Check this parameter and select the number of cells in rows and columns for the 2D code to be
detected. Selecting “Any” can detect the code regardless of the number, however, a certain longer
processing time is required.
Code color
Select the color of the codes to detect (code color relative to background).
• Both: Both black-on-white and white-on-black codes can be detected. However the processing
time is longer than when [Black] or [White] is selected.
• Black: Detects only black codes on white backgrounds.
• White: Detects only white codes on black backgrounds.
Mirrored Reading
Changes the internal processing so that it is able to recognize images of mirrored codes that were
captured from a mirror, a prism, or the back of a transparent sheet.
• Both: Both standard codes and reversed codes can be detected. However the processing time
will be longer compared with when [Standard Only] or [Mirrored Only] is selected.
• Standard Only: Only standard codes are detected. (Mirrored codes are not detected.)
• Mirrored Only: Only mirrored codes are detected. (Standard codes are not detected.)
Base Angle
Specifies the base angle for 2D-code detection.
Angle range
Specifies a detectable angle range of the code from the specified base angle. This enables
higher-speed stable detection.
Scale variations
Select the degree of variation to accept when code sizes vary. A smaller range results in faster
processing speeds, and allows more stable code detection.
• Small: Accepts size variations of approximately ±10%.
• Medium: Accepts size variations of approximately ±20%.
• Large: Accepts size variations of approximately ±30%.
• Unlimited: Accepts all sizes that can be read.
Timeout
Sets the upper limit of the processing time. The tool’s processing time varies depending on the
status of a captured image. When the processing time exceeds the set value (0.01 to 60 sec.), the
processing becomes a timeout error.
Large Area Mode
Enable this setting to use the Large Area Mode. This mode needs to be set when the region size is
more than 2432 pixels in width or more than 2050 pixels in height.
If the Large Area Mode setting is changed, then redo the automatic tuning.
Additionally, if an image enhancement filter is being used, then revise the filter parameters.
The Large Area Mode and "Verification" (Page 2-362) cannot be used simultaneously. To enable
the Large Area Mode, set the Verification to [OFF].
CV-X UM_E
2-361
Function List
Setting item
2D Code Reader
Read data settings
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Start digit
Specifies a digit of the detected code where readout starts.
Read data length
Specifies the number of code digits (in Byte) to be read from the start digit.
Split data
Turning this option on splits a portion of the read code data and outputs the split data. The split
data can be collated with the reference pattern.
Output fixed length
Turning this option on outputs a fixed data length by the specified number of code digits. If the
number of read digits is short, a 1-byte character specified in “Filling Character (1 byte)” will be
added to complete the length.
Call text at read error Turning this option on calls the text specified in “Text Called” when data reading fails.
Output symbol
identifier
Turning this option on adds a symbol identifier (3 Byte) defined in the ISO/IEC 15424 / JIS X 0530
data carrier identifiers (including symbol system identifiers) to the top of read data.
Extended channel
interpretation (ECI)
Turning this option on outputs ECI after reading a code incorporating ECI. This setting does not
affect reading a code where ECI is not incorporated.
Verification
Setting item
Settings
Verification
Select the method for verifying the printing quality.
Overall Symbol Grade Overall Symbol Grade ConditionSpecifies the verification items to include for Overall Symbol
Condition
Grade determination. The Overall Symbol Grade is the lowest value (grade) among the verification
items specified.
Lower Limit
Specifies the Overall Symbol Grade to judge as OK by setting the [Lower Limit].
The Overall Symbol Grade is the lowest value (grade) among the verification items specified.
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Condition
Select “Multiple” when setting multiple reference conditions.
Condition list
A maximum of 16 reference conditions can be set. By setting multiple reference conditions,
matching combined two or more ranges of read data and sorting collation results (showing which
range No. is matched) are enabled. For the sort usage, collation can be performed while ignoring
a mismatch result by turning off “Use in Tool’s Judgment”.
Data range
Select a data range which is intended to be matched with the reference pattern. When “Split Data”
is turned on, the read data can be split to up to 8 ranges and any of the split ranges can be
specified to be collated.
Reference pattern
Enter a reference pattern which will be collated with the read code.
Conversion settings
Specify detailed specifications for matching the read code, as needed.
Read data length
Specifies the allowable range of read data length to be judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
Position
Specifies the allowable range of X and Y coordinate value to be judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit] of each.
Detected angle
Specifies the allowable angle range to be judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit].
2-362 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax3A) (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax3A)
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
This tool learns the quality images through the image sensor and recognizes images different from the quality
images as defective images.
It is so useful in that the influence from variabilities or individual differences existing in quality images can be
removed.
Reference
This tool includes the function of position adjustment (ShapeTrax3A).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the quality image is registered
When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)"
OK workpieces with variation of color
A A
A A
Generate the quality learning image
in consideration of variation
A
A
Quality match (%): 90
When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume"
During operation
Inspection target
A A
A A
Detect the difference by comparing
with the quality learning image
A
A
Defect volume: 400
CV-X UM_E
2-363
Function List
"Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax3A)" measurement
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax3A) (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
Set position adjustment.
Set it to perform position adjustment for the target object. By performing settings to look for the position
of the work, the inspection region can be made to follow the work.
If position adjustment is not necessary, remove the check from the [Position Adjustment] box.
For more details on items of
, refer to "ShapeTrax3(A)" (Page 2-274).
[Extract Colors] and [Image Enhance] can also be set on this screen.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
3
Edit the inspection region.
Specify the desired region range for inspection.
Multiple areas for inspection can be set.
See "2.Editing an inspection region" (Page 2-5) for more details.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
4
Learn the quality images.
With registration of multiple quality images, what is learned is that variation in the registered range is OK
and items out of the range is NG. The more number of quality image registrations there are, the more
redundant the quality image is against variation. More precise learning can be achieved.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
5
Verify the learned result.
Capture quality images and defective images to verify if correct inspection can be performed.
Registration of multiple defective samples in advance is useful to verify if a defective sample after
change of the setting values is correctly judged.
If correct inspection cannot be performed, adjust settings (Page 2-8) or execute additional learning.
6
Set judgment conditions.
• When the judgment mode is [Defect Volume]: Specify the upper limit for the defect volume judged as
OK in the Upper Limit field for Defect Volume.
• When the judgment mode is [Quality Match (%)]: Set a resemblance percentage of the specified region
against the quality image, where target objects will be judged as OK in the Lower Limit field for Quality
Match (%).
2-364 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax3A) (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Setting detailed conditions
Position Adjustment
Settings
Angle range
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
Min. match %
[Match%], or the correlation value, shows the current image's resemblance percentage against a
registered pattern.
A pattern having a correlation value lower than the set [Min. Match%] is excluded from the
measurement, and faulty detections are decreased.
Check the deviation in the correlation values among quality images and set a lower limit. Note that
faulty detection increases if the value is lowered extremely.
Search sensitivity
Changes the reduction rate of an image or feature to specify the priority between the search speed
and stability.
• Fast: Select when prioritizing the search speed.
• Standard: Select for normal.
• Detailed: Select when prioritizing stability.
Feat. Extraction
Settings
Set the edge feature intensity for the search.
• Automatic: Extracts the optimum edge features based on the reference image and pattern region.
• Automatic (Low Contrast): Select this when the search is unstable due to such factors as low
contrast of the current image.
Feature Drawing Tool When this option is turned on, the feature drawing tool can be used. Draws figures, such as
straight lines and circles, and profile information that is automatically extracted with regard to the
reference image as features. Use this in such cases as when detection is unstable because
appropriate features could not be extracted from the reference image.
• Refer to "Creating feature information from the profile information of figures and images in
ShapeTrax3/ShapeTrax2 (Feature Drawing Tool)" (Page 1-44) for more details.
• Simultaneous use with the [Eraser Tool] is not possible.
Eraser Tool
By specifying an arbitrary part on the reference image, detected edges that are within the range can be
eliminated from the feature information as noise components.
• In the [Size] field, specify the size of the range to remove the noise component when specifying
an arbitrary point on the image.
• In addition, simultaneous use with the [Feature Drawing Tool] is not possible.
Extract Colors
settings
Converts the captured color image to the black & white (gray or binary) image suited for the image
processing by arbitrary extraction method.
Image Enhance
settings
Specifies the filter processing applied to the image.
When multiple filters are specified, the process flows from the upper in the menu in sequence.
Composite Image Learning
Setting item
Settings
Select color
Selects the color information to use in learning the quality image.
• Color: Uses the color information for learning.
• Gray: Uses only gray information for learning.
Noise Reduction
Heighten this to reduce false detection around the ends of the object or pattern.
Also, turn it up when the target has large variability of color, like a sandy surface.
Defect enhancement
This is useful for detecting a slight change in a part where tone variation is small.
It is also effective for detecting shape variations of the profile.
Segment size
Specifies the segment size to be used for learning.
Set a small value for precise detection of slighter changes,
while set a large value for higher-speed learning and processing.
CV-X UM_E
2-365
Function List
Setting item
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax3A) (CV-X400/X300 Series Only)
Setting item
Settings
Cut incorrect learning Turning this option on excludes the image which apparently seems to be defective and conducts
the auto-teach inspection.
Set auto threshold
Function List
Turning this option on changes the settings in the [Verify/Judge] screen to the most suitable value
when learning the quality image.
The target settings are as follows:
• Defect Strength
• Defect Volume: Upper Limit
Terminal Output
During "REC"
Operation
Selects the way to output signals via output terminal during the "REC" operation.
Turning this option on enables output via terminals as during Run Mode.
Turning this option off (default) enables output of only the BUSY, READY, and FLASH signals.
Verification
Setting item
Settings
Defect strength
Detects a portion whose intensity difference from the quality image is larger than the specified
value as a defect.
Defect size
Detects the defect whose area is larger than or equal to the specified value as a defective part.
Target
Selects the color to be detected as a defect.
• Bright: Detects only defect brighter than the quality image.
• Dark: Detects only defect darker than the quality image.
• Bright & Dark: Detects both bright and dark defects.
Available only when "Gray" is chosen in "Select Color".
Judgment mode
Specifies the following judgment options.
• Quality Match(%): Specifies the OK-judged ratio of what percentage is matched with the quality
assuming the region area is the ratio of 100%.
• Defect Volume: Judges how much different portions (defect) from the quality image there are
within the region.
Display graph during Turning this option on shows the bar graph indicating the match degree during operation.
operation
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Defect volume
Specifies the upper limit of the defect volume judged as OK.
Quality match (%)
Sets a resemblance percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target
objects will be judged as OK.
2-366 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2)
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2)
This tool learns the quality images through the image sensor and recognizes images different from the quality
images as defective images.
It is so useful in that the influence from variabilities or individual differences existing in quality images can be
removed.
Reference
This tool includes the function of position adjustment (ShapeTrax2).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the quality image is registered
When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)"
OK workpieces with variation of color
A A
A A
Generate the quality learning image
in consideration of variation
A
A
Quality match (%): 90
When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume"
During operation
Inspection target
A A
A A
Detect the difference by comparing
with the quality learning image
A
A
Defect volume: 400
CV-X UM_E
2-367
Function List
"Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2)" measurement
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
Set position adjustment.
Set it to perform position adjustment for the target object. By performing settings to look for the position
of the work, the inspection region can be made to follow the work.
If position adjustment is not necessary, remove the check from the [Position Adjustment] box.
For details of setting items
, refer to "ShapeTrax2" (Page 2-281).
[Extract Colors] and [Image Enhance] can also be set on this screen.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
3
Edit the inspection region.
Specify the desired region range for inspection.
Multiple areas for inspection can be set.
See "2.Editing an inspection region" (Page 2-5) for more details.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
4
Learn the quality images.
With registration of multiple quality images, what is learned is that variation in the registered range is OK
and items out of the range is NG. The more number of quality image registrations there are, the more
redundant the quality image is against variation. More precise learning can be achieved.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
5
Verify the learned result.
Capture quality images and defective images to verify if correct inspection can be performed.
Registration of multiple defective samples in advance is useful to verify if a defective sample after
change of the setting values is correctly judged.
If correct inspection cannot be performed, adjust settings (Page 2-8) or execute additional learning.
6
Set judgment conditions.
• When the judgment mode is [Defect Volume]: In [Defect Volume Upper Limit], specify the upper limit
of the defect volume to judge as OK.
• When the judgment mode is [Quality Match (%)]: In [Quality Match (%) Lower Limit], set a resemblance
percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target objects will be judged as OK.
2-368 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2)
Setting detailed conditions
Position Adjustment
Settings
Angle range
Sets the angle range by +/- when the target of the position adjustment is angled.
Min. match %
[Min. Match%], or the correlation value, shows the current image’s resemblance percentage
against a registered pattern. A pattern having a correlation value lower than the set [Min. Match%]
is excluded from the measurement, and faulty detections are decreased. Check the deviation in
the correlation values among quality images and set a lower limit. Note that faulty detection
increases if the value is lowered extremely.
Search sensitivity
This is a feature-detection-related option. Increase [Search Sensitivity] when an erroneous search
occurs (finding a different place from the feature image). Heightening [Search Sensitivity]
stabilizes the detection. However, processing time becomes longer.
Edge sensitivity
Specifies a sensitivity where a characteristic edge is determined for use in the position adjustment.
Increase the sensitivity when the contrast is low in the characteristic portion.
Feature Drawing Tool When this option is turned on, the feature drawing tool can be used. Draws figures, such as
straight lines and circles, and profile information that is automatically extracted with regard to the
reference image as features. Use this in such cases as when detection is unstable because
appropriate features could not be extracted from the reference image.
• Refer to "Creating feature information from the profile information of figures and images in ShapeTrax3/
ShapeTrax2 (Feature Drawing Tool)" (Page 1-44) for more details.
• Simultaneous use with the [Eraser Tool] is not possible.
Eraser Tool
When this option is turned on, the eraser tool can be set.
By specifying an arbitrary part on the reference image, detected edges that are within the range
can be eliminated from the feature information as noise components.
In addition, simultaneous use with the [Feature Drawing Tool] is not possible.
Extract Colors
settings
Converts the captured color image to the black & white (gray or binary) image suited for the image
processing by arbitrary extraction method.
Image Enhance
settings
Specifies the filter processing applied to the image. When multiple filters are specified, the
process flows from the upper in the menu in sequence.
CV-X UM_E
2-369
Function List
Setting item
Auto-Teach Inspection (ShapeTrax2)
Composite Image Learning
Setting item
Settings
Select color
Selects the color information to use in learning the quality image.
• Color: Uses the color information for learning.
Function List
• Gray: Uses only gray information for learning.
Noise Reduction
Heighten this to reduce false detection around the ends of the object or pattern. Also, turn it up
when the target has large variability of color, like a sandy surface.
Defect enhancement
This is useful for detecting a slight change in a part where tone variation is small. It is also effective
for detecting shape variations of the profile.
Segment size
Specifies the segment size to be used for learning. Set a small value for precise detection of
slighter changes, while set a large value for higher-speed learning and processing.
Cut incorrect learning Turning this option on excludes the image which apparently seems to be defective and conducts
the auto-teach inspection.
Set auto threshold
Turning this option on changes the settings in the [Verify/Judge] screen to the most suitable value
when learning the quality image.
The target settings are as follows:
• Defect Strength
• Defect Volume: Upper Limit
Terminal Output
During "REC"
Operation
Selects the way to output signals via output terminal during the “REC” operation. Turning this
option on enables output via terminals as during Run Mode. Turning this option off (default)
enables output of only the BUSY, READY, and FLASH signals.
Verification
Setting item
Settings
Defect strength
Detects a portion whose intensity difference from the quality image is larger than the specified
value as a defect.
Defect size
Detects the defect whose area is larger than or equal to the specified value as a defective part.
Target
Selects the color to be detected as a defect.
• Bright: Detects only defect brighter than the quality image.
• Dark: Detects only defect darker than the quality image.
• Bright & Dark: Detects both bright and dark defects.
Available only when "Gray" is chosen in "Select Color".
Judgment mode
Specifies the following judgment options.
• Quality Match(%): Specifies the OK-judged ratio of what percentage is matched with the quality
assuming the region area is the ratio of 100%.
• Defect Volume: Judges how much different portions (defect) from the quality image there are
within the region.
Display graph during Turning this option on shows the bar graph indicating the match degree during operation.
operation
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Defect volume
Specifies the upper limit of the defect volume judged as OK.
Quality match (%)
Sets a resemblance percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target
objects will be judged as OK.
2-370 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection (Pattern Search)
Auto-Teach Inspection (Pattern Search)
This is the tool that learns the quality images through the image sensor and recognizes an image different from
the quality images as a defective one.
It is so useful in that the influence from variabilities or individual differences existing in the quality images can
be removed.
Reference
This tool includes the function of position adjustment (Pattern Search).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the quality image is registered
When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)"
OK workpieces with variation of color
A A
A A
Generate the quality learning image
in consideration of variation
A
A
Quality match (%): 90
When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume"
During operation
Inspection target
A A
A A
Detect the difference by comparing
with the quality learning image
A
A
Defect volume: 400
CV-X UM_E
2-371
Function List
"Auto-Teach Inspection (Pattern Search)" measurement
Auto-Teach Inspection (Pattern Search)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
Set position adjustment.
Set it to perform position adjustment for the target object. By performing settings to look for the position
of the work, the inspection region can be made to follow the work.
If position adjustment is not necessary, remove the check from the [Position Adjustment] box.
For details of setting items
, refer to "Pattern Search" (Page 2-270).
[Extract Colors] and [Image Enhance] can also be set on this screen.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
3
Edit the inspection region.
Specify the desired region range for inspection. Multiple areas to inspect can be set.
See "2.Editing an inspection region" (Page 2-5) for more details.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
4
Learn the quality images.
By registering multiple quality images, variabilities within the registered range are learned as OK and
those out of the range as NG. The more quality images registered, the more redundancy there is for
variabilities within quality images which leads to more precise learning.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
5
Verify the learned result.
Capture quality images and defective images to verify if correct inspection can be performed.
By registering multiple defective samples in advance, it will be convenient to verify whether proper
judgment is given after setting values are changed.
If correct inspection cannot be performed, adjust settings (Page 2-8) or execute additional learning.
6
Set judgment conditions.
• When the judgment mode is [Defect Volume]: In [Defect Volume Upper Limit], specify the upper limit
of the defect volume to judge as OK.
• When the judgment mode is [Quality Match (%)]: In [Quality Match (%) Lower Limit], set a resemblance
percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target objects will be judged as OK.
2-372 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection (Pattern Search)
Setting detailed conditions
Position Adjustment
Settings
Angle range
Sets the angle range by +/- when the target of the position adjustment is angled.
Min. match %
[Min. Match%], or the correlation value, shows the current image’s resemblance percentage
against a registered pattern. A pattern having a correlation value lower than the set [Min. Match%]
is excluded from the measurement, and faulty detections are decreased. Check the deviation in
the correlation values among quality images and set a lower limit. Note that faulty detection
increases if the value is lowered extremely.
Search sensitivity
This is a feature-detection-related option. Increase [Search Sensitivity] when an erroneous search
occurs (finding a different place from the feature image). Heightening [Search Sensitivity]
stabilizes the detection. However, processing time becomes longer.
Accuracy
This is a detection-accuracy-related option.
To increase the detection accuracy, set [Accuracy] to a higher level.
The higher the [Accuracy] level is, the more detection accuracy improves. However, the
processing time becomes longer.
Extract Colors
settings
Converts the captured color image to the black & white (gray or binary) image suited for the image
processing by arbitrary extraction method.
Image Enhance
settings
Specifies the filter processing applied to the image. When multiple filters are specified, the
process flows from the upper in the menu in sequence.
Composite Image Learning
Setting item
Settings
Select color
Selects the color information to use in learning the quality image.
• Color: Uses the color information for learning.
• Gray: Uses only gray information for learning.
Noise Reduction
Heighten this to reduce false detection around the ends of the object or pattern. Also, turn it up
when the target has large variability of color, like a sandy surface.
Defect enhancement
This is useful for detecting a slight change in a part where tone variation is small. It is also effective
for detecting shape variations of the profile.
Segment size
Specifies the segment size to be used for learning. Set a small value for precise detection of
slighter changes, while set a large value for higher-speed learning and processing.
Cut incorrect learning Turning this option on excludes the image which apparently seems to be defective and conducts
the auto-teach inspection.
Set auto threshold
Turning this option on changes the settings in the [Verify/Judge] screen to the most suitable value
when learning the quality image.
The target settings are as follows:
• Defect Strength
• Defect Volume: Upper Limit
Terminal Output
During "REC"
Operation
Selects the way to output signals via output terminal during the “REC” operation. Turning this
option on enables output via terminals as during Run Mode. Turning this option off (default)
enables output of only the BUSY, READY, and FLASH signals.
CV-X UM_E
2-373
Function List
Setting item
Auto-Teach Inspection (Pattern Search)
Verification
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Defect strength
Detects a portion whose intensity difference from the quality image is larger than the specified
value as a defect.
Defect size
Detects the defect whose area is larger than or equal to the specified value as a defective part.
Target
Selects the color to be detected as a defect.
• Bright: Detects only defect brighter than the quality image.
• Dark: Detects only defect darker than the quality image.
• Bright & Dark: Detects both bright and dark defects.
Available only when "Gray" is chosen in "Select Color".
Judgment mode
Specifies the following judgment options.
• Quality Match(%): Specifies the OK-judged ratio of what percentage is matched with the quality
assuming the region area is the ratio of 100%.
• Defect Volume: Judges how much different portions (defect) from the quality image there are
within the region.
Display graph during Turning this option on shows the bar graph indicating the match degree during operation.
operation
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Defect volume
Specifies the upper limit of the defect volume judged as OK.
Quality match (%)
Sets a resemblance percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target
objects will be judged as OK.
2-374 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection (PatternTrax)
Auto-Teach Inspection (PatternTrax)
This is the tool that learns the quality images through the image sensor and recognizes an image different from
the quality images as a defective one.
It is so useful in that the influence from variabilities or individual differences existing in the quality images can
be removed.
Reference
This tool includes the function of position adjustment (PatternTrax).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the quality image is registered
When the judgment mode is "Quality Match (%)"
OK workpieces with variation of color
A A
A A
Generate the quality learning image
in consideration of variation
A
A
Quality match (%): 90
When the judgment mode is "Defect Volume"
During operation
Inspection target
A A
A A
Detect the difference by comparing
with the quality learning image
A
A
Defect volume: 400
CV-X UM_E
2-375
Function List
"Auto-Teach Inspection (PatternTrax)" measurement
Auto-Teach Inspection (PatternTrax)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
Set position adjustment.
Set it to perform position adjustment for the target object. By performing settings to look for the position
of the work, the inspection region can be made to follow the work.
If position adjustment is not necessary, remove the check from the [Position Adjustment] box.
For details of setting items
, refer to "PatternTrax" (Page 2-286).
[Extract Colors] and [Image Enhance] can also be set on this screen.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
3
Edit the inspection region.
Specify the desired region range for inspection. Multiple areas to inspect can be set.
See "2.Editing an inspection region" (Page 2-5) for more details.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
4
Learn the quality images.
By registering multiple quality images, variabilities within the registered range are learned as OK and
those out of the range as NG. The more quality images registered, the more redundancy there is for
variabilities within quality images which leads to more precise learning.
When operation is completed, left-click [Next].
5
Verify the learned result.
Capture quality images and defective images to verify if correct inspection can be performed.
By registering multiple defective samples in advance, it will be convenient to verify whether proper
judgment is given after setting values are changed.
If correct inspection cannot be performed, adjust settings (Page 2-8) or execute additional learning.
6
Set judgment conditions.
• When the judgment mode is [Defect Volume]: In [Defect Volume Upper Limit], specify the upper limit
of the defect volume to judge as OK.
• When the judgment mode is [Quality Match (%)]: In [Quality Match (%) Lower Limit], set a resemblance
percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target objects will be judged as OK.
2-376 CV-X UM_E
Auto-Teach Inspection (PatternTrax)
Setting detailed conditions
Position Adjustment
Settings
Angle range
Sets the angle range by +/- when the target of the position adjustment is angled.
Min. match %
[Min. Match%], or the correlation value, shows the current image’s resemblance percentage
against a registered pattern. A pattern having a correlation value lower than the set [Min. Match%]
is excluded from the measurement, and faulty detections are decreased. Check the deviation in
the correlation values among quality images and set a lower limit. Note that faulty detection
increases if the value is lowered extremely.
Search sensitivity
Specifies the search sensitivity. Increase the sensitivity when the detection is unstable.
Accuracy
This is a detection-accuracy-related option.
To increase the detection accuracy, set [Accuracy] to a higher level.
The higher the [Accuracy] level is, the more detection accuracy improves. However, the
processing time becomes longer.
Auto Tuning
Automatically sets a part of the feature extraction conditions such that the registered pattern will
be detected.
In the case that unintended features are extracted, deselect this option and set the conditions
manually.
Noise Cut
Tone changes equal to or less than the specified tone are ignored.
Gain
Sets the gain for accentuating the extracted tone change. When the tone change is small, make
the value large.
Feature Extraction
Size
Specifies the size of the tone change desired for extraction. When a gradual tone change is to be
extracted, make the value large.
Eraser Tool
When this option is turned on, the eraser tool can be set. By specifying an arbitrary part on the
reference image, tone changes that are within the range can be eliminated.
In the [Size] field, specify the size of the range for removing the noise component when specifying
an arbitrary point on the image.
Extract Colors
settings
Converts the captured color image to the black & white (gray or binary) image suited for the image
processing by arbitrary extraction method.
Image Enhance
settings
Specifies the filter processing applied to the image. When multiple filters are specified, the
process flows from the upper in the menu in sequence.
CV-X UM_E
2-377
Function List
Setting item
Auto-Teach Inspection (PatternTrax)
Composite Image Learning
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Select color
Selects the color information to use in learning the quality image.
• Color: Uses the color information for learning.
• Gray: Uses only gray information for learning.
Noise Reduction
Heighten this to reduce false detection around the ends of the object or pattern. Also, turn it up
when the target has large variability of color, like a sandy surface.
Defect enhancement
This is useful for detecting a slight change in a part where tone variation is small. It is also effective
for detecting shape variations of the profile.
Segment size
Specifies the segment size to be used for learning. Set a small value for precise detection of
slighter changes, while set a large value for higher-speed learning and processing.
Cut incorrect learning Turning this option on excludes the image which apparently seems to be defective and conducts
the auto-teach inspection.
Set auto threshold
Turning this option on changes the settings in the [Verify/Judge] screen to the most suitable value
when learning the quality image.
The target settings are as follows:
• Defect Strength
• Defect Volume: Upper Limit
Terminal Output
During "REC"
Operation
Selects the way to output signals via output terminal during the “REC” operation. Turning this
option on enables output via terminals as during Run Mode. Turning this option off (default)
enables output of only the BUSY, READY, and FLASH signals.
Verification
Setting item
Settings
Defect strength
Detects a portion whose intensity difference from the quality image is larger than the specified
value as a defect.
Defect size
Detects the defect whose area is larger than or equal to the specified value as a defective part.
Target
Selects the color to be detected as a defect.
• Bright: Detects only defect brighter than the quality image.
• Dark: Detects only defect darker than the quality image.
• Bright & Dark: Detects both bright and dark defects.
Available only when "Gray" is chosen in "Select Color".
Judgment mode
Specifies the following judgment options.
• Quality Match(%): Specifies the OK-judged ratio of what percentage is matched with the quality
assuming the region area is the ratio of 100%.
• Defect Volume: Judges how much different portions (defect) from the quality image there are
within the region.
Display graph during Turning this option on shows the bar graph indicating the match degree during operation.
operation
Setting judgment conditions
Setting item
Settings
Defect volume
Specifies the upper limit of the defect volume judged as OK.
Quality match (%)
Sets a resemblance percentage of the specified region against the quality image, where target
objects will be judged as OK.
2-378 CV-X UM_E
Image Region Generator
Image Region Generator
Generates a freeform inspection region. This inspection region can be used with desired measurement tools.
This is useful when inspection regions with complicated shapes are needed.
Image of the Process
Current image
Run Measurement
Binary
processing
Image region generator tool
Processing result
of the defect tool
(Image region is not used)
Measurement tool
Creation of a 2-gradation
black and white image
A
B
C
Inspection region
Number of defects that will
be detected: 3
Blob filter is applied
Processing result of the defect tool
(Image region is used)
Creation of an image
region by removing the
unnecessary defects
Black pixel portion
in the image region is used
as an inspection region.
A
Actual inspection region
Number of defects that will
be detected: 1
CV-X UM_E
2-379
Function List
"Image Region Generator" tool
Image Region Generator
Flow of Setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
2
>
2
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
For more details on the types of image
enhancement that can be used in the image region
generator tool, see "List of image enhancement
filters" (Page 1-48).
3
4
Set the threshold for Binary.
5
To apply Blob Filter, change the settings
after putting a check mark on [Blob Filter].
For more details on the blob filter, see "Blob Filter"
(Page 1-52).
5
6
To perform shrink processing of the white
pixels and black pixels, put a check mark on
[Shrink White Pixels] and [Shrink Black
Pixels] (Page 2-381).
In the [Image Region Generation Range]
field, select the image region generation
range.
Selects the range for image region generation.
• Full Image: The entire image is the range for image region generation.
• Rectangle: The image region generation range can be specified. The region is generated from the
specified range.
7
In [Image Region Generation Target Image], select the applicable target image for the
generated image region.
• Current Image: Applies the image region to the current image and displays it.
• Reference Image: Applies the image region to the reference image and displays it.
8
Specify the generated image region as an inspection region for another measurement tool.
On the [Inspection Region] screen that is displayed by left-clicking [Inspection Region] in
the measurement tool, put a check on [Use Image Region] and specify the image region
generator tool number that will serve as the reference for the region shape.
The detection color (white or black) can be specified, and the shape can be previewed for
checking.
2-380 CV-X UM_E
6
7
Image Region Generator
Shrink Processing
Settings
Shrink white pixels
Enable this to shrink white pixels and remove white pixel noise.
Shrink black pixels
Enable this to shrink black pixels and remove black pixel noise.
Reference
The process type executed for [Shrink White Pixels] is the Shrink filter process (Page 1-48), and the process type
executed for [Shrink Black Pixels] is the Expand filter process (Page 1-48).
CV-X UM_E
2-381
Function List
Setting item
Outline Coincidence/Outline Comparison (When in Outline Capture Mode)
Outline Coincidence/Outline Comparison
(When in Outline Capture Mode)
Function List
“Outline Coincidence” measurement
Detects the degree of coincidence and the difference in shape of outlines by comparing the outline information of the
outline image at the time of measurement with that at the time of registration.
Product type distinction or presence/absence inspection can be conducted for the measurement target.
Point
The Outline Coincidence/Outline Comparison tools are only available when capturing is done using Outline Capture Mode.
Image of the Measurement
Outline Image
Measurement Example
Registered Outline
Current
Image
Registered
Outline
Compare
Compare
The outline of the
current image is
compared against the
registered outline to
detect the differences.
: Outline of
Current Image
: Match
: Mismatch
: Judgment Range
Judgment Condition
Minimum Match Degree:
90.0 %
NG
2-382 CV-X UM_E
Match Degree
78.5 %
OK
Match Degree
100.0 %
Outline Coincidence/Outline Comparison (When in Outline Capture Mode)
Flow of Setting
1
Prepare the tool.
>
>
>
>
Function List
Adding a tool (Page 1-32).
Register a reference image
(Page 1-26).
When there is no image to be used as a
reference, register the reference image.
2
3
Left-click [Register Base Binary Image].
Left-click [Next].
2
3
CV-X UM_E
2-383
Outline Coincidence/Outline Comparison (When in Outline Capture Mode)
4
5
Function List
6
Select the outlines to inspect from the
base binary image (Page 2-386).
Adjust the shape of the outline (Page 2386).
4
Left-click [Done].
5
6
2-384 CV-X UM_E
Outline Coincidence/Outline Comparison (When in Outline Capture Mode)
7
7
8
Set detection conditions (Page 2-386).
9
Set judgment conditions (Page 2-386).
Set the tolerances (upper limit and lower limit) for
the measured values.
CV-X UM_E
2-385
Function List
8
9
Set Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Outline Coincidence/Outline Comparison (When in Outline Capture Mode)
Selecting the Outline to Inspect
Function List
Setting item
Settings
Lower Outline Length
Retains only the outlines that are longer than the specified value. Set it to a large value when you wish to
collectively delete short outlines.
Delete Outline
Deletes the outlines that are not to be inspected.
Connect Outlines
Connects broken outlines.
Outline Count
The number of outlines to be inspected is displayed.
Adjusting the Outline to Inspect
Setting item
Settings
Filter Effects
Apply filter processing to the binary image to adjust the outline.
• Remove Black Spots: Removes the black pixel noises. Applies the Remove Dark Noise filter on the binary
image.
• Remove White Spots: Removes the white pixel noises. Applies the Remove Bright Noise filter on the binary
image.
• Expand Black: Removes the white pixel noises by expanding the black pixels. Applies the Shrink filter on
the binary image.
• Expand White: Removes the black pixel noises by expanding the white pixels. Applies the Expand filter on
the binary image.
Draw
Draw white or black on the binary image to adjust the outline shape.
• Rectangle: Draws a rectangle in the specified color.
• Rotated Rectangle: Draws a rotatable rectangle in the specified color.
• Circle : Draws a circle in the specified color.
• Oval : Draws an oval in the specified color.
• Fill: Fills the area that was specified using the mouse. Select the color and then click on the screen. Multiple
areas can be collectively filled by dragging.
• Freehand: Draws a line along the part traced using the mouse. Select the color and the thickness and then
click on the screen.
Setting the Detection Conditions
Setting item
Settings
Judgment Range
(Pixels)
Specifies the range for detecting the outlines by the width from the set outlines. When a detected outline is
outside the range, it is counted as an NG outline.
Setting the Judgment Conditions
Setting item
Settings
Match Degree (%)
Specifies the range of the match degree judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• Match Degree: The proportion of the parts which match the set outlines. It is calculated from the number of
detected outlines and the number of registered outlines.
NG Outlines
Sets the upper limit value for the number of outlines judged as NG.
Detected Outlines
Specifies the range of the outline count judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit]. Set them
to not be greater than the number of registered outlines.
• Registered Outlines: The sum total of the number of outlines set. It is the maximum number of outlines that
can be detected.
Registered Outlines
The total number of registered outlines is displayed.
2-386 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment
Position Adjustment
Presence/Absence
Flaw Detection
Alignment
Measurements & Dimensions
Count
ID & OCR/OCV
Graphic Display
Mathematical Operations
Function List
q Position Adjustment
CV-X UM_E
2-387
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Shading)
Position Adjustment with Pattern
Match (Shading)
Position Adjustment
"Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Shading)" measurement
Detects the most similar portion of a target object to a pre-registered pattern and indicates the position and
angle of the target object. This tool is applied as a position correction reference for another tool (target) where
position adjustment is performed according to the position and angle information of this tool.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Pattern Search" (Page 2-270).
Image of the Measurement
During pattern registration
Search region
CV
Registered pattern
Origin
Y
X
CV
C
CV V
CV CV
2-388 CV-X UM_E
(0,0)
Y
X
C
CV V
CV CV
CV
During operation
(0,0)
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: X>Y: Ascend
• Judged Label: 0
Pattern region
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
CV
Measurement Example
Tilt Angle
Search region
Tilt Angle
-30°
Match %
98
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
Count
3
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Shading)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
4
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set Angle Range.
Specifies the angle range by +/- for tilted search targets. The smaller the angle range is, the shorter the
processing time.
5
Set Judgment Conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Position], Specifies the range of the X coordinate and Y coordinate judged as OK by setting the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Angle], Specifies the range of the detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
• In [Match %], Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
After settings are completed
The added tool is registered as [Reference] tool. It can be used as a reference for the position adjustment of
other tools. See "Adjusting position (Position Adjustment)" (Page 1-53) for more details about the position
adjustment.
CV-X UM_E
2-389
Position Adjustment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Shading)
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select Filtered.
The target is searched, but there is positional deviation.
The target is out of the search region and detection is
unstable.
To judge acceptance by position gap
Increase [Angle Range].
Set [Search Sensitivity] to [High].
Set [Accuracy] to [High].

A wrong target is searched.
Reduce [Min. Match %].
Change the pattern region to a region which does not go
out of the search region.

A target with large inclination cannot be searched.
Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment
Conditions].
Example of representative settings
• The target is out of the search region and detection is unstable.
→ Change the pattern region to a region which does not go out of the search region.
• To judge acceptance by position gap
→ Set upper/lower limit of [Position] or [Angle] in [Judgment Conditions].
Step 1
Confirmation
Show the target and set Pattern Region.
Confirm the detected position (green arrow) with Filtered.

Position Adjustment
Some targets cannot be searched.
    
Status
Detection point is not visible.
Step 2
If the pattern is out of the search region as shown in the
figure below, search is unstable.
2-390 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Shading)
Step 3
Confirmation
Set the pattern region again so that it may not be out of
the search region.
Confirm that the label is correctly searched even if the
overall image is moved upward.

Position Adjustment
Step 4
Set Angle Range, Search Sensitivity, Accuracy and
Min.Match % as necessary.
Confirmation
Set upper/lower limit of [Position X/Y] in [Judgment
Conditions].
Confirm that NG is detected by inspecting an object with
position gap.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-391
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Profile)
Position Adjustment with Pattern
Match (Profile)
Position Adjustment
"Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Profile)" measurement
Detects the most similar portion of a target object to a pre-registered profile information and indicates the
position and angle of the target object. This tool is applied as a position correction reference for another tool
(target) where position adjustment is performed according to the position and angle information of this tool.
For more details on items of
, refer to the base tool "ShapeTrax3(A)" (Page 2-274) (for CV-X400/X300/X100
Series) or "ShapeTrax2" (Page 2-281) (for CV-X200 Series).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
During pattern registration
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: From Upper Left (Downward)
• Judged Label: 0
Search region
Pattern region
Origin
Detection point
Can be specified as
desired.
(0,0)
Y
Registered pattern
Origin
X
Tilt Angle
Search region
Y
Even when some part is missing,
a pattern is detected based on
the registered pattern.
Even when a pattern is
overlapped, it is detected based
on the registered pattern.
2-392 CV-X UM_E
Tilt Angle
+30°
Match %
85
Count
3
Detected position
X: 320, Y: 360
During operation
(0,0)
X
Scale
1.025
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Profile)
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
5
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
6
2
Set Pattern Region (Page 1-39).
Register as [Pattern Region] the model image to
detect.
3
4
5
6
Set Search Region (Page 1-39), Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set Angle Range.
Specifies the angle range by +/- for the case where the search target is titled.
Set the Feature Extraction Conditions (Page 2-279).
Set Judgment Conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Position], Specifies the range of the X/Y coordinates judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
• In [Angle], Specifies the range of detected angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
• In [Match %], Specifies the range of the correlation value judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
After settings are completed
The added tool is registered as [Reference] tool. It can be used as a reference for the position adjustment of
other tools. See "Adjusting position (Position Adjustment)" (Page 1-53) for more details about the position
adjustment.
CV-X UM_E
2-393
Position Adjustment
2
3
4
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Profile)
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Registered Feature and Current Feature are not visible.
Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction
Conditions].
 
Target with different size cannot be searched.

Processing time is long.
Reduce [Min. Match %].
Change the upper and lower limits of [Scale].
• Select [Fast] in [Fine Search Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax3)
or select [Low] in [Accuracy] (for ShapeTrax2).



Only the detected angle is unstable for a workpiece with
rotational symmetry.
Change the [Rotation Direction-Added Search] setting to
detect the rotation direction (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/
X300 Series only).
Reduce [Minimum Distance] and [Angle Range] in
[Minimum Settings] ([Minimum Distance] and [Angle
Range] operate in logical AND condition).
Select [All] for [Elimination Target] under [Eliminate Overlap].
Change the settings such as the feature reference region,
search target specification, etc. in [Select By Feature Pixel
Count] (ShapeTrax3 only, CV-X400/X300 Series only).
Select [Detailed] (for ShapeTrax3) or [High] (for ShapeTrax2)
in [Search Sensitivity] under [Feature Extraction Conditions].
Overlapping targets cannot be detected.
You do not wish to detect overlapping targets.
You wish to additionally specify whether to include or
exclude the object that was detected as a detection
target based on the features around the pattern.
There is little Current Feature and the search is not stable.
Increase the [Allowable Distortion].

Sometimes searching cannot be done because of the
angle of view or the object’s tilt.
Put a check mark on [Reverse Detect].

Target with reverse shading cannot be searched.
Use the eraser tool and erase unnecessary features, or
edit the features via the Feature Drawing Tool.

Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the
search is not stable.

• Narrow down the search region.

Position Adjustment
Some targets cannot be searched.

Status
Example of representative settings
• Registered feature has an unnecessary feature and the search is not stable.
→ Erase unnecessary feature with Eraser Tool.
• Registered Feature and Current Feature are not visible.
→ Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction Conditions].
Step 1
Show the target and set Pattern Region and Search
Region.
2-394 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment with Pattern Match (Profile)
Step 2
Confirmation
Select the eraser tool and determine the size. Drag on the
unnecessary feature and delete it.
Fine segment of registered feature is displayed in green,
and coarse segment is displayed in light blue.

Position Adjustment
Confirmation
Select [Fine] from [Display Feature] of [Feature Extraction
Conditions].
Current feature feature is displayed in blue. Confirm that
the area to be detected as feature is displayed in blue.

Step 3
Confirmation
Set Angle Range and Min. Match % as necessary.
Capture multiple images and check if stable detection is
performed.

Step 4
CV-X UM_E
2-395
Position Adjustment with Edge
Position Adjustment with Edge
Position Adjustment
"Position Adjustment with Edge" measurement
Detects an edge (X or Y direction) in the inspection region and outputs its position. This tool is applied as a
position correction reference for another tool (target) where position adjustment is performed according to the
positional gap from the detected edge.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Edge Position" (Page 2-291).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Example: When the inspection region is a rectangle
• Judged Label: 0
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Edge to be detected
Target
(0,0)
Inspection region
Y
• Judged Label: 1
• Scan Direction: →
• Edge Direction: Light to Dark
Edge to be detected
Inspection region
Target
2-396 CV-X UM_E
X
Detected position
X: 560, Y: 480
Edge count
3
Position Adjustment with Edge
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
7
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
It is also possible to set multiple regions and set the detection and judgment conditions for each region.
See "Setting Multiple Regions as Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)" (Page 9-5) for more details.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
Set Scan Direction.
Specifies the direction for scanning for the edge in the inspection region. Select one of the four options,
[To Right], [To Left], [Down] and [Up].
5
Set Edge Direction.
Specifies a light-dark change direction for the edge detection. Select the direction from among [Light to
Dark], [Dark to Light] and [Both].
CV-X UM_E
2-397
Position Adjustment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Position Adjustment with Edge
6
Set Edge Sensitivity.
Sets the criteria for recognition of an edge as a percentage against the largest wave’s peak where the
shading variation is most remarkable. Use this parameter to ignore noises.
See "What is an edge?" (Page 9-41) for more details.
Position Adjustment
7
Set Judgment Conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Position], Specifies the range of the edge position (X or Y) judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit].
After settings are completed
The added tool is registered as [Reference] tool. It can be used as a reference for the position adjustment of
other tools. See "Adjusting position (Position Adjustment)" (Page 1-53) for more details about the position
adjustment.
2-398 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment with Edge
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Weak noise is detected erroneously.
Angled detected edge position is not stable.



Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes
inward.
Reduce Edge Sensitivity while viewing the edge graph.
Reduce Edge Filter Width while viewing the detected
edge position.

A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Select [Light to Dark] from Edge Direction.
While viewing the edge graph, increase Lower Edge
Intensity or the edge sensitivity.

To detect only edges that become dark
Set Scan Direction to [←]. (In a rectangle, [↑], [↓], [→] or
[←] can be selected).
Put a check mark on Angled Edge Detection or increase
Edge Filter Width.
Example of representative settings
• A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is detected erroneously.
→ Reduce Edge Sensitivity while viewing the edge graph.
• Detection of the edge of a curve is attempted, but it goes inward.
→ Reduce Edge Filter Width while viewing the detected edge position.
Confirmation
Show the target and set Inspection Region.
Check the Detected Edge Position (green line) and the
Edge Graph (red line) with Filtered.

Step 1
CV-X UM_E
2-399
Position Adjustment
To detect an edge on the right, not on the left
Select Filtered.

Corrective action

Status
Edge graph is not displayed.
Position Adjustment with Edge
Step 2
Confirmation
Change the scan direction to [←] and set Edge Sensitivity
to 10.
Check if gray and black edges are detected (yellow line
of the edge graph is edge sensitivity).

Position Adjustment
Confirmation
Change Scan Direction to [→] and set Edge Filter Width
to 1.
While viewing the detected edge position, check if the
vertex of the curve can be detected.

Step 3
2-400 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment with Line Position and Angle
Position Adjustment with Line
Position and Angle
Finds a line from the information of the edge points after detecting multiple edge points in the inspection
region. This tool is applied as a position correction reference for another tool (target) where position
adjustment is performed according to the gaps from the position and angle of the detected line.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Position" (Page 2-319).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a rectangle
In the instance the scan direction is Forward and the
trend direction is [↓]
When the inspection region is a rectangle
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: ↓
• Scan Direction: Forward
• Edge Direction: Both
Segment shift
Segment size
Trend
direction
Scan direction
Target
Maximum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Minimum detected edge
on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Inspection region
Trend
direction
Maximum edge
position measured
300
Minimum edge
position measured
160
Scan direction
CV-X UM_E
2-401
Position Adjustment
"Position Adjustment with Line Position and Angle" measurement
Position Adjustment with Line Position and Angle
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Position Adjustment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
2
3
4
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Left-click 2 points on the line for detection.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
If the line is not detected, remove check from [Optimize] and adjust the setting values.
See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the setting values.
5
Set Judgment Conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
In [Line Angle], Specifies the range of the detected line angle judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit]
and [Lower Limit]. The angle can be specified in the range of -180.000 (degrees) to 180.000 (degrees).
After settings are completed
The added tool is registered as [Reference] tool. It can be used as a reference for the position adjustment of
other tools. See "Adjusting position (Position Adjustment)" (Page 1-53) for more details about the position
adjustment.
2-402 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment with Line Position and Angle
Corrective action

Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction
and edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Example of representative settings
The desired line is not detected.
→ Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction and edge direction.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Confirmation
Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan
direction/edge direction/edge sensitivity as necessary.
Verify the angle of the detected line.

Step 2
CV-X UM_E
2-403
Position Adjustment
Status
The desired line is not detected.

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Position Adjustment at Center of Circle
Position Adjustment at Center of
Circle
Position Adjustment
"Position Adjustment at Center of Circle" measurement
Finds a circle from the information of the edge points after detecting multiple edge points in the inspection
region. This tool is applied as a position correction reference for another tool (target) where position
adjustment is performed according to the gap from the center position of the detected circle.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Profile Position" (Page 2-319).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
When the trend direction is [Clockwise]
When the inspection region is a ring or an arc
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Trend Direction: Clockwise
• Scan Direction: Out to Center
• Edge Direction: Both
Maximum detected
edge on profile
· No. of the segment
with maximum value
Inspection region
Segment size
Trend direction
Scan direction
Target
Minimum detected
edge on profile
· No. of the segment
with minimum value
Trend direction
2-404 CV-X UM_E
Maximum radius measured
400
Minimum radius measured
300
Position Adjustment at Center of Circle
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
2
>
3
>
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
5
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Left-click 3 points on the desired circle.
3
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image Enhance (Page 1-47).
4
If the circle is not detected, remove check from [Optimize] and adjust the setting values.
See "Profile Position" (Page 2-319) for more details about the setting values.
5
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Detect Circle Center] Specifies the range of the detected circle center (X/Y) judged as OK by
setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• In [Detect Circle Radius/Diameter], Specifies the range of the detected circle diameter/radius judged
as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
After settings are completed
The added tool is registered as [Reference] tool. It can be used as a reference for the position adjustment of
other tools. See "Adjusting position (Position Adjustment)" (Page 1-53) for more details about the position
adjustment.
CV-X UM_E
2-405
Position Adjustment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Position Adjustment at Center of Circle
Corrective action

Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction
and edge direction.
Reduce the edge sensitivity while viewing the Edge
Graph.
A dense edge in the region, not the desired edge, is
detected erroneously.
Example of representative settings
The desired circle is not detected.
→ Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan direction and edge direction.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the edge detection point (orange) with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
Remove check from [Optimize] and set the scan
direction/edge direction/edge sensitivity as necessary.
Verify the center coordinates of the detect circle.

Position Adjustment
Status
The desired circle is not detected.

If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
2-406 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment with Gravity Center of Cluster
Position Adjustment with Gravity
Center of Cluster
Detects a cluster with the extracted color and outputs the center of gravity position. This tool is applied as a
position correction reference for another tool (target) where position adjustment is performed according to the
positional gap from the detected cluster’s gravity center.
For more details on items of
, see base tool "Blob" (Page 2-310).
Image of the Measurement
Measurement Example
Blobs are measured, filtered, and identified based on
numerous criteria. When identified, they can be ordered
based on the size or detection direction.
Example showing the results under the following
conditions:
• Detection Order: Y>X: Ascend
• Judged Label: 2
�
�
�
�
�
Detected blob
�
�
Inspection region
Target
�
�
�
Labels
5
Target blob
Center of gravity: X: 600, Y: 460
Area: 20,000
Roundness: 0.85
CV-X UM_E
2-407
Position Adjustment
"Position Adjustment with Gravity Center of Cluster" measurement
Position Adjustment with Gravity Center of Cluster
Flow of setting
1
Prepare a tool.
Position Adjustment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
>
>
2
3
4
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
Reference
3
4
5
6
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Set the binary conditions.
Select the detection color.
Select which area between [Black] and [White] is measured from the binarized image.
Set the Lower Area Filter.
Excludes a blob which is smaller than the specified lower limit. Increase the value in case an
unnecessary noise component is counted.
2-408 CV-X UM_E
5
6
7
8
9
Position Adjustment with Gravity Center of Cluster
7
Fills the inside of the blob with the detection color. Setting to ON enables calculation of the area and
positional coordinates of a blob filled-in with the detection color.
Set Active Border.
Excludes the blobs on the frame border of the inspection region. Setting to ON removes the background
from the inspection region.
9
Set judgment conditions.
Pass / fail tolerance (upper and lower limits) settings for the inspection.
• In [Labels], Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and
[Lower Limit].
• In [Center of Gravity], Specifies an acceptable range for the position of the center of gravity (X,Y) by
setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
After settings are completed
The added tool is registered as [Reference] tool. It can be used as a reference for the position adjustment of
other tools. See "Adjusting position (Position Adjustment)" (Page 1-53) for more details about the position
adjustment.
CV-X UM_E
2-409
Position Adjustment
8
Set Fill Holes.
Position Adjustment with Gravity Center of Cluster
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained
Corrective action
Select black in detection color.
Not to detect a target touching the inspection region
To detect only round targets
To detect only long and thin targets
To judge with the number of targets


To detect the target with the same area filter of which the
center is not extracted
  
Inspection is not stable in gray binary.

A small target is not detected.
Increase the detection count to the number required.
Reduce the Lower Area Filter.
Select Color to Binary in Extract Colors and extract the
desired colors.
Put a check mark on Fill Holes.
Put a check mark on Active Border.
Set the Roundness Filter.
Set the Axes Ratio Filter.
Set the upper/lower limits of labels for the judgment
condition.
Example of representative settings
• Inspection is not stable in gray binary.
→ Select Color to Binary in Extract Colors and extract the desired colors.
• To judge with the number of targets
→ Set the upper/lower limits of labels for the judgment condition.
Confirmation
Show the target and set the region.
Confirm the binary status with Filtered.

Step 1
Step 2
Confirmation
If it is difficult to make detection with Gray, select Color to
Binary from Extract Colors.
Confirm the binary status with Extract Image 1.

Position Adjustment
31 or more blobs cannot be detected.
  
Status
The black point is not the detection target.
2-410 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment with Gravity Center of Cluster
Step 3
Confirmation
Select Pick and set the dropper-type cursor to the target
and then left-click.
Confirm the binary status with Extract Image 1.
Left-click multiple areas until extraction is sufficient.

Position Adjustment
Step 4
Set Detection Color, Detection Count, Lower Area Filter,
etc. as necessary.
Confirmation
Set the upper/lower limits of Labels for the judgment
conditions.
Inspect an NG image and confirm that the NG judgment
is given.

Step 5
CV-X UM_E
2-411
Position Adjustment with Dark or Bright Cluster
Position Adjustment with Dark or
Bright Cluster
Position Adjustment
"Position Adjustment with Dark or Bright Cluster" measurement
Detects clusters that are darker or brighter than the background and outputs their center of gravity.
Measurement is stable even under the conditions of inconstant target object shape or position and varying
brightness within the inspection region. This tool is automatically registered as a position correction source in
the position adjustment setting. Position correction is made for the inspection region in the target tool
according to the positional gap of the gravity center of a detected cluster.
For more details on items of
2-412 CV-X UM_E
, see base tool "Grayscale Blob" (Page 2-314).
Position Adjustment with Dark or Bright Cluster
Flow of setting
1
Prepare the tool.
2
>
3
>
4
5
6
Registering reference image
(Page 1-26)
If a reference image is not available,
register the reference image.
2
Set the inspection region (Page 1-39).
Layout the region to surround the area to measure.
7
Reference
3
4
8
It is also possible to set multiple regions and
set the detection and judgment conditions for
each region. See "Setting Multiple Regions as
Inspection Regions (Multi-Region Mode)"
(Page 9-5) for more details.
9
Set Extract Colors (Page 1-46) and Image
Enhance (Page 1-47).
Specify the Detection Target.
Select whether “bright” or “dark” is the target
feature to detect.
5
Set the Reference Intensity.
Select the intensity value that will serve as the reference for the intensity difference.
6
Set the Intensity Threshold Level.
Specify the lower limit for the intensity difference that is to be detected as a blob in the range of 0 to 254.
CV-X UM_E
2-413
Position Adjustment
Adding a tool (Page 1-32)
Position Adjustment with Dark or Bright Cluster
7
Set the Segment Size.
When the value is increased, the noise reduction effect improves. However, since the intensity difference
that will be detected may also vary, adjust the value in a way that the target can be detected stably.
Position Adjustment
8
Set the cluster that is to be detected as a blob.
For more details on each setting item, see "Setting blob detection conditions" (Page 2-317).
9
Set the Judgment Conditions.
Set the tolerances (upper limit and lower limit) for the measured values.
• Specifies the range of the number of labels judged as OK by setting the [Upper Limit] and [Lower
Limit] on the [Labels] column.
• Specifies an acceptable range for the position of the center of gravity (X,Y) by setting the [Upper
Limit] and [Lower Limit] under [Center of Gravity].
2-414 CV-X UM_E
Position Adjustment with Dark or Bright Cluster
If expected measurement results cannot be obtained


Select Specified in Reference Intensity and input the
value you want.

Change to Contrast view and check that the difference
between the cluster and the background can be
differentiated via color.
Increase Intensity Threshold Level to show colors on
defects only.
Decrease the Segment Size. Set the Segment Size to the
equivalent size of the smallest cluster that you want to
detect.
Increase Lower Area Filter under Blob Settings.
Cluster and background detection status are not visible.
Things other than clusters are also colored in Contrast
view.
Small clusters can no longer be detected if the Intensity
Threshold Level is increased.
You only want to detect a defect with a large area.
CV-X UM_E
2-415
Position Adjustment
You want to choose a value instead of it being
automatically determined by the Reference Intensity.
Select [Bright] or [Dark] on Detection Target.

You want to detect either the bright or dark cluster.

Corrective action

Status
Position Adjustment with Dark or Bright Cluster
Position Adjustment
2-416 CV-X UM_E
Chapter
3
Capture/operation/output
Capture/operation/output
Documentation for the installation and configuration methods
of the controller, software, and CAD data can be downloaded
from the following URL.
www.keyence.com/cvx_support
CV-X UM_E
3-1
Camera settings
q Camera settings
Camera settings
Mathematical Operations
Execute
Output setting
Custom menu
3-2 CV-X UM_E
Overview of camera settings
Overview of camera settings
Change the camera settings as required.
Reference
1 In the setup mode, left-click the camera to change
the settings of from the [Display Camera] tab.
Main setting items
(Page 3-4)
• Primary Settings: Model/Size/Shutter Speed/Sensitivity/
Calibration/HDR
• Details: Gain Control (Shift/Span)/Capture Area Settings/
White Balance
(Page 3-12)
• Primary Settings: Trigger Mode/Trigger Signal
• Details: Trigger Signal Details/Trigger Delay/Live Image
in Run Mode
(Page 3-12)
• Flash Output Settings: Select Flash/Output Timing
• Light Controller Settings: Emission Timing/Volume/
Output Mode/Linearize
(Page 3-17)
• Asynchronous Trigger/Image Buffer/Multi-Capture
2 Left-click
.
The [Camera Settings] screen appears.
Reference
The details displayed on the [Camera Settings]
screen differs depending on the selected
camera and light settings.
CV-X UM_E
3-3
Camera settings
• To use a special capture mode, such as
LumiTrax, MultiSpectrum, 3D Capture or
Outline Capture, refer to "Chapter 7 Capture
Using High-functioning Cameras or LJ-V
Series Heads" (Page 7-1).
• When using an LJ-V Series head, refer to
"Capture Using the LJ-V Series Head (CVX400 Series Only)" (Page 7-82).
• To change the transfer speed for CA-H*C/M
and CA-HS200C/M cameras, see "Changing
the camera transfer speed (Transfer Setting)
(CV-X400/X300 Series Only)" (Page 5-26).
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
Sets the conditions such as model, image size and
brightness of the camera used.
Camera settings
Reference
When Multi-Capture is used, the settings can be
changed for each capture number. Change the
settings after selecting the capture number with
the button located at the top right of the screen.
However, the items that are common for a
camera unit can only be changed for capture
number 1.
1 On the [Camera Settings] screen of the camera to
change the settings of (Page 3-3), left-click the
[Camera] tab.
The settings screen for the selected camera appears.
3 Use [Size] to choose the number of camera pixels.
Scan method
• Interlace mode: Transfers image signals from the
image sensor of the camera by combining odd and
even lines. Since the transfer size per image is
halved, the transfer time can be reduced, but the
image quality is inferior to the progressive mode.
This mode can be specified only when the
supported monochrome camera is selected.
• Progressive mode: Transfers image signals from the
image sensor of the camera as is.
Reference
For more details on transfer times for each camera model,
see the CV-X Series Setup Manual (Area Camera Edition).
4 In [Shutter Speed], select the shutter speed.
A proper shutter speed can be selected from the list
according to the line speed and lighting conditions.
Secure sufficient illuminance for setting a shutter
speed to fit a fast line.
5 In [Sensitivity], select the camera sensitivity.
2 In [Model], choose the model of the connected
camera.
The color/monochrome selection and resolution will be
configured according to the selected model.
When selecting [Auto], it is convenient as it
automatically performs settings appropriate for the
connected camera.
Reference
For the CV-X200/X100 Series, when using a
camera of the following model, please select
the corresponding model.
Camera model to use
3-4 CV-X UM_E
Corresponding
camera model
CA-035C
CV-035C/CV-S035C
CA-H035C
CV-H035C
CA-HS035C
CV-H035C
CA-200C
CV-200C
CA-H200C
CV-H200C
CA-HS200C
CV-S200C
CA-H500C
CV-H500C
CA-035M
CV-035M/CV-S035M
CA-H035M
CV-H035M
CA-HS035M
CV-H035M
CA-200M
CV-200M
CA-H200M
CV-H200M
CA-HS200M
CV-S200M
CA-H500M
CV-H500M
Typically, to adjust the brightness of an image, the lens
aperture, lighting and shutter speed are all adjusted
accordingly. However, if none of these improve image
brightness on a fast moving line, then change the
camera sensitivity.
The larger the number, the brighter the image; the
smaller the number, the darker the image. As the
sensitivity is changed, the image display updates
accordingly.
6 Select the number of channels used for the image
transfer in the [Channels Used] field (only for CAHF*C/M).
By specifying the number of channels used, you can
increase transfer speed.
• If you select [2] for [Channels Used], the transfer
speed is approximately twice as fast than if you
select [1]. However, as one camera uses two
cameras' worth of channels, the number of
connectable cameras decreases by that amount.
• You cannot create a setting where Camera 3 and
Camera 4 alone take up 4 channels.
• The maximum length of connection cables for
cameras that can be used differs depending on the
[Channels Used] set for the camera.
- When [4ch] is set: 10 m
- When [2ch] is set: 20 m (Up to two extension cables)
- When [1ch] is set: 20 m (Up to two extension cables)
7 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
Setting detail capture conditions
(details of camera settings)
Left-click
on the Camera Settings screen to display
the Details of Camera Settings screen.
Gain Control
Shift
Adjust the level to increase the entire image signals. The
setting value range is -255 to +255.
• To darken the image: Specify a
negative value to move the entire
line downward. The section below
the minimum value on the Y-axis is
processed as level 0 (black).
Output
Line is moved
downward.
Input
This section is processed
as level 0
• To lighten the image: Specify a
positive value to move the entire line
upward. The section above the
maximum value on the Y-axis is
processed as level 255 (white).
This section is
processed as level 255
Output
Line is moved
upward.
Input
As the setting value is changed, the displayed image is
updated accordingly.
Span
Adjust the correction level for change of contrast. The
setting value range is 0.0 to 7.9.
• To increase the contrast in
Output
images: Use a high value so there
Steep
gradient
is a greater rate of change.
Gentle
• To decrease the contrast in
gradient
images: Use a low value so there
Input
is a lesser rate of change.
As the setting value is changed, the displayed image is
updated accordingly.
CV-X UM_E
3-5
Camera settings
Image quality and contrast can be adjusted by changing
the camera's image sensor sensitivity and gain-adjustment
settings. Use it by combining with the camera sensitivity
when adjusting the image display balance on the low and
high gradation regions of the image. This feature is useful
when lightening a darkened image or importing an
underexposed or overexposed image.
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
Capture Area Settings
Specify which part of the image sensor valid area is to be
set as the process area (target of measurement
processing).
1 In [Capture Area Settings] on the Details of Camera
Camera settings
Settings screen, left-click [Settings].
The [Capture Area Settings] screen appears.
Valid area (image sensor) and process area
(measurement target range)
• The range (number of pixels) that can be captured by
the image sensor used for the camera varies depending
on camera models. This is called valid area.
• The region for measurement of the controller is the
region specified by [Size] in [Camera Settings]. This is
called process area.
• In some camera models, sizes of the processing region
and the valid region are not the same, or multiple
processing region sizes can be selected.
1600
960
1200
Valid area
(capture region)
1024
Process area
(inspection region)
Example of selecting 1 megapixel mode in CV-200C
2 Drag and specify the overall position of the
processing region.
In [Origin X] and [Origin Y], offset of the load position
can be adjusted by pixel. (By default, the load position
is set to the center of the image sensor valid area.)
Reference
• The possible offset range differs
depending on the camera.
• The unit by which the Origin X/Y, Start/
End Line can be specified and the
minimum load line count varies
depending on the camera (units of one
pixel, two pixels, and so on). For
example, for the CA-HF2100C/M and CAHF6400C/M the settings are to be
specified in units of two pixels, and the
minimum load range is eight.
3 Drag and specify the start line of the load range.
In [Start Line], the line can be adjusted by pixel.
4 Drag and specify the end line of the load range.
In [End Line], the line can be adjusted by pixel.
5 To load a mirror-inverted image, select the
inversion method in the [Mirror Invert] field.
It is useful to invert mirror-reflected images such as those
from a side view attachment and turn it back to normal.
Reference
• The following mirror inversions are
available:
- CV-X100 Series: Mirrored CCD only
- CV-X400/X300/X200 Series: Horizontal,
Vertical, Rotate 180°
• When a program setting containing the
[Vertical] or [Rotate 180°] instruction is
loaded into the CV-X100 Series, the
settings will be treated as [None].
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
3-6 CV-X UM_E
The capture area can be defined within the process
area
The capture area can be narrowed in the vertical direction
after specifying process area. By eliminating unnecessary
parts of the image, the process area transfer rate can be
increased.
0
Region not used
200
Start line: 200
Image scan direction
640
1199
Inspection region
End line: 640
Region not used
Example of when the capture area is set to "200 to 640"
White balance
Left-click [Settings] of [White Balance (Global Settings)] to
adjust white balance. See , "Adjusting the white balance
(White Balance Settings)" (Page 5-25) for more details.
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
Correcting image distortion caused by
the lens characteristics (calibration)
Correct lens distortion caused by the lens characteristics,
and perspective distortion caused by the conditions of
camera installation (calibration).
Setting calibration
1 On the [Camera Settings] screen of the camera to
change the settings of (Page 3-3), left-click the
[Camera] tab.
The settings screen for the selected camera appears.
Camera settings
Current Image
Calibration point
Execute calibration
Create
Operation during image processing
Calibration model
data extracted
(Distortion information is
extracted from the recognized
calibration points)
Generate a calibrated image
based on the model data
2 Check the [Calibration] box.
3 Left-click [Set].
The calibration settings screen appears.
Use as the current image of
the measurement tool
Reference
• Calibration cannot be used with color cameras.
• Calibration cannot be used in combination with
HDR capture, LumiTrax capture, MultiSpectrum
capture, 3D Capture or Outline Capture.
• If the scan mode is interlace mode, calibration
cannot be used.
• Calibration cannot be used at the same time
as Multi-Capture (Page 3-20).
• When performing calibrations, calibration
pattern images need to be used that were
exposed in actual installation conditions. If
installation conditions are altered, recalibration
needs to be implemented.
• If the heights at which the exposure subjects
were exposed differ from those of the
calibration pattern planes when the
calibrations were implemented, that will
become a factor in errors.
CV-X UM_E
3-7
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
4 As necessary, check the [Detect Calibration Pts.
with Multiple Images] box.
You can generate a calibration model from multiple
images (up to 16) captured on the same plane that
have different pattern placing. For details, see
"Generating a Calibration Model from Multiple Images
(Multiple Image Calibration)" (Page 3-9).
Camera settings
5 In [Pattern Type], select the pattern to use for
calibration.
• Chess Board: Use a black and white checkerboard
pattern.
• Dot Grid: Use a dot pattern.
Reference
Each of the patterns can be printed using
the CV-X Series Simulation-Software.
Target distortion
Select a distortion type to calibrate.
• Lens & Perspective (default setting): Corrects both
lens distortion and perspective distortion.
• Lens Only: Corrects lens distortion only.
• Perspective Only: Corrects perspective distortion
only.
8 Left-click [Execute Calibration].
9 As necessary, left-click on
in [Execute
Calibration] and change the calibration execution
settings.
A screen for setting the details of calibration execution
appears.
6 Left-click [Detect Calibration Points].
7 As necessary, left-click on
in [Detect
Calibration Points] and change the settings for the
method for detecting calibration points.
A screen for setting the details of calibration point
detection appears.
Region
When detection is unstable due to the background
beyond the calibration pattern being captured or
another reason, this can stabilize detection by limiting
the region that is the target of detection.
• Full Image: Uses the full image as the detection
region.
• Quadrangle: Uses the area inside the specified
quadrangle as the detection region.
Detection threshold
Specifies the threshold of the calibration point
detection.When detection is unstable due to noises,
heightening the threshold may stabilize the detection.
Max. number of points
Specifies the maximum number of detection points for
calibration.
3-8 CV-X UM_E
Angle Correction
Checking the box corrects angular factors.Use this
function to align the horizontal direction of every image
from multiple cameras when a single calibration
pattern is used.
Corrective Angle
Specifies the angle of the angle-corrected image.The
specified angle is applied to the angle-corrected
image when “Angle Correction” option is turned on.
Zoom Ratio
Specifies the magnification ratio of the calibrated
image size on the basis of the original image size.
Shift
Adjusts the calibrated image position by parallelly
shifting it in the X and/or Y direction.
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
Scope of Calibration
The image calibration processing time can be
shortened by limiting the range for generating the
calibrated image.
• Full Image: Calibrates the full image.
• Rectangle: Calibrates the area inside the specified
rectangle.
The scaling coefficient is calculated automatically
when the full scale value is entered for the pattern
interval of the calibration pattern and [Recalculate] is
left-clicked.
This value is also applied to [Scaling] in [Utility] (Page
4-26).
11 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
12Execute capture and check the calibration results.
You can generate a calibration model from multiple images
(up to 16) captured on the same plane that have different
pattern placing by using multiple image calibration. This
function is useful when one calibration pattern cannot
cover the entire screen.
Reference
• Increasing the number of images may greatly
increase the time it takes to detect calibration
points.
• If it is the same plane, the pattern position and
angle of each image can be freely arranged.
1 Check the [Detect Calibration Pts. with Multiple
Images] box on the calibration settings screen
(Page 3-7).
Repeat adjustment of the calibration settings as
necessary.
CV-X UM_E
3-9
Camera settings
10Change the scaling value as required.
Generating a Calibration Model from Multiple
Images (Multiple Image Calibration)
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
2 In [Pattern Type], select the pattern to use for
calibration.
• Chessboard: Uses a black-and-white checkered
pattern.
• Dot Grid: Uses a dot pattern.
Reference
Each of the patterns can be printed using
the CV-X Series Simulation-Software.
Camera settings
3 In [Image List], left-click
and add the image
to be used in calibration model generation.
4 In [Image List], left-click an image to select it to
Capturing an image with expanded
dynamic range (HDR capture)
It is possible to capture an image with an expanded
dynamic range by capturing an image while changing the
exposure and other settings (HDR capture). The use of
HDR capture allows an image suitable for processing to be
obtained even when the brightness of the target object is
uneven, or when the target object contains both light and
dark areas.
Image and dynamic range before HDR capture
generate a calibration model.
5 In the same way as executing calibration on a
single image, repeat Steps 6 to 7 in "Setting
calibration" (Page 3-7).
6 Repeat Steps 4 to 5 to detect the calibration points
in all images to be used in calibration model
generation.
Image and dynamic range with HDR capture
7 In the same way as executing calibration on a
single image, repeat Steps 8 to 9 in "Setting
calibration" (Page 3-7).
8 As necessary, set scaling values.
9 After finishing the settings, left-click [OK].
10Execute capture and check the calibration results.
Repeat adjustment of the calibration settings as
necessary.
3-10 CV-X UM_E
Reference
• Because HDR capture synthesizes multiple
images, correct capture may not be possible if
the target is moving.
• HDR capture cannot be used at the same time as
image buffer (Page 3-18), asynchronous trigger
capture (Page 3-19), calibration (Page 3-7),
LumiTrax capture (Page 7-15), MultiSpectrum
capture (Page 7-35), 3D Capture (Page 7-47) or
Outline Capture (Page 7-68).
• Live image update cannot be used with HDR
capture.
• With HDR capture, the trigger signal is fixed at
trigger 1 for all cameras.
• HDR capture is not possible when using the
CA-HX500C/HX500M/HX200C/HX200M/
HX048C/HX048M, or CA-DC30E with the CVX200/X100 Series.
Setting camera model and capture conditions (Camera)
1 On the [Camera Settings] screen of the camera to
change the settings of (Page 3-3), left-click the
[Camera] tab.
The settings screen for the selected camera appears.
4 Change the HDR capture settings.
increases the number of images captured.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness in the range from 0 (dark) - 100
(bright). (Default: 50)
Contrast
Adjust the contrast in the range from 0 (low) - 100
(high). (Default: 50)
Temporary parameter saving
2 Put a check mark on [HDR].
3 Left-click [Set].
The HDR settings screen appears.
Temporarily saves the parameter settings, allowing
them to be loaded later.
When the settings are saved, the numbers 1 - 8 are
displayed above the buttons. Left-click on a button to
load the saved settings.
This function is useful when selecting the optimal
parameters because it allows multiple sets of
parameters to be saved and then easily loaded and
compared.
Reference
The temporary save data is deleted when
the [HDR Setting] screen is closed.
5 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
6 Execute capture and check the HDR capture
effects.
Repeat adjustment of the HDR settings as necessary.
CV-X UM_E
3-11
Camera settings
HDR Disabled Display
HDR capture is disabled when this box is checked,
and normal image capture is performed.
Correct Underexposure: Set the degree to reduce
underexposure in the HDR image. Raising the level
increases the number of images captured.
Correct Overexposure: Set the degree to reduce
overexposure in the HDR image. Raising the level
Specifying trigger used for capture (Trigger)
Specifying trigger used for capture (Trigger)
Specify the setting conditions related to the trigger
(capture timing).
Camera settings
1 On the [Camera Settings] screen of the camera to
change the settings of (Page 3-3), left-click the
[Trigger] tab.
The trigger settings screen for the selected camera
appears.
Setting detailed trigger conditions
(details of trigger settings)
Left-click
on the trigger settings screen to display
the details of trigger settings screen.
2 In [Trigger Mode], specify the trigger signal used
for capture.
• External: Capture is taken in tune with the trigger
input by the mouse or trigger signal from the
external unit. Only one time processing is
conducted for every trigger input.
• Internal: Capture is taken in tune with the trigger
signal which occurs every given time by setting the
trigger cycle. The repeat processing can be made
without the external trigger input.
Reference
When Multi-Capture is used, only [External] is
available.
3 In [Trigger Signal], specify the trigger that is
accepted by the camera selected.
4 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
3-12 CV-X UM_E
Trigger mode
External
Capture is taken in tune with the trigger input by the mouse
or trigger signal from an external device. Only one time
processing is conducted for every trigger input. When
using external triggers, select by checking the type of
trigger to be used for capturing.
• External Terminal: This is the trigger input by the
external terminal to which TRG1 to TRG4 are allocated.
• Mouse: This is the trigger input by clicking the “Run”
button using the mouse.
• RS-232C: This is the trigger input by a command
through RS-232C.
• Ethernet (TCP/IP): This is the trigger input by a
command through Ethernet.
• PLC-Link: This is the trigger input by a command
through RS-232C or Ethernet PLC-Link.
• EtherNet/IP: This is the trigger input by the cyclic
communication, message communication, or a
command of EtherNet/IP.
• PROFINET: This is the trigger input by the cyclic
communication, acyclic communications, or a
command of PROFINET.
Specifying trigger used for capture (Trigger)
Run Screen Update Mode
Live Image in Run Mode
Check the box when displaying the latest image in series
in “Run Mode”.While it is ON, images which are captured
after a trigger input are used for image processing.
Because of this, in comparison with the OFF setting, the
capture timing delays and varies.This setting value is
saved to the global setting as the common value to all
inspection, andeffects on the capture timing of the other
program settings.
Internal
Capture is taken in tune with the trigger signal which
occurs every given time by setting the trigger cycle. The
trigger cycle specified for the controller is from the
previous exposure start point to the next trigger. The
setting value range is 1 to 999 ms.
Reference
• When the internal trigger is selected, trigger
signals are continuously generated during Run
mode operation. To stop trigger generation
temporarily from outside, take the following steps.
- Disable trigger input: Disable input with any of
the following methods. The output of the result
data up to that period continues.
Disable at the terminal block input (EXT
terminal): See Page 6-68. Page 6-70.
Disable with the communication command (TE,
0 command): See Page 6-29.
- Change the Run mode to the Setup mode:
Change with any of the following methods. The
output of result data is treated in the same way
as when RESET is input and it is cancelled.
Change with the mouse (operation/setting
change): See Page 1-18.
Change with the communication command (S0
command): See Page 6-6.
• Using a TEST terminal, it is possible to stop only
the signal output without stopping the internal
trigger (Page 6-68. Page 6-70).
Trigger settings
Trigger signal
Selects a trigger with input acceptance.
Trigger delay (ms)
Specifies the trigger delay time when starting the capture
image at a given delay time after the trigger input.
The setting range is 0 - 999 msec (Default: 0 msec).
CV-X UM_E
3-13
Camera settings
• EtherCAT: This is the trigger input by the EtherCAT cyclic
communications, acyclic communications, or commands.
• EtherNet/IP Module: This is the trigger input by the
cyclic communications, message communications, or
commands of the EtherNet/IP module.
• PROFINET Module: This is the trigger input by the cyclic
communications, acyclic communications, or commands
of the PROFINET module.
• PC Program: This is the trigger input from a method of
ActiveX Control.
Changing lighting configuration for each camera (Lighting)
Changing lighting configuration for each camera
(Lighting)
Reference
Camera settings
• To change light settings when using LumiTrax,
see "Changing Settings Such that the Workpiece
Can be Captured in LumiTrax Mode" (Page 7-23).
• To change light settings when using
MultiSpectrum, refer to "Changing Settings
Such that the Workpiece Can be Captured in
MultiSpectrum Mode" (Page 7-37).
• To change light settings when using 3D Capture,
refer to "Changing the Settings for Capturing in 3D
Capture Mode (Easy Setup Menu)" (Page 7-50).
• To change light settings when using Outline
Capture, refer to "Changing the Settings for
Capturing in Outline Capture Mode (Outline
Capture Settings)" (Page 7-71).
Specifying flash operation conditions
(flash output settings)
In [Flash Output Settings] on the lighting configuration
screen, left-click
to display the flash output settings
screen.
Select Flash
1 On the [Camera Settings] screen of the camera to
change the settings of (Page 3-3), left-click the
[Lighting] tab.
The lighting configuration screen for the selected
camera appears.
2 In [Flash Output Settings], put a check mark on the
flash terminal used by the camera selected.
Reference
When using Flash 5 to 8 with the CV-X400/X300
Series, specify them on the [Flash Output Settings]
screen that appears when
is left-clicked.
3 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
When Using a Light Controller
Assign the flash selected in Step 2 in the emission timing of the
Light Controller/LIGHT used.
Put a check on the FLASH signal to use for the camera that
is being set, and then specify the mode and timing of the
flash.
• For CV-X100/X200:
Select from Flash signal 1 to 4 (Flash signals must be
assigned to the FLASH terminals).
• For CV-X400/X300:
- When using a light controller: Select from Flash signal
1 to 8 (Assignment of Flash signals to the FLASH
terminals is not necessary). When using an external
light instead of a light controller, assign only Flash
signals 1 to 4 to the FLASH terminals.
- When an external light is used: Same as for the CVX100/X200.
Reference
3-14 CV-X UM_E
A flash that is being used by another camera cannot
be selected.
Changing lighting configuration for each camera (Lighting)
Output Timing
Setting operation of illumination
expansion unit (light controller settings)
CV-X200/X100 Series
Mode
Select the timing for outputting the flash.
• Flash Output to Start Capture: Starts the image capture
after outputting the flash.
• Start Capture to Flash Output: Outputs the flash after
starting the image capture.
Flash Output to Start Capture (μs)/Start Capture to
Flash Output (μs)
Specify the interval from the flash output to starting the
image capture or vice versa in the range of 0 to 500 (μs)
(CV-X200/X100 Series) or in the range of 0 to 50000 (μs)
(CV-X400/X300 Series).
Flash Output Duration (ms)
Specify the flash output duration from 0.1 to 999.9 (ms).
Synchronize with Shutter Speed
Enabling this setting links the shutter speed and the output
duration.
Reference
• [Synchronize with Shutter Speed] is a setting
that is available only when the illumination
expansion unit CA-DC40E is connected.
• When [Synchronize with Shutter Speed] is
enabled, the output time will be clipped to the
maximum value of 999.9 ms, even if the camera
shutter speed is set to 1000 ms or higher.
Unit*: LIGHT*
• Emission Timing: The light which illuminates linked to this
camera is selected and the emission timing is specified.
- When [Flash 1 to 4] is selected, it illuminates linked to
the output of the flash terminal. The flashes with
check mark on the flash settings of this camera can
be selected.
- When [Continuous] is selected, it continuously
illuminates regardless of the flash terminal output.
- When [OFF] is selected, it does not illuminate
regardless of the flash terminal output.
• Volume: Specifies the brightness of the lighting in the
range of 0 to 127. When the output limitation is [OFF],
the volume can be set to 128 or more. However, be
careful of damaging the light due to heat generation.
Reference
If two lights, which includes the CA-DRW20X, are
connected to one light controller (CA-DC30E),
the CA-DRW20X light volume is limited to 80.
Unit*: Base settings
Left-click [Settings] to display the lighting controller base
settings screen. See "Illumination expansion unit settings
(Lighting Configuration)" (Page 5-24) for more details.
CV-X UM_E
3-15
Camera settings
In [Light Controller Settings] on the lighting configuration
screen, left-click
to display the light controller
settings screen.
Changing lighting configuration for each camera (Lighting)
CV-X400/X300 Series
In [Light Controller Settings] on the lighting configuration
screen, left-click
to display the light controller settings
screen.
• Control Light Intensity: By controlling the light intensity of
the lighting, variation of light intensity due to temperature
and degradation with age can be suppressed. As the
upper limit of the light intensity of the lighting is held down
when "Control Light Intensity" is enabled, disable it when
the light intensity is insufficient.
Reference
Camera settings
• If two lights, which includes the CA-DRW20X, are
connected to one light controller (CA-DC50E),
the CA-DRW20X light volume is limited to 320.
• If you are using the CA-DRM10X or CA-DRM20X
in MultiSpectrum mode or Standard Lighting
mode, the light volume when one light is
connected to one light controller (CA-DC60E) is
limited to 700, and 511 when two lights are
connected. There are no limits on the light
volume of the CA-DRM5X itself, but the limits
above apply.
• The Control Light Intensity function can only be
selected in the CA-DC60E when normal
illumination mode is in use.
Unit*: Base settings
Left-click [Settings] to display the lighting controller base
settings screen. See "Illumination expansion unit settings
(Lighting Configuration)" (Page 5-24) for more details.
Model
Select the model of the connected light controller. Leftclick [Auto] to automatically select the model of the
currently connected light controller.
Unit*: LIGHT*
• Emission Timing: The light which illuminates linked to
this camera is selected and the emission timing is
specified.
- When [Flash 1 to 8] is selected, it illuminates linked to
the specified flash signal. The flashes with check
mark on the flash settings of this camera can be
selected.
- When [Continuous] is selected, it continuously
illuminates regardless of the flash signal output.
- When [OFF] is selected, it does not illuminate
regardless of the flash signal output.
• Volume: Specifies the brightness of the lighting in the
range of 0 to 511. When the output limitation is [OFF],
the volume can be set to 512 or more. However, be
careful of damaging the light due to heat generation.
3-16 CV-X UM_E
Specifying advanced capture conditions (Set Advanced)
Specifying advanced capture conditions (Set Advanced)
Appearance inspection of IC (using multi-capture)
Capture multiple images while changing the lighting
conditions. Different defects can be detected with each
image, and the results can be output together.
Examples of advanced capture conditions
Chip mounter alignment measurement (using
asynchronous trigger capture)
Connect 2 cameras to 1 controller. The trigger is input to
each camera at a different time, allowing capture to match
the system movement.
Surrounding appearance inspection of bottle mouths
(using multi-capture)
The inspection that was previously performed by capture
using 3 cameras surrounding the bottle can here be
performed by rotating the bottle and capturing 3 images
with 1 camera, and outputting the results together.
CV-X UM_E
3-17
Camera settings
By changing the advanced settings on the [Camera Settings]
screen, you can specify advanced capture conditions in
accordance with the object and execute measurements.
Specifying advanced capture conditions (Set Advanced)
Executing the next capture without waiting
for image processing after capture
(image buffer)
Capture + measurement from all cameras used are
processed as a single measurement. Triggers can be set
for the capture timing at each camera.
Camera settings
1 At the bottom of the [Camera Settings] screen
(Page 3-3) of the camera to change the settings of,
left-click
.
The [Set Advanced] screen appears.
- Image Buffer Count: Specifies the number of
captures ensured in a buffer for the “Image Buffer”
processing.The actual settable number of
captures varies depending on the camera
configurations including the types of set cameras
and the number of set cameras.
- Behavior at Image Buffer Full
• No Capturing (default): Any further capture is
halted when the number of unprocessed images in
the buffer reaches the set image buffer count.
• Overwrite Oldest Image: The image data is
overwritten in chronological order and the captures
continue to be processed when the number of
unprocessed images in the buffer reaches the set
image buffer count.
3 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
2 Change the settings as necessary.
Capture Type
Select [Normal] to process the images together after
the images from all cameras have been captured.
Capture Options
After capturing, to capture the next image without
waiting for processing of the image, select [Image
Buffer]. For the specified number of image buffer,
images can be stored in the controller for each
camera. Images can be captured without waiting for
processing.
When this processing is used during movement of an
object after image capture, the cycle time of the entire
controller can be improved.
• None: Normal capture is performed.
• Image Buffer (default): Image capture can be
asynchronous to measurement processing. The next
trigger can be input even if image processing is not
completed. This can minimize the waiting time for
capture of the inspection target. Left-click [Details]
to display the [Image Buffer Settings] screen. Set
the image buffer count and the behavior at full
buffer.
3-18 CV-X UM_E
Specifying advanced capture conditions (Set Advanced)
3 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Processing of individual images from
cameras where capture was completed
(asynchronous trigger capture)
Reference
Camera settings
Processes the capture + measurement from any 1 camera
only as 1 measurement, regardless of the total number of
cameras. Camera selection is fixed to the trigger number
that is the same as the camera number (trigger 1 for
camera 1). When the [Run] button is left-clicked, the
camera on the selected camera tab is specified.
With asynchronous trigger capturing, the Judged
Values and Result Outputs are implemented by
camera. In order to check which camera's
measurement is the output data a result of, change
the settings such that CAM * Execute Status is
included in the output data.
1 At the bottom of the [Camera Settings] screen (Page 3-3)
of the camera to change the settings of, left-click
The [Set Advanced] screen appears.
.
2 Change the settings as necessary.
Capture Type
Select [Asynchronous Trigger] to perform sequential
processing of individual images from cameras where
capture was completed.
• Processes the capture + measurement from any 1
camera only as 1 measurement, regardless of the
total number of cameras. Camera selection is fixed
to the trigger number that is the same as the camera
number (trigger 1 for camera 1). When the [Run]
button is left-clicked, the camera on the selected
camera tab is specified.
• If 2 or more cameras are used, there is timing
deviation between image capture of cameras. In this
case, this is used to reduce the cycle time. For
example, in a situation as in the figure below, there
may be unnecessary waiting time until all camera
images are prepared. Use of the asynchronous
trigger can reduce the cycle time for image
processing.
Normal
CAM 1
Capture/transmission
CAM 2
Capture/transmission
Processing of
CAM 1/CAM 2
Waiting time
Asynchronous Trigger
CAM 1
CAM 2
Capture/transmission Processing of CAM 1
Capture/transmission Processing of CAM 2
Shortening of time
CV-X UM_E
3-19
Specifying advanced capture conditions (Set Advanced)
Capturing multiple images in 1 measurement
(multi-capture)
Performs multiple image captures at the same location and
processes them as a single measurement. You can also
use this feature to capture images while varying the
lighting settings or shutter speed at each capture.
3 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
4 Select the capture number using the buttons at the
top of the screen.
Camera settings
1 At the bottom of the [Camera Settings] screen
(Page 3-3) of the camera to change the settings of,
left-click
.
The [Set Advanced] screen appears.
5 Set the shutter speed, lighting conditions, and
other factors for each capture number.
2 Change the settings as necessary.
Capture Type
Select [Multi-Capture] to capture multiple images in 1
measurement.
Point
If [Multi-Capture] is selected, the [Trigger
settings] are fixed via the [External trigger].
Details
Change the detailed setting of Multi-Capture.
• Multi-Capture Settings
- Capture Count: Specifies how many captures will
be performed.
- Auto-Capture after 1st Shot: Turning this option on
performs all captures by one trigger input.Turn
this option off when a separate trigger input is to
be used for each capture.
• Active Capture Settings
Specifies the active camera for each capture number
(this setting can only be selected for the CV-X400/
X300/X100 Series).
Reference
3-20 CV-X UM_E
Tools associated with capture numbers and
cameras that are disabled in Active
Capture Settings are automatically deleted.
Reference
If the [Capture Only for Selected Capture No.] box at
the bottom of the screen is checked, then capture is
performed using only the conditions set for the
selected capture number while the [Camera Settings]
screen is displayed.
Mathematical Operations
Overview of
mathematical operations
Camera settings
Execute
Output setting
Custom menu
CV-X UM_E
3-21
Mathematical Operations
q Mathematical Operations
Operators, functions and operation symbols that can be
used in the calculation tool (Page 2-260) are described.
• Operation Notations (Page 3-22)
• Operation Function List (Page 3-28)
• Operation symbol/output item comparison table
(Measured Value/Judgment Value) (Page 3-61)
Operation Notations
Operation Notations
Mathematical Operations
The following rules should be followed when expressing
operations on the CV-X Series.
• Supported character sets (Page 3-22)
• Operation Notations (Page 3-22)
• Programming (Page 3-23)
• Temporary variables (Page 3-23)
• Expressions and operators (Page 3-24)
• Statements (Page 3-26)
Supported character sets
Calculations and scripts can be created using the
following characters.
Type
Character set
Space
<Space> <TAB>
Letters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Numbers
0123456789
Symbols
,.()[]+-*/^=<>_@':%
• Spaces and tabs are identified as token (language)
separators.
• Letters are case-sensitive.
Operation Notations
Functions and lines
• Operation programs are made up of multiple lines.
• Each line can contain a set of elements for defining a
single function.
• A function is the smallest unit of execution in a
calculation / script.
Comment
• Comments are indicated by a single quotation (') mark.
• Functions after a single quotation (') on the same line are
ignored.
Examples
@a = 100 'Set initial values
'Date created: May 23
Line continuation
To separate a long line into several lines, use a space and
an underscore ("space" + "_").
Example 1 (Correct)
IF (@a > 100) AND (@a < 200) THEN
...(omitted)
END IF
Example 2 (Correct)
IF (@a > 100) AND _
(@a < 200) THEN
...(omitted)
END IF
3-22 CV-X UM_E
Operation Notations
Example 3 (Error)
IF (@a > 100) AND
(@a < 200) THEN
...(omitted)
END IF
Example explanation
Example 1: Processed correctly because the function is
written on a single line.
Example 2: Processed correctly because the line
continuation syntax is used.
Example 3: Results in an error because the line
continuation syntax is missing.
Example 4: Example of separating function arguments
over two lines.
Programming
Arithmetic expression
Arithmetic expressions are comprised of statements.
Statements
Statements
Statements are categorized into Assignment, IF, FOR, and
DO LOOP statements.
Assignment
statement
Description of a string starting with [@] can treat the string
as a temporary variable. By assigning a value into the
temporary variable, it can be quoted again during
calculation.
Examples
@a=10
ANS0=20+@a
[ANS0] is set to a value of "30".
Example (Error)
@a_10[10] … a
Example explanation
a : Arrays cannot be used.
Variable type of temporary variables
A temporary variable is fixed by the value type which is
input first in the calculation. Since a temporary variable of
which the type is not fixed cannot be used, be sure to input
a value into the variable in advance.
6 types are available; "Scalar", "Position", "Line", "Circle",
"3D Position" and "Plane". Each consists of the data in the
table below.
Type
Notation method
Internal storage
type
Scalar
Variable name
64-bit floating
point number
Position
Variable name.X (X coordinate)
64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.Y (Y coordinate)
64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.T (q)
64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.RH (ρ)
64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.CX(center of
circle X coordinate)
64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.CY(center of
circle Y coordinate)
64-bit floating
point number
Line*
IF statement
FOR statement
Circle
DO LOOP
statement
Other
• The maximum number of characters that can be used is
5000.
• The levels of nesting allowed for parentheses, IF, FOR,
and DO LOOP statements, and operators is subject to
the amount of free memory. If the available memory
space is exceeded, a programming error will occur
when the calculation is applied, and the cursor moves to
the beginning of the expression where the error occurs.
Mathematical Operations
Example 4 (Correct)
@max = Max (@a, @b, @c, _
@d, @e, @f)
Temporary variables
Variable name.CR(circle radius) 64-bit floating
point number
3D Position Variable name.TX (X coordinate) 64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.TY (Y coordinate) 64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.TZ (Z coordinate) 64-bit floating
point number
Plane**
Variable name.PPA
64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.PPB
64-bit floating
point number
Variable name.PPC
64-bit floating
point number
CV-X UM_E
3-23
Operation Notations
*
Mathematical Operations
The following is the line-type notation.
- T(θ): Clockwise angle where the
three o'clock direction of the
θ
perpendicular line of RH (ρ) is 0
ρ
degrees
- RH(ρ): Length (pixels) of the
perpendicular line connecting the
straight line from the origin (0,0)
** The following is the plane-type
notation.
PPA, PPB, PPC: Value of each coefficient when a plane is
expressed with z=PPAx+PPBy+PPC.
Examples
@a=AsPoint(20,30)
Since "@a" is treated as position variable, it is treated as
"@a.X=20" and "@a.Y=30".
Expressions and operators
Mathematical operators
Mathematical operators can be used for processing scalar
values. The following operators are available.
Operator Description Syntax
Conditional expressions
^
Power
A^B
Raises A to the power of B.
+
Positive
+A
A
-
Negative
-A
Inverts the sign of A.
*
Multiply
A*B
Multiplies A by B.
/
Divide
A/B
Divides A by B.
MOD
Modulo
A MOD B
The remainder when A is
divided by B.
+
Add
A+B
Adds A and B.
-
Subtract
A-B
Subtracts B from A.
Precautions for use of temporary variables
• Temporary variables cannot be referred between
different calculation tools.
• Variable names have to be 32 characters or less
including the @ sign.
Comparison operators
Comparison operators compare scalar data and produce
Boolean (true or false) results.
A true/false value of 1 indicates true and a value of 0
indicates false.
Operator Description Syntax
Conditional expressions
=
Equal to
A is equal to B.
<>
Not equal to A <> B
A is not equal to B.
>
Greater than A > B
A is greater than B.
A=B
<
Less than
>=
Greater than A >= B
or equal to
A is greater than or equal
to B.
<=
Less than or A <= B
equal to
A is less than or equal to
B.
Reference
A<B
A is less than B.
Comparison operations are executed in 64-bit
floating point decimal form.
Examples
• If @a is equal to @b, the result of the statement is TRUE
(1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a = @b THEN
...
END IF
• If @a is not equal to @b, the result of the statement is
TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a <> @b THEN
...
END IF
• If @a is greater than @b, the result of the statement is
TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a > @b THEN
...
END IF
• If @a is less than @b, the result of the statement is TRUE
(1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a < @b THEN
...
END IF
3-24 CV-X UM_E
Operation Notations
Reference
Comparison operators can only be used in
conditional statements (such as IF and WHILE).
They cannot be used for assignments. For example,
if the syntax reads "@a=@b<>@c", then neither 0
nor 1 is stored for @a and a settings error occurs.
To define @a, the script must be written using the IF
statement as shown.
IF @b<>@c THEN
@a=1
ELSE
@a=0
END IF
Priority of Operator
If a statement contains more than one operator, the order
of execution is based on the priority of the operators.
Operators are evaluated in the following order.
(1) Mathematical operators
(2) Comparison operators
(3) Logic operators
The priority of operators is shown in the table below.
Operator
Mathematical
Operators
Comparison
Operators
Logic operators
Logic operators can be used in conditional functions for
performing true / false operations. Logic operators can
only be used in conditional statements (such as IF and
WHILE).
The following logic operators are available.
Description Processing
Priority
^
Power
1
+
Positive
2
-
Negative
*
Multiply
/
Divide
3
MOD
Modulo
4
+
Add
5
-
Subtract
=
Equal to
<>
Not equal to
>
Greater than
6
<
Less than
>=
Greater than
or equal to
<=
Less than or
equal to
NOT
Logical
inverse
7
Operator Description Syntax
Conditional
expressions
NOT
Logical
inverse
Inverts A.
AND
Logical
multiplication
8
AND
Logical
A AND B
multiplication
Multiplies A and B.
OR
Logical
addition
9
OR
Logical
addition
Adds A and B.
XOR
Exclusive OR
10
XOR
Exclusive OR A XOR B
NOT A
A OR B
Exclusive OR of A and B
Examples
• If @a is a value other than 1, the result of the statement is
TRUE (1), and if it is 1, the expression is FALSE (0):
IF NOT(@a = 1) THEN
...
END IF
• If @a is greater than -1 and less than +1, the result of the
statement is TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF (@a > -1) AND (@a < +1) THEN
...
END IF
• If @a is less than -1 or greater than +1, the result of the
statement is TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF (@a < -1) OR (@a > +1) THEN
...
END IF
• If one of @a or @b is 0 and the other value is not 0, the
result of the statement is TRUE (1)
If both @a and @b are 0 or both not 0, the result of the
statement is FALSE (0):
IF (@a = 0) XOR (@b = 0) THEN
Logic Operators
Examples
• IF @a > -1 AND @a < +1 THEN … a
...
END IF
• IF (@a > -1) AND (@a < +1) THEN … b
...
END IF
• @a = 1 + 2 * 3 … c
• @a = 1 + (2 * 3) … d
• @a = (1 + 2) * 3 … e
Example explanation
• a and b result in being processed the same way.
• c and d result in being processed the same way.
• The result of c is 7.
• The result of d is 7.
• The result of e is 9.
CV-X UM_E
3-25
Mathematical Operations
• If @a is greater than or equal to @b, the result of the
statement is TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a >= @b THEN
...
END IF
• If @a is less than or equal to @b, the result of the
statement is TRUE (1), otherwise it is FALSE (0):
IF @a <= @b THEN
...
END IF
Operation Notations
IF THEN: Conditional function
Statements
Process a single set of functions as a block from multiple
blocks based on the result of a conditional expression.
Assignment statement
Mathematical Operations
An item (result, setting, value, etc.) can be substituted to a
variable.
• The item on the right of the expression is assigned to the
variable on the left of the "=" sign.
• Only items of the same type can be assigned to each
other.
Syntax
Syntax
If <conditional expressions> THEN
- statements [ELSE IF]
- statements [ELSE]
- statements END IF
variable = expression
Syntax
Reference
Variable
=
Expression
Example (Correct)
• Assignment of a scalar variable:
@a = @a + 1
• Assignment of the X component (scalar value) of a circle
to a scalar variable:
@a = @circle.CX
• Assignment of the three scalar components of a circle
(CX, CY, CR) to a circle type variable:
@circle_A = @circle
Example (Error)
• Incorrect assignment of a circle value into a scalar
variable:
@a = @circle
• Incorrect assignment of a scalar value into a circle
variable:
@circle = @a
The parts in the [ ] brackets in the syntax shown
above can be omitted.
Explanation
• If the result of the IF statement condition is true, execute
the block after THEN and branch to END IF.
- If false, branch to the next ELSE IF.
- If false and ELSE IF is omitted, branch to ELSE.
- If no ELSE IF or ELSE is programmed and the
condition is FALSE, execution branches to END IF.
• If the result of the ELSE IF statement condition is true,
execute the block after THEN and branch to END IF.
- If false, branch to the next ELSE IF.
- If false and ELSE IF is omitted, branch to ELSE.
- If no ELSE IF or ELSE is programmed and the
condition is FALSE, execution branches to END IF.
• The ELSE IF statement can be used as many times as
necessary.
• The ELSE statement can only be used as the last ELSE
term before END IF.
Example
@a = 4
IF @a < 3 THEN
@b = 333
ELSE IF @a < 4 THEN
@b = 444
ELSE IF @a < 5 THEN
@b = 555
ELSE
@b = 999
END IF
Example explanation
In the above example, @b is assigned the value of 555.
3-26 CV-X UM_E
Operation Notations
DO: Conditional loop (unspecified count)
Processing a set of functions multiple times in a loop
fashion for a specified number of iterations.
Processing a set of functions multiple times in a loop
fashion while a conditional statement is true.
Syntax
Syntax
• Pre-loop evaluation:
DO WHILE <conditional expression> -statementsLOOP
• Post loop evaluation:
FOR <Variable> = <Initial value> TO <Final value> [STEP
<increment>]
- statements NEXT
Explanation
• Before the loop is processed, an initial value is assigned
to a variable, which is then incremented each time
through the loop. This loop is repeated until the variable
value exceeds the final value.
• STEP can be omitted (in which case the incremental
value is 1).
• A loop can be exited using the EXIT FOR statement.
Processing resumes at the line following the NEXT
statement.
Example
@a = 0
FOR @i = 1 TO 10
@a = @a + @i
IF @a > 11 THEN
EXIT FOR
END IF
NEXT
Example explanation
In the above example, the value of @a becomes 15.
DO - statements - LOOP WHILE <conditional
expression>
Explanation
The DO statement uses pre-loop evaluation when the
condition is written after the DO statement and post-loop
evaluation when the condition is written after the LOOP
statement.
• In the pre-loop evaluation, the loop condition must be
true in order to process the statements below. When
processing reaches the LOOP statement, it returns to
the DO statement. If the conditional expression is false,
the loop is finished and processing resumes on the line
after the LOOP statement.
• In the post loop evaluation, the statements in the loop
are processed first and then the loop condition is
checked. If true, processing returns to the DO
statement, otherwise the loop is finished and processing
resumes on the next line.
• The loop condition can be omitted (resulting in an
endless loop).
• LOOP can be exited using the EXIT DO statement in the
loop after the desired condition. Processing resumes on
the next line after the LOOP statement LOOP. If WHILE is
omitted the loop function must include EXIT DO.
Examples
(Pre-loop evaluation)
@a = 0
@i = 0
DO WHILE @i < 10
@i = @i +10
@a = @a + @i
LOOP … a
(Post loop evaluation)
@a = 0
@i = 10
DO
@i = @i + 1
@a = @a + @i
LOOP WHILE @i < 10 … b
Example explanation
a @a is set to a value of 10.
b @a is set to a value of 11.
CV-X UM_E
3-27
Mathematical Operations
FOR TO: Loop with counter (specified count)
Operation Function List
Operation Function List
The following functions can be used in the operations on
the CV-X Series.
Mathematical Operations
Mathematical functions
Function
Description
Reference
page
2D Geometric Functions
Function
Description
Reference
page
AddVector()
Add vectors
Page 3-36
AngC()
Center angle
Page 3-36
Angle()
Segment angle
Page 3-36
Angle conversion
Page 3-37
Abs()
Absolute value
Page 3-30
AngleConv()
Ave()
Average
Page 3-30
AngW()
Angular width
Page 3-37
AveR()
Average value in a set range
Page 3-30
Circle3()
Create circle from 3 points
Page 3-38
Ceil()
Round up
Page 3-30
CircleTangent() Tangent to circle
Co-ordinate conversion
Page 3-39
Page 3-38
Deg()
Convert radians to degrees
Page 3-31
ConvCrd()
Exp()
Exponential
Page 3-31
ConvCrd2()
Co-ordinate conversion 2
Page 3-39
Floor()
Round down
Page 3-31
Dist()
Distance between 2 points
Page 3-40
Hist()
Refer to the previous measurement
Page 3-31
I2Circle()
Intersection of 2 circles
Page 3-40
Page 3-31
I4XY()
Intersection of Four Points
Page 3-41
I4Line()
Intersection of a Quadrilateral's
Diagonal Lines
Page 3-41
ILineCircle()
Intersection of line and circle
Page 3-42
InnerProd()
Inner product of 2 vectors
Page 3-42
ISect()
Intersection of 2 lines
Page 3-42
Line()
Create line from 2 points
Page 3-43
LLAngle()
Angle between 2 lines
Page 3-43
LnAngle()
Angle of line to horizontal
Page 3-43
LnDist()
Perpendicular distance from point to line Page 3-43
LnDistP()
Perpendicular vector distance from
point to line
Page 3-44
LnDistXY()
Intersection in respect to perpendicular
Page 3-44
MidLine()
Bisector between 2 lines
Page 3-44
MidXY()
Midpoint of 2 points
Page 3-45
OuterProd()
Outer product of vectors
Page 3-45
Rotate()
Rotate
Page 3-45
RotCenter()
Center of rotation
Page 3-46
SubVector()
Subtract vectors
Page 3-46
VMidLine()
Bisector between 2 points
Page 3-47
AsCircle()
Define circle from single X,Y and radius
values
Page 3-47
CX()
Center X coordinate of circular variable
Page 3-47
CY()
Center Y coordinate of circular variable
Page 3-47
Int()
Convert to integer
Ln()
Natural logarithm
Page 3-31
Log()
Common logarithm
Page 3-32
Max()
Maximum value
Page 3-32
MaxN()
Location of Maximum value
Page 3-32
Min()
Minimum value
Page 3-32
MinN()
Pi()
Location of minimum value
Circle ratio
Page 3-33
Page 3-33
Rad()
Convert angle to radians
Page 3-33
Round()
Round to the nearest integer
Page 3-33
Sqr()
Square
Page 3-33
Sqrt()
Square root
Page 3-33
Stdev()
Standard Deviation of a Range of
Values
Page 3-34
Trigonometric functions
Function
Description
Reference
page
Acos()
Angle formed by adjacent &
hypotenuse
Page 3-34
Asin()
Angle formed by opposite &
hypotenuse
Page 3-34
Atan()
Angle formed by opposite & adjacent
Page 3-35
Atan2()
Angle formed by opposite (P1) &
adjacent (P2)
Page 3-35
CR()
Radius of circular variable
Page 3-48
Cos()
Adjacent/Hypotenuse: Cosine
Page 3-35
C.CX
Center X coordinate of circular variable
Page 3-48
Sin()
Opposite/Hypotenuse: Sine
Page 3-35
C.CY
Center Y coordinate of circular variable
Page 3-48
Page 3-35
C.CR
Radius of circular variable
Page 3-48
AsLine()
Define line from point (X,Y) and angle
values
Page 3-49
T()
Angle of linear variable
Page 3-49
RH()
Distance from origin of linear variable
Page 3-49
L.T
Angle of linear variable
Page 3-49
L.RH
Distance from origin of linear variable
Page 3-49
AsPoint()
Define point from single X and Y values
Page 3-49
X()
X coordinate of position variable
Page 3-50
Y()
Y coordinate of position variable
Page 3-50
Q.X
X coordinate of position variable
Page 3-50
Q.Y
Y coordinate of position variable
Page 3-50
Tan()
Opposite/Adjacent: Tangent
3-28 CV-X UM_E
Operation Function List
3D Geometric Functions
Calendar functions
Point
The 3D Geometric Functions can be used only in the calculation of
the program setting using the LJ-V Series head.
Function
Description
AddVector3D() Add 3D Vectors
Reference
page
Function
Description
Reference
page
ShiftDay()
No. Day(s) offset
Page 3-58
ShiftMonth()
No. Month(s) offset
Page 3-58
ShiftYear()
No. Year(s) offset
Page 3-58
Page 3-51
Distance Between Two 3D-Coordinate
Points
Page 3-51
BIT functions
I2Plane()
Line of Intersection of 2 Planes
Page 3-51
Function
Description
Reference
page
ILine3DPlane() Intersection of 3D Line and Plane
Line3DDist()
Distance Between Point and 3D Line
Line3DDistXYZ() Foot of Perpendicular from Point to 3D
Line
LnLn3DDist()
Distance Between Two 3D Lines
Page 3-51
B_And()
Multiplication
Page 3-59
Page 3-52
B_Not()
Inverse
Page 3-59
Page 3-52
B_Or()
Addition
Page 3-59
B_Xor()
Exclusive Addition
Page 3-59
Bind()
Bind Bits
Page 3-60
Page 3-53
Plane2Angle() Angle Between Two Planes
Page 3-53
PlanePassPt() Parallel Movement of Plane
Page 3-54
Other
PlDist()
Distance Between Plane and Point
Page 3-54
PlDistP()
Distance Between Plane and Point
(Signed)
Page 3-54
Function
Description
Reference
page
PlDistXYZ()
Foot of Perpendicular from Point to
Plane
Page 3-54
ANS0
Answer0
Page 3-60
ANS1
Answer1
Page 3-60
ANS2
Answer2
Page 3-60
SubVector3D() Subtract 3D Vectors
Page 3-54
As3DPoint()
Define 3D Position from Single X, Y, Z
Values
Page 3-55
TX()
X Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Page 3-55
TY()
Y Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Page 3-55
TZ()
Z Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Page 3-55
T.TX
X Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Page 3-55
T.TY
Y Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Page 3-56
T.TZ
Z Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Page 3-56
AsPlane()
Define Plane from A, B and C Values
Page 3-56
PPA()
X Slope of Plane Variable
Page 3-56
PPB()
Y Slope of Plane Variable
Page 3-57
PPC()
Z Intercept of Plane Variable
Page 3-57
P.PPA
X Slope of Plane Variable
Page 3-57
P.PPB
Y Slope of Plane Variable
Page 3-57
P.PPC
Z Intercept of Plane Variable
Page 3-57
CV-X UM_E
3-29
Mathematical Operations
Dist3D()
Operation Function List
Mathematical functions
Reference
The sample calculations given in the following
explanations may be not be precise due to
computational errors inherent with processors.
Abs (P): Absolute value
Mathematical Operations
Calculates the absolute value of P.
Parameters
• P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in
a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@integer = -128
@natural = Abs(@integer)
Example explanation
@natural is set to a value of 128.
Ave (P0, P1, ...,Pn): Average
Calculates the average value of P0-Pn (Maximum of 40
terms).
Parameters
P0 - Pn: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if none of the terms P0 - Pn are
specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms.
Example
@a = 8
@b = 9
@c = 2
@d = 3
@average = Ave(@a, @b, @c, @d)
Example explanation
@average is set to a value of 5.5.
AveR(Max, Min, P0, P1, ... , Pn): Average value in a
set range
Calculates the average value of terms that fall between a
specified Min-to-Max range from P0-Pn (Maximum of 40
terms).
• The function will still calculate the average if the Min and
Max are reversed.
• Results in 0 if none of terms P0 to Pn fall between the
Min-to-Max range.
Parameters
• Max: maximum value. Constant, scalar variable, or a
function that results in a scalar value
• Min: minimum value. Constant, scalar variable, or a
function that results in a scalar value
• P0 - Pn: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that
results in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if none of the terms from P0 - Pn are
specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms.
Example
@max = 25
@min = 20
@a = 21
@b = 26
@c = 23
@average = AveR(@max, @min, @a, @b, @c)
Example explanation
@average is set to a value of 22.
Ceil(P): Round up
Rounds P up to the nearest integer.
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Examples
@a = Ceil(1.5)
@b = Ceil(-1.5)
Example explanation
@a and @b are set to values of 2 and -1, respectively.
3-30 CV-X UM_E
Operation Function List
Deg(P): Convert radians to degrees
Hist(P): Refer to the previous measurement
Converts the angle P from radians into degrees.
Refer to the value of the one previous measurement for P.
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
scalar value in radians
Parameters
P: Measured value or judged value
Reference
Example
@degree = Deg(3.14)
Example explanation
@degree is set to a value of 179.909...
Exp(): Exponential
Returns the exponential base e value (2.71828183...).
Parameters
None
Return value
Int(P): Convert to integer
Returns the integer of P.
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Scalar value
Example
@a = Exp()
Examples
@a = Int(1.5)
@b = Int(-1.5)
Example explanation
@a is set to a value of 2.718....
Example explanation
@a and @b are set to values of 1 and -1, respectively.
Floor(P): Round down
Ln(P): Natural logarithm
Rounds P down to the nearest integer.
Calculates the natural logarithm of P.
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value
Parameters
P: Scalar (larger than 0)
Return value
Scalar value
Examples
@a = Floor(1.5)
@b = Floor(-1.5)
Example explanation
@a and @b are set to values of 1 and -2, respectively.
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P is 0 or less.
Example
@e = Exp()
@a = Ln(@e)
Example explanation
@a is set to a value of 1.
CV-X UM_E
3-31
Mathematical Operations
Return value
Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
• When the controller is started, the program No. is
changed, or immediately after reset, the value is
"0" regardless of the P value.
• Self-quotation is useful for integration of the
measured values in the past. For example, when
"ANS = Hist (ANS of own tool) + judgment result
of measurement tool" is specified, NG count can
be calculated for any measurement tool.
Operation Function List
Log(P): Common logarithm
MaxN(P0, P1, ... , Pn): Location of Maximum value
Calculates the common logarithm (base 10) of P.
Returns the location (from 0 to n) of the largest value in P0Pn (maximum of 40 terms).
Parameters
P: Scalar (larger than 0)
Return value
Scalar value
Mathematical Operations
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P is 0 or less.
Example
@a = Log(10)
Example explanation
The value becomes @a=1.
Max(P0, P1, ... , Pn): Maximum value
Calculates the largest value in P0 - Pn (Maximum of 40
items)
Parameters
P0 - Pn: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if none of the terms from P0 - Pn are
specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms.
Example
@a = 8
@b = 9
@c = 2
@d = 3
@max = Max(@a, @b, @c, @d)
Example explanation
@max is set to a value of 9.
Parameters
P0 - Pn: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if none of the terms from P0 - Pn are
specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms.
Example
@a = 8
@b = 9
@c = 2
@d = 3
@maxn = MaxN(@a, @b, @c, @d)
Example explanation
@maxn is set to a value of 1.
Reference
Note that it is counted from 0.
Min(P0, P1, ... , Pn): Minimum value
Calculates the smallest value in P0 - Pn (maximum of 40
terms).
Parameters
P0 - Pn: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if none of the terms from P0 - Pn are
specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms.
Example
@a = 8
@b = 9
@c = 2
@d = 3
@min = Min(@a, @b, @c, @d)
Example explanation
@min is set to a value of 2.
3-32 CV-X UM_E
Operation Function List
MinN(P0, P1, ... , Pn): Location of minimum value
Round(P): Round to the nearest integer
Returns the location (from 0 to n) of the smallest value in
P0-Pn (maximum of 40 terms).
Rounds P up or down to the nearest integer.
Parameters
P0 - Pn: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if none of the terms from P0 - Pn are
specified.
• An error occurs if P0 - Pn is more than 40 terms.
Example
@a = 8
@b = 9
@c = 2
@d = 3
@minn = MinN(@a, @b, @c, @d)
Example explanation
@minn is set to a value of 2.
Reference
Note that it is counted from 0.
Return value
Scalar value
Examples
@a = Round(1.5)
@b = Round(1.4)
@c = Round(-1.4)
@d = Round(-1.5)
Example explanation
@a, @b, @c and @d are set to values of 2, 1, -1 and -2,
respectively.
Sqr(P): Square
Calculates P to the power of 2.
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value
Pi(): Circle ratio
Return value
Scalar value
Returns the value of π (circular constant) in double
precision.
Example
@param = 2
@result = Sqr(@param)
Parameters
None
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 4.
Return value
Scalar value
Reference
180 (deg) = π (radian).
Sqrt(P): Square root
Calculates the square root of P.
Rad(D): Convert angle to radians
Converts the angle D from degrees to radians.
Parameters
D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
scalar value in degrees (°)
Return value
Scalar value in radians
Example
@radian = Rad(30)
Example explanation
@radian is set to a value of 0.523...
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P is negative.
Example
@param = 256
@result = Sqrt(@param)
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 16.
CV-X UM_E
3-33
Mathematical Operations
Return value
Scalar value
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value
Operation Function List
Stdev(P0,P1, ... , Pn): Standard Deviation of a
Range of Values
Trigonometric functions
Finds the standard deviation of the range of values P0 to
Pn (up to 40).
Acos(P): Angle formed by adjacent & hypotenuse
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
P0 to Pn: A constant, scalar variable, or a function that
returns a scalar value.
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
-A setting error occurs if there is no P0 to Pn specification.
-A setting error occurs if the count for P0 to Pn is greater
than 40.
Example
@a = 8
@b = 9
@c = 2
@d = 3
@stdev = Stdev(@a, @b, @c, @d)
Example explanation
@stdev is set to a value of 3.041.
Calculates the angle of an arc of a right-angled triangle
based on (P) (adjacent / hypotenuse).
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value within the range of -1 to 1
Return value
Scalar value (0 to 180) (Unit: degrees (°))
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P falls outside of -1.0 to +1.0.
Example
@degree = Acos(0.5)
Example explanation
@degree is set to a value of 60 (°).
Asin(P): Angle formed by opposite & hypotenuse
Calculates the angle of an arc of a right-angled triangle
based on (P) (opposite / hypotenuse).
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value within the range of -1 to 1
Return value
Scalar value (-90 to 90) (Unit: degrees (°))
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P falls outside of -1.0 to +1.0.
Example
@degree = Asin(0.5)
Example explanation
@degree is set to a value of 30 (°).
3-34 CV-X UM_E
Operation Function List
Cos(D): Adjacent/Hypotenuse: Cosine
Calculates the angle of an arc for a right-angled triangle
based on (P) (opposite / adjacent).
Calculates adjacent, hypotenuse ratio for a right-angled
triangle based on an arc (D) (°).
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value
Parameters
D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
scalar value in degrees (°)
Return value
Scalar value (-90 to 90) (Unit: degrees (°))
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@degree = Atan(1)
Example
@a = Cos(60)
Example explanation
@degree is set to a value of 45 (°).
Example explanation
@a is set to a value of 0.5.
Atan2(P1, P2): Angle formed by opposite (P1) &
adjacent (P2)
Sin(D): Opposite/Hypotenuse: Sine
Calculates the arctangent value of P1/P2.
If P2 = 0, the function processes as follows.
• P1>0 → 90
• P1<0 → -90
• P1 = 0 → error
Parameters
P1, P2: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value (-180 to 180) (Unit: degrees (°))
Causes of errors
An error occurs if both P1 and P2 are 0.
Mathematical Operations
Atan(P): Angle formed by opposite & adjacent
Calculates opposite, hypotenuse ratio for a right-angled
triangle based on an arc (D) (°).
Parameters
D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
scalar value in degrees (°)
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@a = Sin(30)
Example explanation
@a is set to a value of 0.5.
Tan(D): Opposite/Adjacent: Tangent
Example
@degree = Atan2(1, 1)
Example explanation
@degree is set to a value of 45 (°).
Calculates opposite, adjacent ratio for a right-angled
triangle based on an arc (D) (°).
Parameters
D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
scalar value in degrees (°)
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@a = Tan(45)
Example explanation
@a is set to a value of 1.
CV-X UM_E
3-35
Operation Function List
2D Geometric functions
AddVector(Q1, Q2): Add vectors
Calculates the sum of 2D vectors.
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
Q1, Q2: Position variable or a function that results in
position data
Angle(Q1, Q2): Segment angle
Calculates the angle formed by the horizontal axis and the
line through positions Q1 to Q2.
• Calculates the angle of Q2 with Q1 as the point of
rotation.
• With reference to the horizontal axis, the angle is
calculated as a positive value in a clockwise direction.
Return value
Position data
Parameters
Q1, Q2: position variable or a function that results in
position data
Example
@vector1=AsPoint(1,1)
@vector2=AsPoint(2,2)
@resultVector = AddVector ( @vector1, @vector2 )
Return value
Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
• It results in a value larger than -180 degrees and 180
degrees or less.
Example explanation
@resultVector is set to a value of (3,3).
Causes of errors
An error occurs if Q1 and Q2 are the same value.
AngC(D1, D2): Center angle
Example
@Q1 = AsPoint(0, 0)
Calculates the center angle between D1 (°) and D2 (°) as
calculated from the angle D1 in the clockwise direction.
@Q2 = AsPoint(1, 1)
@ang = Angle(@Q1, @Q2)
Parameters
D1, D2: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in
a scalar value in degrees (°)
Example explanation
@ang is set to a value of 45(°).
Return value
Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
Example
Angle(Q1,Q2)
Q2
Y
@degree = AngC(30, 90)
Example explanation
@degree is set to a value of 60 (°).
D1
(30˚)
D2
(90˚)
3-36 CV-X UM_E
AngC(D1, D2)=60˚
X
Q1
Operation Function List
AngleConv(D1, D2, P): Angle conversion
AngW(D1, D2): Angular width
Add angle D2 to angle D1 and calculate the angle
converted in the range specified by P.
• Usually, an angle is measured clockwise using the 3
o'clock direction horizontal line as a reference.
• With this function, an angle can be converted to the
angle based on the desired reference line.
Calculates the arc between D1 (°) and D2 (°) as calculated
from the angle D1 in the clockwise direction.
scalar value.
• D2: Angle added (Unit: Degree (°)) Specifies constant,
scalar variable, or a function that results in a scalar
value.
• P : For 0, it results in an angle between -180 and 180 (°).
For 1, it results in an angle between 0 and 360 (°).
Specifies constant, scalar variable, or a function that
results in a scalar value.
Return value
Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
Example 1
@degree = AngW(30, 90)
Explanation of example 1
@degree is set to a value of 60 (°).
Example 2
@degree = AngW(90, 30)
Explanation of example 2
@degree is set to a value of 300 (°).
Return value
Angle after conversion (Unit: Degree (°))
Scalar value
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P is neither 0 nor 1.
Examples
@after0 = AngleConv(225, 90, 0)
@after1 = AngleConv(225, 90, 1)
Example explanation
The above is converted to the angle based on the 12
o'clock direction reference line.
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• D1: Angle before conversion (Unit: Degree (°)) Specifies
constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
Parameters
D1, D2: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in
a scalar value in degrees (°)
D1
(30˚)
D2
(90˚)
AngW(D1, D2)=60˚
AngW(D1, D2)=300˚
D2(30˚)
D1(90˚)
@after0 is set to a value of -45(°).
@after1 is set to a value of 315(°).
D2(90°)
AngleConv(225, 90, 0)
D1(225°)
AngleConv(225, 90, 1)
CV-X UM_E
3-37
Operation Function List
Mathematical Operations
Circle3(Q1, Q2, Q3): Create circle from 3 points
CircleTangent(C, Q, P): Tangent to circle
Calculates the circle that passes through three X,Y
positions (Q1, Q2, Q3).
Calculates two points on circle (C) based on tangent lines
connecting position (Q) and circle (C).
Parameters
Q1, Q2, Q3: Position variable or a function that returns in
position data
Parameters
• C: Circle variable or a function that results in circle data
• Q: Position variable or a function that results in position
data
• P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in
a scalar value
- 0: Returns the left intersect point on the circle when
Return value
Circle data
Causes of errors
An error occurs if two or more points are of the same
coordinate, or if all three points are in a single line.
Example
@point0 = AsPoint(10,0)
@point1 = AsPoint(0,10)
@point2 = AsPoint(10,20)
@circle = Circle3(@point0, @point1, @point2)
Example explanation
The values are set as follows: @circle.CX = 10, @circle.CY
= 10, @circle.CR = 10.
Q1
C
Q3
Q2
looking at position (Q) from the circle (C).
- 1: Returns the right intersect point on the circle (C)
when looking at position (Q) from the circle (C).
Return value
Position data (Unit: pixels)
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if point Q is inside the circle.
• An error occurs if the value of P is neither 0 nor 1.
Examples
@circle = AsCircle(10, 10, 10)
@point = AsPoint(-10,10)
@tangent0 = CircleTangent(@circle, @point, 0) … a
@tangent1 = CircleTangent(@circle, @point, 1) … b
Example explanation
a Intersect position (5, 18.660...).
b Intersect position (5, 1.339...).
Q
C
Q0
3-38 CV-X UM_E
Operation Function List
ConvCrd(Q1, Q2, D, P): Co-ordinate conversion
Converts the X, Y position Q1 in terms of the origin set at
Q2, rotated D degrees and scaled by P (Coordinate
system transformation).
Return value
Position data (Unit: pixels)
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P is zero.
Example
@before = AsPoint(10,10 + 10 * Sqrt(2))
@origin = AsPoint(10,10)
@after = ConvCrd(@before, @origin, 45, 1)
Example explanation
@after is set to a value of (10, 10).
X
0
Q2
D˚
Q1
P times
X
Y
Convert the coordinate of the point described by the coordinate system of the image into the coordinate viewed
from the desired co-ordinate system.
• Outputs the position of Q1 in terms of the origin set at
Q2, rotated D degrees and scaled by P1.
• Converts to a right hand system or a left hand system.
Parameters
• Q1: Conversion source coordinate (Coordinate is
expressed by the conversion source coordinate
system.) Position variable or a function that results in
position data
• Q2: Origin in the destination coordinate system
(coordinates expressed in terms of the source
coordinate system) Position variable or function that
returns a position value.
• D: Rotation angle of X axis in the destination coordinate
system (coordinates expressed in terms of the source
coordinate system) Constant, scalar variable, or function
that returns a scalar value.
• P1: Magnification power in the destination coordinate
system (coordinates expressed in terms of the source
coordinate system) Constant, scalar type variable, or
function that returns a scalar value.
• P2: 0 if the positive side of the Y axis faces the same
way in the source and destination. 1 if the positive side
of the Y axis faces in the opposite direction between the
source and destination. (Constant, scalar type variable,
or function that returns a scalar value.)
Return value
Position data
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if the value of P is zero.
• An error occurs if the value of P2 is neither 0 nor 1.
Examples
@before = AsPoint(10,10 + 10 * Sqrt(2))
@origin = AsPoint(10,10)
@after0 = ConvCrd2(@before, @origin, 45, 1, 0) … a
@after1 = ConvCrd2(@before, @origin, 45, 1, 1) … b
Example explanation
a @after0 is set to a value of (10.10).
b @after1 is set to a value of (10, -10).
0
y
X
Q2
Q1
D˚
X
P times
Y
CV-X UM_E
3-39
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• Q1, Q2: position variable or a function that results in
position data
• D: Constant, scalar variable, or function that results in a
scalar value in degrees (°)
• P: Constant, scalar variable, or a scalar value
ConvCrd2(Q1, Q2, D, P1, P2): Co-ordinate
conversion 2
Operation Function List
Dist(Q1, Q2): Distance between 2 points
I2Circle(C1,C2,P): Intersection of 2 circles
Calculates the distance between two X,Y positions Q1 and
Q2.
Calculates two intersecting points of two circles (C1 and
C2). The points will have the same value if the circles are
touching but not passing through each other.
Parameters
Q1, Q2: position variable or a function that results in
position data
Mathematical Operations
Return value
Scalar value (unit: pixels)
Example
@point1 = AsPoint(70.20)
@point2 = AsPoint(30.50)
@distance = Dist(@point1, @point2)
Example explanation
@distance is set to a value of 50.
X
0
Q1
Q2
Parameters
• C1, C2: Circle variable or a function that results in a
circle data
• P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in
a scalar value
- 0: Returns the left intersect point when looking at the
line passing through the intersecting points (Q0, Q1)
from the center of the circle (C1).
- 1: Returns the right intersect point when looking at the
line passing through the intersecting points (Q0, Q1)
from the center of the circle (C1).
Return value
Position data (Unit: pixels)
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if the circles do not intersect.
• An error occurs if the value of P is neither 0 nor 1.
Y
Examples
@circle0 = AsCircle(10, 10, 10)
@circle1 = AsCircle(20, 20, 10)
@point0 = I2Circle(@circle0, @circle1, 0) … a
@point1 = I2Circle(@circle0, @circle1, 1) … b
Example explanation
a Intersect position is (20,10).
b Intersect position is (10.20).
Q0
C1
C2
Q1
3-40 CV-X UM_E
Operation Function List
I4XY(Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4): Intersection of Four Points
Finds the intersection of diagonals from four points.
Parameters
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4: A position variable or a function that
returns a position value.
Causes of errors
• The function terminates abnormally if Q1 and Q3 as well
as Q2 and Q4 have the same coordinates.
• The function terminates abnormally because an
intersection cannot be found if lines Q1Q3 and Q2Q4
are parallel.
Examples
@p0 = I4XY(@Q1,@Q2,@Q3,@Q4)
Example explanation
The coordinates of intersection Q0 are returned to @p0.
Q2
Finds the intersection of the diagonals of a quadrilateral
that is composed by four straight lines.
Parameters
L1, L2, L3, L4: A line variable or a function that returns a
line value.
Return value
Position value
Causes of errors
• The function terminates abnormally if at least 1 of the 4
required intersections cannot be found.
• The function terminates abnormally if diagonals cannot
be found from the 4 line intersections.
Examples
@p0 = I4Line(@L1,@L2,@L3,@L4)
Example explanation
The coordinates of intersection Q0 are returned to @p0.
Q1
L1
L2
Q0
Q3
Q0
Q4
L4
L3
CV-X UM_E
3-41
Mathematical Operations
Return value
Position value
I4Line(L1,L2,L3,L4): Intersection of a
Quadrilateral's Diagonal Lines
Operation Function List
ILineCircle(C,L,P): Intersection of line and circle
InnerProd(Q1, Q2): Inner product of 2 vectors
Calculates the two intersecting points of a circle (C) and a
line (L). The points will have the same value if the circle
and line are touching but not passing through each other.
Calculates the inner product of the 2D vector consisting of
Q1 and Q2.
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• C: Circle variable or a function that results in circle data
• L: Line variable or a function that results in line data
• P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in
a scalar value
- 0: Returns the left intersect point when looking at the
line (L) from the center of the circle (C).
- 1: Returns the right intersect point when looking at the
line (L) from the center of the circle (C).
Reference
When line L passes through the center of circle C, it
is not determined. Specification by P value is not
allowed.
Return value
Position data (Unit: pixels)
Examples
@circle = AsCircle(10, 10, 10)
@line = AsLine(15 * Sqrt(2), 45) … a
@point0 = ILineCircle(@circle, @line, 0) … b
@point1 = ILineCircle(@circle, @line, 1) … c
Example explanation
a Represents line y = -x + 30.
b Intersect position is (20,10).
c Intersect position is (10,20).
L
Q0
Q1
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@vector1=AsPoint(1,1)
@vector2=AsPoint(2,2)
@result = InnerProd( @vector1, @vector2 )
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 4 (@vector1.X * @vector2.X +
@vector1.Y * @vector2.Y).
ISect(L1, L2): Intersection of 2 lines
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if the circle and line do not intersect.
• An error occurs if the value of P is neither 0 nor 1.
C
Parameters
Q1, Q2: Position variable or a function that results in
position data
Calculates the intersecting point of line L1 and line L2.
Parameters
L1, L2: Line variable or a function that results in line data
Return value
Position data (Unit: pixels)
Causes of errors
An error occurs if L1 and L2 are parallel.
Example
@point0 = AsPoint(20.0)
@point1 = AsPoint(0,10)
@point2 = AsPoint(0.0)
@point3 = AsPoint(20,10)
@intersect = ISect( Line(@point0,@point1),
Line(@point2,@point3))
Example explanation
@intersect.X is 10 and @intersect.Y is 5.
L1
L2
3-42 CV-X UM_E
Operation Function List
Line(Q1,Q2): Create line from 2 points
LnAngle(L): Angle of line to horizontal
Calculates the line between X,Y positions Q1 and Q2.
Calculates the angle (-90° < θ ≤ 90°) formed by line L and
a horizontal line.
Parameters
Q1, Q2: position variable or a function that results in
position data
Point
A line perpendicular to the horizontal line will
have a 90° angle.
Parameters
L: Line variable or a function that results in line data
Causes of errors
An error occurs if Q1 and Q2 are the same value.
Return value
Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
Example
@point1 = AsPoint(50.20)
@point2 = AsPoint(20.50)
@line = Line(@point1, @point2)
Example
@line = AsLine(Sqrt(3) / 2,60)
@ang = LnAngle(@line)
Example explanation
@line.T is set to a value of 45°, and @line.RH to 49.497.
Mathematical Operations
Return value
Line data
Example explanation
@ang is set to a value of -30(°).
LnAngle(L)
X
0
X
0
Q1
L
Q2
Y
Y
LLAngle(L1, L2): Angle between 2 lines
Calculates the angle formed by lines L1 and L2 where the
angle is the absolute difference (0° ≤ θ < 180°) of the angles
(-90° < θ ≤ 90°) formed by L1 and L2 with the horizontal line.
Point
A line perpendicular to the horizontal line will
have a 90° angle.
LnDist(L, Q): Perpendicular distance from point to
line
Calculates the perpendicular distance between line L and
X,Y position Q.
Parameters
L1, L2: Line variable or a function that results in line data
Parameters
• L: Line variable or a function that results in line data
• Q: Position variable or a function that results in position
data
Return value
Scalar value (unit: degrees (°))
Return value
Scalar value (unit: pixels)
Example
@line0 = AsLine(Sqrt(3) / 2, 60)
@line1 = AsLine(0, 120)
@angle = LLAngle(@line0, @line1)
Example
@point = AsPoint(0.0)
@line = AsLine(1.5, 60)
@distance = LnDist(@line, @point)
Example explanation
@angle is set to a value of 60(°).
Example explanation
@distance is set to a value of 1.5.
Q
L1
LnDist(L,Q)
L
LLAngle (L1,L2)
L2
CV-X UM_E
3-43
Operation Function List
LnDistP(L, Q): Perpendicular vector distance from
point to line
Outputs signed LnDist. If point Q is lower than line L, the
value is positive; if it is higher, the value is negative.
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• L: Line variable or a function that results in line data
• Q: Position variable or a function that results in position
data
Return value
Scalar value (unit: pixels)
• When point Q is more on the positive side of the Y axis
than line L, a positive value is returned.
• However, when line L is parallel to axis Y, it is when point
Q is more on the positive side of axis X than line L that a
positive value is returned.
Example
@point = AsPoint(0.0)
@line = AsLine(1.5, 60)
@distance = LnDistP(@line, @point)
LnDistP(L,Q)
Calculates two bisecting lines based on the intersection of
two straight lines L1 and L2.
Parameters
• L1, L2: Line variable or a function that results in line data
• P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in
a scalar value
- 0: θ component returns the median between L1 and
L2.
- 1: returns the line perpendicular to the median when 0
is specified
Return value
Line data
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if L1 and L2 are parallel.
• An error occurs if the value of P is neither 0 nor 1.
Examples
@Line1 = AsLine(30, 60)
@Line2 = AsLine(20, 120)
@line = MidLine(@Line1, @Line2, 0) … a
@line = MidLine(@Line1, @Line2, 1) … b
Example explanation
@distance is set to a value of -1.5.
Q
MidLine(L1,L2,P): Bisector between 2 lines
L
Example explanation
a The value is θ = 90° and ρ = 28.868.
b The value is θ =0° and ρ =10.
MidLine(L1,L2,0)
L1
LnDistXY(L, Q): Intersection in respect to
perpendicular
Y
MidLine(L1,L2,1)
Calculates the intersecting point between the line L and
the perpendicular line from X,Y position Q.
Parameters
• L: Line variable or a function that results in line data
• Q: Position variable or a function that results in position
data
Return value
Position data (Unit: pixels)
Example
@point = AsPoint(10.10)
@line = AsLine(5 * Sqrt(2), 45)
@intersect = LnDistXY(@line, @point)
Example explanation
@intersect is set to a value of (5, 5).
L
LnDistXY(L,Q)
Q
3-44 CV-X UM_E
0
X
L2
Operation Function List
Rotate(Q1,Q2,D,P): Rotate
Calculates the point Q halfway between X,Y positions Q1
and Q2.
Rotates X,Y position Q1 about center Q2 for D degrees
and scaled by P.
Parameters
Q1, Q2: position variable or a function that results in
position data
Parameters
• Q1: Coordinate of rotation source. Position variable or a
function that results in position data
• Q2: Rotation center. Position variable or a function that
results in position data
• D: Rotation angle. Constant, scalar variable, or a
function that results in a scalar value. The clockwise
Return value
Position data (Unit: pixels)
Example
@point0 = AsPoint(90.20)
@point1 = AsPoint(10.80)
@mid =MidXY(@point0, @point1)
Example explanation
@mid is set to a value of (50, 50).
X
0
Q1
Q
direction is positive.
• P: Scaling factor. Constant, scalar variable, or a function
that results in a scalar value
Return value
Position data (Unit: pixels)
Example
@before = AsPoint(15,15)
@origin = AsPoint(10,10)
@after = Rotate(@before, @origin, 90, 2)
Q2
Y
OuterProd(Q1, Q2): Outer product of vectors
Example explanation
@after is set to a value of (0, 20).
(0,0)
X
Calculates the outer product of the 2D vector consisting of
Q1 and Q2.
Q2 (rotation center)
Parameters
Q1, Q2: Position variable or a function that results in
position data
Return value
Scalar value
D˚
P times
Y
SrcQ (Before conversion)
DstQ (After conversion)
Example
@vector1=AsPoint(1,1)
@vector2=AsPoint(2,2)
@result = OuterProd( @vector1, @vector2 )
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 0 (@vector1.X * @vector2.Y @vector1.Y * @vector2.X).
CV-X UM_E
3-45
Mathematical Operations
MidXY(Q1, Q2): Midpoint of 2 points
Operation Function List
Mathematical Operations
RotCenter(Q1,Q2,D): Center of rotation
SubVector(Q1, Q2): Subtract vectors
Calculates the X,Y position rotation center when Q1 is
rotated to Q2 by D degrees.
Calculates the vector by subtracting position vector Q2
from position vector Q1.
Parameters
• Q1: Position variable or a function that results in position
data (coordinate before rotation).
• Q2: Position variable or a function that results in position
data (coordinate after rotation).
• D: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in
a scalar value in degrees (°) (rotation angle from Q1 to
Parameters
Q1, Q2: Position variable or a function that results in
position data
Q2)
Return value
Position data
Causes of errors
• An error occurs if Q1 and Q2 are the same value.
• An error occurs if D is a multiple of 360 degrees (-360, 0,
360, 720, ..., etc.).
Example
@origin=RotCenter(@before, @after, 30)
Example explanation
Assigns to @origin the rotation center value used for
rotating the point of @before 30 degrees to move it to the
coordinate of @after.
Reference
The rotation angle in the direction from X axis to Y
axis is positive. Clockwise is positive when using the
left hand system, counterclockwise is positive when
using the right hand system.
Left hand axis system
0 when D is positive
Left hand axis system
X
0 when D is negative
Rotation center
Q1
-D
Q1
Q2
D
Q2
Rotation center
Y
Y
Y
Rotation center
D
Q1
Q2
0 Right hand axis system
when D is positive
3-46 CV-X UM_E
X
X
Return value
Position data
Example
@vector1=AsPoint(1,1)
@vector2=AsPoint(2,2)
@result = SubVector( @vector1, @vector2 )
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of (-1,-1).
Operation Function List
VMidLine(Q1,Q2): Bisector between 2 points
CX(C): Center X coordinate of circular variable
Calculates the perpendicular line that bisects the line
passing through X,Y positions Q1 and Q2.
Take out the X coordinate of the circle center from the
circular variable.
Parameters
Q1, Q2: position variable or a function that results in
position data
Parameters
C: Circle variable or a function that results in circle data
Causes of errors
An error occurs if Q1 and Q2 are the same coordinates.
Example
@point0 = AsPoint(10*Sqrt(3),0)
@point1 = AsPoint(0,10)
@line =VMidLine(@point0, @point1)
Example
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@x = CX(@circle)
Example explanation
@x is set to a value of 10.
Reference
Example explanation
@line.T is set to a value of -30°, and @line.RH to 5.
X
0
Q1
Q2
VMidLine(Q1,Q2)
Y
AsCircle(P1, P2, P3): Define circle from single X,Y
and radius values
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@x = @circle.CX
CY(C): Center Y coordinate of circular variable
Take out the Y coordinate of the circle center from the
circular variable.
Parameters
C: Circle variable or a function that results in circle data
Return value
Scalar value
Put circular variable by assigning P1 as the X center
coordinate of a circle, P2 to as Y center coordinate, and P3
as radius R.
Example
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
Parameters
• P1: X center coordinate (constant, scalar variable, or a
function that results in a scalar value)
• P2: Y center coordinate (constant, scalar variable, or a
function that results in a scalar value)
• P3: Radius value (constant, scalar variable, or a function
that results in a scalar value)
Example explanation
@y is set to a value of 20.
@y = CY(@circle)
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@y = @circle.CY
Return value
Circle data
Example
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
CV-X UM_E
3-47
Mathematical Operations
Return value
Line data
Return value
Scalar value
Operation Function List
CR(C): Radius of circular variable
C.CY: Center Y coordinate of circular variable
Take out the circle radius from the circular variable.
Parameters
None
Parameters
C: Circle variable or a function that results in circle data
Return value
Scalar value
Mathematical Operations
Example
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@radius = CR(@circle)
Example explanation
@radius is set to a value of 30.
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@radius = @circle.CR
Return value
Scalar value
Example: Only center Y coordinate is individually
updated.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@circle.CY = 40 'Update of center Y coordinate
@y = @circle.CY
Example explanation
@y is set to a value of 40.
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@circle.CY = 40
@y = CY(@circle) 'When CY(C) is used
C.CX: Center X coordinate of circular variable
C.CR: Radius of circular variable
Parameters
None
Parameters
None
Return value
Scalar value
Example: Only center X coordinate is individually
updated.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@circle.CX = 40 'Update of center X coordinate
@x = @circle.CX
Example explanation
@x is set to a value of 40.
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@circle.CX = 40
@x = CX(@circle) 'When CX(C) is used
3-48 CV-X UM_E
Return value
Scalar value
Example: Only radius value is individually updated.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@circle.CR = 40 'Update of radius value
@radius = @circle.CR
Example explanation
@radius is set to a value of 40.
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@circle = AsCircle(10, 20, 30)
@circle.CR = 40
@radius = CR(@circle) 'When CR(C) is used
Operation Function List
AsLine(P,D): Define line from point (X,Y) and
angle values
When a line is expressed as xcosD + ysinD = P, input the
linear variable.
Gets the clockwise angle which has the 3 o'clock direction
of the perpendicular line (drawn from the origin (0,0) to the
line) as 0°.
Parameters
None
Example: Only θ is individually updated.
@line = AsLine(10, 45)
@line.T = 30 'Update of θ
@theta = @line.T
Example explanation
@theta is set to a value of 30.
Return value
Line data
Example
@line = AsLine(10, 45)
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@line = AsLine(10, 45)
@line.T = 30
@theta = T(@line) 'When T(L) is used
T(L): Angle of linear variable
Gets the clockwise angle which has the 3 o'clock direction
of the perpendicular line (drawn from the origin (0,0) to the
line) as 0°.
Parameters
T (variable name): θ : 64-bit floating point number
Example
@line = AsLine(10, 45)
@theta = T(@line)
Example explanation
@theta is set to a value of 45.
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@line = AsLine(10, 45)
@theta = @line.T
L.RH: Distance from origin of linear variable
Gets the perpendicular line length (pixel) drawn from the
origin (0, 0) to the line.
Parameters
None
Example: Only ρ is individually updated.
@line = AsLine(10,45)
@line.RH = 30 'Update of ρ
@rho = @line.RH
Example explanation
@rho is set to a value of 30.
Reference
RH(L): Distance from origin of linear variable
Gets the perpendicular line length (pixel) drawn from the
origin (0, 0) to the line.
Parameters
L: Line variable or a function that results in line data
Example
@line = AsLine(10,45)
@rho = RH(@line)
Example explanation
@rho is set to a value of 10.
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@line = AsLine(10, 45)
@rho = @line.RH
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@line = AsLine(10,45)
@line.RH = 30
@rho = RH(@line) 'When RH(L) is used
AsPoint(P1,P2): Define point from single X and Y
values
Puts position variables using P1 as the X coordinate and
P2 as the Y coordinate.
Parameters
• P1: X-coordinate value (constant, scalar variable, or a
function that results in a scalar value)
• P2: Y-coordinate value (constant, scalar variable, or a
function that results in a scalar value)
Return value
Position data
Example
@point = AsPoint(10,20)
CV-X UM_E
3-49
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• P: Distance between origin and line (Constant, scalar
variable, or a function that results in a scalar value)
• D: Clockwise angle formed between the perpendicular
line (drawn from the origin to the line) and the 3 o'clock
direction (unit in °) (Constant, scalar variable, or a
function that results in a scalar value)
L.T: Angle of linear variable
Operation Function List
X(Q): X coordinate of position variable
Q.X: X coordinate of position variable
Gets the X coordinate value from the position variable.
Parameters
None
Parameters
Q: position variable or a function that results in position
data
Mathematical Operations
Example
@point = AsPoint(1,2)
@x = X(@point)
Example explanation
@x is set to a value of 1.
Reference
Example explanation
@x is set to a value of 10.
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@point = AsPoint(1, 2)
@x = @point.X
Y(Q): Y coordinate of position variable
Gets the Y coordinate value from the position variable.
Parameters
Q: position variable or a function that results in position
data
Example
@point = AsPoint(1,2)
@y = Y(@point)
Example explanation
@y is set to a value of 2.
Reference
Example: Only X coordinate is individually updated.
@point = AsPoint(1, 2)
@point.X = 10 'Update of X coordinate
@x = @point.X
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@point = AsPoint(1,2)
@y = @point.Y
3-50 CV-X UM_E
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@point = AsPoint(1,2)
@point.X = 10
@x = X(@point) 'When X(Q) is used
Q.Y: Y coordinate of position variable
Parameters
None
Example: Only Y coordinate is individually updated.
@point = AsPoint(1,2)
@point.Y = 10 'Update of Y coordinate
@y = @point.Y
Example explanation
@y is set to a value of 10.
Reference
This example produces the same results as these
operations.
@point = AsPoint(1,2)
@point.Y = 10
@y = Y(@point) 'When Y(Q) is used
Operation Function List
3D Geometric functions
I2Plane(A1,A2,P,V): Line of Intersection of 2 Planes
Finds the line of intersection of two planes.
AddVector3D(Q1,Q2): Add 3D Vectors
Finds the sum of 3D vectors.
Return value
3D position value
Example
@P1 = As3DPoint(10,10,10)
@P2 = As3DPoint(20,20,20)
@P = AddVector3D(@P1,@P2)
Example explanation
@P is set to a value of (30,30,30).
Dist3D(Q1,Q2): Distance Between Two 3D-Coordinate
Points
Finds the distance between 3D coordinates Q1 and Q2.
Parameters
Q1, Q2: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a
3D position value.
Return value
Scalar value (Unit: mm)
Example
@Q1 = As3DPoint(TX1,TY1,TZ1)
@Q2 = As3DPoint(TX2,TY2,TZ2)
@distance = Dist3D(@Q1,@Q2)
Example explanation
The distance between the two points is returned to
@distance.
z
Q2
Q1
x
y
Return value
Scalar value (0 on success)
If the error condition is met, a return value will not be
returned as the function will terminate abnormally.
Causes of errors
The function terminates abnormally if the normal vector of
the 2 planes are in parallel.
Reference
As the plane formula is expressed as z=ax+by+c, a
plane with a normal line perpendicular to the Z axis
cannot be calculated.
ILine3DPlane(P,V,A): Intersection of 3D Line and
Plane
Finds the intersection of a 3D line and a plane. The 3D line
passes through 3D position P and is shown as a straight
line with direction vector V.
Parameters
• P: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
• V: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
• A: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane value.
Return value
3D position value
Causes of errors
• The function terminates abnormally if the direction
vector of the 3D line is perpendicular to the normal
vector of the plane.
• The function terminates abnormally if direction vector V
is (0,0,0).
Reference
As the plane formula is expressed as z=ax+by+c, a
plane with a normal line perpendicular to the Z axis
cannot be calculated.
CV-X UM_E
3-51
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
Q1, Q2: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a
3D position value.
Parameters
• A1, A2: A plane variable or a function that returns a
plane value.
• P: A 3D position variable (a point on the line of
intersection obtained will be stored).
• V: A 3D position variable (the direction vector of the line
of intersection obtained will be stored).
Operation Function List
Line3DDist(P,V,Q): Distance Between Point and
3D Line
Line3DDistXYZ(P,V,Q): Foot of Perpendicular from
Point to 3D Line
Finds the distance between a point and a 3D line (straight
line in directional vector V passing through 3D position P).
Finds the coordinates (XYZ) for the foot of a perpendicular
line dropped from a point to a 3D line (straight line in
directional vector V passing through 3D position P).
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• P: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
• V: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
• Q: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
position value.
Return value
Scalar value (Unit: mm)
Causes of errors
The function terminates abnormally if the direction vector V
is (0,0,0).
Example
@P = As3DPoint(TX1,TY1,TZ1)
@V = As3DPoint(TX2,TY2,TZ2)
@Q = As3DPoint(TX3,TY3,TZ3)
@distance = Line3DDist(@P,@V,@Q)
Example explanation
The distance from point Q to the 3D line is returned to
@distance.
z
Parameters
• P: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
• V: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
• Q: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
V
Return value
3D position value
Causes of errors
The function terminates abnormally if the direction vector V
is (0,0,0).
Example
@P0 = As3DPoint(TX1,TY1,TZ1)
@V = As3DPoint(TX2,TY2,TZ2)
@Q = As3DPoint(TX3,TY3,TZ3)
@p1 = Line3DDistXYZ(@P0,@V,@Q)
Example explanation
The coordinates of the perpendicular line and straight line
intersection P1 are returned to @p1.
z
V
Q
Q
distance
P1
x
y
x
P
y
3-52 CV-X UM_E
P0
Operation Function List
LnLn3DDist(P1,V1,P2,V2): Distance Between Two
3D Lines
Finds the distance between two 3D lines (straight lines in
directional vector V passing through 3D position P).
Finds the angle between two planes.
Parameters
A1, A2: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane
value.
Return value
Scalar value (Unit: degrees)
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• P1: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
• V1: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
• P2: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
Plane2Angle(A1,A2): Angle Between Two Planes
A2
• V2: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
A1
Return value
Scalar value (Unit: mm)
Causes of errors
The function terminates abnormally if direction vector V1 or
V2 is (0,0,0).
Example
@P1 = As3DPoint(TX1,TY1,TZ1)
@V1 = As3DPoint(TX3,TY3,TZ3)
@P2 = As3DPoint(TX2,TY2,TZ2)
@V2 = As3DPoint(TX4,TY4,TZ4)
@distance = LnLn3DDist(@P1,@V1,@P2,@V2)
Example explanation
The distance between the two lines is returned to
@distance.
PlanePassPt(A,Q): Parallel Movement of Plane
The plane A is shifted in a parallel fashion to find a plane Q
that passes through the specified point.
Parameters
• A: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane
value.
• Q: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
Return value
Plane value.
z
P1
Q
V1
P2
y
distance
x
V2
A
CV-X UM_E
3-53
Operation Function List
PlDist(A,Q): Distance Between Plane and Point
Finds the distance between plane A and 3D coordinate Q.
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• A: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane
value.
• Q: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
Return value
Scalar value (Unit: mm)
PlDistXYZ(A,Q): Foot of Perpendicular from Point
to Plane
Finds the coordinates (XYZ) for the foot of a perpendicular
line dropped from a point to a plane.
Parameters
• A: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane
value.
• Q: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
Return value
3D position value
Example
@Q = As3DPoint(TX,TY,TZ)
@A = AsPlane(P1,P2,P3)
@distance = PlDist(@A, @Q)
Example explanation
The distance from plane A to point Q is returned to
@distance.
Q
Example
@Q = As3DPoint(TX,TY,TZ)
@A = AsPlane(P1,P2,P3)
@p = PlDistXYZ(@A,@Q)
Example explanation
The 3D coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular line
dropped from point Q to plane A are returned to @p.
As the plane formula is expressed as z=ax+by+c, a
plane with a normal line perpendicular to the Z axis
cannot be calculated.
Reference
distance
Q
z
A
A
PlDistP(A,Q): Distance Between Plane and Point
(Signed)
Finds the distance between plane A and 3D coordinate Q,
and finds the result with a sign (PIDist output with sign
where the normal vector direction is positive).
Parameters
• A: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane
value.
• Q: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value.
Return value
Scalar value (Unit: mm)
A positive value is returned when point Q is closer on the
direction of the positive Z axis than plane A.
Q1
z
A
Q2
3-54 CV-X UM_E
y
SubVector3D(Q1,Q2): Subtract 3D Vectors
Finds the subtracted value of 3D vectors.
Parameters
Q1, Q2: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a
3D position value.
Return value
3D position value
Example
@P1 = As3DPoint(20,20,20)
Example explanation
@P is set to a value of (10,10,10).
x
distance<0
x
@P2 = As3DPoint(10,10,10)
@P = SubVector3D(@P1,@P2)
distance>0
y
P
Operation Function List
As3DPoint(P1,P2,P3): Define 3D Position from
Single X, Y, Z Values
Substitutes P1, P2 and P3 into TX, TY and TZ of a 3D
position variable.
Return value
3D position value
This function obtains the Y coordinate from a 3D position
variable.
Parameters
T: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value
Example
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
@ty = TY(@p)
Example explanation
@ty is set to a value of 20.
Reference
Example
@P = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
Example explanation
This has the same result as the following calculations:
@P.TX = 10
@P.TY = 20
@P.TZ = 30
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
@ty = @p.TY
TZ(T): Z Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
This function obtains the Z coordinate from a 3D position
variable.
Parameters
T: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value
TX(T): X Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
This function obtains the X coordinate from a 3D position
variable.
Example
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
@tz = TZ(@p)
Parameters
T: A 3D position variable or a function that returns a 3D
position value
Example explanation
@tz is set to a value of 30.
Example
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
@tx = TX(@p)
Example explanation
@tx is set to a value of 10.
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
@tx = @p.TX
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = As3DPoint(10,20,30)
@tz = @p.TZ
T.TX: X Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Parameters
None
Example: Update only X coordinate individually
@p = As3DPoint(1,2,3)
@p.TX = 10 'X coordinate update
@tx = @p.TX
Example explanation
@tx is set to a value of 10.
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = As3DPoint(1,2,3)
@p.TX = 10
@tx = TX(@p) 'if TX(T) is used
CV-X UM_E
3-55
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
• P1: value for TX (a constant, a scalar variable, or a
function that returns a scalar value)
• P2: value for TY (a constant, a scalar variable, or a
function that returns a scalar value)
• P3: value for TZ (a constant, a scalar variable, or a
function that returns a scalar value)
TY(T): Y Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Operation Function List
T.TY: Y Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Parameters
None
Substitutes P1, P2 and P3 into A, B and C of a Plane
variable.
Mathematical Operations
Example: Update only Y coordinate individually
@p = As3DPoint(1,2,3)
@p.TY = 20 'Y coordinate update
@ty = @p.TY
Example explanation
@ty is set to a value of 20.
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = As3DPoint(1,2,3)
@p.TY = 20
@ty = TY(@p) 'if TY(T) is used
T.TZ: Z Coordinate of 3D Position Variable
Parameters
None
Example: Update only Z coordinate individually
@p = As3DPoint(1,2,3)
@p.TZ = 30 'Z coordinate update
@tz = @p.TZ
Example explanation
@tz is set to a value of 30.
Reference
AsPlane(P1,P2,P3): Define Plane from A, B and C
Values
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = As3DPoint(1,2,3)
@p.TZ = 30
@tz = TZ(@p) 'if TZ(T) is used
Parameters
• P1: value for A (a constant, a scalar variable, or a
function that returns a scalar value)
• P2: value for B (a constant, a scalar variable, or a
function that returns a scalar value)
• P3: value for C (a constant, a scalar variable, or a
function that returns a scalar value)
Return value
Plane value
Example
@P = AsPlane(10, 20, 30)
Example explanation
This has the same result as the following calculations:
@P.PPA = 10
@P.PPB = 20
@P.PPC = 30
PPA(P): X Slope of Plane Variable
This function obtains the X slope from a plane variable.
Parameters
P: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane value.
Example
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@ppa = PPA(@p)
Example explanation
@ppa is set to a value of 10.
Reference
3-56 CV-X UM_E
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@ppa = @p.PPA
Operation Function List
PPB(P): Y Slope of Plane Variable
P.PPA: X Slope of Plane Variable
This function obtains the Y slope from a plane variable.
Parameters
None
Parameters
P: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane value.
Example explanation
@ppb is set to a value of 20.
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@ppb = @p.PPB
PPC(P): Z Intercept of Plane Variable
Example explanation
@ppa is set to a value of 10.
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPA = 10
@ppa = PPA(@p) 'if PPA(P) is used
P.PPB: Y Slope of Plane Variable
This function obtains the Z intercept from a plane variable.
Parameters
P: A plane variable or a function that returns a plane value.
Parameters
None
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@ppc = PPC(@p)
Example: Update only Y slope individually
@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPB = 20 'Y slope update
@ppb = @p.PPB
Example explanation
@ppc is set to a value of 30.
Example explanation
@ppb is set to a value of 20.
Example
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@ppc = @p.PPC
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPB = 20
@ppb = PPB(@p) 'if PPB(P) is used
P.PPC: Z Intercept of Plane Variable
Parameters
None
Example: Update only Z intercept individually
@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPC = 30 'Z intercept update
@ppc = @p.PPC
Example explanation
@ppc is set to a value of 30.
Reference
This has the same result as the following calculation:
@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPC = 30
@ppc = PPC(@p) 'if PPC(P) is used
CV-X UM_E
3-57
Mathematical Operations
Example
@p = AsPlane(10,20,30)
@ppb = PPB(@p)
Example: Update only X slope individually
@p = AsPlane(1,2,3)
@p.PPA = 10 'X slope update
@ppa = @p.PPA
Operation Function List
Calendar functions
ShiftDay(P): No. Day(s) offset
Adds or subtracts the number of days (P) to the current
month, day and year of the controller, and returns the
"day".
Mathematical Operations
Parameters
P: Number of days to be added or subtracted (constant,
scalar variable, or a function that results in a scalar value)
ShiftYear(P): No. Year(s) offset
Adds or subtracts the number of days (P) to the current
month, day and year of the controller, and returns the
"year".
Parameters
P: Number of days to be added or subtracted (constant,
scalar variable, or a function that results in a scalar value)
Return value
Scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the number of days P exceeds 9,999.
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the number of days P exceeds 9,999.
Example
@year = ShiftYear(-365)
Example
@day = ShiftDay(-1)
Example explanation
Returns the year of the date 365 days prior to the current
set date.
Example explanation
Returns the day one day prior to the current date set.
ShiftMonth(P): No. Month(s) offset
Adds or subtracts the number of days (P) to the current
month, day and year of the controller, and returns the
"month".
Parameters
P: Number of days to be added or subtracted. Constant,
scalar variable, or a function that results in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the number of days P exceeds 9,999.
Example
@month = ShiftMonth(10)
Example explanation
Returns the month of the date 10 days after the current
date set.
3-58 CV-X UM_E
Operation Function List
BIT functions
B_And(P1, P2): Multiplication
Parameters
Calculates the logical sum of the BIT's of P1 and P2.
• The function converts P1 and P2 from a scalar value to a
4-byte integer (32 BIT's) and returns the calculated
result as a scalar value.
• If the value specified exceeds the maximum for an
unsigned 4-byte integer (= 4294967295 = 32nd power
of 2 - 1), the lower 4-bytes are used and all bits above
that are ignored.
Parameters
P1, P2: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
P1, P2: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@param1 = 10.1
@param2 = 3.14
@result = B_Or(@param1, @param2)
Example
@param1 = 10.1
@param2 = 3.14
@result = B_And(@param1, @param2)
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 2.
B_Not(P): Inverse
Calculates the logical inverse of the BIT's of P.
• The function converts P from a scalar value to a 4-byte
integer (32 BIT's) and returns the calculated result as a
scalar value.
• If the value specified exceeds the maximum for an
unsigned 4-byte integer (= 4294967295 = 32nd power
of 2 - 1), the lower 4-bytes are used and all bits above
that are ignored.
Parameters
P: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results in a
scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@param = 10.1
@result = B_And(B_Not(@param), 15)
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 5.
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 11.
B_Xor(P1, P2): Exclusive Addition
Calculates the exclusive logical OR of the BIT's of P1 and
P2.
• The function converts P1 and P2 from a scalar value to a
4-byte integer (32 BIT's) and returns the calculated
result as a scalar value.
• If the value specified exceeds the maximum for an
unsigned 4-byte integer (= 4294967295 = 32nd power
of 2 - 1), the lower 4-bytes are used and all bits above
that are ignored.
Parameters
P1, P2: Constant, scalar variable, or a function that results
in a scalar value
Return value
Scalar value
Example
@param1 = 10.1
@param2 = 3.14
@result = B_Xor(@param1, @param2)
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 9.
CV-X UM_E
3-59
Mathematical Operations
Calculates the logical product of the BIT's of P1 and P2.
• The function converts P1 and P2 from a scalar value to a
4-byte integer (32 BIT's) and returns the calculated
result as a scalar value.
• If the value specified exceeds the maximum for an
unsigned 4-byte integer (= 4294967295 = 32nd power
of 2 - 1), the lower 4-bytes are used and all bits above
that are ignored.
B_Or(P1, P2): Addition
Operation Function List
Bind(P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7): Bind Bits
Binds the bits from P0 to P7 into an 8-bit value (P0: MSB,
P7: LSB).
Parameters
P0 - P7: Constant, scalar variable, or function that returns a
scalar value
Mathematical Operations
Return value
Scalar value
Causes of errors
An error occurs if the value of P0 to P7 is neither a 0 nor a
1.
Example
@result = Bind(0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1)
Example explanation
@result is set to a value of 85.
Other
ANS0: Answer0
Scalar variable defined in advance. It is equivalent to the
result data of the calculation tool.
• ANS has to be referenced in uppercase letters.
• ANS must be referred as left-hand side value.
Example
ANS0 = T101.RSLT.X[JGL]:AB - T100.RSLT.X[JGL]:AB
Example explanation
Puts the difference between the X coordinate measured by
the tool whose tool ID is 101 and the X coordinate
measured by the tool whose tool ID is 100 into ANS0.
ANS1: Answer1
Scalar variable defined in advance. It is equivalent to the
result data of the calculation tool.
• ANS has to be referenced in uppercase letters.
• ANS must be referred as left-hand side value.
Example
ANS1 = T101.RSLT.Y[JGL]:AB - T100.RSLT.Y[JGL]:AB
Example explanation
Puts the difference between the Y coordinate measured by
the tool whose tool ID is 101 and the Y coordinate
measured by the tool whose tool ID is 100 into ANS1.
ANS2: Answer2
Scalar variable defined in advance. It is equivalent to the
result data of the calculation tool.
• ANS has to be referenced in uppercase letters.
• ANS must be referred as left-hand side value.
Example
ANS2 = T101.RSLT.T[JGL]:AB - T100.RSLT.T[JGL]:AB
Example explanation
Puts the difference between the angle measured by the
tool whose tool ID is 101 and the angle measured by the
tool whose tool ID is 100 into ANS2.
3-60 CV-X UM_E
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Operation symbol/output item comparison table
(Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Reference
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Common
EXAC
Execution Count
10-digit integer
-
×
-
OKAC
OK Count
10-digit integer
-
×
-
NGAC
NG Count
10-digit integer
-
×
-
TERR
Execution Errors
1-digit integer
-
×
-
TEID
Execution Error ID
7-digit integer
-
×
-
EXTM
Execution time
7-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
Auto-Teach Inspection
integer11 digits
VOL
Defect volume
MS,JG,HL
(Page 2-263)
AR
Area
MS
8-digit integer
Auto-Teach Inspection
(Pattern Search) (Page 2AGRDE
Match %
MS,JG,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
371)
RGNJG
Judgment value for each region
1-digit integer
Auto-Teach Inspection
(ShapeTrax2) (Page 2-367) For the defect volume and match %, the label value is multiplied by 1000000 and added to the item ID value,
Auto-Teach Inspection
and the resulting value is specified in the DR/DW command parameters.
(PatternTrax) (Page 2-375)
Example: When accessing defect volume (item ID: 2447) label 5 judgment condition
Judged with Quality Learning The specified parameter is 2447 + 5 * 1000000 = 5002447
(Page 2-3)
Detect Flaw with Quality
Learning (Page 2-41)
-
v
2447
-
v
-
-
v
2474
-
v
-
AR
Area (Page 2-267)
Judged with Black/WhiteSpecific Area (Page 2-13)
Judged with ColorSpecific Area (Page 2-16)
Detect Flaw with Black &
White Area (Page 2-61)
Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
105
Pattern Search (Page 2-270)
Judged with Pattern Match
(Shading) (Page 2-19)
Pattern Match (Shading)
Position
(Alignment) (Page 2-84)
Pattern Match (Shading)
Position
(Measurements &
Dimensions)
(Page 2-176)
Pattern Match (Shading)
Count
(Page 2-212)
Position Adjustment with
Pattern Match (Shading)
(Page 2-388)
N
Quantity
MS,JG,HL,LL
2-digit integer
-
×
90
X
Position X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
Y
Position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
XY
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T
Angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
Position XY / Angle (Cannot be
used in calculation.)
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
Match %
MS,JG,HL,LL
2-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
89
CV-X UM_E
3-61
C
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
-
Mathematical Operations
• ST (Reference value): Measured value for the reference image calculated during setting.
• MS (Measured value): The measured result data from the unit that is output.
• JG (Judgment value): Judgment result (OK=0, NG=1).
• AB (Absolute measured value): Measured value before specifying the origin. When position adjustment is used, it is
the value before adjustment.
• EC (Encoder Pulse Count): When using the LJ-V Series head for continuous capture, this value is output as the
measurement result in the coordinate system reflecting the encoder value.
• HL (Upper limit): The upper limit used for judgment.
• LL (Lower limit): The lower limit used for judgment.
• Items that can use label specification are only MS (measured value) and AB (absolute measured value).
• When output is set, the selection is automatically set to [MS]. Additionally, items that have decimal number digit stated
in the [Format of measurement data] column are handled as decimal data by the PLC-Link, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET,
and EtherCAT. For details, see [Decimal Point] for the applicable communication method in "Chapter 6 Communication
control" (Page 6-1).
• For an item with the symbol * shown at the end, the measured value correction function is available. For more details,
refer to "Correcting individual measurement results (Measured Value Correction)" (Page 9-3).
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Mathematical Operations
PatternTrax (Page 2-286)
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Quantity
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
Position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
Angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
Position XY / Angle (Cannot be
used in calculation.)
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
Match %
MS,JG,HL,LL
2-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
89
Scale
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1759
Feature Pixel Count 1
MS,JG,HL,LL
6-digit integer
-
v
9458
Feature Pixel Count 2
MS,JG,HL,LL
6-digit integer
-
v
9459
N
Quantity
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
X
Position X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
Y
Position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
XY
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T
Angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
Position XY / Angle (Cannot be
used in calculation.)
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
C
Match %
MS,JG,HL,LL
2-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
89
S
Scale
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1759
N
Quantity
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
X
Position X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
82
Y
Position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
83
XY
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T
Angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
XYT
Position XY / Angle (Cannot be
used in calculation.)
MS, AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
C
Match %
MS,JG,HL,LL
2-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
89
No. of edges
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
Position X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
Position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
Angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
Distance
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
-
Intensity
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
Edge Position (Page 2N
289)
X
Edge Position (Alignment)
Y
(Page 2-92)
Edge Position to
XY
Circumference (Page 2T
106)
P
Edge Position
(Measurements &
I
Dimensions) (Page 2-184)
Edge Count (Page 2-206)
Position Adjustment with
Edge (Page 2-396)
3-62 CV-X UM_E
Format of measurement data
Position X
ShapeTrax3 (Page 2-274)
N
Judged with Pattern Match
X
(Profile) (Page 2-23)
Pattern Match (Profile)
Y
Position
XY
(Alignment) (Page 2-88)
Pattern Match (Profile)
T
Position
(Measurements &
Dimensions)
(Page 2-180)
C
Pattern Match (Profile) Count
S
(Page 2-216)
Position Adjustment with
QZ1
Pattern Match (Profile) (Page
QZ2
2-392)
ShapeTrax2 (Page 2-281)
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Edge Angle (Page 2-294) T
Edge Slope (Page 2-102) N
X
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
84
Number of Detected Edges
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
Center X
ST,MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y
Center Y
ST,MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY
Center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X1
Position 1 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Position 1 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Position 1 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P1
Distance 1
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
I1
Intensity 1
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X2
Position 2 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y2
Position 2 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY2
Position 2 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P2
Distance 2
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
I2
Intensity 2
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
N
No. of pairs
MS
1-digit integer
-
×
-
W*
Edge width
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
97
X1
Position 1 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Position 1 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Position 1 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
T1
Angle 1
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P1
Distance 1
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
I1
Intensity 1
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X2
Position 2 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y2
Position 2 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY2
Position 2 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
T2
Angle 2
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P2
Distance 2
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
I2
Intensity 2
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
Edge Pitch (Page 2-300) N
Center Pitch (Page 2-148) WH
Gap Pitch (Page 2-152)
WL
No. of pitches
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
Pitch (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
99
Pitch (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
100
WA
Pitch (Ave)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
W*
Pitch
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
97
X1
Position 1 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
Y1
Position 1 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
XY1
Position 1 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T1
Angle 1
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
P1
Distance 1
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
-
I1
Intensity 1
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
X2
Position 2 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
Y2
Position 2 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
XY2
Position 2 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T2
Angle 2
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
P2
Distance 2
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
-
I2
Intensity 2
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CV-X UM_E
3-63
Mathematical Operations
Edge width (Page 2-297)
Edge width (Page 2-136)
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Edge Pairs (Page 2-303)
Gap Pitch (Edge Pairs)
(Page 2-155)
Mathematical Operations
Defect (Page 2-306)
Detect Flaw with Total
Defect Area (Page 2-51)
Detect Flaw with Each
Defect (Page 2-56)
Blob (Page 2-310)
Cluster Position
(Alignment)
(Page 2-114)
Gravity Center of Cluster
(Measurements &
Dimensions)
(Page 2-192)
Cluster Count (Page 2201)
Position Adjustment with
Gravity Center of Cluster
(Page 2-407)
3-64 CV-X UM_E
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
N
No. of pairs
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
WH
Pair width (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
99
WL
Pair width (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
100
WA
Pair width (Ave)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
W*
Pair width
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
97
X1
Position 1 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
Y1
Position 1 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
XY1
Position 1 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T1
Angle 1
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
P1
Distance 1
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
-
I1
Intensity 1
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
X2
Position 2 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
Y2
Position 2 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
XY2
Position 2 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T2
Angle 2
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
P2
Distance 2
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
-
I2
Intensity 2
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
SL
Detected defect level
MS
3-digit integer
-
×
-
TSA
Total defect area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
374
X
Position X
ST,MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y
Position Y
ST,MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
N
No. of groups
MS,JG,HL,LL
2-digit integer
-
×
90
GSA
Defect area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
v
377
GX
Center of gravity X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
378
GY
Center of gravity Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
379
GXY
Center of gravity XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
N
No. of labels
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
X
Center of gravity X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
XH
Center of gravity X (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
294
XL
Center of gravity X (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
295
Y
Center of gravity Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
YH
Center of gravity Y (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
296
YL
Center of gravity Y (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
297
XY
Center of gravity XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T
Major axis angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
TH
Major axis angle (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
298
TL
Major axis angle (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
299
Center of Gravity XY / Major Axis MS
Angle (Cannot be used in
calculation.)
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
AR
Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
v
105
ARH
Area (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
306
ARL
Area (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
307
FX
Feret diameter X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
106
FXH
Feret diameter X (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
300
FXL
Feret diameter X (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
301
FY
Feret diameter Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
107
FYH
Feret diameter Y (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
302
FYL
Feret diameter Y (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
303
CL
Perimeter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
8-digit integer
L
v
108
CLH
Perimeter (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
8-digit integer
L
×
308
CLL
Perimeter (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
8-digit integer
L
×
309
CD
Roundness
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
109
CDH
Roundness (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
304
CDL
Roundness (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
305
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
(continued)
Blob (Page 2-310)
Cluster Position
(Alignment)
(Page 2-114)
Gravity Center of Cluster
(Measurements &
Dimensions)
(Page 2-192)
Cluster Count (Page 2201)
Position Adjustment with
Gravity Center of Cluster
(Page 2-407)
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
MAA
Major axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
1890
MAAH
Major axis (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1896
MAAL
Major axis (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1897
MIA
Minor axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
1891
MIAH
Minor axis (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1898
MIAL
Minor axis (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1899
RTO
Aspect ratio
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1892
RTOH
Aspect ratio (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1900
RTOL
Aspect ratio (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1901
MAA2
Equivalent Oval Major axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
1893
MAA2H
Equivalent Oval Major axis (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1902
MAA2L
Equivalent Oval Major axis (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1903
MIA2
Equivalent Oval Minor axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
1894
MIA2H
Equivalent Oval Minor axis (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1904
MIA2L
Equivalent Oval Minor axis (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1905
RTO2
Equivalent Oval Aspect ratio
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1895
RTO2H
Equivalent Oval Aspect ratio (Max) MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1906
RTO2L
Equivalent Oval Aspect ratio (Min) MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1907
Detected Blob Maximum Intensity MS
Difference
8-digit integer
-
×
-
Blob Reference Intensity
MS
8-digit integer
-
×
-
Blob Total Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
2446
Number of Blobs Result
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
ST,MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
Grayscale Blob (Page 2-314) DIL
Detect Flaw with Contrast
with Background (Page 2-64)
BLV
Dark or Bright Cluster
Position (Page 2-119)
TAR
Dark or Bright Cluster
N
Position (Page 2-196)
Dark or Bright Cluster Count XY
(Page 2-220)
Position Adjustment with Dark X
or Bright Cluster (Page 2XH
412)
Blob Center of Gravity XY Result MS,AB,EC
Blob Center of Gravity X Result
Blob Maximum Center of Gravity MS,EC,JG,HL,LL
X Result
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
294
XL
Blob Minimum Center of Gravity X MS,EC,JG,HL,LL
Result
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
295
Y
Blob Center of Gravity Y Result
ST,MS,AB,EC,JG,HL,LL Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
YH
Blob Maximum Center of Gravity MS,EC,JG,HL,LL
Y Result
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
296
YL
Blob Minimum Center of Gravity Y MS,EC,JG,HL,LL
Result
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
297
T
Blob Major Axis Angle Result
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
TH
Blob Maximum Major Axis Angle MS,JG,HL,LL
Result
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
298
TL
Blob Minimum Major Axis Angle
Result
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
299
AR
Blob Area Result
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
v
105
ARH
Blob Maximum Area Result
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
306
ARL
Blob Minimum Area Result
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
307
VOL
Blob Volume
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
10-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
2447
VOLH
Blob Maximum Volume
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
10-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
2451
VOLL
Blob Minimum Volume
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
10-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
2452
BOW
Blob Bright/Dark
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
AVI
Blob Average Intensity Difference MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
v
2448
AVIH
Blob Average Intensity Difference MS,JG,HL,LL
(max)
3-digit integer
-
×
2453
AVIL
Blob Average Intensity Difference MS,JG,HL,LL
(min)
3-digit integer
-
×
2454
MXI
Blob Maximum Intensity Difference MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
v
2449
MXIH
Blob Maximum Intensity
Difference (max)
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
2455
MXIL
Blob Maximum Intensity
Difference (min)
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
2456
FX
Blob X Feret Diameter
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
106
FXH
Blob Maximum X Feret Diameter MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
300
FXL
Blob Minimum X Feret Diameter
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
301
FY
Blob Y Feret Diameter
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
107
FYH
Blob Maximum Y Feret Diameter MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
302
FYL
Blob Minimum Y Feret Diameter
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
303
CV-X UM_E
3-65
ST,MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Mathematical Operations
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
(continued)
CL
Grayscale Blob (Page 2-314)
CLH
Detect Flaw with Contrast
with Background (Page 2-64) CLL
Dark or Bright Cluster
CD
Position (Page 2-119)
Blob Perimeter Result
Dark or Bright Cluster
CDH
Position (Page 2-196)
Dark or Bright Cluster Count CDL
(Page 2-220)
MAA
Position Adjustment with Dark
MAAH
or Bright Cluster (Page 2412)
MAAL
Blob Minimum Roundness Result MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
305
Blob Major Axis Width Result
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
1890
Blob Maximum Major Axis Width MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Result
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1896
Blob Minimum Major Axis Width
Result
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1897
MIA
Blob Minor Axis Height Result
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
1891
MIAH
Blob Maximum Minor Axis Height MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Result
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1898
MIAL
Blob Minimum Minor Axis Height MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
Result
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1899
RTO
Blob Axes Ratio Result
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1892
RTOH
Blob Maximum Axes Ratio Result MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1900
RTOL
Blob Minimum Axes Ratio Result MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1901
MAA2
Blob Dist. Oval Major Axis Result MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
1893
MAA2H
Blob Max. D. Oval Major Axis
Result
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1902
MAA2L
Blob Min. D. Oval Major Axis
Result
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1903
MIA2
Blob Dist. Oval Minor Axis Result MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
1894
MIA2H
Blob Max. D. Oval Minor Axis
Result
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1904
MIA2L
Blob Min. D. Oval Minor Axis
Result
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
1905
RTO2
Blob Aspect Ratio Result
MS,LG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1895
RTO2H
Blob Maximum Aspect Ratio
Result
MS,LG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1906
RTO2L
Blob Minimum Aspect Ratio
Result
MS,LG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1907
SGN
No. of segments
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
DSGN
No. of detected segments
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
533
N
No. of edges
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
NHI
No. of edges (Max)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
NLO
No. of edges (Min)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
X
Position X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
XHI
Position X (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
598
XLO
Position X (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
599
XA
Position X (Ave)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y
Position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
YHI
Position Y (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
600
YLO
Position Y (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
601
YA
Position Y (Ave)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
XYHI
Position XY (Max)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
XYLO
Position XY (Min)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
XYA
Position XY (Ave)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
T
Angle
ST,MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
THI
Angle (Max)
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
TLO
Angle (Min)
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P*
Distance
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
91
PHI
Distance (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
110
PLO
Distance (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
111
PA
Distance (Ave)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
RW
Radius
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
541
RWHI
Radius (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
112
RWLO
Radius (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
113
RWA
Radius (Ave)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
Profile Position (Page 2-319)
Position and Angle of Line
(Page 2-96)
Center Position of Circle
(Page 2-99)
Tip Position (Alignment)
(Page 2-110)
Detect Line (Page 2-163)
Detect Circle (Page 2-173)
Tip Position (Measurements &
Dimensions) (Page 2-188)
Position Adjustment with Line
Position and Angle (Page 2401)
Position Adjustment at Center
of Circle (Page 2-404)
3-66 CV-X UM_E
Symbols
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
L
v
108
Blob Maximum Perimeter Result MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
L
×
308
Blob Minimum Perimeter Result
MS,AB,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
L
×
309
Blob Roundness Result
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
109
Blob Maximum Roundness Result MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
304
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
(continued)
Profile Position(Page 2-319)
Position and Angle of Line
(Page 2-96)
Center Position of Circle
(Page 2-99)
Tip Position (Alignment)
(Page 2-110)
Detect Line (Page 2-163)
Detect Circle (Page 2-173)
Tip Position (Measurements &
Dimensions) (Page 2-188)
Position Adjustment with Line
Position and Angle (Page 2401)
Position Adjustment at Center
of Circle (Page 2-404)
Profile Width
(Page 2-323)
Width (Max./Min.)
(Page 2-140)
Diameter (Max./Min.)
(Page 2-144)
Peak-to-Peak Width
(Page 2-160)
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
I
Intensity
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
IHI
Intensity (Max)
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ILO
Intensity (Min)
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
DCX
Circle center X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
546
DCY
Circle center Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
547
DCXY
Circle center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
DCR
Circle radius
MS,HL,LL,AB
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
545
DCD
Circle Diameter
MS,HL,LL,AB
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2592
DLT
Line angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
640
DLX
Line center X
ST,MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
DLY
Line center Y
ST,MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
DLXY
Line center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
DLX1
Line X1
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
DLY1
Line Y1
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
DLXY1
Line XY1
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
DLX2
Line X2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
DLY2
Line Y2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
DLXY2
Line XY2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
MXSGI
Maximum segment No.
(Cannot be used with output
settings.)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
MNSGI
Minimum segment No.
(Cannot be used with output
settings.)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
SGN
No. of segments
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
DSGN
No. of detected segments
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
533
N
No. of pairs
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
NHI
No. of pairs (Max)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
NLO
No. of pairs (Min)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
W*
Edge width
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
97
WHI*
Edge width (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
604
WLO*
Edge width (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
605
WA
Edge width (Ave)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
PMHI*
Max. P-P width
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2718
PMLO*
Min. P-P width
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2719
X1
Position 1 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
X1HI
Position 1 X (Max)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
X1LO
Position 1 X (Min)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
X1PHI
Peak Position 1X (Max.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
X1PLO
Peak Position 1X (Min.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Position 1 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
Y1HI
Position 1Y (Max)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
Y1LO
Position 1Y (Min)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
Y1PHI
Peak Position 1Y (Max.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
Y1PLO
Peak Position 1Y (Min.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Position 1 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
XY1HI
Position1XY (Max)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
XY1LO
Position1XY (Min)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
XY1PHI
Peak Position 1XY (Max.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
XY1PLO
Peak Position 1XY (Min.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
T1
Angle 1
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T1HI
Angle 1(max)
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
T1LO
Angle 1(min)
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P1
Distance 1
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
-
P1HI
Distance 1(max)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
P1LO
Distance 1(min)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
CV-X UM_E
3-67
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
(continued)
Profile Width
(Page 2-323)
Width (Max./Min.)
(Page 2-140)
Diameter (Max./Min.)
(Page 2-144)
Peak-to-Peak Width
(Page 2-160)
I1
Intensity 1
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
I1HI
Intensity1 (Max)
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
I1LO
Intensity1 (Min)
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X2
Position 2 X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
X2HI
Position 2 X (Max)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
X2LO
Position 2 X (Min)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
X2PHI
Peak Position 2X (Max.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
X2PLO
Peak Position 2X (Min.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y2
Position 2 Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
Y2HI
Position 2Y (Max)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
Y2LO
Position 2Y (Min)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
Y2PHI
Peak Position 2Y (Max.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
Y2PLO
Peak Position 2Y (Min.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY2
Position 2 XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
XY2HI
Position2XY (Max)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
XY2LO
Position2XY (Min)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
XY2PHI
Peak Position 2XY (Max.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
XY2PLO
Peak Position 2XY (Min.)
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
T2
Angle 2
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T2HI
Angle 2(max)
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
T2LO
Angle 2(min)
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P2
Distance 2
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
v
-
P2HI
Distance 2(max)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
P2LO
Distance (min)
MS,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
I2
Intensity 2
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
I2HI
Intensity2 (Max)
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
I2LO
Intensity2 (Min)
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
MXSGI
Maximum segment No.
(Cannot be used with output
settings.)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
MNSGI
Minimum segment No.
(Cannot be used with output
settings.)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
No. of segments
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
No. of detected segments
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
533
Defect count
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
1609
Total defect size
MS,JG,HL,LL
7-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1612
Total defect level
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
Total defect width
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
STG[st]
Defect size
MS,JG,HL,LL
7-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1627
STGHI
Defect size (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL
7-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1628
STGLO
Defect size (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL
7-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1629
STL[st]
Defect level
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
STLHI
Defect level (Max)
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
STLLO
Defect level (Min)
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
STW[st]
Defect width
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
STWHI
Defect width (Max)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
STWLO
Defect width (Min)
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
STX[st]
Defect position X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
1613
STXHI
Defect position X (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
1614
STXLO
Defect position X (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
1615
STY[st]
Defect position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
1616
STYHI
Defect position Y (Max)
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
1617
Profile Defect (Page 2SGN
328)
DSGN
Flaw on a Line (Page 2-68)
Flaw on a Ring (Page 2- STN
72)
TSTG
Flaw on a Curve (Page 2TSTL
77)
TSTW
3-68 CV-X UM_E
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
STYLO
Defect position Y (Min)
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
1618
STXY[st]
Defect position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
STT[st]
Defect angle
ST,MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
STBX2[st] Defect end position X2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
STBY2[st] Defect end position Y2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
STBXY2[st] Defect end position XY2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
STSN[st]
Defect start segment No.
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
STTN[st]
Defect top segment No.
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
STEN[st]
Defect end segment No.
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
BMN
No. of reference lines
MS
1-digit integer
-
×
-
BLX1
Model line X1
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
BLY1
Model line Y1
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
BLXY1
Model line XY1
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BLX2
Model line X2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
BLY2
Model line Y2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
BLXY2
Model line XY2
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BLX
Model line center X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
BLY
Model line center Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
BLXY
Model line center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BLT
Model line angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BCR
Model circle radius
MS,AB
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
BCX
Model circle center X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
BCY
Model circle center Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
BCXY
Model circle center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BER1
Model oval radius 1
MS,AB
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
BER2
Model oval radius 2
MS,AB
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
BEX
Model oval center X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
BEY
Model oval center Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
BEXY
Model oval center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BET
Model oval rotation angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BFX
Model free curve X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
BFY
Model free curve Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
BFXY
Model free curve XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
DIFF
Difference
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
N
No. of edges
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
X
Edge position X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
-
Y
Edge position Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
-
XY
Edge position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T
Edge angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
DA
Average intensity
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
182
DD
Intensity deviation
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
184
DH
Maximum intensity
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
187
DL
Minimum intensity
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
188
CV-X UM_E
3-69
Mathematical Operations
MS,AB,EC
(continued)
STTX[st] Defect top position X
Profile Defect (Page 2STTY[st] Defect top position Y
328)
Flaw on a Line (Page 2-68) STTXY[st] Defect top position XY
Flaw on a Ring (Page 2- STBX1[st] Defect start position X1
72)
STBY1[st] Defect start position Y1
Flaw on a Curve (Page 2STBXY1[st] Defect start position XY1
77)
Intensity (Page 2-333)
Judged with Shading
(Page 2-28)
Format of measurement data
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Color Detection (Page 2335)
Judged with Color
Component (Page 2-31)
RA
R: Average intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
189
GA
G: Average intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
190
BA
B: Average intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
191
RD
R: Intensity deviation
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
57
GD
G: Intensity deviation
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
192
BD
B: Intensity deviation
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
642
RH
R: Maximum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, decimal number 0 digit
-
×
193
GH
G: Maximum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, decimal number 0 digit
-
×
194
BH
B: Maximum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, decimal number 0 digit
-
×
195
RL
R: Minimum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, decimal number 0 digit
-
×
196
GL
G: Minimum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, decimal number 0 digit
-
×
197
BL
B: Minimum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, decimal number 0 digit
-
×
198
HUA
H: Average intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
643
SAA
S: Average intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
644
VAA
B: Average intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
645
HUD
H: Intensity deviation
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
646
SAD
S: Intensity deviation
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
647
VAD
B: Intensity deviation
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
648
HUEH
H: Maximum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
649
SATH
S: Maximum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
650
VALH
B: Maximum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
651
HUEL
H: Minimum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
652
SATL
S: Minimum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
653
VALL
B: Minimum intensity
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
654
MC_UVA Average UV Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9793
MC_BA
Average Blue Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9794
MC_GA
Average Green Intensity Result
Mathematical Operations
Tool
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9795
MC_AMA Average AM Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9796
MC_RA
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9797
MC_FRA Average FR Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9798
MC_IRA Average IR Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9799
MC_WA
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9800
MC_UVD UV Intensity Deviation Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9801
MC_BD
Blue Intensity Deviation Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9802
MC_GD
Green Intensity Deviation Result MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9803
Average Red Intensity Result
Average W Intensity Result
MC_AMD AM Intensity Deviation Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9804
MC_RD
Red Intensity Deviation Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9805
MC_FRD FR Intensity Deviation Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9806
MC_IRD IR Intensity Deviation Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9807
MC_WD W Intensity Deviation Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
9808
MC_UVH Maximum UV Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9809
MC_BH
Maximum Blue Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9810
MC_GH
Maximum Green Intensity Result MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9811
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9812
MC_AMH Maximum AM Intensity Result
Maximum Red Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9813
MC_FRH Maximum FR Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9814
MC_IRH Maximum IR Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9815
MC_WH Maximum W Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9816
MC_UVL Minimum UV Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9817
MC_BL
Minimum Blue Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9818
MC_GL
Minimum Green Intensity Result
MC_RH
3-70 CV-X UM_E
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9819
MC_AML Minimum AM Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9820
MC_RL
Minimum Red Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9821
MC_FRL Minimum FR Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9822
MC_IRL
Minimum IR Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9823
MC_WL
Minimum W Intensity Result
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
×
9824
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Color Grouping (CVX400 Series Only) (Page
2-338)
Color Sorting (Page 2-34)
Judged with Color
Distribution (Page 2-37)
MXARGI Primary Candidate (Group No.)
D
MS,EC
2-digit integer
-

9551
MXAR
Primary Candidate (Area)
MS,EC,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-

9554
MXRT
Primary Candidate (Area) (%)
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 1-digit decimal number
-

9557
GAR[0]
Individual Area
MS,EC,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
v
9552
GRT[0]
Individual Area (%)
MS,EC,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 1-digit decimal number
-
v
9553
ESAR
Area of All Groups
MS,EC,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-

9556
For Primary Candidate (Group No.), Individual Area, and Individual Area (%), the group number value is multiplied by 1,000,000 and added to
the item ID value, and the resulting value is specified in the DW/DR command parameters.
Example: When accessing Primary Candidate (Group No.) (item ID: 9551) group number 5 judgment condition
The specified parameter is 9551 + 5 * 1000000 = 5009551
OCR (Page 2-348)
Identify Characters (CVX200/X100 Series) (Page
2-234)
OCR2(Page 2-341)
Identify Characters (CVX400/X300 Series)(Page
2-226)
JG
1-digit integer
-

-
RCG_CHR Recognized character
MS,JG
3-digit integer
-
v
-
JG_CHR
Reference character
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
VR_STR
Reference (Matching) String
JG
1-digit integer
-
v
-
VR_CHR[] Reference (Matching) Character
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
CHR1
1st candidate character result
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
CHR2
2nd candidate character result
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
CRR1
1st candidate correlation result
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
CRR2
2nd candidate correlation result
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
STBL
Stability Result
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
GDEV
Intensity Deviation Result
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
CCN1
Number of Characters Result
STR1
Recognized String
MS
2-digit integer
-

-
L1CRR1_H Max. Correlation Score Result
MS,JG,LL
2-digit integer
-

1383
L1CRR1_L Min. Correlation Score Result
MS,JG,LL
2-digit integer
-

1384
L1STBL_H Max. Stability Score Result
MS,JG,LL
2-digit integer
-

1385
L1STBL_L Min. Stability Score Result
MS,JG,LL
2-digit integer
-

1386
Judged Characters
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
String
-

-
Recognized String
JG
1-digit integer
-

-
RCG_CHR Recognized Character
MS,JG
3-digit integer
-
v
-
JG_CHR
Reference Character
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
VR_STR
Reference (Matching) String
JG
1-digit integer
-
v
-
VR_CHR[] Reference (Matching) Character
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
CHR1
1st candidate character result
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
CHR2
2nd candidate character result
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
CRR1
1st candidate correlation result
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
CRR2
2nd candidate correlation result
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
VR_CPLC1 1st candidate Library Register
No.
[]
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
VR_CPLC2 2nd candidate Library Register
No.
[]
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
STBL
Stability Result
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
GDEV
Intensity Deviation Result
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
CCN1
Number of Characters Result
MS,JG,HL,LL
2-digit integer
-

1399
L1CRR1_H Max. Correlation Score Result
MS,JG,LL
2-digit integer
-

1383
L1CRR1_L Min. Correlation Score Result
MS,JG,LL
2-digit integer
-

1384
L1STBL_H Max. Stability Score Result
MS,JG,LL
2-digit integer
-

1385
L1STBL_L Min. Stability Score Result
MS,JG,LL
2-digit integer
-

1386
String
-

-
CV-X UM_E
3-71
STR1
Judged Characters
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
1D Code
(Page 2-243)
1D Code Reader
(Page 2-355)
ID_LEN
Read data length
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA
Read Data
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR
Read Data Text
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
X
Position X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
Y
Position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
XY
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T
Detected angle
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
XYT
Position XY / Detected Angle
MS,AB
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal
number
-
v
-
ID_LEN1
Split Data Length 1
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN2
Split Data Length 2
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN3
Split Data Length 3
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN4
Split Data Length 4
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN5
Split Data Length 5
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN6
Split Data Length 6
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN7
Split Data Length 7
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN8
Split Data Length 8
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA1 Split Data 1
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA2 Split Data 2
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA3 Split Data 3
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA4 Split Data 4
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA5 Split Data 5
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA6 Split Data 6
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA7 Split Data 7
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA8 Split Data 8
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
Mathematical Operations
Tool
3-72 CV-X UM_E
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
ID_STR1
Split Data Text 1
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR2
Split Data Text 2
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR3
Split Data Text 3
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR4
Split Data Text 4
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR5
Split Data Text 5
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR6
Split Data Text 6
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR7
Split Data Text 7
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR8
Split Data Text 8
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
MSIZE
Code Resolution
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
ID_CCLR
Code color
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_CDT
Code Angle
ST,MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
ID_CDL
Code Data Length
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
STB
Stability
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_ERR
Readout Error
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_ERSN
Readout Error Factor
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
M_IDX
No. of Matched Code
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA1 Reference Pattern 1
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA2 Reference Pattern 2
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA3 Reference Pattern 3
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA4 Reference Pattern 4
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA5 Reference Pattern 5
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA6 Reference Pattern 6
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
(continued)
1D Code
(Page 2-243)
1D Code Reader
(Page 2-355)
M_DATA7 Reference Pattern 7
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA8 Reference Pattern 8
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA9 Reference Pattern 9
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA10 Reference Pattern 10
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA11 Reference Pattern 11
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA12 Reference Pattern 12
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA13 Reference Pattern 13
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA14 Reference Pattern 14
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA15 Reference Pattern 15
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA16 Reference Pattern 16
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR1
Reference Pattern Text 1
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR2
Reference Pattern Text 2
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR3
Reference Pattern Text 3
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR4
Reference Pattern Text 4
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR5
Reference Pattern Text 5
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR6
Reference Pattern Text 6
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR7
Reference Pattern Text 7
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR8
Reference Pattern Text 8
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR9
Reference Pattern Text 9
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR10
Reference Pattern Text 10
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR11
Reference Pattern Text 11
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR12
Reference Pattern Text 12
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR13
Reference Pattern Text 13
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR14
Reference Pattern Text 14
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR15
Reference Pattern Text 15
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR16
Reference Pattern Text 16
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT
Collation Result
JG
1-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT1
Collation Result 1
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT2
Collation Result 2
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT3
Collation Result 3
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT4
Collation Result 4
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT5
Collation Result 5
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT6
Collation Result 6
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT7
Collation Result 7
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT8
Collation Result 8
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT9
Collation Result 9
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT10 Collation Result 10
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT11 Collation Result 11
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT12 Collation Result 12
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT13 Collation Result 13
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT14 Collation Result 14
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT15 Collation Result 15
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT16 Collation Result 16
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer
-
v
-
CV-X UM_E
3-73
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
(continued)
1D Code
(Page 2-243)
1D Code Reader
(Page 2-355)
BC_ALL
BC Overall Symbol Grade
MS, JG, LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_DEC
BC Decode (DEC)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_EDG
Edge Determination (EDGE)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_SC
BC Symbol Contrast (SC)
Mathematical Operations
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_MINR BC Minimum Reflectance (MINR) MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_MINE BC Minimum Edge Contrast
(MINE)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_MOD
BC Modulation (MOD)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_QZ
BC Minimum Quiet Zone (QZ)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_DCD
BC Decodability (DCD)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_DEF
BC Defects (DEF)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_WNR
BC Wide to Narrow Ratio (WNR) MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_EDG_ BC Edge Determination (EDGE) MS
VAL
Value
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_SC_VA BC Symbol Contrast (SC) Value
L
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_MINR_ BC Minimum Reflectance (MINR) MS
VAL
Value
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_MINE_ BC Minimum Edge Contrast
VAL
(MINE) Value
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_MOD_ BC Modulation (MOD) Value
VAL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_QZ_
VAL
BC Minimum Quiet Zone (QZ)
Value
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_DCD_ BC Decodability (DCD) Value
VAL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_DEF_
VAL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_WNR_ BC Wide to Narrow Ratio (WNR) MS
VAL
Value
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_CGAP BC Intercharacter Gap (CGAP)
_VAL
Value
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ID_LEN
Read data length
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer
-
v
2006
ID_DATA
Read Data
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR
Read Data Text
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
BC_CGAP BC Intercharacter Gap (CGAP)
2D Code
(Page 2-246)
2D code reader
(Page 2-359)
3-74 CV-X UM_E
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
BC Defects (DEF) Value
MS
CC1D_LE Read Data Length (Composite
N
Code 1D Part)
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
CC1D_DAT Read Data
A
(Composite Code 1D Part)
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
CC1D_ID_ Read Data Text
STR
(Composite Code 1D Part)
MS
128-digit integer
-
v
-
CC2D_LE Read Data Length (Composite
N
Code 2D Part)
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
CC2D_DAT Read Data
A
(Composite Code 2D Part)
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
CC2D_ID_ Read Data Text
STR
(Composite Code 2D Part)
MS
512-digit integer
-
v
-
X
Position X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,
AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
82
Y
Position Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,
AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
83
XY
Position XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T
Detected angle
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
XYT
Position XY / Detected Angle
MS,AB
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal
number
-
v
-
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
(continued)
2D Code
(Page 2-246)
2D code reader
(Page 2-359)
CC1D_X
X Position
(Composite Code 1D Part)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CC1D_Y
Y Position
(Composite Code 1D Part)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CC1D_XY XY Position
(Composite Code 1D Part)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CC1D_T
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CC1D_XYT XY Position / Detected Angle
MS
(Composite Code 1D Part)
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal
number
-
v
-
CC2D_X
X Position
(Composite Code 2D Part)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CC2D_Y
Y Position
(Composite Code 2D Part)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CC2D_XY XY Position
(Composite Code 2D Part)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CC2D_T
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
CC2D_XYT XY Position / Detected Angle
MS
(Composite Code 2D Part)
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal
number
-
v
-
ID_LEN1
Split Data Length 1
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN2
Split Data Length 2
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN3
Split Data Length 3
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN4
Split Data Length 4
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN5
Split Data Length 5
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN6
Split Data Length 6
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN7
Split Data Length 7
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_LEN8
Split Data Length 8
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA1 Split Data 1
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA2 Split Data 2
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA3 Split Data 3
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA4 Split Data 4
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA5 Split Data 5
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA6 Split Data 6
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA7 Split Data 7
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_DATA8 Split Data 8
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
Detected Angle
(Composite Code 1D Part)
Detected Angle
(Composite Code 2D Part)
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
ID_STR1
Split Data Text 1
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR2
Split Data Text 2
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR3
Split Data Text 3
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR4
Split Data Text 4
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR5
Split Data Text 5
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR6
Split Data Text 6
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR7
Split Data Text 7
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_STR8
Split Data Text 8
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
512-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_CSIZE Code Resolution
MS
3-digit integer, decimal number 3 digit
-
v
-
ID_UECR
Unused Error Correction Rate
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_CNR
Number of Rows
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_CNC
Number of Columns
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_CCLR
Code color
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
CV-X UM_E
3-75
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
(continued)
2D Code
(Page 2-246)
2D code reader
(Page 2-359)
Mathematical Operations
3-76 CV-X UM_E
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
ID_MRI
Mirrored Reading
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_CDT
Code Angle
ST,MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
ID_CDL
Code Data Length
MS
4-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_ERR
Readout Error
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
ID_ERSN
Readout Error Factor
MS
1-digit integer
-
v
-
CC_HGAP Composite Code Side Slip Width MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
M_IDX
No. of Matched Code
MS
2-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA1 Reference Pattern 1
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA2 Reference Pattern 2
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA3 Reference Pattern 3
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA4 Reference Pattern 4
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA5 Reference Pattern 5
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA6 Reference Pattern 6
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA7 Reference Pattern 7
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA8 Reference Pattern 8
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA9 Reference Pattern 9
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA10 Reference Pattern 10
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA11 Reference Pattern 11
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA12 Reference Pattern 12
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA13 Reference Pattern 13
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA14 Reference Pattern 14
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA15 Reference Pattern 15
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_DATA16 Reference Pattern 16
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR1
Reference Pattern Text 1
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR2
Reference Pattern Text 2
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR3
Reference Pattern Text 3
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR4
Reference Pattern Text 4
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR5
Reference Pattern Text 5
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR6
Reference Pattern Text 6
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR7
Reference Pattern Text 7
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR8
Reference Pattern Text 8
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR9
Reference Pattern Text 9
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR10
Reference Pattern Text 10
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR11
Reference Pattern Text 11
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR12
Reference Pattern Text 12
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR13
Reference Pattern Text 13
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR14
Reference Pattern Text 14
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR15
Reference Pattern Text 15
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_STR16
Reference Pattern Text 16
MS
(Cannot be used in calculation.)
128-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT
Collation Result
JG
1-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT1
Collation Result 1
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT2
Collation Result 2
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
(continued)
2D Code
(Page 2-246)
2D code reader
(Page 2-359)
M_RSLT3
Collation Result 3
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT4
Collation Result 4
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT5
Collation Result 5
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT6
Collation Result 6
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT7
Collation Result 7
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT8
Collation Result 8
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT9
Collation Result 9
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT10 Collation Result 10
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT11 Collation Result 11
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT12 Collation Result 12
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT13 Collation Result 13
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT14 Collation Result 14
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT15 Collation Result 15
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
M_RSLT16 Collation Result 16
MS
3-digit integer
-
v
-
ISO_ALL
ISO Overall Symbol Grade
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_DEC
ISO Decode(DEC)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_SC
ISO Symbol Contrast(SC)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_MOD ISO Modulation (MOD)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_RM
ISO Reflect. Margin(RM)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_FPD
ISO Fixed Pat.Dmg.(FPD)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_AN
ISO Axial N-uniform.(AN)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_GN
ISO Grid N-uniform.(GN)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_UEC
ISO Unused Err.Crr.(UEC)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_FID
ISO Form.Info.Dmg.(FID)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_VID
ISO Vers.Info.Dmg. (VID)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_PGH
ISO Print Growth H.(PGH)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_PGV
ISO Print Growth V.(PGV)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_ALL
AIM Overall Symbol Grade
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_DEC AIM Decode(DEC)
AIM_CC
AIM Cell Contrast(CC)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_CM
AIM Cell Modulation (CM)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_RM
AIM Reflect. Margin(RM)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_FPD
AIM Fixed Pat.Dmg.(FPD)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_AN
AIM Axial N-uniform.(AN)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_GN
AIM Grid N-uniform.(GN)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_UEC AIM Unused Err.Crr.(UEC)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_FID
AIM Form.Info.Dmg.(FID)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_VID
AIM Vers.Info.Dmg.(VID)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_PGH AIM Print Growth H.(PGH)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
AIM_PGV
AIM Print Growth V.(PGV)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
SAE_ALL
SAE Overall Symbol Grade
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
SAE_QZ
SAE Quiet Zone(QZ)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
CV-X UM_E
3-77
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
(continued)
2D Code
(Page 2-246)
2D code reader
(Page 2-359)
SAE_SC
SAE Symbol Contrast(SC)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
SAE_AD
SAE Angular Dist.(AD)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
SAE_MF
SAE Module Fill(MF)
MS,JG,LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ISO_SC_V ISO Symbol Contrast(SC)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ISO_AN_V ISO Axial N-uniform.(AN)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ISO_GN_V ISO Grid N-uniform.(GN)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ISO_UEC_ ISO Unused Err.Crr.(UEC)
VAL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ISO_FID_V ISO Form.Info.Dmg.(FID)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 1-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ISO_VID_V ISO Vers.Info.Dmg.(VID)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 1-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ISO_PGH_ ISO Print Growth H.(PGH)
VAL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ISO_PGV_ ISO Print Growth V.(PGV)
VAL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
AIM_CC_V AIM Cell Contrast(CC)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
AIM_AN_V AIM Axial N-uniform.(AN)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
AIM_GN_V AIM Grid N-uniform.(GN)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
AIM_UEC_ AIM Unused Err.Crr.(UEC)
VAL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
AIM_FID_V AIM Form.Info.Dmg.(FID)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 1-digit decimal number
-
×
-
AIM_VID_V AIM Vers.Info.Dmg.(VID)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 1-digit decimal number
-
×
-
AIM_PGH_ AIM Print Growth H.(PGH)
VAL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
AIM_PGV_ AIM Print Growth V.(PGV)
VAL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
SAE_SC_V SAE Symbol Contrast(SC)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
SAE_AD_V SAE Angular Dist.(AD)
AL
(Reference value)
MS
Sign, 2-digit integer
-
×
-
SAE_MF_V SAE Module Fill(MF) (Reference MS
AL
value)
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_ALL
ST Overall Symbol Grade
MS, JG, LL
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_DEC
ST Decode(DEC)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_EDG
ST Edge Determination(EDGE)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_SC
ST Symbol Contrast(SC)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_MINR
ST Minimum Reflectance(MINR) MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_MINE
ST Minimum Edge
Contrast(MINE)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_MOD
ST Modulation(MOD)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_QZ
ST Minimum Quiet Zone(QZ)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_DCD
ST Decodability(DCD)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_DEF
ST Defects(DEF)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_CY
ST Codeword Yield(CY)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
ST_CPQ
ST Codeword Print Quality(CPQ) MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
Mathematical Operations
Tool
3-78 CV-X UM_E
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
(continued)
2D Code
(Page 2-246)
2D code reader
(Page 2-359)
ST_UEC
ST Unused Error Correction(UEC) MS
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
-
×
-
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_SC_VA ST Symbol Contrast(SC) Value
L
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_MINR_ ST Minimum Reflectance(MINR) MS
VAL
Value
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_MINE_ ST Minimum Edge
VAL
Contrast(MINE) Value
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_MOD_ ST Modulation(MOD) Value
VAL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_QZ_VA ST Minimum Quiet Zone(QZ)
L
Value
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_DCD_V ST Decodability(DCD) Value
AL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_DEF_V ST Defects(DEF) Value
AL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_CY_VA ST Codeword Yield(CY) Value
L
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_CPQ_V ST Codeword Print Quality(CPQ) MS
AL
Value
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ST_UEC_V ST Unused Error Correction(UEC) MS
AL
Value
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_DEC
BC Decode(DEC)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_EDG
BC Edge Determination(EDGE)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_SC
BC Symbol Contrast(SC)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_MINR BC Minimum Reflectance(MINR) MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_MINE
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC Minimum Edge
Contrast(MINE)
BC_MOD
BC Modulation(MOD)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_QZ
BC Minimum Quiet Zone(QZ)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_DCD
BC Decodability(DCD)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_DEF
BC Defects(DEF)
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer
-
×
-
BC_EDG_ BC Edge Determination(EDGE)
VAL
Value
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_SC_VA BC Symbol Contrast(SC) Value
L
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_MINR_ BC Minimum Reflectance(MINR) MS
VAL
Value
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_MINE_ BC Minimum Edge
VAL
Contrast(MINE) Value
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_MOD_ BC Modulation(MOD) Value
VAL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_QZ_VA BC Minimum Quiet Zone(QZ)
L
Value
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_DCD_ BC Decodability(DCD) Value
VAL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
BC_DEF_V BC Defects(DEF) Value
AL
MS
Sign, 1-digit integer, 2-digit decimal number
-
×
-
CV-X UM_E
3-79
Mathematical Operations
Sign, 1-digit integer
ST_EDG_V ST Edge Determination(EDGE)
AL
Value
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Points Distance
(Page 2-130)
Mathematical Operations
Point/Line Distance
(Page 2-131)
Lines Distance
(Page 2-132)
Point/Circle Distance
(Page 2-133)
Line/Circle Distance
(Page 2-134)
3-80 CV-X UM_E
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
P*
Distance
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
91
XP*
Distance X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2574
YP*
Distance Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2575
X1
Best Fit Point 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Best Fit Point 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Best Fit Point 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X2
Best Fit Point 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y2
Best Fit Point 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY2
Best Fit Point 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P*
Distance
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
91
X1
Best Fit Point X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Best Fit Point Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Best Fit Point XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2T
Best Fit Line angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2X
Best Fit Line X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L2Y
Best Fit Line Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L2XY
Best Fit Line XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P*
Distance
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
91
L1T
Best Fit Line 1 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1X
Best Fit Line 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L1Y
Best Fit Line 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L1XY
Best Fit Line 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2T
Best Fit Line 2 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2X
Best Fit Line 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L2Y
Best Fit Line 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L2XY
Best Fit Line 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
P*
Distance
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
91
XP*
Distance X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2574
YP*
Distance Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2575
X1
Best Fit Point X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Best Fit Point Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Best Fit Point XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
C2X
Best Fit Circle Center X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
C2Y
Best Fit Circle Center Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
C2XY
Best Fit Circle Center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
C2R
Best Fit Circle Radius
MS,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
C2D
Best Fit Circle Diameter
MS,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
P*
Distance
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
91
L1T
Best Fit Line 1 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1X
Best Fit Line 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L1Y
Best Fit Line 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L1XY
Best Fit Line 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
C2X
Best Fit Circle Center X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
C2Y
Best Fit Circle Center Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
C2XY
Best Fit Circle Center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
C2R
Best Fit Circle Radius
MS,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
C2D
Best Fit Circle Diameter
MS,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Circles Distance
(Page 2-135)
Bisection of Two Lines
(Page 2-167)
Angle Formed by Two
Lines
(Page 2-168)
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
P*
Distance
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
91
XP*
Distance X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2574
YP*
Distance Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2575
C1X
Best Fit Circle 1 Center X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
C1Y
Best Fit Circle 1 Center Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
C1XY
Best Fit Circle 1 Center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
C1R
Best Fit Circle 1 Radius
MS,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
C1D
Best Fit Circle 1 Diameter
MS,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
C2X
Best Fit Circle 2 Center X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
C2Y
Best Fit Circle 2 Center Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
C2XY
Best Fit Circle 2 Center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
C2R
Best Fit Circle 2 Radius
MS,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
C2D
Best Fit Circle 2 Diameter
MS,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
-
DLT
Best Fit Line angle
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
640
DLX
Best Fit Line X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
DLY
Best Fit Line Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
DLXY
Best Fit Line XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X1
Best Fit Point 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Best Fit Point 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Best Fit Point 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X2
Best Fit Point 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y2
Best Fit Point 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY2
Best Fit Point 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
DLT
Median Angle
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 2-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
640
DLX
Median X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
DLY
Median Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
DLXY
Median XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1T
Best Fit Line 1 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1X
Best Fit Line 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L1Y
Best Fit Line 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L1XY
Best Fit Line 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2T
Best Fit Line 2 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2X
Best Fit Line 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L2Y
Best Fit Line 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L2XY
Best Fit Line 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
T
Angle
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
84
L1T
Best Fit Line 1 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1X
Best Fit Line 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L1Y
Best Fit Line 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L1XY
Best Fit Line 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2T
Best Fit Line 2 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2X
Best Fit Line 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L2Y
Best Fit Line 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L2XY
Best Fit Line 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
CV-X UM_E
3-81
Mathematical Operations
Line Passing Two Points
(Page 2-166)
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Line/V-Line Intersection
(Page 2-169)
X
Intersection X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
82
Y
Intersection Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
83
XY
Intersection XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1T
Best Fit Line 1 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1X
Best Fit Line 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L1Y
Best Fit Line 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L1XY
Best Fit Line 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X2
Best Fit Point 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y2
Best Fit Point 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY2
Best Fit Point 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X
Intersection X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
82
Y
Intersection Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
83
XY
Intersection XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1T
Best Fit Line 1 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1X
Best Fit Line 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L1Y
Best Fit Line 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L1XY
Best Fit Line 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2T
Best Fit Line 2 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2X
Best Fit Line 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L2Y
Best Fit Line 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L2XY
Best Fit Line 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X
Center X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
82
Two Lines Intersection
(Page 2-170)
Center of Quadrangle
(Page 2-171)
Midpoint of Points
(Page 2-172)
3-82 CV-X UM_E
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Y
Center Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
83
XY
Center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1T
Best Fit Line 1 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L1X
Best Fit Line 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L1Y
Best Fit Line 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L1XY
Best Fit Line 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2T
Best Fit Line 2 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L2X
Best Fit Line 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L2Y
Best Fit Line 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L2XY
Best Fit Line 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L3T
Best Fit Line 3 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L3X
Best Fit Line 3X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L3Y
Best Fit Line 3Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L3XY
Best Fit Line 3XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L4T
Best Fit Line 4 Angle
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
L4X
Best Fit Line 4X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
L4Y
Best Fit Line 4Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
L4XY
Best Fit Line 4XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X
Midpoint X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
82
Y
Midpoint Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
83
XY
Midpoint XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X1
Best Fit Point 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Best Fit Point 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Best Fit Point 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X2
Best Fit Point 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y2
Best Fit Point 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY2
Best Fit Point 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Circle Passing Three
Points
(Page 2-175)
DCX
Best Fit Circle center X
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
546
DCY
Best Fit Circle center Y
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
547
DCXY
Best Fit Circle center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
DCR
Best Fit Circle radius
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
545
DCD
Best Fit Circle Diameter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
L
×
2592
X1
Best Fit Point 1X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y1
Best Fit Point 1Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY1
Best Fit Point 1XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X2
Best Fit Point 2X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y2
Best Fit Point 2Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY2
Best Fit Point 2XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
X3
Best Fit Point 3X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
×
-
Y3
Best Fit Point 3Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
×
-
XY3
Best Fit Point 3XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ANS0
Calculation Result 0
Sign, 11-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
ANS0
Calculation Result 0
Sign, 11-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
975
Sign, 11-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
Sign, 11-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
2511
Sign, 11-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
Sign, 11-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
2512
-
Calculation (Page 2-260)
3D Comparison
(Page 8-16)
ANS1
Calculation Result 1
ANS1
Calculation Result 1
ANS2
Calculation Result 2
ANS2
Calculation Result 2
JG,HL,LL
JG,HL,LL
ERRC
Error Code
7-digit integer
-
×
ERRL
Error line
7-digit integer
-
×
-
TDSUB_
MTC
Total Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10242
TDSUB_
TCVA
Convex Parts Total Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10253
TDSUB_
TCCA
Concave Parts Total Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10250
TDSUB_
MTC
Match Degree
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10241
TDSUB_TV Total Volume
MS,JG,HL,LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10244
TDSUB_
TCVV
Convex Parts Total Volume
MS,JG,HL,LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10254
TDSUB_
TCCV
Concave Parts Total Volume
MS,JG,HL,LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10251
TDSUB_
MXBA
Maximum Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10246
TDSUB_
MXBV
Maximum Volume
MS,JG,HL,LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10247
Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
105
CONTCMP Match Degree
_MTC
MS,JG,HL,LL
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
10293
CONTCMP NG Outlines
_NGSEG
MS,JG,HL
4-digit integer
-
×
10377
CONTCMP Detected Outlines
_SEG
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
10376
CONTCMP Registered Outlines
_TSEG
MS
4-digit integer
-
×
-
CV-X UM_E
3-83
Section Area Comparison AR
(Page 8-22)
Outline Comparison
(Page 8-27)
Outline Coincidence
(Page 2-382)
JG,HL,LL
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Height Comparison
(Page 8-33)
MXH
Max. Height
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
8019
MNH
Min. Height
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
8020
AVH
Ave. Height
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
8087
PMH
P-P Height
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
8343
EPA
Valid Pix. Count
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
8089
CONV_AR Convex Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
8021
CONC_AR Concave Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
8022
CONV_VOL Convex Volume
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
8023
CONC_VOL Concave Volume
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
8024
PPABC
Plane Formula Info. XYZ of Zero
Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
-
×
-
PPA
X Slope of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
-
×
-
PPB
Y Slope of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
-
×
-
PPC
Z Intercept of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
DIFF
Level Difference
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1642
PPABC
Plane Formula Info. XYZ of Zero
Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
-
×
-
PPA
X Slope of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
-
×
-
PPB
Y Slope of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
-
×
-
PPC
Z Intercept of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
-
N
Number of Blobs
MS,JG,HL,LL
4-digit integer
-
×
90
X
Blob Center X
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
82
XH
Blob Maximum X Position
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
294
XL
Blob Minimum X Position
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
295
Y
Blob Center Y
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB,EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
83
YH
Blob Maximum Y Position
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
296
YL
Blob Minimum Y Position
MS,JG,HL,LL,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
297
XY
Blob Center XY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
T
Blob Major Axis Angle
ST,MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
84
TH
Blob Maximum Major Axis Angle MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
298
TL
Blob Minimum Major Axis Angle MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
299
Blob Center XY and Major Axis
Angle (Cannot be used in
calculation.)
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
-
AR
Blob Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
v
105
ARH
Blob Maximum Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
306
ARL
Blob Minimum Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
8-digit integer
-
×
307
FX
Blob X Feret Diameter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
106
FXH
Blob Maximum X Feret Diameter MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
300
FXL
Blob Minimum X Feret Diameter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
301
FY
Blob Y Feret Diameter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
107
FYH
Blob Maximum Y Feret Diameter MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
302
FYL
Blob Minimum Y Feret Diameter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
303
CL
Blob Perimeter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
8-digit integer
-
v
108
CLH
Blob Maximum Perimeter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
8-digit integer
-
×
308
CLL
Blob Minimum Perimeter
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
8-digit integer
-
×
309
CD
Blob Roundness
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
109
CDH
Blob Maximum Roundness
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
304
CDL
Blob Minimum Roundness
MS,JG,HL,LL
1-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
305
MAA
Blob Major Axis Width
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1890
MAAH
Blob Maximum Major Axis Width MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1896
MAAL
Blob Minimum Major Axis Width
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1897
MIA
Blob Minor Axis Height
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1891
MIAH
Blob Maximum Minor Axis Height MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1898
MIAL
Blob Minimum Minor Axis Height MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1899
RTO
Blob Axes Ratio
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1892
RTOH
Blob Maximum Axes Ratio
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1900
RTOL
Blob Minimum Axes Ratio
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1901
MAA2
Blob Dist. Oval Major Axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1893
MAA2H
Blob Max. D. Oval Major Axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1902
Profile Comparison
(Page 8-37)
Section Count
(Page 8-41)
3-84 CV-X UM_E
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
(Continued)
Section Count
(Page 8-41)
MAA2L
Blob Min. D. Oval Major Axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1903
MIA2
Blob Dist. Oval Minor Axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1894
MIA2H
Blob Max. D. Oval Minor Axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1904
MIA2L
Blob Min. D. Oval Minor Axis
MS,JG,HL,LL,AB
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1905
RTO2
Blob Aspect Ratio
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
v
1895
RTO2H
Blob Maximum Aspect Ratio
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1906
RTO2L
Blob Minimum Aspect Ratio
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
-
×
1907
MXX*
Max. height X
MS, JG, HL, LL, AB, EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
8051
MXY*
Max. height Y
MS, JG, HL, LL, AB, EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
8053
MXZ*
Max. height Z
MS, JG, HL, LL, AB, EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8055
8019
MXH*
Max. height H
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
MXXYZ*
Max. height XYZ
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MNX*
Min. height X
MS, JG, HL, LL, AB, EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
8058
MNY*
Min. height Y
MS, JG, HL, LL, AB, EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
8060
MNZ*
Min. height Z
MS, JG, HL, LL, AB, EC Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8062
MNH*
Min. height H
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8020
MNXYZ*
Min. height XYZ
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
AVX*
Ave. height X
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
8065
AVY*
Ave. height Y
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
8066
AVZ*
Ave. height Z
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8067
AVH*
Ave. height H
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8087
AVXYZ*
Ave. height XYZ
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8064
PMH*
Peak-to-peak height H
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8343
EPA
Valid pixel count
MS, JG, HL, LL
8-digit integer
–
–
8089
CONC_AR* Concave area
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8022
CONV_AR* Convex area
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8021
CONC_VOL* Concave volume
MS, JG, HL, LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8024
CONV_VOL* Convex volume
MS, JG, HL, LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8023
DPPABC
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
Plane formula info. XYZ of
detected plane
DPPA
X slope of detected plane
MS, AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
DPPB
Y slope of detected plane
MS, AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
DPPC
Z intercept of detected plane
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPABC
Plane formula info. XYZ of zero
plane
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPA
X slope of zero plane
MS, AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPB
Y slope of zero plane
MS, AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPC
Z intercept of zero plane
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
Number of segments result
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
Number of detected segments
result
MS, JG, HL, LL
4-digit integer
–
–
533
NSGN
Number of NG segments
MS, JG, HL
4-digit integer
–
–
8229
CNSGN
Number of consecutive NG
segments
MS, JG, HL
4-digit integer
–
–
8230
MXX
Peak X
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
MXXMX
Peak X (max.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
MXXMN
Peak X (min.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
MXY
Peak Y
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
–
MXYMX
Peak Y (max.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
MXYMN
Peak Y (min.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
MXZ
Peak Z
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
MXZMX
Peak Z (max.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MXZMN
Peak Z (min.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MXH*
Peak H
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8019
MXHMX*
Peak H (max.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8241
MXHMN*
Peak H (min.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8242
MXXYZ
Peak XYZ
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
MXXYZMX Peak XYZ (max.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MXXYZMN Peak XYZ (min.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MXMXSGI Max. peak segment number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
CV-X UM_E
3-85
Trend Height Measurement SGN
(Page 8-51)
DSGN
Mathematical Operations
Height Measurement
(Page 8-47)
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
(Continued)
MXMNSGI Min. peak segment number
Trend Height Measurement MNX
Bottom X
(Page 8-51)
MNXMX
Bottom X (max.)
Mathematical Operations
3-86 CV-X UM_E
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
–
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
–
MNXMN
Bottom X (min.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
MNY
Bottom Y
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
–
MNYMX
Bottom Y (max.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
MNYMN
Bottom Y (min.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
MNZ
Bottom Z
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
MNZMX
Bottom Z (max.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MNZMN
Bottom Z (min.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MNH*
Bottom H
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8020
MNHMX*
Bottom H (max.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8253
MNHMN*
Bottom H (min.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8254
MNXYZ
Bottom XYZ
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
MNXYZMX Bottom XYZ (max.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MNXYZMN Bottom XYZ (min.)
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
MNMXSGI Max. bottom segment number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
MNMNSGI Min. bottom segment number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
AVZ
Average Z
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
AVZMX
Average Z (max.)
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
AVZMN
Average Z (min.)
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
AVH*
Average H
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8087
AVHMX*
Average H (max.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8265
AVHMN*
Average H (min.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8266
AVMXSGI Max. average segment number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
AVMNSGI Min. average segment number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
PMHIH*
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8343
PMHIHMX* Peak-to-peak height H (max.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8348
PMHIHMN* Peak-to-peak height H (min.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8349
PMMXSGI Max. peak-to-peak height
segment number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
PMMNSGI Min. peak-to-peak height
segment number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
Peak-to-peak height H
EPA
Valid pixel count
MS, JG, HL, LL
8-digit integer
–
v
8089
EPAMX
Valid pixel count (max.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
8-digit integer
–
–
8272
EPAMN
Valid pixel count (min.)
MS, JG, HL, LL
8-digit integer
–
–
8273
EPAMXSGI Max. valid pixel count Segment
number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
EPAMNSGI Min. valid pixel count Segment
number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
CONV_AR* Convex area
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8021
CONV_AR Convex area (max.)
MX*
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8274
CONV_AR Convex area (min.)
MN*
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8275
CONV_AM Max. convex area segment
XSGI
number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
CONV_AM Min. convex area segment
NSGI
number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
CONC_AR* Concave area
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8022
CONC_AR Concave area (max.)
MX*
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8276
CONC_AR Concave area (min.)
MN*
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8277
CONC_AM Max. concave area segment
XSGI
number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
CONC_AM Min. concave area segment
NSGI
number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
CONV_VOL* Convex volume
MS, JG, HL, LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8023
CONV_VO Convex volume (max.)
LMX*
MS, JG, HL, LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8278
CONV_VO Convex volume (min.)
LMN*
MS, JG, HL, LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8279
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Tool
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
(Continued)
CONV_VM Max. convex volume segment
number
Trend Height Measurement XSGI
(Page 8-51)
CONV_VM Min. convex volume segment
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
CONC_VOL* Concave volume
MS, JG, HL, LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8024
CONC_VO Concave volume (max.)
LMX*
MS, JG, HL, LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8280
CONC_VO Concave volume (min.)
LMN*
MS, JG, HL, LL
9-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8281
CONC_VM Max. concave volume segment
XSGI
number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
CONC_VM Min. concave volume segment
NSGI
number
MS
4-digit integer
–
–
–
DCR
Best fit circle radius result
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
545
DCD
Best fit circle diameter result
MS, JG, HL, LL
6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
2592
DCX
Best fit circle center X result
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
DCY
Best fit circle center Y result
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
DCZ
Best fit circle center Z result
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
NSGI
number
DCH
Best fit circle center H result
MS
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
DPPABC
Plane formula info. XYZ of
detected plane
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
DPPA
X slope of detected plane
MS, AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
–
DPPB
Y slope of detected plane
MS, AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
DPPC
Z intercept of detected plane
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPABC
Plane formula info. XYZ of zero
plane
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PPA
X slope of zero plane
MS, AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PPB
Y slope of zero plane
MS, AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PPC
Z intercept of zero plane
MS, AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
SGCX
Segment center X
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
SGCY
Segment center Y
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
–
SGCXY
Segment center XY
MS, AB, EC
Sign, 6-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].HGT Height
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8920
PMSR[].DIFF Level Difference
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
1642
PMSR[].DH Level Difference:
GTR
Reference Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DH Level Difference:
GTM
Measurement Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].POS Position
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
8923
PMSR[].POS Position XYZ
XYZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].POSX Position X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].POSY Position Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
PMSR[].POSZ Position Z
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].CTR Center Position
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
8924
PMSR[].CTR Center Position XYZ
XYZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].CTRX Center Position X
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].CTRY Center Position Y
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
PMSR[].CTRZ Center Position Z
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].CP Center Position: Position 1
OS1
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].CP Center Position: Position 2
OS2
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].WID Width
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
8927
PMSR[].WP Width: Position 1
OSR
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].WP Width: Position 2
OSM
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].HA Angle from Horizontal
NG
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8930
PMSR[].LLA Angle Formed by Two Lines
NG
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8931
CV-X UM_E
3-87
Mathematical Operations
Profile Measurement
(Page 8-55)
Format of measurement data
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
(Continued)
Profile Measurement
(Page 8-55)
PMSR[].LLA Reference Angle
NGR
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
-
PMSR[].LLA Measurement Angle
NGM
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
-
PMSR[].PRAD Radius of Circle
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8934
PMSR[].ZAR Cross-Section Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
9425
PMSR[].LAR 1-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8935
PMSR[].DLAR 2-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8936
PMSR[].PPD Points Distance
ST
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8937
PMSR[].LPD Point/Line Distance
ST
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
8938
PMSR[].PCNT Count
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer
–
–
9063
PMSR[].STG Defect Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
1627
PMSR[].STD Distance from Reference Line
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPABC
Plane Formula Info. XYZ of Zero
Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPA
X Slope of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
PPB
Y Slope of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPC
Z Intercept of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
For height, level difference, position, center position, width, angle from horizontal, angle formed by two lines, radius of circle, cross-section area,
1-line cross-section area, 2-line cross-section area, points distance, point/line distance, defect detection, and count, the label value is multiplied
by 1,000,000 and added to the item ID value, and the resulting value is specified in the DW/DR command parameters.
Example: To access the height (Item ID: 8920) label 5 judgment condition
The specified parameter is 8920 + 5 * 1000000 = 5008920
Continuous Profile
Measurement
(Page 8-78)
PROFN
Number of Profiles
MS
5-digit integer
–
–
–
VPROFN
Valid Profiles
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer
–
–
9955
NPROFN
NG Profiles
MS,JG,HL
5-digit integer
–
–
9236
CNPROFN
Consecutive NG Profiles
MS,JG,HL
5-digit integer
–
–
9237
PROFJG[]
Judgment Value Per Profile
1-digit integer
–
v
–
VPROF[]
Valid/Invalid Judgment Per Profile
1-digit integer
–
v
–
DC1PROFID (Condition 1)
X[]
Result Display Profile No.
MS
5-digit integer
–
v
–
DC2PROFID (Condition 2)
X[]
Result Display Profile No.
MS
5-digit integer
–
v
–
DC3PROFID (Condition 3)
X[]
Result Display Profile No.
MS
5-digit integer
–
v
–
DC4PROFID (Condition 4)
X[]
Result Display Profile No.
MS
5-digit integer
–
v
–
PMSR[].PRE Profile Measurement Erroe
RR[]
Presence/Absence
MS
1-digit integer
–
v
–
1-digit integer
–
–
–
PMSR[].ITE Overall Judgment Value
MJG
3-88 CV-X UM_E
PMSR[].HGT Height
[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8920
PMSR[].MX Height (Maximum)
HGT
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Height (Minimum)
HGT
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVH Height (Average)
GT
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVH Height (3σ)
GT
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1) Height
HGT[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2) Height
HGT[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3) Height
HGT[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4) Height
HGT[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DIF Level Difference
F[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
1642
PMSR[].DH Level Difference:
GTR[]
Reference Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
(Continued)
Continuous Profile
Measurement
(Page 8-78)
PMSR[].DH Level Difference:
GTM[]
Measurement Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].MX Level Difference (Maximum)
DIFF
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Level Difference (Minimum)
DIFF
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVD Level Difference (Average)
IFF
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVD Level Difference (3σ)
IFF
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
DIFF[]
Level Difference
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
DHGTR[]
Reference Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
DHGTM[] Measurement Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
DIFF[]
Level Difference
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
DHGTR[]
Reference Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
DHGTM[] Measurement Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
DIFF[]
Level Difference
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
DHGTR[]
Reference Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
DHGTM[] Measurement Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].
DC4DIFF[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
DHGTR[]
Reference Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
DHGTM[] Measurement Height
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].POS[] Position
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
8923
PMSR[].POS Position XYZ
XYZ[]
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].POS Position X
X[]
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].POS Position Y
Y[]
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
–
PMSR[].POS Position Z
Z[]
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].MXP Position (Maximum)
OS
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MXP Position (Max.) XYZ
OSXYZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MXP Position (Max.) X
OSX
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MXP Position (Max.) Y
OSY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
PMSR[].MXP Position (Max.) Z
OSZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Position (Minimum)
POS
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MN Position (Min.) XYZ
POSXYZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Position (Min.) X
POSX
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MN Position (Min.) Y
POSY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
PMSR[].MN Position (Min.) Z
POSZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVP Position (Average)
OS
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].DVP Position (3σ)
OS
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
CV-X UM_E
3-89
(Condition 4)
Level Difference
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
(Continued)
Continuous Profile
Measurement
(Page 8-78)
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1) Position
POS[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2) Position
POS[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3) Position
POS[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4) Position
POS[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].CTR[] Center Position
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
8924
PMSR[].CTR Center Position XYZ
XYZ[]
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].CTR Center Position X
X[]
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].CTR Center Position Y
Y[]
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
v
–
PMSR[].CTR Center Position Z
Z[]
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].CP Position 1
OS1[]
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].CP Position 2
OS2[]
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].MX Center Position (Maximum)
CTR
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MX Center Position (Max.) XYZ
CTRXYZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MX Center Position (Max.) X
CTRX
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MX Center Position (Max.) Y
CTRY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
PMSR[].MX Center Position (Max.) Z
CTRZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Center Position (Minimum)
CTR
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MN Center Position (Min.) XYZ
CTRXYZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Center Position (Min.) X
CTRX
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MN Center Position (Min.) Y
CTRY
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
Y
–
–
PMSR[].MN Center Position (Min.) Z
CTRZ
MS,AB,EC
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVC Center Position (Average)
TR
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].DVC Center Position (3σ)
TR
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
CTR[]
Center Position
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
CPOS1[]
Center Position: Position 1
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
CPOS2[]
Center Position: Position 2
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
CTR[]
Center Position
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
CPOS1[]
Center Position: Position 1
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
CPOS2[]
Center Position: Position 2
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
CTR[]
Center Position
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
CPOS1[]
Center Position: Position 1
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
CPOS2[]
Center Position: Position 2
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
CTR[]
Center Position
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
CPOS1[]
Center Position: Position 1
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
Mathematical Operations
Tool
3-90 CV-X UM_E
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
(Continued)
Continuous Profile
Measurement
(Page 8-78)
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
CPOS2[]
Center Position: Position 2
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].WID[] Width
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
8927
PMSR[].WP Width: Position 1
OSR[]
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].WP Width: Position 2
OSM[]
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].MX Width (Maximum)
WID
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].MN Width (Minimum)
WID
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].AV Width (Average)
WID
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].DV Width (3σ)
WID
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
WID[]
Width
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
WPOSR[] Width: Reference Position
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
WPOSM[] Width: Measurement Position
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
WID
Width
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
WPOSR[] Width: Reference Position
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
WPOSM[] Width: Measurement Position
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
WID
Width
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
WPOSR[] Width: Reference Position
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
WPOSM[] Width: Measurement Position
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
WID
Width
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
WPOSR[] Width: Reference Position
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
WPOSM[] Width: Measurement Position
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
X
v
–
PMSR[].HA Angle from Horizontal
NG[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8930
PMSR[].MX Angle from Horizontal (Maximum) MS,JG
HANG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Angle from Horizontal (Minimum) MS,JG
HANG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVH Angle from Horizontal (Average) MS,JG
ANG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVH Angle from Horizontal (3σ)
ANG
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
HANG[]
Angle from Horizontal
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
HANG[]
Angle from Horizontal
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
HANG[]
Angle from Horizontal
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
HANG[]
Angle from Horizontal
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].LLA Angle Formed by Two Lines
NG[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8931
PMSR[].LLA Reference Angle
NGR[]
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].LLA Measurement Angle
NGM[]
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].MXL Angle Formed by Two Lines
LANG
(Maximum)
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Angle Formed by Two Lines
LLANG
(Minimum)
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
CV-X UM_E
3-91
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
(Continued)
Continuous Profile
Measurement
(Page 8-78)
PMSR[].AVL Angle Formed by Two Lines
LANG
(Average)
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVL Angle Formed by Two Lines
LANG
(3σ)
MS
3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
LLANG[]
Angle Formed by Two Lines
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
LLANGR[] Reference Angle
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
LLANGM[] Measurement Angle
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
LLANG[]
Angle Formed by Two Lines
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
LLANGR[] Reference Angle
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
LLANGM[] Measurement Angle
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
LLANG[]
Angle Formed by Two Lines
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
LLANGR[] Reference Angle
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
LLANGM[] Measurement Angle
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
LLANG[]
Angle Formed by Two Lines
MS,JG
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
LLANGR[] Reference Angle
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
LLANGM[] Measurement Angle
MS
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].PRA Radius of Circle
D[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8934
PMSR[].MXP Radius of Circle (Maximum)
RAD
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Radius of Circle (Minimum)
PRAD
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVP Radius of Circle (Average)
RAD
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVP Radius of Circle (3σ)
RAD
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].
(Condition 1)
DC1PRAD[] Radius of Circle
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].
(Condition 2)
DC2PRAD[] Radius of Circle
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].
(Condition 3)
DC3PRAD[] Radius of Circle
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].
(Condition 4)
DC4PRAD[] Radius of Circle
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].ZAR Cross-Section Area
[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
9425
PMSR[].MXZ Cross-Section Area (Maximum)
AR
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Cross-Section Area (Minimum)
ZAR
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVZ Cross-Section Area (Average)
AR
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVZ Cross-Section Area (3σ)
AR
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1) Cross-Section Area MS,JG
ZAR[]
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2) Cross-Section Area MS,JG
ZAR[]
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3) Cross-Section Area MS,JG
ZAR[]
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4) Cross-Section Area MS,JG
ZAR[]
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].LAR 1-Line Cross-Section Area
[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8935
PMSR[].MXL 1-Line Cross-Section Area
AR
(Maximum)
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
Mathematical Operations
Tool
3-92 CV-X UM_E
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
(Continued)
Continuous Profile
Measurement
(Page 8-78)
PMSR[].MN 1-Line Cross-Section Area
LAR
(Minimum)
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVL 1-Line Cross-Section Area
AR
(Average)
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVL 1-Line Cross-Section Area
AR
(3σ)
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].
DC1LAR[]
(Condition 1)
1-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
LAR[]
1-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
LAR[]
1-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
LAR[]
1-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DLA 2-Line Cross-Section Area
R[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8936
PMSR[].MX 2-Line Cross-Section Area
DLAR
(Maximum)
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN 2-Line Cross-Section Area
DLAR
(Minimum)
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVD 2-Line Cross-Section Area
LAR
(Average)
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVD 2-Line Cross-Section Area (3σ)
LAR
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
DLAR[]
2-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
DLAR[]
2-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
DLAR[]
2-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
DLAR[]
2-Line Cross-Section Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].PPD Points Distance
ST[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8937
PMSR[].MXP Points Distance (Maximum)
PDST
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Points Distance (Minimum)
PPDST
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVP Points Distance (Average)
PDST
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVP Points Distance (3σ)
PDST
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1) Points Distance
PPDST[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2) Points Distance
PPDST[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3) Points Distance
PPDST[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4) Points Distance
PPDST[]
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].LPD Point/Line Distance
ST[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
8938
PMSR[].MXL Point/Line Distance (Maximum)
PDST
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Point/Line Distance (Minimum)
LPDST
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVL Point/Line Distance (Average)
PDST
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVL Point/Line Distance (3σ)
PDST
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
LPDST[]
Point/Line Distance
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
LPDST[]
Point/Line Distance
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
LPDST[]
Point/Line Distance
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
LPDST[]
Point/Line Distance
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
CV-X UM_E
3-93
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Operation symbol/output item comparison table (Measured Value/Judgment Value)
Symbols
(Continued)
Continuous Profile
Measurement
(Page 8-78)
PMSR[].PCN Count
T[]
MS,JG,HL,LL
5-digit integer
–
v
9062
PMSR[].MXP Count (Maximum)
CNT
MS,JG
5-digit integer
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Count (Minimum)
PCNT
MS,JG
5-digit integer
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVP Count (Average)
CNT
MS,JG
5-digit integer
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVP Count (3σ)
CNT
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1) Count
PCNT[]
MS,JG
5-digit integer
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2) Count
PCNT[]
MS,JG
5-digit integer
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3) Count
PCNT[]
MS,JG
5-digit integer
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4) Count
PCNT[]
MS,JG
5-digit integer
–
–
–
PMSR[].STG Defect Area
MS,JG,HL,LL
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
1627
PMSR[].STD Distance from Reference Line
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].MXS Defect Area (Maximum)
TG
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].MN Defect Area (Minimum)
STG
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].AVS Defect Area (Average)
TG
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DVS Defect Area (3σ)
TG
MS
5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
STG[]
Defect Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
STD[]
Distance from Reference Line
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
STG[]
Defect Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
STD[]
Distance from Reference Line
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
STG[]
Defect Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
STD[]
Distance from Reference Line
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
STG[]
Defect Area
MS,JG
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
STD[]
Distance from Reference Line
MS
Sign, 5-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC1 (Condition 1)
PRERR[]
Profile Measurement Error
3-digit integer
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC2 (Condition 2)
PRERR[]
Profile Measurement Error
3-digit integer
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC3 (Condition 3)
PRERR[]
Profile Measurement Error
3-digit integer
–
v
–
PMSR[].DC4 (Condition 4)
PRERR[]
Profile Measurement Error
3-digit integer
–
v
–
Mathematical Operations
Tool
Description of measurement item Description of
selection
separation/selection
Format of measurement data
Scaling Label
Item
Target specification ID
PPABC
Plane Formula Info. XYZ of Zero
Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPA
X Slope of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPB
Y Slope of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 1-digit integer, 6-digit decimal number
–
–
–
PPC
Z Intercept of Zero Plane
MS,AB
Sign, 3-digit integer, 3-digit decimal number
–
–
–
For height, level difference, position, center position, width, angle from horizontal, angle formed by two lines, radius of circle,
cross-section area, 1-line cross-section area, 2-line cross-section area, points distance, point/line distance, defect detection, and
count, the label value is multiplied by 1,000,000 and added to the item ID value, and the resulting value is specified in the DW/DR
command parameters.
Example: To access the height (Item ID: 8920) label 5 judgment condition
The specified parameter is 8920 + 5 * 1000000 = 5008920
3-94 CV-X UM_E
Execute
Camera Settings
Overview of execute
conditions
Mathematical Operations
Displaying [Execute Condition Settings] screen
q Execute
Output Setting
Custom Menu
Execute conditions are set on the [Execute Condition
Settings] screen.
In Setup mode, left-click
.
The [Execute Condition Settings] screen appears.
CV-X UM_E
3-95
Execute
On the [Execute Condition Settings] screen, execution/nonexecution of each tool can be changed. It is useful for
switching inspection contents of a single program setting.
Setting execute conditions (Execute Condition Settings)
Setting execute conditions (Execute Condition Settings)
Execute
Execution/non-execution of each tool can be changed. It is
useful for switching inspection contents of a single program
setting.
1 On the [Execute Condition Settings] screen (Page
3-95), execute conditions are set for each tool.
When multiple cameras are used, change the camera
for setting execute conditions with the camera number
tab and make settings for each camera.
• Always Execute: Always executes.
• Never Execute: Never executes. This is used to
make non-execution temporarily in order to confirm
the operation of other tools.
• Following the Judged Result of: It refers to the OK/
NG result of other tools and changes between
execution/non-execution accordingly. After selecting
this, left-click the empty field to the right and specify
the target tool on the [Select Judgment Result
Reference Tool] screen.
• Following the Execute No.: Only when the set
Execute No. matches the [Currently Valid Execute
No.] will the target tool be executed.
• Following Multiple Execute Nos.: Executes the
target tool only when one of the multiple execute Nos.
set matches [Currently Valid Execute No.]. Left-click
the Specify Execute Condition No. field on the right of
the execute condition and check the box of the
execute number of the condition where you want to
execute the tool on the [Select Execute Nos.] screen.
• Following the Color Group No. of: The tool is executed
or not executed depending upon the group no. of the
Color Grouping tool set (only when Color Grouping
tools are in the program setting).
3-96 CV-X UM_E
Do not execute the tool when its condition
reference tool is not executed
If this option is checked, the execution target tool will
not be executed if its condition reference tool is not
executed in cases where: (1) the execution target tool
is referencing the judgment result of another tool or (2)
the execution target tool is referencing a tool whose
execution/non-execution is based on the judgment
result of another tool.
2 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the Execute No.
If you select [Following the Execute No.] or [Following
Multiple Execute Nos.], change the settings in [Currently
Valid Execute No.] displayed on the lower of the [Execute
Condition Settings] screen.
You can also rewrite [Currently Valid Execute No.]
externally by using the EXW command (Page 6-17).
Setting execute conditions (Execute Condition Settings)
Main application of execute conditions
Example 1. A product type is judged by color to
change the inspection automatically (Following
the Judged Result of).
During inspection, when the [Currently Valid Execute No.]
is changed to the number of the next object type with the
EXW command, execution/non-execution is changed for
the arrival of the object.
Since only execute conditions are changed, the setting
change time can be reduced.
Reference
When using Multi-Capture, the execute condition
for the first trigger input will also be applied to the
second and subsequent captures.
Inspection start
Inspection start
T100
Detection in red
T101
Detection in blue
T102
Detection in green
NG
OK
NG
T103
Inspection A
T104
Inspection B
T105
Inspection C
Set the type number using command "EXW".
(When [Currently Valid Execute No.] is "1".)
Execute No. 0
No match
Execute No. 1
Match
Execute No. 2
No match
Inspection end
Inspection executed
Inspection not executed
T100
Inspection 1-1
T101
Inspection 2-1
T102
Inspection 3-1
OK
T103
Inspection 1-2
T104
Inspection 2-2
T105
Inspection 3-2
Inspection end
Inspection executed
Inspection not executed
CV-X UM_E
3-97
Execute
Tools (T100 to T102) that detect the color of the product
type are prepared in advance. Only appropriate inspection
linked to the tool which detected OK is executed.
Since change is automatically performed, it is not
necessary to perform manual change even if multiple
types are produced.
Example 2: External instruction to change the
type is given to change the inspection
immediately (Following the Execute No.).
Output setting
Camera settings
Output setting
Mathematical Operations
Execute
q Output setting
Custom menu
3-98 CV-X UM_E
Overview of output setting
Overview of output setting
The judgment result or measured values of the controller can be output from the parallel I/O connector of the controller or
an Ethernet communication port, or images can be output to an SD card or a USB HDD.
Set [CAM Judgment] and [Partial Judgment].
OR Terminal (Page 3-101)
Set the output method for when the total status value is output from the OR terminal.
OUT Terminal (Page 3-102)
Set the output item for I/O output such as [Total Status], [Tool Judgment], [In-Tool
Judgment], [Partial Judgment], [CAM Judgment], [Group Judgment] and [Camera Execute
Status].
RS-232C (non-procedural)
(Page 3-103)
Set the items for output of results with RS-232C non-procedural communications.
Ethernet (non-procedural)
(Page 3-105)
Set the items for output of results with non-procedural communications from an Ethernet
interface.
SD Card 2 (Page 3-107)
Set the items for output of results to the SD card inserted in the SD2 slot.
USB HDD (Page 3-109)
Set the items for output of results to the USB HDD (CV-X400/X300 Series only).
PC Program (Page 3-111)
Set the items for output of results to a PC application (CV-H1X) from an Ethernet
interface.
PLC-Link(Page 3-112)
Set the items for output of results with PLC-Link (RS-232C) or PLC-Link (Ethernet).
EtherNet/IP (Page 3-113)
Set the items for output of results with EtherNet/IP.
PROFINET (Page 3-115)
Set the items for output of results with PROFINET.
EtherCAT (Page 3-117)
Set the items for output of results with EtherCAT.
EtherNet/IP Module (Page 3-113) Set the items for output of results with EtherNet/IP Module.
PROFINET Module (Page 3-115) Set the items for output of results with PROFINET Module.
FTP (Page 3-119)
Set the items for output of results to the FTP server.
VisionDataStorage (USB)
(Page 3-121)
Set the items for output of results to the VisionDataStorage (sold separately) connected
by means of the dedicated VisionDataStorage USB cable (OP-88263).
Image Output (Page 3-123)
Change the settings for output of the image used for measurement via the Ethernet interface
to an external device or for saving it on SD card 2 or a USB HDD (CV-X400/X300 Series Only).
VisionDatabase
Change the settings for when outputting to VisionDatabase (sold separately).
For more details, see the VisionDatabase User's Manual.
Reference
• Data can be output only in run mode.
• The SD card 1 cannot be specified as the data output destination.
Displaying [Output Settings] screen
Output settings are performed on the [Output Settings] screen.
In Setup Mode, left-click
.
The [Output Settings] screen appears.
CV-X UM_E
3-99
Output setting
Judgment Settings
(Page 3-100)
Setting [CAM Judgment] and [Partial Judgment] (Judgment Settings)
Setting [CAM Judgment] and [Partial Judgment]
(Judgment Settings)
Output setting
Selects the tool as a target of the CAM judgment and
partial judgment.
• The CAM judgment results in the value of the logical add
(OR) of the judged value for the selected tool (OK=0,
NG=1). The judgment of the unset CAM is deemed as
OK(0).
• The partial judgment results in the value of the logical
add (OR) or logical multiply (AND) of the judged value
for the selected tool or judged group.
• The total status is the value of the logical add (OR) for
the CAM judgment.
Preparing judgment with combination of
desired tools (Partial Judgment)
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [Judgment Settings].
The [Judgment Settings] screen appears.
2 Click the [Partial Judgment] tab.
Changing judgment for each camera
(CAM Judgment)
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [Judgment Settings].
The [Judgment Settings] screen appears.
2 Left-click the [CAM Judgment] tab.
3 Left-click [Add].
The partial judgment group is added.
4 Left-click [Settings] and specify the tool for
judgment and the partial judgment.
5 Select [Condition logic].
• OR: If there is one NG in the items specified in
[Settings], NG occurs.
• AND: Only when all items specified in [Settings] are
NG, NG occurs.
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
3 Left-click the camera number tab for setting.
4 Uncheck tools to be excluded from camera
judgment.
5 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
3-100 CV-X UM_E
Setting output method when the total status value is output from the OR terminal (OR Terminal)
Setting output method when the total status value is
output from the OR terminal (OR Terminal)
The output method of the controller OR terminal can be
changed.
For details of the output from the OR terminal, refer
to "Terminal Block Interface (for CV-X100 Series)"
(Page 6-68), "Terminal Block Interface (for CV-X200
Series)" (Page 6-70), and "Terminal Block Interface
(for CV-X400/X300 Series)" (Page 6-84).
Output setting
Reference
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [OR Terminal].
The [OR Terminal Output Settings] screen appears.
2 Select the output method in the [OR Terminal Output
Mode] field.
• Update Every Judge: Output is given for every total
status in synchronous with STO. The STO timing can
be set from [External Terminal] (Page 5-4).
• Hold Status: Once NG judgment is output, NG
status is held regardless of subsequent judgment
results. To cancel this, it is necessary to reset the
controller (It is cancelled also when moving from
Run Mode to Setup Mode).
• One Shot Output: If an NG occurs, the OR terminal
is ON only for the duration set in [One Shot Time]
and it is then OFF.
3 Select the output timing in the [OR Terminal Output
Timing] field.
• Output on NG Status: Outputs when judged as NG.
• Output on OK Status: Outputs when judged as OK.
4 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
CV-X UM_E
3-101
Setting the output items for I/O output (OUT Terminal)
Setting the output items for I/O output (OUT Terminal)
Output setting
Output items, such as [Total Status], [Tool Judgment], [InTool Judgment], [Partial Judgment], [CAM Judgment],
[Group Judgment] and [Camera Execute Status], which
are output from the controller parallel I/O interface are set.
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [OUT Terminal].
The [OUT Terminal Output Settings] screen appears.
2 In [Count], specify the output count to a number
from 1 to 8.
The count tab appears according to the specified
output count.
3 Select the output method in the [OUT Terminal
Output Mode] field.
• Update Every Judge: Outputs after each judgment in
synchronization with STO. The STO timing can be
set in “External Terminal” (Page 5-4).
• One Shot Output: When an NG judgment occurs,
the OUT terminal will be ON for the duration
specified in [One Shot Time] and then OFF
immediately afterwards.
Reference
The [OUT Terminal Output Mode] setting is
only effective when the output count is set to
1.
4 Left-click the desired output count tab for setting
output items.
5 Left-click [Output Items] of the desired output
terminal for change of allocation.
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
3-102 CV-X UM_E
6 Select the output item.
• None: Output is not performed.
• Total Status: Outputs the total status result.
• CAM 1 Judgment to CAM 4 Judgment: Judgment
results of CAM 1 to CAM 4 are output (Page 3-100).
• Partial Judgment: Desired partial judgment results
(Page 3-100) are output.
• Tool Judgment: Desired tool judgment results are
output.
• In-Tool Judgment: The in-tool judgment results are
output (Only for Auto-Teach Inspection tool or
Connector Dimension Inspection tool).
• Group Judgment (Ver. 5.2 or later): Desired group
judgment (Page 1-37) results are output.
• CAM * Execute Status: Outputs which camera was
executed when using asynchronous trigger (Page 319).
If multiple judgments or tools are allocated in [Partial
Judgment], [Tool Judgment], or [In-Tool Judgment],
the logical sum (OR) of each judgment value is output.
7 Select the output timing in the [Output Timing]
field.
• On NG Status: Outputs when the judgment result is
NG.
• On OK Status: Outputs when the judgment result is
OK.
Reference
The [Output Timing] setting will have no effect
if [CAM * Execute Status] is selected in the list
of output items.
8 Put a check on [Do Not Output When Tool(s)
Unexecuted] if output is not to be done when the
measurement specified in Step 3 is not executed.
When a check is placed, output is not done when a
tool is skipped due to the execution condition (Page 395) or it is not executed due to settings errors. Check
this option if [On OK Status] was selected in Step 7
and the OUT terminal must not become ON when the
specified measurement is not executed.
9 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Setting result output items for RS-232C non-procedural communication (RS-232C (Non-Procedural))
Setting result output items for RS-232C non-procedural
communication (RS-232C (Non-Procedural))
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the
controller, output of some measurement data
(measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be
omitted.
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [RS-232C (Non-Procedural)].
The [RS-232C (Non-Procedural) Output Settings]
screen appears.
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total Count: Measurement count is output in 10 digits.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in a 10-digit number.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in a 10-digit number.
• Program Time: The measurement time is output in
the form of integer 7 digits + decimal number 1 digit
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7 integers + 1
decimal digit (Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output for year/month/day/hour/minute/second in 2
digits for each (YYMMDDHHMMSS).
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 digits.
Symbols
Left-click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for
output.
The default is set to no output of data.
2 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
3 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
String
Left-click the [String] tab, left-click [Add] and input the
desired text for output.
• Delimiter (,) is not output after the output of symbols
and character strings.
• If a delimiter is required, add a string item for output
of the delimiter.
4 If there are other desired items for output, repeat
step 3.
5 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
6 To change the output format, left-click the
of
the output item to be changed and change the
setting on the [Output Format Settings] screen.
Check [Customize Format] and specify the number of
output digit and the use or non-use of the plus sign
and the zero suppression process. When [Use For All
Output Data] under [Batch Format Change] is
checked, the same setting can be reflected to the
other output items as well.
CV-X UM_E
3-103
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for output in RS232C non-procedural communication of the controller.
Output details and output sequence can be specified for
the environment in operation.
Setting result output items for RS-232C non-procedural communication (RS-232C (Non-Procedural))
7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
for when the measurement specified in Step 3 is
skipped by the execute condition (Page 3-95) or
when no execution occurs due to setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
output "0".
• None: Nothing is output.
Output setting
8 In [Data Delimiter], select the delimiter character to
place between output data.
9 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display on the [Output Item Settings]
screen, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for canceling output in the
output data display on the [Output Item Settings] screen,
left-click
.
Temporarily stopping output for each output item
Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to
temporarily stop output for in the output data display.
3-104 CV-X UM_E
Setting result output items for Ethernet interface in non-procedural communication (Ethernet (Non-Procedural))
Setting result output items for Ethernet interface in
non-procedural communication (Ethernet (Non-Procedural))
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the
controller, output of some measurement data
(measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be
omitted.
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [Ethernet (Non-Procedural)].
The [Ethernet (Non-Procedural) Output Settings]
screen appears.
The default is set to no output of data.
2 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
3 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total Count: Measurement count is output in 10 digits.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in a 10-digit number.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in a 10-digit number.
• Program Time: The measurement time is output in
the form of integer 7 digits + decimal number 1 digit
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7 integers + 1
decimal digit (Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output for year/month/day/hour/minute/second in 2
digits for each (YYMMDDHHMMSS).
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 digits.
Symbols
Left-click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for
output.
String
Left-click the [String] tab, left-click [Add] and input the
desired string for output.
• Delimiter (,) is not output after the output of symbols
and character strings.
• If a delimiter is required, add a string item for output
of the delimiter.
4 If there are other desired items for output, repeat
step 3.
5 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
6 To change the output format, left-click the
of
the output item to be changed and change the
setting on the [Output Format Settings] screen.
Check [Customize Format] and specify the number of
output digit and the use or non-use of the plus sign
and the zero suppression process. When [Use For All
Output Data] under [Batch Format Change] is
checked, the same setting can be reflected to the
other output items as well.
CV-X UM_E
3-105
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for output in
Ethernet interface non-procedural communication of the
controller. Output details and output sequence can be
specified for the environment in operation.
Setting result output items for Ethernet interface in non-procedural communication (Ethernet (Non-Procedural))
7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
for when the measurement specified in Step 3 is
skipped by the execute condition (Page 3-95) or
when no execution occurs due to setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
output "0".
• None: Nothing is output.
Output setting
8 In [Data Delimiter], select the delimiter character to
place between output data.
9 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display on the [Output Item Settings]
screen, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for canceling output in the
output data display on the [Output Item Settings] screen,
left-click
.
Temporarily stopping output for each output item
Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to
temporarily stop output for in the output data display.
3-106 CV-X UM_E
Setting result output items for the SD card (SD Card 2)
Setting result output items for the SD card (SD Card 2)
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the
controller, output of some measurement data
(measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be
omitted.
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [SD Card 2].
The [SD Card 2 Output Settings] screen appears.
The default is set to no output of data.
2 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
3 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total Count: Measurement count is output in 10 digits.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in a 10-digit number.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in a 10-digit number.
• Program Time: The measurement time is output in
the form of integer 7 digits + decimal number 1 digit
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7 integers + 1
decimal digit (Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output for year/month/day/hour/minute/second in 2
digits for each (YYMMDDHHMMSS).
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 digits.
Symbols
Left-click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for
output.
String
Left-click the [String] tab, left-click [Add] and input the
desired string for output.
• Delimiter (,) is not output after the output of symbols
and character strings.
• If a delimiter is required, add a string item for output
of the delimiter.
4 If there are other desired items for output, repeat
step 3.
5 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
6 To change the output format, left-click the
of
the output item to be changed and change the
setting on the [Output Format Settings] screen.
Check [Customize Format] and specify the number of
output digit and the use or non-use of the plus sign
and the zero suppression process. When [Use For All
Output Data] under [Batch Format Change] is
checked, the same setting can be reflected to the
other output items as well.
CV-X UM_E
3-107
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for saving on the
SD card (SD card 2) inserted in the SD2 slot. Output
details and output sequence can be specified for the
environment in operation.
Setting result output items for the SD card (SD Card 2)
7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
for when the measurement specified in Step 3 is
skipped by the execute condition (Page 3-95) or
when no execution occurs due to setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
output "0".
• None: Nothing is output.
Output setting
8 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display on the [Output Item Settings]
screen, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for canceling output in the
output data display on the [Output Item Settings] screen,
left-click
.
Temporarily stopping output for each output item
Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to
temporarily stop output for in the output data display.
3-108 CV-X UM_E
Setting result output items for the USB HDD (USB HDD)
Setting result output items for the USB HDD (USB HDD)
Reference
• If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of
the controller, output of some measurement
data (measured value, judgment values, etc.)
may be omitted.
• To output to the VisionDataStorage via USB, see
the VisionDataStorage User's Manual.
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [USB HDD].
The [USB HDD Output Settings] screen appears.
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total Count: Measurement count is output in 10 digits.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in a 10-digit number.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in a 10-digit number.
• Program Time: The measurement time is output in
the form of integer 7 digits + decimal number 1 digit
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7 integers + 1
decimal digit (Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output for year/month/day/hour/minute/second in 2
digits for each (YYMMDDHHMMSS).
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 digits.
Symbols
Left-click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for
output.
The default is set to no output of data.
2 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
3 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
String
Left-click the [String] tab, left-click [Add] and input the
desired string for output.
• Delimiter (,) is not output after the output of symbols
and character strings.
• If a delimiter is required, add a string item for output
of the delimiter.
4 If there are other desired items for output, repeat
step 3.
5 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
6 To change the output format, left-click the
of
the output item to be changed and change the
setting on the [Output Format Settings] screen.
Check [Customize Format] and specify the number of
output digit and the use or non-use of the plus sign
and the zero suppression process. When [Use For All
Output Data] under [Batch Format Change] is
checked, the same setting can be reflected to the
other output items as well.
CV-X UM_E
3-109
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for saving on the
USB HDD. Output details and output sequence can be
specified for the environment in operation.
Setting result output items for the USB HDD (USB HDD)
7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
for when the measurement specified in Step 3 is
skipped by the execute condition (Page 3-95) or
when no execution occurs due to setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
output "0".
• None: Nothing is output.
Output setting
8 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display on the [Output Item Settings]
screen, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for canceling output in the
output data display on the [Output Item Settings] screen,
left-click
.
Temporarily stopping output for each output item
Uncheck the boxes to the left of the output items to
temporarily stop output for in the output data display.
3-110 CV-X UM_E
Setting result output items from Ethernet interface to PC application (PC Program)
Setting result output items from Ethernet interface to
PC application (PC Program)
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the
controller, output of some measurement data
(measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be
omitted.
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [PC Program].
The [PC Program Output Settings] screen appears.
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in 7 integers + 1
decimal digit (Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output for year/month/day/hour/minute/second in 2
digits for each (YYMMDDHHMMSS).
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 digits.
Symbols
Left-click the [Symbols] tab and select the item for
output.
String
Left-click the [String] tab, left-click [Add] and input the
desired string for output.
• Delimiter (,) is not output after the output of symbols
and character strings.
• If a delimiter is required, add a string item for output
of the delimiter.
The default is set to no output of data.
2 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
4 If there are other desired items for output, repeat
step 3.
5 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
3 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display on the [Output Item Settings]
screen, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for canceling output in the
output data display on the [Output Item Settings] screen,
left-click
.
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total Count: Measurement count is output in 10 digits.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in a 10-digit number.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in a 10-digit number.
• Program Time: The measurement time is output in
the form of integer 7 digits + decimal number 1 digit
(Unit: ms).
CV-X UM_E
3-111
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for output from the
controller Ethernet interface to PC program (CV-H1X).
Output details and output sequence can be specified for
the environment in operation.
Setting result output for PLC-Link (RS-232C) or PLC-Link (Ethernet) (PLC-Link)
Setting result output for PLC-Link (RS-232C) or
PLC-Link (Ethernet) (PLC-Link)
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for output for PLCLink (RS-232C) or PLC-Link (Ethernet). Output details and
output sequence can be specified for the environment in
operation.
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the
controller, output of some measurement data
(measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be
omitted.
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [PLC-Link].
The [PLC-Link Output Settings] screen appears.
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total count: Measurement count is output in 2 words.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in two words.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in two words.
• Program Time: Program time is output in 2 words
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in two words.
(Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output for year/month/day/hour/minute/second in 2
words each.
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 words.
4 If there are other desired items for output, repeat
step 3.
The default is set to no output of data.
2 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
3 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
• Total Status: Total Status, CAM Judgment and
Partial Judgment can be selected.
• Tool Judgment: Left-click [Add] to display the
[Output Item Settings] screen. By allocating any tool
judgment value to the bit, a maximum of 32 tool
judgment values can be output in batch.
5 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
6 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
for when the measurement specified in Step 3 is
skipped by the execute condition (Page 3-95) or
when no execution occurs due to setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
output "0".
• None: Nothing is output.
7 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display on the [Output Item Settings]
screen, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for canceling output in the
output data display on the [Output Item Settings] screen,
left-click
.
Temporarily stopping output
Uncheck the [Output] box in the output data display.
3-112 CV-X UM_E
Setting the items for output of results with EtherNet/IPTM (EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP Module)
Setting the items for output of results with EtherNet/IPTM
(EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP Module)
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the
controller, output of some measurement data
(measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be
omitted.
Setting the bit allocation area output
items
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [EtherNet/IP] or [EtherNet/IP Module].
The [EtherNet/IP Output Settings]/[EtherNet/IP Module
Output Settings] screen appears.
2 Left-click the [Bit Allocation Area] tab.
The output settings screen for the bit allocation area
appears.
4 Select the output item.
• None: Output is not performed.
• Total Status: Outputs the total status result.
• CAM 1 Judgment - CAM 4 Judgment: The camera 1 camera 4 judgment results (Page 3-100) are output.
• Partial Judgment: The desired partial judgment
results are output (Page 3-100).
• Tool Judgment: The desired tool judgment results
are output.
• Group Judgment (Ver. 5.2 or later): The desired
group judgment (Page 1-37) results are output.
• CAM * Execute Status: Outputs which camera was
executed when using asynchronous trigger (Page 319).
If multiple judgments or tools are allocated in [Partial
Judgment], or [Tool Judgment], the logical sum (OR)
of each judgment value is output.
5 Select the output timing in the [Output Timing]
field.
• On NG Status: Outputs when the judgment result is
NG.
• On OK Status: Outputs when the judgment result is
OK.
Reference
The [Output Timing] setting will have no effect
if [CAM * Execute Status] is selected in the list
of output items.
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
The default is set to no output of data.
3 Left-click the [Item to Output] field of the address
for change of allocation.
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
CV-X UM_E
3-113
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for output with
EtherNet/IP communications from the Ethernet port on this
controller or the EtherNet/IP module (CA-NEP20E: Option)
connected to this controller. Output details and output
sequence can be specified according to the environment
where the system is used.
Setting the items for output of results with EtherNet/IPTM (EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP Module)
Setting the byte allocation area output
items
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [EtherNet/IP] or [EtherNet/IP Module].
The [EtherNet/IP Output Settings]/[EtherNet/IP Module
Output Settings] screen appears.
Output setting
2 Left-click the [Byte Allocation Area] tab.
The output settings screen for the byte allocation area
appears.
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total Count: Measurement count is output in 2 words.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in two words.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in two words.
• Program Time: Program time is output in 2 words
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in two words.
(Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output as the year/month/day/hour/minute/second in
2 words each.
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 words.
The default is set to no output of data.
3 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
4 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
• Total Status: Total Status, CAM Judgment and
Partial Judgment can be selected.
• Tool Judgment: Left-click [Add] to display the
[Output Item Settings] screen. By allocating any tool
judgment value to the bit, a maximum of 32 tool
judgment values can be output in a batch.
5 If there are other desired items for output, repeat step 4.
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
for when the measurement specified in Step 4 is
skipped by the execute condition (Page 3-95) or
when no execution occurs due to a setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
output "0".
• None: Nothing is output.
8 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
the output data display, left-click
.
Temporarily stopping output
Uncheck the [Output] box in the output data display.
3-114 CV-X UM_E
Setting the items for results output with PROFINET (PROFINET, PROFINET Module)
Setting the items for results output with PROFINET
(PROFINET, PROFINET Module)
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the
controller, output of some measurement data
(measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be
omitted.
Setting the bit allocation area output
items
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [PROFINET] or [PROFINET Module].
The [PROFINET Output Settings]/[PROFINET Module
Output Settings] screen appears.
2 Left-click the [Bit Allocation Area] tab.
The output settings screen for the bit allocation area
appears.
4 Select the output item.
• None: Output is not performed.
• Total Status: Outputs the total status result.
• CAM 1 Judgment - CAM 4 Judgment: The camera 1 camera 4 judgment results (Page 3-100) are output.
• Partial Judgment: The desired partial judgment
results are output (Page 3-100).
• Tool Judgment: The desired tool judgment results
are output.
• Group Judgment (Ver. 5.2 or later): The desired
group judgment (Page 1-37) results are output.
• CAM * Execute Status: Outputs which camera was
executed when using asynchronous trigger (Page 319).
If multiple judgments or tools are allocated in [Partial
Judgment], or [Tool Judgment], the logical addition
(OR) of each judgment value is output.
5 Select the output timing in the [Output Timing]
field.
• On NG Status: Outputs when the judgment result is
NG.
• On OK Status: Outputs when the judgment result is
OK.
Reference
The [Output Timing] setting will have no effect
if [CAM * Execute Status] is selected in the list
of output items.
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
The default is set to no output of data.
3 Left-click the [Item to Output] field of the address
for change of allocation.
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
CV-X UM_E
3-115
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for output with
PROFINET communications from the Ethernet port on this
controller or the PROFINET module (CA-NPN20E: Option)
connected to this controller. Output details and output
sequence can be specified according to the environment
where the system is used.
Setting the items for results output with PROFINET (PROFINET, PROFINET Module)
Setting the byte allocation area output
items
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [PROFINET] or [PROFINET Module].
The [PROFINET Output Settings]/[PROFINET Module
Output Settings] screen appears.
Output setting
2 Left-click the [Byte Allocation Area] tab.
The output settings screen for the byte allocation area
appears.
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total Count: Measurement count is output in 2 words.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in two words.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in two words.
• Program Time: Program time is output in 2 words
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in two words.
(Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output as the year/month/day/hour/minute/second in
2 words each.
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 words.
The default is set to no output of data.
3 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
4 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
• Total Status: Total Status, CAM Judgment and
Partial Judgment can be selected.
• Tool Judgment: Left-click [Add] to display the
[Output Item Settings] screen. By allocating any tool
judgment value to the bit, a maximum of 32 tool
judgment values can be output in a batch.
5 If there are other desired items for output, repeat step 4.
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
for when the measurement specified in Step 4 is
skipped by the execute condition (Page 3-95) or
when no execution occurs due to a setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
output "0".
• None: Nothing is output.
8 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
the output data display, left-click
.
Temporarily stopping output
Uncheck the [Output] box in the output data display.
3-116 CV-X UM_E
Setting the items for output of results with EtherCAT (EtherCAT)
Setting the items for output of results with EtherCAT
(EtherCAT)
Reference
If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of the
controller, output of some measurement data
(measured value, judgment values, etc.) may be
omitted.
Setting the bit allocation area output
items
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [EtherCAT].
The [EtherCAT Output Settings] screen appears.
2 Left-click the [Bit Allocation Area] tab.
The output settings screen for the bit allocation area
appears.
4 Select the output item.
• None: Output is not performed.
• Total Status: Outputs the total status result.
• CAM 1 Judgment - CAM 4 Judgment: The camera 1 camera 4 judgment results (Page 3-100) are output.
• Partial Judgment: The desired partial judgment
results are output (Page 3-100).
• Tool Judgment: The desired tool judgment results
are output.
• Group Judgment (Ver. 5.2 or later): The desired
group judgment (Page 1-37) results are output.
• CAM * Execute Status: Outputs which camera was
executed when using asynchronous trigger (Page 319).
If multiple judgments or tools are allocated in [Partial
Judgment], or [Tool Judgment], the logical sum (OR)
of each judgment value is output.
5 Select the output timing in the [Output Timing]
field.
• On NG Status: Outputs when the judgment result is
NG.
• On OK Status: Outputs when the judgment result is
OK.
Reference
The [Output Timing] setting will have no effect
if [CAM * Execute Status] is selected in the list
of output items.
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
The default is set to no output of data.
3 Left-click the [Item to Output] field of the address
for change of allocation.
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
CV-X UM_E
3-117
Output setting
Output details such as measured value, judgment result,
measurement count, etc. are specified for output with
EtherCAT communications from the EtherCAT module (CANEC20E: Option) connected to this controller. Output
details and output sequence can be specified according
to the environment where the system is used.
Setting the items for output of results with EtherCAT (EtherCAT)
Setting the byte allocation area output
items
1 At the left of the [Output Settings] screen (Page 3-99),
left-click [EtherCAT].
The [EtherCAT Output Settings] screen appears.
2 Left-click the [Byte Allocation Area] tab.
Output setting
The output settings screen for the byte allocation area
appears.
Variables
Left-click the [Variables] tab and select the item for
output.
• Total Count: Measurement count is output in 2 words.
• OK Count: Outputs the OK count in two words.
• NG Count: Outputs the NG count in two words.
• Program Time: Program time is output in 2 words
(Unit: ms).
• Interval: Outputs the trigger interval in two words.
(Unit: ms).
• Date & Time: The measurement date and time is
output as the year/month/day/hour/minute/second in
2 words each.
• Individual CAM Judgment Result: Outputs the
execute count, OK count, NG count and execute
status of each camera. It is useful to reference these
items when using asynchronous trigger (Page 3-19).
• Individual CAM Scaling Coefficient: Outputs the
scaling coefficient (X, Y, and lengthwise directions)
of each camera.
• Execute No.: Outputs the execute condition No.
during measurement in 2 words.
The default is set to no output of data.
3 Left-click [Select Data].
The [Output Item Settings] screen appears.
4 Select the item for output and left-click [Add].
Added items are shown on the list and items are
output in the order from the top.
Measured Value
Left-click the [Measured Value] tab, select the desired
camera and the tool for output and the measured
value, and left-click [Add].
Judged Value
Left-click the [Judged Value] tab and select the
judgment value for output (0: OK, 1: NG).
• Total Status: Total Status, CAM Judgment and
Partial Judgment can be selected.
• Tool Judgment: Left-click [Add] to display the
[Output Item Settings] screen. By allocating any tool
judgment value to the bit, a maximum of 32 tool
judgment values can be output in a batch.
5 If there are other desired items for output, repeat step 4.
6 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
7 In [Result Output at Skipped Tool], select the action
for when the measurement specified in Step 4 is
skipped by the execute condition (Page 3-95) or
when no execution occurs due to a setting error.
• Output "0": When the specified tool is not executed,
output "0".
• None: Nothing is output.
8 After completing the settings, left-click [OK].
Changing the output sequence
After selecting the output item for change of sequence in
the output data display, left-click
or
.
Deleting items canceling output
After selecting the output item for discontinuing output in
the output data display, left-click
.
Temporarily stopping output
Uncheck the [Output] box in the output data display.
3-118 CV-X UM_E
Setting the items for output of results to the FTP server (FTP)
Setting the items for output of results to the FTP server
(FTP)
Reference
• If an overflow occurs from the output buffer of
the controller, output of some measurement
data (measured value, judgment values, etc.)
may be omitted.
• If SFTP is enabled in the FTP client settings
(Page 5-11), the SFTP icon will be displayed
below the output items list. Only ASCII
characters can be used for the output
destination folder and file names with SFTP.
Additionally, SFTP does not support FTP
output to